Cover
Introduction
Getting Started and Basic Camera Operations
Basic Shooting
Setting the AF and Drive Modes
Image Settings
GPS Settings
Advanced Operations for Photographic Effects
Flash Photography
- Flash Photography
- Setting the Flash Function
Shooting with the LCD Monitor (Live View Shooting)
Shooting Movies
Image Playback
Post-Processing Images
Sensor Cleaning
Print order and Photobook Set-up
- Digital Print Order Format (DPOF)
- Specifying Images for a Photobook
Customizing the Camera
Reference
Software Start Guide / Downloading Images to a Computer

Canon 6D Mark II + 24-70mm IS USM User Manual

Displayed below is the user manual for 6D Mark II + 24-70mm IS USM by Canon which is a product in the Digital Cameras category. This manual has pages.

Related Manuals

Canon RP + RF 24-240mm f/4-6.3 IS USM Manual

Canon RF 15-35mm F2.8L IS USM Manual

Canon RF 100-500mm F4.5-7.1L IS USM Manual

Canon 7D Mark II Body + W-E1 Manual

Canon G7 X Mark II Manual

Canon 1D X Mark III Manual

Canon G7 X Mark III Manual

INSTRUCTION

MANUAL

The EOS 6D Mark II is a digital single-lens reflex camera featuring a

full-frame (approx. 35.9 x 24.0 mm) CMOS sensor with approx. 26.2

effective megapixels, DIGIC 7, normal ISO speed range of ISO 100 -

ISO 40000 (for still photos), high-precision and high-speed 45-point AF

(up to 45 cross-type points), maximum continuous shooting speed of

approx. 6.5 shots/sec., Live View shooting, Full HD video shooting, 4K

time-lapse movie shooting, Dual Pixel CMOS AF, Wi-Fi/NFC/Bluetooth

(wireless communication) function, and GPS function.

Before Starting to Shoot, Be Sure to Read the Following

To avoid botched pictures and accidents, first read the “Safety

Precautions” (p.22-24) and “Handling Precautions” (p.25-27). Also, read

this manual carefully to ensure that you use the camera correctly.

Refer to This Manual while Using the Camera to Further

Familiarize Yourself with the Camera

While reading this manual, take a few test shots and see how they

come out. You can then better understand the camera. Be sure to store

this manual safely, too, so that you can refer to it again when necessary.

Testing the Camera Before Use and Liability

After shooting, play images back and check whether they have been

properly recorded. If the camera or memory card is faulty and the

images cannot be recorded or downloaded to a computer, Canon

cannot be held liable for any loss or inconvenience caused.

Copyrights

images of people and certain subjects for anything but private

enjoyment. Also be aware that certain public performances, exhibitions,

etc. may prohibit photography even for private enjoyment.

Introduction

Before starting, check that all the following items are included with your

camera. If anything is missing, contact your dealer.

* Battery Charger LC-E6 or LC-E6E is provided. (The LC-E6E comes with a

power cord.)

The camera does not come with an interface cable or HDMI cable.

The camera does not come with the Software CD-ROM.

The Instruction Manuals are listed on the next page.

For Software, see page 594.

If you purchased a Lens Kit, check that the lenses are included.

Be careful not to lose any of the above items.

For items sold separately, see the System Map (p.514).

Item Check List

Battery Pack LP-E6N

(with protective cover)

Battery Charger

LC-E6/LC-E6E*

Strap

Camera

(with eyecup and body cap)

When you need Lens Instruction Manuals, download them from the Canon

Web site (p.4).

The Lens Instruction Manuals (PDF files) are for lenses sold individually.

Note that when purchasing the Lens Kit, some of the accessories included

with the lens may not match those listed in the Lens Instruction Manual.

Camera Basic Instruction Manual

The Instruction Manuals (PDF files) can be downloaded from the Canon

Web site to your computer or the like.

Instruction Manual (PDF files) download site:

• Wi-Fi (Wireless Communication) Function Instruction Manual

• Lens Instruction Manual

• Software Instruction Manual

www.canon.com/icpd

Instruction Manuals

Downloading the Instruction Manuals (PDF Files)

Compatible Cards

The Instruction Manuals (PDF files) can be downloaded to your

smartphone or tablet using the QR code.

Downloading Instruction Manuals Using QR Code

www.canon.com/icpd

A software application is required to read out the QR code.

Select your country or region of residence, then download the Instruction

Manuals.

Select [Manual/software URL] under the [55] tab to display the QR

code on the camera’s LCD monitor.

The following cards can be used with the camera regardless of

capacity. If the card is new or was previously formatted (initialized)

by another camera or computer, format the card with this camera

(p.70).

SD/SDHC*/SDXC* memory cards

* UHS-I cards supported.

When shooting movies, use a large-capacity card with good enough

performances (fast enough writing and reading speeds) to handle the

movie recording quality. For details, see page 343.

Compatible Cards

Cards that Can Record Movies

In this manual, “card” refers to SD memory cards, SDHC memory

cards, and SDXC memory cards.

*The camera does not come with a card for recording photos/

movies. Please purchase it separately.

Quick Start Guide

1Insert the battery (p.42).

Upon purchase, charge the battery

to start using (p.40).

2Insert the card (p.43).

With the card’s label facing

toward the back of the

camera, insert it into the card

slot.

3Attach the lens (p.53).

Align the red mount index on the

lens with the red mount index on the

camera to attach the lens.

4Set the lens’s focus mode

switch to <AF> (p.53).

5Set the power switch to <1>,

then set the shooting mode to

<A> (p.47).

Turn the Mode Dial while holding

down the button at the center.

All the necessary camera settings

will be set automatically.

Quick Start Guide

6Flip out the LCD monitor (p.46).

When the LCD monitor displays the

date/time/zone setting screen, see

page 49.

7Focus on the subject (p.56).

Look through the viewfinder and

aim the viewfinder center over the

subject.

Press the shutter button halfway,

and the camera will focus on the

subject.

8Take the picture (p.56).

Press the shutter button completely

to take the picture.

9Review the picture.

The image just captured will be

displayed for approx. 2 sec. on the

LCD monitor.

To display the image again, press

the <x> button (p.388).

To shoot while looking at the LCD monitor, see “Live View

Shooting” (p.289).

To view the images captured so far, see “Image Playback” (p.388).

To delete images, see “Erasing Images” (p.430).

Icons in this Manual

<6> : Indicates the Main Dial.

<5> : Indicates the Quick Control Dial.

<9> : Indicates the Multi-controller.

<W><X><Y><Z> : Indicates the direction of the shift or move when the

key on the Multi-controller is pressed.

<0> : Indicates the Setting button.

0/9/4/ : After you press an operation button, this indicates

7/8how long (in seconds) the respective setting will

remain in effect after you let go of the button.

The respective time will be 4 sec., 6 sec., 8 sec., 10

sec., or 16 sec.

* In addition to the above, the icons and symbols used on the camera’s buttons

and displayed on the LCD monitor are also used in this manual when discussing

relevant operations and functionality.

3: Indicates a function that can be changed by pressing the <M>

button to change its settings.

M: This icon on the right of the page title indicates that the function is

available only in the Creative Zone modes (<d>, <s>, <f>,

<a>, and <F>).

(p.***) : Reference page numbers for more information.

: Warning to prevent shooting problems.

: Supplemental information.

: Tips or advice for better shooting.

: Troubleshooting advice.

Notes About the Instructions and Sample Photos

All operations described in this manual assume that the power switch is

set to <1> and the <R> switch is set to the downward (Multi

function lock released) (p.47, 59).

It is assumed that all the menu settings and Custom Functions are set to

their defaults.

The illustrations in this manual show the camera attached with the

EF50mm f/1.4 USM lens as an example.

The sample photos displayed on the camera and used in this manual are

for instructional purposes only.

Conventions Used in this Manual

Chapters

Introduction 2

Getting Started and Basic Camera Operations 39

Basic Shooting 93

Setting the AF and Drive Modes 129

Image Settings 161

GPS Settings 217

Advanced Operations for Photographic Effects 233

Flash Photography 277

Shooting with the LCD Monitor

(Live View Shooting)

289

Shooting Movies 325

Image Playback 387

Post-Processing Images 437

Sensor cleaning 449

Print Order and Photobook Set-up 457

Customizing the Camera 467

Reference 513

Software Start Guide / Downloading Images to a Computer

593

Introduction 2

Item Check List................................................................................. 3

Instruction Manuals .......................................................................... 4

Compatible Cards............................................................................. 5

Quick Start Guide ............................................................................. 6

Conventions Used in this Manual..................................................... 8

Chapters........................................................................................... 9

Index to Features ........................................................................... 18

Safety Precautions ......................................................................... 22

Handling Precautions ..................................................................... 25

Nomenclature ................................................................................. 28

Getting Started and Basic Camera Operations 39

Charging the Battery ..................................................................... 40

Installing and Removing the Battery............................................... 42

Installing and Removing the Card .................................................. 43

Using the LCD Monitor ................................................................... 46

Turning on the Power ..................................................................... 47

Setting the Date, Time, and Zone................................................... 49

Selecting the Interface Language................................................... 52

Attaching and Detaching a Lens .................................................... 53

Basic Shooting Operations............................................................. 55

Q Quick Control for Shooting Functions....................................... 61

3 Menu Operations and Configurations................................... 64

d Operating the Camera with Touch Screen ................................. 67

Contents

Formatting the Card ........................................................................70

Before You Start..............................................................................73

Disabling the Beeper....................................................................73

Setting the Power-off Time/Auto Power Off..................................73

Setting the Image Review Time ...................................................74

Turning the LCD Monitor Off/On ..................................................74

Reverting the Camera to the Default Settings..............................75

l Displaying the Grid in the Viewfinder .......................................79

Q Displaying the Electronic Level ...............................................80

Setting the Viewfinder Information Display .....................................82

B Button Functions ...................................................................84

R Setting the Multi Function Lock ..........................................88

Setting the Shooting Mode Guide ...................................................89

Setting the Feature Guide...............................................................90

Help............................................................................................91

Basic Shooting 93

A Fully Automatic Shooting (Scene Intelligent Auto)....................94

A Full Auto Techniques (Scene Intelligent Auto) ..........................97

C Creative Auto Shooting ...........................................................100

8: Special Scene Mode ...........................................................107

8: 2 Shooting Portraits...........................................................109

8: q Shooting Group Photos ................................................. 110

8: 3 Shooting Landscapes ................................................... 111

8: 5 Shooting Moving Subjects ............................................ 112

8: C Photographing Children ................................................. 113

Contents

8: r Panning.........................................................................114

8: 4 Shooting Close-ups ........................................................116

8: P Shooting Food.................................................................117

8: y Shooting Candlelight Portraits ........................................118

8: 6 Shooting Night Portraits (With a Tripod) .........................119

8: F Shooting Night Scenes (Handheld) ............................... 120

8: G Shooting Backlit Scenes ............................................... 121

Q Quick Control .......................................................................... 126

Setting the AF and Drive Modes 129

f: Selecting the AF Operation ................................................... 130

S Selecting the AF Area and AF Point ....................................... 134

AF Area Selection Mode............................................................... 139

AF Sensor .................................................................................... 143

Lenses and Usable AF Points ...................................................... 145

When Autofocus Fails................................................................... 153

MF: Manual Focus........................................................................ 154

Setting Lens Electronic MF .......................................................... 155

i Selecting the Drive Mode ....................................................... 156

j Using the Self-timer................................................................. 159

Image Settings 161

Setting the Image-Recording Quality ........................................... 162

Setting the Aspect Ratio ............................................................... 168

i: Setting the ISO Speed for Still Photos ................................. 170

Selecting a Picture Style .............................................................. 176

Contents

Customizing a Picture Style ..........................................................180

Registering a Picture Style............................................................183

B: Setting the White Balance....................................................185

u White Balance Correction ....................................................... 191

Auto Correction of Brightness and Contrast .................................194

Setting Noise Reduction ...............................................................195

Highlight Tone Priority ...................................................................199

Correction of Lens Aberrations due to Optical Characteristics .....200

Reducing Flicker ...........................................................................206

Setting the Color Space ............................................................... 208

Creating and Selecting a Folder ...................................................209

File Numbering Methods............................................................... 211

Setting Copyright Information .......................................................214

GPS Settings 217

GPS Features ...............................................................................218

GPS Precautions ..........................................................................220

Acquiring GPS Signals..................................................................221

Setting the Positioning Interval .....................................................226

Setting Time from GPS on the Camera ........................................227

Logging the Route Traveled..........................................................228

Advanced Operations for Photographic Effects 233

d: Program AE.............................................................................234

s: Shutter-Priority AE ................................................................236

f: Aperture-Priority AE ..............................................................238

Contents

a: Manual Exposure ................................................................... 241

q Selecting the Metering Mode.................................................. 243

O Setting the Desired Exposure Compensation ......................... 245

h Auto Exposure Bracketing (AEB)........................................... 247

A Locking the Exposure for Shooting (AE Lock) ........................ 249

F: Long (Bulb) Exposures ........................................................... 250

w: HDR (High Dynamic Range) Shooting .............................. 253

P Multiple Exposures ................................................................. 258

2 Mirror Lockup......................................................................... 265

H Interval Timer Shooting.................................................... 267

Using the Eyepiece Cover............................................................ 270

Remote Control Shooting ............................................................. 271

Using a Remote Switch ................................................................ 276

Flash Photography 277

D Flash Photography ................................................................... 278

Setting the Flash Function............................................................ 281

Shooting with the LCD Monitor (Live View Shooting) 289

A Shooting with the LCD Monitor .............................................. 290

Shooting Function Settings .......................................................... 300

Menu Function Settings................................................................ 302

Selecting the AF Operation ......................................................... 305

Focusing with AF (AF Method) ..................................................... 308

x Shooting with the Touch Shutter............................................. 319

MF: Focusing Manually ................................................................ 321

Contents

Shooting Movies 325

k Shooting Movies .....................................................................326

Shooting Function Settings...........................................................339

Setting the Movie Recording Quality.............................................341

Setting the Sound Recording........................................................346

Shooting HDR Movies...................................................................348

a Shooting Time-lapse Movies.................................................349

Shooting Video Snapshots............................................................361

Menu Function Settings ................................................................371

Image Playback 387

x Image Playback ......................................................................388

B: Shooting Information Display .............................................391

H Index display (Multiple-image Display) ...................................399

e Jump Display (Jumping Through Images) ...............................400

t Filtering Images for Playback .................................................402

u Magnifying Images ..................................................................404

d Playing Back with the Touch Screen.........................................406

b Rotating the Image ..................................................................408

K Protecting Images ...................................................................409

p Setting Ratings........................................................................412

Q Quick Control for Playback......................................................415

k Enjoying Movies......................................................................417

k Playing Back Movies...............................................................419

X Editing a Movie’s First and Last Scenes..................................422

Contents

Slide Show (Auto Playback) ......................................................... 424

Viewing Images on a TV Set ........................................................ 427

L Erasing Images........................................................................ 430

Adjusting the LCD Monitor Brightness ......................................... 434

Setting the Auto Rotation of Vertical Images ................................ 435

Post-Processing Images 437

R Processing RAW Images with the Camera........................... 438

S Resizing JPEG Images........................................................... 444

N Cropping JPEG Images .......................................................... 446

Sensor Cleaning 449

f Automatic Sensor Cleaning .................................................. 450

Appending Dust Delete Data........................................................ 452

Manual Sensor Cleaning ............................................................. 455

Print order and Photobook Set-up 457

W Digital Print Order Format (DPOF) ......................................... 458

p Specifying Images for a Photobook......................................... 464

Customizing the Camera 467

Setting Custom Functions ............................................................ 468

Custom Functions ....................................................................... 469

Custom Function Settings ............................................................ 471

8: Fine Adjustment of AF’s Point of Focus................................. 491

8: Custom Controls................................................................... 497

Contents

Registering My Menu ................................................................... 505

w: Registering Custom Shooting Modes.................................... 510

Reference 513

System Map ..................................................................................514

Checking the Battery Information..................................................516

Using a Household Power Outlet..................................................520

H Using Eye-Fi Cards .................................................................522

Function Availability Table by Shooting Mode...............................526

Menu Settings...............................................................................534

Troubleshooting Guide..................................................................548

Error Codes...................................................................................567

Specifications................................................................................568

Software Start Guide /

Downloading Images to a Computer 593

Software Start Guide.....................................................................594

Downloading Images to a Computer.............................................598

Index .............................................................................................600

Power

Charging the battery  p.40

Battery level  p.48

Checking battery

information  p.516

Household power outlet  p.520

Auto power off  p.73

Cards

Formatting  p.70

Releasing shutter

without card  p.44

Cards compatible with

movie recording  p.343

Lens

Attaching  p.53

Detaching  p.54

Basic Settings

Language  p.52

Date/Time/Zone  p.49

Beeper  p.73

Copyright information  p.214

Clear all camera settings  p.75

Viewfinder

Dioptric adjustment  p.55

Eyepiece cover  p.270

Electronic level  p.81

Grid display  p.79

Information display in

viewfinder  p.82

LCD monitor

Vari-angle  p.46

Touch control  p.67

Brightness  p.434

Half-press Off/On  p.74

Electronic level  p.80

Shooting mode guide  p.89

Feature guide  p.90

Help  p.91

AF operation  p.130

AF area selection mode  p.134

AF point selection  p.137

Lens group  p.149

Customizing AF

functions  p.475

Color tracking  p.142

AF Microadjustment  p.491

Manual focusing  p.154

Electronic MF  p.155

Metering

Metering mode  p.243

Drive

Drive mode  p.156

Self-timer  p.159

Maximum burst  p.167

Index to Features

Image Recording Settings

Creating/Selecting a

folder  p.209

File numbering  p.211

Image Quality

Image-recording quality  p.162

ISO speed (still photos)  p.170

Picture Style  p.176

White balance  p.185

Auto Lighting Optimizer  p.194

Noise reduction for

high ISO speeds  p.195

Noise reduction for long

exposures  p.197

Highlight tone priority  p.199

Lens aberration

correction  p.200

Reducing flicker  p.206

Color space  p.208

Shooting

Shooting mode  p.35

• Basic Zone modes  p.35

• SCN mode  p.108

• Creative Zone modes  p.36

Aspect ratio  p.168

HDR mode  p.253

Multiple exposures  p.258

Mirror lockup  p.265

Bulb timer  p.251

Interval timer  p.267

Depth-of-field preview  p.240

Remote switch  p.276

Remote control  p.271

•Pairing  p.273

Quick Control  p.61

Multi function lock  p.88

Error codes  p.567

Exposure

Exposure compensation  p.245

Exposure compensation

with M+ISO Auto  p.242

AEB  p.247

AE lock  p.249

Safety shift  p.473

GPS

GPS  p.217

Logging  p.228

Index to Features

Flash

External flash  p.278

Flash exposure

compensation  p.278

FE lock  p.278

Flash function settings  p.281

Flash Custom Function

settings  p.286

Live View Shooting

Live View shooting  p.289

AF operation  p.305

AF method  p.308

Touch Shutter  p.319

Magnified view  p.317

Manual focusing  p.321

Exposure simulation  p.303

Silent LV shooting  p.303

Movie Shooting

Autoexposure shooting  p.326

Manual exposure

shooting  p.330

ISO speed (movie)  p.372

AF method  p.308

Movie Servo AF  p.373

Movie Servo AF tracking

sensitivity  p.375

Movie Servo AF speed  p.376

Movie recording quality  p.341

HDR movie  p.348

Time-lapse movie  p.349

Video snapshot  p.361

Sound recording  p.346

Microphone  p.347

Wind filter  p.346

Attenuator  p.347

Remote control shooting  p.381

Index to Features

Playback

Image review time  p.74

Single-image display  p.388

Shooting information

display  p.391

Index display  p.399

Image browsing

(Jump display)  p.400

Setting image search

conditions  p.402

Magnified view  p.404

Image rotation  p.408

Protect  p.409

Rating  p.412

Movie playback  p.419

Editing a movie’s first

and last scenes  p.422

Slide show  p.424

Viewing images on a

TV set  p.427

Erasing  p.430

Touch playback  p.406

Quick Control  p.415

Image Editing

RAW image processing  p.438

Resizing JPEGs  p.444

Cropping JPEGs  p.446

Printing / Photobook Set-up

Print Order (DPOF)  p.458

Photobook Set-up  p.464

Customization

Custom Functions (C.Fn)  p.469

Custom Controls  p.497

My Menu  p.505

Custom shooting mode  p.510

Sensor Cleaning and Dust

Reduction

Sensor cleaning  p.450

Append Dust Delete Data  p.452

Manual sensor cleaning  p.455

Software

Software Start Guide  p.594

Software Instruction

Manuals  p.597

Wi-Fi/NFC/Bluetooth Functions

Wi-Fi (Wireless Communication)

Function Instruction Manual

The following precautions are provided to prevent harm or injury to

yourself and others. Make sure to thoroughly understand and follow

these precautions before using the product. If you experience any

malfunctions, problems, or damage to the product, contact the

nearest Canon Service Center or the dealer from whom you

purchased the product.

Safety Precautions

Warnings: Follow the warnings below. Otherwise, death or serious

injuries may result.

To prevent fire, excessive heat, chemical leakage, explosions, and electrical shock,

follow the safeguards below:

• Do not use any batteries, power sources, or accessories not specified in the

Instruction Manual. Do not use any home-made or modified batteries, or the

product if it is damaged.

• Do not insert the battery’s plus and minus ends incorrectly.

• Do not short-circuit, disassemble, or modify the battery. Do not apply heat or

solder to the battery. Do not expose the battery to fire or water. Do not subject the

battery to strong physical shock.

• Do not recharge the battery in temperatures outside the allowable charging

(working) temperature range. Also, do not exceed the recharge time indicated in

the Instruction Manual.

• Do not insert any foreign metallic objects into the electrical contacts of the camera,

accessories, connecting cables, etc.

When disposing of a battery, insulate the electrical contacts with tape. Contact with

other metallic objects or batteries may cause a fire or an explosion.

If excessive heat, smoke, or fumes are emitted when recharging the battery,

immediately unplug the battery charger from the power outlet to stop recharging.

Otherwise, it may cause a fire, heat damage, or electrical shock.

If the battery leaks, changes color, deforms, or emits smoke or fumes, remove it

immediately. Be careful not to get burned in the process. It may cause a fire,

electrical shock or burns if you keep using it.

Prevent any battery leakage from contacting your eyes, skin, and clothing. It can

cause blindness or skin problems. If the battery leakage comes in contact with your

eyes, skin, or clothing, flush the affected area with lots of clean water without rubbing

it. See a physician immediately.

Do not leave any cords near a heat source. It can deform the cord or melt the

insulation and cause a fire or electrical shock.



Do not hold the camera in the same position for long periods of time. Even if the camera

does not feel too hot, prolonged contact with the same body part may cause skin redness or

blistering due to low-temperature contact burns. Using a tripod is recommended when using

the camera in very hot places or for people with circulation problems or poor skin sensation.



Do not fire the flash at anyone driving a car or other vehicle. It may cause an accident.

When the camera or accessories are not in use, make sure to remove the battery,

and disconnect the power plug and connecting cables from the equipment before

storing. This is to prevent electrical shock, excessive heat, fire, and corrosion.

Safety Precautions

Do not use the equipment where there is flammable gas. This is to prevent an

explosion or a fire.

If you drop the equipment and the casing breaks open to expose the internal parts,

do not touch the exposed internal parts. There is a possibility of an electrical shock.

Do not disassemble or modify the equipment. High-voltage internal parts can cause

electrical shock.

Do not look at the sun or an extremely bright light source through the camera or lens.

Doing so may damage your vision.



Keep equipment out of the reach of children and infants, including when in use. Straps

or cords may accidentally cause choking, electrical shock, or injury. Choking or injury

may also occur if a child or infant accidentally swallows a camera part or accessory. If

a child or infant swallows a part or accessory, consult a physician immediately.



Do not use or store the equipment in dusty or humid places. Likewise, keep the battery

away from metallic items and store it with its protective cover attached to prevent short-

circuit. This is to prevent fire, excessive heat, electrical shock, and burns.

Before using the camera inside an airplane or hospital, check if it is allowed.

Electromagnetic waves emitted by the camera may interfere with the plane’s

instruments or the hospital’s medical equipment.

To prevent a fire and electrical shock, follow the safeguards below:

• Always insert the power plug all the way in.

• Do not handle a power plug with wet hands.

• When unplugging a power plug, grasp and pull the plug instead of the cord.

• Do not scratch, cut, or excessively bend the cord or put a heavy object on the cord.

Also do not twist or tie the cords.

• Do not connect too many power plugs to the same power outlet.

• Do not use a cord whose wire is broken or insulation is damaged.

Unplug the power plug periodically and clean off the dust around the power outlet

with a dry cloth. If the surrounding is dusty, humid, or oily, the dust on the power

outlet may become moist and short-circuit the outlet, causing a fire.

Do not connect the battery directly to an electrical outlet or a car’s cigarette lighter

outlet. The battery may leak, generate excessive heat or explode, causing fire, burns,

or injuries.

A thorough explanation of how to use the product by an adult is required when the

product is used by children. Supervise children while they are using the product.

Incorrect usage may result in electrical shock or injury.

Do not leave a lens or lens-attached camera in the sun without the lens cap attached.

Otherwise, the lens may concentrate the sun’s rays and cause a fire.

Do not cover or wrap the product with a cloth when using it. Doing so may trap heat

within and cause the casing to deform or catch fire.

Be careful not to get the camera wet. If you drop the product in the water or if water

or metal get inside the product, promptly remove the battery. This is to prevent fire,

electrical shock, and burns.

Do not use paint thinner, benzene, or other organic solvents to clean the product.

Doing so may cause fire or a health hazard.

Safety Precautions

Cautions: Follow the cautions below. Otherwise, physical injury or

property damage may result.

Do not use or store the product in a high-temperature location such as inside a car

under the hot sun. The product may become hot and cause burns. Doing so may

also cause battery leakage or explosion, which will degrade the performance or

shorten the life of the product.

Do not carry the camera around when it is attached to a tripod. Doing so may cause

an injury or an accident. Also make sure the tripod is sturdy enough to support the

camera and lens.

Do not leave the product in a low-temperature environment for an extended period of

time. The product will become cold and may cause injury when touched.

Do not fire the flash near the eyes. It may hurt the eyes.

If any abnormal skin reaction or irritation occurs during or following the use of this

product, refrain from further use and get medical advice/attention.

Camera Care

This camera is a precision instrument. Do not drop it or subject it to physical

shock.

The camera is not waterproof and cannot be used underwater.

To maximize the camera’s dust- and drip- resistance, keep the terminal

cover, battery compartment cover, card slot cover, and all other covers firmly

closed.

This camera is designed to be dust- and drip- resistant, in order to help

prevent sand, dust, dirt, or water that falls on it unexpectedly from getting

inside, but it is impossible to prevent dirt, dust, water, or salt from getting

inside at all. As far as possible, do not allow dirt, dust, water, or salt to get on

the camera.

If water gets on the camera, wipe it off with a dry and clean cloth. If dirt, dust,

or salt gets on the camera, wipe it off with a clean, well-wrung wet cloth.

Using the camera in a location with large amounts of dirt or dust may cause

a malfunction.

Cleaning the camera after use is recommended. Allowing dirt, dust, water, or

salt to remain on the camera may cause a malfunction.

If you accidentally drop the camera into water or are concerned that

moisture (water), dirt, dust, or salt may have gotten inside it, promptly

consult the nearest Canon Service Center.

Never leave the camera near anything having a strong magnetic field such

as a magnet or electric motor. Also, avoid using or leaving the camera near

anything emitting strong radio waves, such as a large antenna. Strong

magnetic fields can cause camera misoperation or destroy image data.

Do not leave the camera in excessive heat, such as in a car in direct

sunlight. High temperatures can cause the camera to malfunction.

The camera contains precision electronic circuitry. Never attempt to

disassemble the camera yourself.

Handling Precautions

Do not block the mirror operation with your finger, etc. Doing so may cause a

malfunction.

Use only a commercially-available blower to blow away dust when it adheres

to the lens, viewfinder, reflex mirror, focusing screen, etc. Do not use

cleaners that contain organic solvents to clean the camera body or lens. For

stubborn dirt, take the camera to the nearest Canon Service Center.

Do not touch the camera’s electrical contacts with your fingers. This is to

prevent the contacts from corroding. Corroded contacts can cause camera

malfunction.

If the camera is suddenly brought in from the cold into a warm room,

condensation may form on the camera and internal parts. To prevent

condensation, first put the camera in a sealed plastic bag and let it adjust to

the warmer temperature before taking it out of the bag.

If condensation forms on the camera, do not use the camera. This is to avoid

damaging the camera. If there is condensation, remove the lens, card and

battery from the camera, and wait until condensation has evaporated before

using the camera.

If the camera will not be used for an extended period, remove the battery

and store the camera in a cool, dry, well-ventilated location. Even while the

camera is in storage, press the shutter button a few times once in a while to

check that the camera is still working.

Avoid storing the camera where there are chemicals that result in rust and

corrosion such as in a chemical lab.

If the camera has not been used for an extended period, test all its functions

before using it. If you have not used the camera for some time or if there is

an important shoot such as a foreign trip coming up, have the camera

checked by your nearest Canon Service Center or check the camera

yourself and make sure it is working properly.

If you repeat continuous shooting or perform Live View shooting or movie

shooting for a prolonged period, the camera may become hot. This is not a

malfunction.

If there is a bright light source inside or outside the image area, ghosting

may occur.

Handling Precautions

LCD Panel and LCD Monitor

Although the LCD monitor is manufactured with very high precision

technology with over 99.99% effective pixels, 0.01% or fewer of the pixels

may be dead, and there may also be spots of black, red, or other colors. This

is not a malfunction. They do not affect the images recorded.

If the LCD monitor is left on for a prolonged period, screen burn-in may occur

where you see remnants of what was displayed. However, this is only

temporary and will disappear when the camera is left unused for a few days.

The LCD monitor display may seem slightly slow in low temperatures or may

look black in high temperatures. It will return to normal at room temperature.

Cards

To protect the card and its recorded data, note the following:

Do not drop, bend, or wet the card. Do not subject it to excessive force,

physical shock, or vibration.

Do not touch the card’s electronic contacts with your fingers or anything

metallic.

Do not affix any stickers, etc. on the card.

Do not store or use the card near anything that has a strong magnetic field,

such as a TV set, speakers, or magnets. Also avoid places prone to having

static electricity.

Do not leave the card in direct sunlight or near a heat source.

Store the card in a case.

Do not store the card in hot, dusty, or humid locations.

Lens

After detaching the lens from the camera, put down the

lens with the rear end up and attach the rear lens cap to

avoid scratching the lens surface and electrical contacts.

Contacts

28
Nomenclature
<R> Drive mode selection 
button (p.156, 159)
<i> ISO speed setting 
button (p.170)
<U> LCD panel 
illumination button 
(p.60)
<6> Main Dial 
(p.57)
Shutter button 
(p.56)
Self-timer/
Remote control 
lamp (p.159)
Remote control 
sensor (p.272)
Grip
(Battery 
compartment)
DC coupler cord hole 
(p.520)
Depth-of-field preview button 
(p.240)
Mirror (p.265, 455)
<f> AF operation/AF method selection button 
(p.130, 305/308)
Lens mount index (p.53)
Flash sync contacts
Hot shoe (p.278)
Mode Dial lock-release 
button (p.57)
Mode Dial (p.35, 57)
Built-in 
microphones 
(p.326, 347)
Lens lock pin
Lens release 
button (p.54)
Lens mount
Contacts (p.27)
Body cap (p.53)
<B> AF area selection button (p.136, 482)
GPS antenna
Terminal cover
Remote control terminal 
(N3 type) (p.276)
<q> Metering mode 
selection button (p.243)
Strap mount 
(p.38)

29
Nomenclature
* Used for Wi-Fi connections via the NFC function.
<B> Info button 
(p.60, 80, 84, 91, 293, 
298, 334, 388)
LCD panel (p.33, 34)
Eyecup (p.270)
Viewfinder eyepiece
Power switch (p.47)
Terminal cover
<p> 
AF start button
 (p.56, 130, 292, 337)
<A> AE lock/
FE lock button 
(p.249, 278)
<S> AF point 
selection button 
(p.136, 137)
<Q> Quick 
Control 
button (p.61)
<0> Setting button 
(p.64)
<M> Menu button 
(p.64)
<g> Digital terminal (p.598)
<Y> External microphone IN terminal (p.347)
<D> HDMI mini OUT terminal (p.427)
<L> Erase button (p.430)
Speaker
P (N-Mark)*

30
Nomenclature
<u> Index/
Magnify/
Reduce button 
(p.399/317, 
321, 404)
<x> Playback button (p.388)
<9> <W> <X> <Y> <Z> 
Multi-controller (p.59)
LCD monitor (p.46, 64, 
290, 326, 404)
Tripod socket
Card slot (p.43)
Battery compartment 
cover (p.42)
Battery 
compartment 
cover release 
lever (p.42)
Strap mount 
(p.38)
Access lamp (p.44)
<A> Live View shooting/
<k> Movie shooting switch 
(p.289/325)
<0> Start/Stop button 
(p.290, 326)
<V> Focal plane mark
Card slot 
cover (p.43)
Accessory positioning hole
Multi function lock switch 
(p.59)
<5> Quick Control Dial (p.58)
Dioptric adjustment knob (p.55)
Serial number

Nomenclature

Viewfinder Information Display

* The display will show only the settings currently applied.

Electronic level (p.81)

Spot metering circle (p.244)

Grid (p.79)

<z> Battery level

(p.48)

AF operation (p.130)

Metering mode (p.243)

JPEG/RAW (p.162)

Focusing

screen

Aspect ratio line 1:1

(p.168)

<G> Flicker detection

(p.206)

<z> Warning icon

(p.489)

Area AF frame (p.140)

Shooting mode (p.35)

Large Zone AF frame (p.140)

<S> AF point

<O> Spot AF point

(p.139)

Aspect ratio line 16:9 (p.168)

Drive mode (p.156, 159)

Aspect ratio

line 4:3

(p.168)

32
Nomenclature
<A> AE lock (p.249)
AEB in-progress 
(p.247)
<D> Flash-ready (p.278)
Improper FE lock warning
<d> FE lock (p.278)
FEB in-progress (p.285)
<e> High-speed sync (p.285)
<y> Flash exposure 
compensation (p.278)
Shutter speed (p.236)
Bulb (buLb) (p.250)
FE lock (FEL)
Busy (buSY)
Multi function lock warning (L)
No card warning (Card)
Card full warning (FuLL)
Card error warning (Card)
Error codes (Err)
Aperture (p.238)
AF point selection
([ ] AF, SEL [ ], SEL AF)
Exposure level indicator
Exposure compensation amount 
(p.245)
AEB range (p.247)
<A> Highlight tone priority 
(p.199)
ISO speed (p.170)
Consecutive self-timer shots 
(p.159)
Maximum burst for 
continuous shooting (p.167)
Number of remaining 
multiple exposures (p.259)
<o> Focus indicator 
(p.94, 131)
<i> ISO speed 
(p.170)
<O> Exposure compensation (p.245)

Nomenclature

LCD Panel

* The display will show only the settings currently applied.

Shutter speed

Bulb (buLb)

FE lock (FEL)

Remaining number of shots for

time-lapse movie

Busy (buSY)

Multi function lock warning (L)

Cleaning image sensor (CLn)

No card warning (Card)

Card full warning (FuLL)

Card error warning (Card)

Error codes (Err)

AF operation (p.130, 305)

One-Shot AF

AI Focus AF

AI Servo AF

Servo AF

4 L

Manual focus

(p.154, 321)

Possible shots

Self-timer countdown

Bulb exposure time

Error number

Remaining images to record

<A> Highlight tone priority (p.199)

ISO speed (p.170)

Metering mode (p.243)

q Evaluative metering

w Partial metering

r Spot metering

e Center-weighted

average metering

ISO speed (p.170)

Consecutive self-timer shots

(p.159)

Aperture

Drive mode (p.156, 159)

uSingle shooting

oHigh-speed continuous shooting

iLow-speed continuous shooting

BSilent single shooting

MSilent continuous shooting

QSelf-timer: 10 sec./remote control

kSelf-timer: 2 sec./remote control

qSelf-timer: Continuous

AF point selection

([ ] AF, SEL [ ], SEL AF)

Nomenclature

Battery level (p.48)

<H>

Bulb timer shooting/

Interval timer shooting

(p.251/267)

Multiple-exposure shooting

(p.258)

<z> Warning icon

(p.489)

<O> Exposure compensation

(p.245)

<a> Time-lapse movie shooting (p.349)

Exposure level indicator

Exposure compensation amount

(p.245)

AEB range (p.247)

<x> Logging function

<r> GPS acquisition

status

<l>

Wi-Fi function

<s> Bluetooth function

Nomenclature

Mode Dial

You can set the shooting mode. Turn the Mode Dial while holding down

the Mode Dial center (Mode Dial lock release button).

Basic Zone

All you do is press the shutter button. The camera sets everything to

suit the subject or scene for shooting.

A:Scene Intelligent Auto (p.94)

Creative Auto

(p.100)

8:Special scene (p.107)

2Portrait (p.109) 4Close-up (p.116)

qGroup Photo (p.110) PFood (p.117)

3Landscape (p.111) yCandlelight (p.118)

5Sports (p.112) 6Night Portrait (p.119)

CKids (p.113) FHandheld Night Scene (p.120)

rPanning (p.114) GHDR Backlight Control (p.121)

Nomenclature

Custom shooting mode

You can register the shooting mode (<d>, <s>, <f>, <a>, or

<F>), AF operation, menu settings, etc. to the <w> and <x>

Mode Dial positions (p.510).

Creative Zone

These modes give you more

control for shooting various

subjects as desired.

d: Program AE (p.234)

s: Shutter-priority AE (p.236)

Aperture-priority AE

(p.238)

a: Manual exposure (p.241)

F: Bulb (p.250)

Nomenclature

Battery Charger LC-E6

Charger for Battery Pack LP-E6N/LP-E6 (p.40).

Battery Charger LC-E6E

Charger for Battery Pack LP-E6N/LP-E6 (p.40).

Battery pack slot

Charge lamp

Power plug

IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS-SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS.

DANGER-TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK,

CAREFULLY FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS.

For connection to a supply not in the U.S.A., use an attachment plug adapter

of the proper configuration for the power outlet, if needed.

Power cord

Power cord socket

Battery pack slot

Charge lamp

Nomenclature

Pass the end of the strap through the

camera’s strap mount eyelet from the

bottom. Then pass it through the strap’s

buckle as shown in the illustration. Pull the

strap to take up any slack and make sure the

strap will not loosen from the buckle.

The strap also has an attached eyepiece

cover (p.270).

Attaching the Strap

Eyepiece cover

Getting Started and Basic

Camera Operations

This chapter describes preparatory steps before you

start shooting and the basic camera operations.

1Remove the protective cover.

Detach the protective cover provided

with the battery.

2Attach the battery.

As shown in the illustration, attach the

battery securely to the charger.

To detach the battery, follow the

above procedure in reverse.

3Recharge the battery.

For LC-E6

As shown by the arrow, flip out the

battery charger’s prongs and insert

the prongs into a power outlet.

For LC-E6E

Connect the power cord to the

charger and insert the plug into a

power outlet.

Recharging starts automatically and

the charge lamp blinks in orange.

It takes approx. 2 hr. and 30 min. to fully recharge a completely

exhausted battery at room temperature (23°C / 73°F). The time

required to recharge the battery will vary greatly depending on the

ambient temperature and the battery’s remaining capacity.

For safety reasons, recharging in low temperatures (5°C - 10°C /

41°F - 50°F) will take longer (up to approx. 4 hr.).

Charging the Battery

LC-E6

LC-E6E

Charge Level Charge Lamp

Color Display

0-49%

Orange

Blinks once per second

50-74% Blinks twice per second

75% or higher Blinks three times per second

Fully charged Green Turned on

Charging the Battery

Upon purchase, the battery is not fully charged.

Charge the battery before use.



Recharge the battery on the day before or on the day it is to be used.

Even during storage, a charged battery will gradually drain and lose its capacity.

After recharging the battery, detach it and disconnect the

charger from the power outlet.

You can attach the cover in a different

orientation to indicate whether the battery

is recharged or not.

If the battery is recharged, attach the cover so that the battery-

shaped hole < > is aligned over the blue sticker on the battery. If

the battery is exhausted, attach the cover in the opposite orientation.

When not using the camera, remove the battery.

If the battery is left in the camera for a prolonged period, a small

amount of power current will continue to be released, resulting in

excess discharge and shorter battery life. Store the battery with the

protective cover attached. Storing the battery when it is fully charged

may lower the battery performance.

The battery charger can also be used in foreign countries.

The battery charger is compatible with a 100 V AC to 240 V AC 50/60 Hz

power source. If necessary, attach a commercially-available plug adapter for

the respective country or region. Do not attach any portable voltage

transformer to the battery charger. Doing so may damage the battery charger.



If the battery becomes exhausted quickly even after having been

fully charged, the battery has reached the end of its service life.

Check the battery’s recharge performance (p.516) and purchase a new battery.

Tips for Using the Battery and Charger

After disconnecting the charger’s power plug, do not touch the prongs for

approx. 10 sec.

If the battery’s remaining capacity (p.516) is 94% or higher, the battery

will not be recharged.

The provided charger cannot charge any battery other than Battery Pack

LP-E6N/LP-E6.

Load a fully-charged Battery Pack LP-E6N (or LP-E6) into the camera.

The camera’s viewfinder becomes bright when a battery is installed, and

darkens when the battery is removed. If the battery is not installed, the

image in the viewfinder becomes blurred and you cannot perform focusing.

1Open the cover.

Slide the lever as shown by the

arrows and open the cover.

2Insert the battery.

Insert the end with the electrical

contacts.

Insert the battery until it locks in

place.

3Close the cover.

Press the cover until it snaps shut.

Open the cover and remove the

battery.

Press the battery lock lever as shown

by the arrow and remove the battery.



To prevent short circuiting, be sure to

attach the provided protective cover

(p.40) to the battery.

Installing and Removing the Battery

Installing the Battery

Removing the Battery

You cannot use batteries other than the Battery Pack LP-E6N or LP-E6.

You can use an SD, SDHC, or SDXC memory card (sold separately)

with the camera. The captured images are recorded onto the card.

1Open the cover.

Slide the cover as shown by the

arrows to open it.

2Insert the card.



As shown by the illustration, face

the card’s label side toward you

and insert it until it clicks in place.

3Close the cover.

Close the cover and slide it in the

direction shown by the arrows until it

snaps shut.

When you set the power switch to

<1>, the number of possible shots

will be displayed on the LCD panel.

Installing and Removing the Card

Installing the Card

Make sure the card’s write-protect switch is set upward to enable

writing and erasing.

Write-protect switch

Possible shots

Installing and Removing the Card

1Open the cover.

Set the power switch to <2>.

Check that the access lamp is off,

then open the cover.

If [Recording...] is displayed on the

LCD monitor, close the cover.

2Remove the card.

Gently push in the card, then let it go

to eject.

Pull the card straight out, then close

the cover.

Removing the Card

Access lamp

UHS-I SDHC or SDXC memory cards can also be used.

The number of possible shots varies depending on the remaining

capacity of the card, the settings of image-recording quality, ISO speed,

etc.

Setting [z1: Release shutter without card] to [Disable] will prevent

you from forgetting to insert a card (p.535).

Installing and Removing the Card

When the access lamp is lit or blinking, it indicates that images are

being written to, read from, or erased from the card, or data is being

transferred. Do not open the card slot cover during this time.

Also, never do any of the following while the access lamp is lit or

blinking. Otherwise, it can damage the image data, card, or camera.

• Removing the card.

• Removing the battery.

• Shaking or banging the camera around.

•Unplugging and connecting a power cord (when household power

outlet accessories (sold separately, p.520) are used).

If the card already contains recorded images, the image number may not

start from 0001 (p.211).

If a card-related error message is displayed on the LCD monitor, remove

and reinsert the card. If the error persists, use a different card.

If you can transfer images on the card to a computer, transfer all the

images and then format the card with the camera (p.70). The card may

then return to normal.

Do not touch the card’s contacts with your fingers or metal objects. Do

not expose the contacts to dust or water. If smudges adhere to the

contacts, contact failure may result.

Multimedia cards (MMC) cannot be used. (Card error will be displayed.)

After you flip out the LCD monitor, you can set menu functions, use Live

View shooting, shoot movies, or play back photos and movies. You can

change the direction and angle of the LCD monitor.

1Flip out the LCD monitor.

2Rotate the LCD monitor.

When the LCD monitor is swung out,

you can rotate it up, down, or over

180° to face the subject.

The indicated angle is only

approximate.

3Face it toward you.

Normally, use the camera with the

LCD monitor facing you.

Using the LCD Monitor

175°

180°

90°

Be careful not to exert excessive force and break the hinge when rotating

the LCD monitor.

When a cable is connected to a camera terminal, the rotation angle

range of the flipped out LCD monitor will be limited.

When not using the camera, close the LCD monitor with the screen

facing inward. You can protect the screen.

During Live View shooting or movie shooting, facing the LCD monitor

toward the subject will display a mirror image on the screen (right/left

reversed).

If you turn on the power switch and the date/time/zone setting

screen appears, see page 49 to set the date/time/zone.

<1> : The camera turns on.

<2> : The camera is turned off and

does not function. Set the

power switch to this position

when not using the camera.

Whenever you set the power switch

to <1> or <2>, sensor cleaning

will be performed automatically. (A

small sound may be heard.) During

the sensor cleaning, the LCD monitor

will display <f>.

Even during the sensor cleaning, if you press the shutter button

halfway (p.56), cleaning operation will be stopped, and you can take

a picture immediately.

If you repeatedly turn the power switch <1>/<2> at a short

interval, the <f> icon may not be displayed. This is normal and

not a malfunction.

To save battery power, the camera turns off automatically after

approx. 1 minute of non-operation. To turn on the camera again, just

press the shutter button halfway (p.56).

You can change the auto power off time with [52: Auto power off]

(p.73).

Turning on the Power

Automatic Sensor Cleaning

3 Auto Power Off

If you set the power switch to <2> while an image is being recorded to

the card, [Recording...] will be displayed and the power will turn off after the

recording finishes.

Turning on the Power

When the power switch is set to <1>, the battery level will be

indicated in one of six levels. A blinking battery icon indicates

that the battery will soon be exhausted.

Number of Possible Shots with Viewfinder Shooting

(Approx. number of shots)



The figures above are based on a fully-charged Battery Pack LP-E6N, no Live View

shooting, and CIPA (Camera & Imaging Products Association) testing standards.

With Battery Grip BG-E21 (sold separately) loaded with two LP-E6N battery

packs, the number of possible shots will be approximately doubled.

z Battery Level Indicator

Display

Level (%) 100 - 70 69 - 50 49 - 20

Display

Level (%) 19 - 10 9 - 1 0

Temperature Room Temperature

(23°C / 73°F)

Low Temperatures

(0°C / 32°F)

Possible shots 1200 1100

Doing any of the following will exhaust the battery faster:

• Pressing the shutter button halfway for a prolonged period.

• Activating the AF frequently without taking a picture.

• Using the lens’s Image Stabilizer.

• Using the LCD monitor frequently.

• Using the GPS function, Wi-Fi function, or Bluetooth function.

The number of possible shots may decrease depending on the actual

shooting conditions.

The lens operation is powered by the camera’s battery. Certain lenses

may exhaust the battery faster than others.

In low ambient temperatures, shooting may not be possible even with a

sufficient battery level.

For the number of possible shots with Live View shooting, see page 291.

See [54: Battery info.] to check the battery status (p.516).

When you turn on the power for the first time or if the date/time/zone

have been reset, the date/time/zone setting screen will appear. Follow

the steps below to set the time zone first.

Set the camera to the time zone in which you currently live so that when

you travel, you can simply change the setting to the correct time zone

for your destination, and the camera will automatically adjust the date/

time.

Note that the date/time appended to recorded images will be based

on this date/time setting. Be sure to set the correct date/time.

1Display the menu screen.

Press the <M> button to display

the menu screen.

2Under the [52] tab, select [Date/

Time/Zone].

Press the <Q> button and select the

[5] tab.

Press the <Y> <Z> keys to select

the [52] tab.

Press the <W> <X> keys to select

[Date/Time/Zone], then press <0>.

3Set the time zone.

[London] is set by default.

Press the <Y> <Z> keys to select

[Time zone], then press <0>.

3 Setting the Date, Time, and Zone

Press the <Y> <Z> keys to select

[Zone], then press <0>.

Press the <W> <X> keys to select

the time zone, then press <0>.



If your desired time zone is not listed,

press the <

> button, then

proceed to the next step to set it (with

the time difference from the

Coordinated Universal Time, UTC).

To set the time difference from UTC,

press the <Y> <Z> keys to select a

parameter (+/-/hour/minute) for [Time

difference].

Press <0> so <r> is displayed.

Press the <W> <X> keys to set it,

then press <0>. (Returns to <s>.)

After entering the time zone or time

difference, press the <Y> <Z> keys

to select [OK], then press <0>.

4 Set the date and time.

Press the <Y> <Z> keys to select

the number.

Press <0> so <r> is displayed.

Press the <W> <X> keys to set it,

then press <0>. (Returns to <s>.)

3 Setting the Date, Time, and Zone

5Set the daylight saving time.

Set it as necessary.

Press the <Y> <Z> keys to select

[Y].

Press <0> so <r> is displayed.

Press the <W> <X> keys to select

[Z], then press <0>.

When the daylight saving time is set

to [Z], the time set in step 4 will

advance by 1 hr. If [Y] is set, the

daylight saving time will be canceled

and the time will go back by 1 hour.

6Exit the setting.

Press the <Y> <Z> keys to select

[OK], then press <0>.

The date, time, time zone, and

daylight saving time will be set.

The date/time/zone settings may be reset when the camera is stored

without the battery, when its battery becomes exhausted, or when it is

exposed to below freezing temperatures for a prolonged period. If this

happens, set the date/time/zone again.

After changing [Zone/Time difference], check that the correct date/time

are set.

The date/time that were set will start from when you select [OK] in step 6.

In step 3, the time displayed in [Time zone] is the time difference

compared with Coordinated Universal Time (UTC).

Even if [52: Auto power off] is set to [1 min.], [2 min.], or [4 min.], the

auto power off time will be approx. 6 min. when the [52: Date/Time/

Zone] screen is displayed.

Automatic time update is possible with GPS function (p.227).

1Display the menu screen.

Press the <M> button to display

the menu screen.

2Under the [52] tab, select

[LanguageK].

Press the <Q> button and select the

[5] tab.

Press the <Y> <Z> keys to select

the [52] tab.

Press the <W> <X> keys to select

[LanguageK], then press <0>.

3Set the desired language.

Press the <W> <X> keys to select

the language, then press <0>.

The interface language will change.

3 Selecting the Interface Language

The camera is compatible with all Canon EF lenses. The camera

cannot be used with EF-S or EF-M lenses.

1Remove the caps.

Remove the rear lens cap and the

body cap by turning them as shown

by the arrows.

2Attach the lens.

Align the red mount index on the lens

with the red mount index on the

camera and turn the lens as shown

by the arrow until it clicks in place.

3Set the lens’s focus mode switch

to <AF>.

<AF> stands for autofocus.

<MF> stands for manual focus.

Autofocus will not operate.

4Remove the front lens cap.

Attaching and Detaching a Lens

Attaching a Lens

Attaching and Detaching a Lens

While pressing the lens release

button, turn the lens as shown by

the arrow.

Turn the lens until it stops, then

detach it.

Attach the rear lens cap to the

detached lens.

Detaching the Lens

Do not look at the sun directly through any lens. Doing so may cause

loss of vision.

When attaching or detaching a lens, set the camera’s power switch to

<2>.

If the front part (focusing ring) of the lens rotates during autofocusing, do

not touch the rotating part.

For instructions on how to use the lens, refer to the Lens Instruction Manual

(p.4).

Tips for Avoiding Smudges and Dust

When changing lenses, do it quickly in a place with minimal dust.

When storing the camera without a lens attached, be sure to attach the

body cap to the camera.

Remove dust on the body cap before attaching it.

Turn the dioptric adjustment

knob.

Turn the knob left or right so that the

AF points in the viewfinder look

sharp.

If the knob is difficult to turn, remove

the eyecup (p.270).

To obtain sharp images, hold the camera still to minimize camera

shake.

1. Wrap your right hand around the camera grip firmly.

2. Hold the lens bottom with your left hand.

3. Rest your right index finger lightly on the shutter button.

4. Press your arms and elbows lightly against the front of your body.

5. To maintain a stable stance, place one foot slightly ahead of the other.

6. Press the camera against your face and look through the viewfinder.

Basic Shooting Operations

Adjusting the Viewfinder Clarity

Holding the Camera

If the camera’s dioptric adjustment still cannot provide a sharp viewfinder

image, using E-series Dioptric Adjustment Lenses (sold separately) is

recommended.

Vertical shooting

Horizontal shooting

To shoot while looking at the LCD monitor, see page 289.

Basic Shooting Operations

The shutter button has two steps. You can press the shutter button

halfway. Then you can further press the shutter button completely.

Pressing Halfway

This activates autofocusing and the

automatic exposure system that sets the

shutter speed and aperture.

The exposure setting (shutter speed and

aperture) is displayed in the viewfinder

and on the LCD panel for approx. 4 sec.

(metering timer/0).

Pressing Completely

This releases the shutter and takes the

picture.

Preventing Camera Shake

Hand-held camera movement during the moment of exposure is

called camera shake. It can cause blurred pictures. To prevent

camera shake, note the following:

• Hold and steady the camera as shown on the preceding page.

• Press the shutter button halfway to autofocus, then slowly press

the shutter button completely.

Shutter Button

In Creative Zone modes, pressing the button is the same as

pressing the shutter button halfway.

If you press the shutter button completely without pressing it halfway

first, or if you press the shutter button halfway and then press it

completely immediately, the camera will take a moment before it takes

the picture.

Even during menu display or image playback, you can go back to

shooting-ready state by pressing the shutter button halfway.

Basic Shooting Operations

Turn the dial while holding down

the lock release button at the

center of the dial.

Use it to set the shooting mode.

(1) After pressing a button, turn the

<6> dial.

When you press a button such as <f>,

<R>, , or <q>, the

respective function remains selectable

for approx. 6 sec. (9). During this time,

you can turn the <6> dial to change

the setting.

When the timer ends or if you press the

shutter button halfway, the camera will

go back to shooting-ready state.

Use this dial to select the AF

operation, drive mode, ISO speed,

metering mode, AF point, etc.

(2) Turn only the <6> dial.

While looking at the viewfinder display or

LCD panel, turn the <6> dial.

Use this dial to set the shutter speed,

aperture, etc.

Mode Dial

6 Main Dial

The operations in (1) can be performed even when the <R> switch is

set upward (Multi function lock, p.59).

Basic Shooting Operations

(1) After pressing a button, turn the

<5> dial.

When you press a button such as <f>,

, or <q>, the respective function

remains selectable for approx. 6 sec.

(9). During this time, you can turn the

5> dial to change the setting.

When the timer ends or if you press the

shutter button halfway, the camera will

go back to shooting-ready state.

Use this dial to select the AF

operation, ISO speed, metering

mode, AF point, etc.

(2) Turn only the <5> dial.

While looking at the viewfinder or LCD

panel, turn the <5> dial.

Use this dial to set the exposure

compensation amount, the aperture

setting for manual exposures, etc.

5 Quick Control Dial

The operations in (1) can be performed even when the <R> switch is

set upward (Multi function lock, p.59).

Basic Shooting Operations

The <9> consists of an eight-direction key.

Use it to select the AF point, correct

the white balance, move the AF point

or magnifying frame during Live View

shooting or movie shooting, set the

Quick Control, etc.

You can also use it to select menu

items.

With [54: Multi function lock] set and the <R> switch set

upward, you can prevent the settings from being changed by

accidentally operating Main Dial, Quick Control Dial, or Multi-controller

or by inadvertently tapping on the touch screen.

For [54: Multi function lock] details, see page 88.

<R> switch set upward: Lock

engaged

<R> switch set downward: Lock

released

9 Multi-controller

R Multi Function Lock

Correcting the white balance and moving the magnifying frame during

playback can be done even with the <R> switch set upward (Multi

Function Lock).

By default, the <5> dial will be locked when the multi function lock switch is

in the lock position.

Basic Shooting Operations

You can illuminate the LCD panel by

pressing the button. Turn on (9)

or off the LCD panel illumination by

pressing the button.

After you press the button a number of times (p.84), the Quick

Control screen (p.86) will appear. You can then check the current

shooting function settings.

Pressing the <Q> button enables Quick Control of the shooting

function settings (p.61).

Then you can press the button to turn off the screen (p.84).

U LCD Panel Illumination

Displaying the Quick Control Screen

During a bulb exposure, pressing the shutter button completely will turn off

the LCD panel illumination.

You can directly select and set the shooting functions displayed on the

LCD monitor with intuitive operations. This is called Quick Control.

1Press the <Q> button (7).

The Quick Control screen will appear.

2Set the desired functions.

Press the <W> <X> <Y> <Z> keys

to select a function.

The settings of the selected function

and Feature guide (p.90) will appear.

Turn the <6> or <5> dial to

change the setting.

3Take the picture.

Press the shutter button completely to

take the picture.

The captured image will be displayed.

Q Quick Control for Shooting Functions

Basic Zone modes Creative Zone modes

For the functions settable in Basic Zone modes and their setting

procedures, see page 126.

You can also tap on the screen for Quick Control settings (p.67).

Q Quick Control for Shooting Functions

Creative Zone modes

Basic Zone modes (Sample screen)

Functions Settable with the Quick Control

Shutter speed (p.236)

AF operation (p.130)

White balance correction (p.191)

Auto Lighting Optimizer

(p.194)

Picture Style (p.176)

Exposure

compensation/

AEB setting

(p.245/247)

ISO speed (p.170)

Image-recording quality

(p.162)

Aperture (p.238)

Flash exposure compensation

(p.278, 285)

Drive mode (p.156)

Custom Controls (p.497)

White balance (p.185)

Metering mode (p.243)

AF Area selection mode/

AF point selection White balance bracketing (p.192)

Wi-Fi function

<C> mode <r> mode mode

In Basic Zone modes, the settable Quick Control functions vary

depending on the shooting mode (p.127). The settable Quick Control

functions in Basic Zone modes are [Ambience-based shots],

[Background blur], [Drive mode], [AF point selection], [Effect]

(Panning), [Brightness], and [Color tone].

For the Quick Control screen, see page 86.

Q Quick Control for Shooting Functions

Select the desired function and press

<0>. The function setting screen will

appear.

Turn the <6> or <5> dial, then

press the <Y> <Z> keys to change

the setting. There are also functions

that are set by pressing a button

following these operations.

Press <0> to finalize the setting and

return to the previous screen.

When you select <7> (p.497),

<H> (p.134), or <k>, and press

the <M> button to exit the

setting.

Quick Control

<0>



For details on the Wi-Fi functions, refer to the “Wi-Fi (Wireless

Communication) Function Instruction Manual” (p.4).

You can configure various settings with the menus such as the image-

recording quality, date/time, etc.

* In Basic Zone modes, some tabs and menu items do not appear.

Menu Operations and Configurations

Basic Zone Modes Menu Screen

Creative Zone Modes Menu Screen

<5> Quick Control

Dial

<M> button

<6> Main Dial

LCD monitor

<0> button

<Q> button

Multi-controller

<W><X><Y><Z> keys

Menu items

Menu settings

z: Shooting

5: Set-up

9: My Menu

3: Playback 8: Custom Functions

Main tabs

Secondary

tabs

3 Menu Operations and Configurations

1Display the menu screen.

Press the <M> button to display

the menu screen.

2Select a tab.



Each time you press the <

> button, the

main tab (group of functions) will switch.

Press the Multi-controller’s <Y>

<Z> keys to select a secondary tab.

For example, the [z3] tab in this

manual refers to the screen displayed

when the z (Shooting) tab’s third

box [ ] from the left is selected.

3Select the desired item.

Press the Multi-controller’s <W> <X>

keys to select the item, then press

<0>.

4Select the setting.

Press the <W> <X> or <Y> <Z>

keys to select the desired setting.

The current setting is indicated in

blue.

5Set the setting.

Press <0> to set it.

6Exit the setting.



Press the <

> button to exit the

menu and return to shooting-ready state.

Menu Setting Procedure

3 Menu Operations and Configurations

Example: Highlight tone priority

Dimmed menu items cannot be set. The

menu item is dimmed if another function

setting is overriding it.

You can see the overriding function by

selecting the dimmed menu item and

pressing <0>.

If you cancel the overriding function’s

setting, the dimmed menu item will

become settable.

Dimmed Menu Items

The description of menu functions hereafter assumes that you have

pressed the <M> button to display the menu screen.

You can also tap on the menu screen or turn the <6> or <5> dial to

operate the menu.

To cancel the operation, press the <M> button.

For details about each menu item, see page 534.

With [55: Clear all camera settings], you can reset the menu functions to

the default settings (p.75).

You may not be able to see the overriding function for certain dimmed menu

items.

You can operate the camera by tapping on the LCD monitor (touch-

sensitive panel) with your fingers.

Sample Screen (Quick Control)

Use your finger to tap on (touch

briefly and then remove your finger

from) the LCD monitor.

By tapping, you can select menus,

icons, etc. displayed on the LCD

monitor.

For example, when you tap on [Q],

the Quick Control screen appears. By

tapping on [Q], you can return to

the preceding screen.

Examples of operations possible by tapping on the screen

Setting menu functions after pressing the <M> button

Quick Control

Setting the function after pressing the <f>, <R>, ,

<q>, or <S> button

Touch AF in Live View shooting and movie shooting

Touch Shutter in Live View shooting

Setting functions in Live View shooting and movie shooting

Playback operations

Operating the Camera with Touch Screen

Tap

If [54: Beep] is set to [Touch ], the beep will not sound for touch

operations (p.73).

d Operating the Camera with Touch Screen

Sample Screen (Menu screen)

Slide your finger while touching the

LCD monitor.

Sample Screen (Scale display)

Examples of operations possible by dragging your finger on

the screen

Selecting a menu tab or item after pressing the <M> button

Setting with scale display

Quick Control

Selecting AF points (except with Live View shooting)

Setting shooting functions for Live View shooting and movie

shooting

Playback operations

Drag

d Operating the Camera with Touch Screen

1Select [Touch control].

Under the [54] tab, select [Touch

control], then press <0>.

2Set the touch control response

setting.

Select the desired setting, then press

<0>.

[Standard] is the normal setting.

[Sensitive] provides a more reactive

touch screen response than

[Standard]. Try using both settings

and select the one you prefer.

To disable touch operations, select

[Disable].

3 Setting the Touch Control Response

Cautions for Touch Control Operations

Since the LCD monitor is not pressure sensitive, do not use any sharp

objects, such as your fingernail or a ballpoint pen, for touch operations.

Do not use wet fingers for touch operations.

If the LCD monitor has any moisture or if your fingers are wet, the touch

screen may not respond or malfunction may occur. In such a case, turn

off the power and wipe off the moisture with a cloth.

Attaching any commercially-available protective sheet or sticker on the

LCD monitor may degrade the touch operation response.

If you quickly perform touch operation when [Sensitive] is set, the touch

operation response may be poor.

If the card is new or was previously formatted by another camera or

computer, format the card with this camera.

1Select [Format card].

Under the [51] tab, select

[

Format

card], then press <0>.

2Format the card.

Select [OK], then press <0>.

The card will be formatted.

For low-level formatting, press the

<L> button to add a checkmark <X>

to [Low level format], then select

[OK].

3 Formatting the Card

When the card is formatted, all images and data on the card will be

erased. Even protected images will be erased, so make sure there is

nothing you need to keep. If necessary, transfer the images and data to

a computer, etc. before formatting the card.

The card capacity displayed on the card format screen may be smaller

than the capacity indicated on the card.

This device incorporates exFAT technology licensed from Microsoft.

3 Formatting the Card

The card is new.

The card was formatted by a different camera or a computer.

The card is full of images or data.

A card-related error is displayed (p.567).

Card’s file formats

SD/SDHC cards will be formatted in FAT32. SDXC cards will be

formatted in exFAT.

When shooting a movie with a card formatted in exFAT, the movie

will be recorded in a single file (instead of being split into multiple

files) even if it exceeds 4 GB. (The movie file will exceed 4 GB.)

Format the card in the following cases:

Low-level Formatting

Perform low-level formatting if the card’s writing or reading speed

seems slow or if you want to totally erase the data on the card.

Since low-level formatting will format all recordable sectors on the

card, the formatting will take longer than normal formatting.

You can stop the low-level formatting by selecting [Cancel]. Even in

this case, normal formatting will already be complete and you can use

the card as usual.

3 Formatting the Card

If you format an SDXC card with this camera and then insert it into

another camera, an error may be displayed and the card may become

unusable. Certain computer operating systems or card readers may not

recognize a card formatted in exFAT.

When the card is formatted or data is erased, only the file management

information is changed. The actual data is not completely erased. Be

aware of this when selling or discarding the card. When discarding the

card, perform low-level formatting or destroy the card physically to

prevent personal data from being leaked.

You can prevent the beeper from sounding when focus is achieved,

during self-timer shooting, and during touch operations.

1Select [Beep].

Under the [54] tab, select [Beep],

then press <0>.

2Select [Disable].

Select [Disable], then press <0>.

The beeper will not sound.

If [Touch ] is selected, the beeper

will be silent only for touch

operations.

To save battery power, the camera turns off automatically after a set

time of idle operation elapses. The default setting is 1 min., but this

setting can be changed. If you do not want the camera to turn off

automatically, set this to [Disable].

After the power turns off, you can turn on the camera again by pressing

the shutter button or other buttons.

1Select [Auto power off].

Under the [52] tab, select [Auto

power off], then press <0>.

2Set the desired time.

Select the desired setting, then press

<0>.

Before You Start

3 Disabling the Beeper

3 Setting the Power-off Time/Auto Power Off

Even if [Disable] is set, the LCD monitor will turn off automatically after

approx. 30 min. to save power. (The camera’s power does not turn off.)

Before You Start

You can set how long the image is displayed on the LCD monitor

immediately after shooting. To keep the captured image displayed, set

[Hold]. To not have the captured image displayed, set [Off].

1Select [Image review].

Under the [z1] tab, select [Image

review], then press <0>.

2Set the desired time.

Select the desired setting, then press

<0>.

The Quick Control screen (p.61) or electronic level (p.80) can be set to

be displayed or not when you press the shutter button halfway during

viewfinder shooting.

1Select [LCD off/on btn].

Under the [52] tab, select [LCD off/

on btn], then press <0>.

2Set the desired setting.

Select the desired setting, then press

<0>.

[Remains on]: The LCD monitor display does not turn off even

when you press the shutter button halfway. To turn

off the LCD monitor, press the button.

[Shutter btn.]: When you press the shutter button halfway, the LCD

monitor display turns off. When you let go of the

shutter button, the display turns on.

3 Setting the Image Review Time

3 Turning the LCD Monitor Off/On

If [Hold] is set, the image will be displayed until the auto power off time

elapses.

Before You Start

The camera’s shooting function settings and menu settings can be

reverted to their defaults.

1Select [Clear all camera settings].

Under the [55] tab, select [Clear all

camera settings], then press <0>.

2Select [OK].

The camera settings will be reset to

the default settings shown on pages

76-78.

3 Reverting the Camera to the Default SettingsN

For how to clear all the Custom Function settings, see page 468.

Before You Start

Shooting Function Settings Image Recording Settings

AF operation One-Shot AF Image quality 73

AF area selection

mode

Automatic

selection AF

Aspect ratio 3:2

Picture Style Auto

Lens electronic

Disable after One-

Shot AF

Auto Lighting

Optimizer Standard

Metering mode q (Evaluative

metering)

Lens aberration correction

Peripheral

illumination

correction

Enable

zISO speed settings

ISO speed Auto

ISO speed range Minimum: 100

Maximum: 40000

Chromatic

aberration

correction

Enable

Auto range Minimum: 100

Maximum: 12800 Distortion

correction Disable

Minimum shutter

speed for auto Auto Diffraction

correction Enable

Drive mode u

(Single shooting)

Exposure

compensation/AEB

Canceled White balance Q (Ambience

priority)

Flash exposure

compensation Canceled Custom White

Balance Canceled

Multiple exposure Disable White balance shift Canceled

HDR mode Disable HDR White balance

bracketing Canceled

Interval timer Disable

Bulb timer Disable Color space sRGB

Anti-flicker shooting

Disable Long Exposure

Noise Reduction Disable

Mirror lockup Disable

Viewfinder display High ISO speed

noise reduction Standard

Electronic level Hide

Grid display Hide Highlight tone

priority Disable

Show/hide in

viewfinder

Only flicker

detection selected File numbering Continuous

Custom Functions Unchanged

Dust Delete Data

Erased

External Speedlite control

Flash firing Enable

E-TTL II flash

metering

Evaluative flash

metering

Flash sync.

speed in Av mode

Auto

Before You Start

Camera Settings Live View Shooting Settings

Image review time 2 sec. Live View shooting Enable

Release shutter

without card Enable AF operation One-Shot AF

AF method u+Tracking

Image jump w/6e (10 images) Touch Shutter Disable

Highlight alert Disable Metering timer 8 sec.

AF point display Disable Grid display Hide

Playback grid Off Exposure simulation Enable

Histogram display Brightness Silent LV shooting Mode 1

Magnification

(Approx.)

2x (magnify

from center)

Control over HDMI Disable

Vertical image auto

rotation OnzD

Wireless communication settings

Wi-Fi Disable

Bluetooth function Disable

Auto power off 1 min.

LCD brightness

LCD off/on btn Remains on

Date/Time/Zone Unchanged

Language Unchanged

GPS Disable

Video system Unchanged

Shooting mode guide Enable

Feature guide Enable

Help text size Small

Touch control Standard

Beep Enable

Auto cleaning Enable

zbutton display

options Select both

zbutton LV display

options Unchanged

Multi function lock 5 (Quick

Control Dial)

Custom shooting mode

Unchanged

Configure: MY MENU Unchanged

Menu display Normal display

Before You Start

Movie Shooting Settings

Movie recording

size

NTSC:

L6X

PAL:L5X

Movie Servo AF Enable

AF method u+Tracking

Sound recording Auto Movie Servo AF

track sensitivity 0

Wind filter Auto

Attenuator Disable Movie Servo AF Speed

kISO speed settings When active Always on

ISO speed Auto AF speed 0 (Standard)

ISO speed

range

Minimum: 100

Maximum: 25600

Metering timer 8 sec.

Grid display Hide

ISO Auto Maximum 25600 V button

function /-

a ISO Auto Maximum 12800

Video snapshot Disable

Time-lapse

movie Disable

Movie digital IS Disable

Remote control

shooting Disable

You can display a grid in the viewfinder to help you check the camera tilt

or compose the shot.

1Select [Viewfinder display].

Under the [52] tab, select

[Viewfinder display], then press

<0>.

2Select [Grid display].

3Select [Show].

When you exit the menu, the grid will

appear in the viewfinder.

Displaying the Grid in the Viewfinder

You can display a grid on the LCD monitor during Live View shooting and

before you start shooting a movie (p.302, 377).

If the [52: Viewfinder display] setting is changed from the default, there

will be an asterisk “*” on the right edge of [52: Viewfinder display].

You can display the electronic level on the LCD monitor and in the

viewfinder to help you correct the camera tilt.

1Press the button.

Each time you press the

button, the screen display will

change.

Display the electronic level.

If the electronic level does not

appear, set [54: z button display

options] so that the electronic level

can be displayed (p.84).

2Check the camera’s tilt.

The horizontal and vertical tilts are

displayed in 1° increments.

When the red line turns green, it

indicates that the tilt is almost

corrected.

3 Displaying the Electronic Level

Displaying the Electronic Level on the LCD Monitor

Vertical

Horizontal

Even when the tilt is corrected, there may be a margin of error of approx.

±1°.



If the camera is very tilted, the electronic level’s margin of error will be larger.

During Live View shooting and before movie shooting, you can also display

the electronic level as described above (except with u+Tracking).

3 Displaying the Electronic Level

An electronic level can be displayed on the upper part of the viewfinder.

Since this indicator is displayed during shooting, you can take the

picture while checking the camera tilt.

1Select [Viewfinder display].

Under the [52] tab, select

[Viewfinder display], then press

<0>.

2Select [Electronic level].

3Select [Show].

4Press the shutter button halfway.

The electronic level will be displayed

on the upper part of the viewfinder.

This level also works with vertical

shooting.

3 Displaying the Electronic Level in the Viewfinder

1° or greater

4°

1°

or greater

7.5°

7°

Even when the tilt is corrected, there may be a margin of error of approx. ±1°.

If the [52: Viewfinder display] setting is changed from the default, there

will be an asterisk “*” on the right edge of [52: Viewfinder display].

The shooting function settings (Battery level, Shooting mode, AF

operation, Image quality (image type), Drive mode, Metering mode,

Flicker detection) can be displayed in the viewfinder.

By default, only Flicker detection is checkmarked [X].

1Select [Viewfinder display].

Under the [52] tab, select

[Viewfinder display], then press

<0>.

2Select [Show/hide in viewfinder].

3Checkmark [X] the information to

be displayed.

Select the information to display and

press <0> to add a checkmark [X].

Repeat this procedure to add a

checkmark [X] to all the information

to be displayed. Then select [OK].

When you exit the menu, the

checkmarked information will appear

in the viewfinder (p.31).

Setting the Viewfinder Information Display

3 Setting the Viewfinder Information DisplayN

If no card is inserted in the camera, the image-recording quality (image type:

JPEG/RAW) will not be displayed.

Regardless of whether it is checkmarked, the respective information will

appear in the viewfinder in the following cases: when you change the

shooting mode, when you press the <f>, <R>, or <q> button,

when you operate the lens’s focus mode switch, and when a lens

equipped with the electronic manual focusing function is used and the

AF and MF switches as the lens focusing ring is turned (p.155).

Even if [Battery] is not checkmarked, the battery check icon ( / )

will be displayed in the viewfinder when the battery level is low.

If the [52: Viewfinder display] setting is changed from the default, there

will be an asterisk “*” on the right edge of [52: Viewfinder display].

During viewfinder shooting, when you

press the button with the

camera being ready to shoot, you can

toggle the display between the electronic

level (p.80) and Quick Control screen

(p.86).

[z button display options] under the

[54] tab enables you to select the

options displayed when the

button is pressed.

Select the desired display option,

then press <0> to add a checkmark

[X].

Then select [OK] to register the

setting.

B Button Functions

Electronic level

Quick Control screen

B Button Functions

If you turn off the power with the electronic level or Quick Control screen

displayed, the same screen will be displayed when you turn on the power

again. To cancel this function, press the button a number of

times until the screen is blank, then turn off the power switch.

You cannot remove the checkmarks from both items.

Even if you set the [Electronic level] not to be displayed, it will still be

displayed for Live View shooting and movie shooting by pressing the

button. Note that depending on the setting for [z5: AF

method], electronic level may not be displayed.

Pressing the <Q> button enables Quick Control (p.61).

During Live View shooting or movie shooting, the items displayed under

the [54] tab will change to [z button LV display options] (p.298).

B Button Functions

* The display will show only the settings currently applied.

Quick Control Screen

AE lock

Highlight tone priority

ISO speed

Flash exposure

compensation

Custom Controls

Image-recording

quality

Possible shots/

Auto cleaning

Max. burst/Number of

remaining multiple exposures

White balance

bracketing

Aperture

Shutter speed

Shooting modes

Exposure compensation

White balance

correction

Picture Style

AF operation

Quick Control icon

Battery level

Wi-Fi signal strength/

Eye-Fi card transmission status

GPS acquisition status

Drive mode

Metering mode

White balance

Exposure level

indicator

Logging function

AF Area selection mode/

AF point selection

Wi-Fi function

Bluetooth function

Auto Lighting Optimizer

Multiple exposures/HDR/

Multi Shot Noise Reduction

B Button Functions

When you press the <f>, <R>, , <q>, <S>, or

button, the setting screen appears and you can set it with <6>, <5>,

<9>, or button.

Button Operations with Quick Control Screen Displayed

AF operation Drive mode

Metering modeISO speed

AF Area / AF point selection

If nothing is displayed even if you press a button, press the button

to display the electronic level or Quick Control screen. Then press any of the

above buttons to display the respective screen.

By setting the <R> switch upward, you can prevent the settings

from being changed by accidentally operating the Main Dial, Quick

Control Dial, or Multi-controller or by inadvertently tapping on the touch

screen.

For details on the Multi function lock switch, see page 59.

1Select [Multi function lock].

Under the [54] tab, select [Multi

function lock], then press <0>.

2Add a checkmark [X] to the

camera control to be locked.

Select a camera control and press

<0> to add a checkmark [X].

Select [OK].

When the <R> switch is set

upward, the checkmarked [X]

camera controls will be locked.

R Setting the Multi Function Lock

When the <R> switch is set upward and you try to operate one of

the locked camera controls, <L> will be displayed in the viewfinder and

on the LCD panel. On the Quick Control screen (p.61), [LOCK] will be

displayed. During Live View or movie shooting, [LOCK] will be displayed

on the shooting screen.

By default, the <5> dial will be locked when the multi function lock

switch is in the lock position.

In Basic Zone modes, only [hTouch control] is settable.

You can operate the Quick Control (p.61) regardless of the Multi function

lock setting.

If it is changed from the default setting, an asterisk “*” will be displayed

on the right edge of [54: Multi function lock].

When you turn the Mode Dial to select a shooting mode, a brief

description (shooting mode guide) of the shooting mode can be

displayed on the screen. During viewfinder shooting, the mode guide

appears when the Quick Control screen or electronic level is displayed.

By default, it is set to [Enable].

1Select [Mode guide].

Under the [53] tab, select [Mode

guide], then press <0>.

2Select [Enable].

If you do not want the Mode guide to

appear, select [Disable].

3Turn the Mode Dial.

A brief description of the selected

shooting mode will appear.

4Press the <X> key.

A more detailed description will

appear.

To turn off the mode guide, press

<0> or press the shutter button

halfway.

Setting the Shooting Mode Guide

In the <8> mode, press <0> in step 3 or 4, then select the shooting

mode.

When using Quick Control, a brief description (feature guide) of the

selected function can be displayed. The Feature guide can be displayed

during viewfinder shooting, Live View shooting, and movie shooting. By

default, it is set to [Enable].

1Select [Feature guide].

Under the [53] tab, select [Feature

guide], then press <0>.

2Select [Enable].

If you do not want the Feature guide

to appear, select [Disable].

3With the camera ready to shoot,

press the <Q> button.

Exit the menu and press the <Q>

button in the shooting-ready state.

When you press <9> to select an

item, the Feature guide will appear

after a moment.

Setting the Feature Guide

Viewfinder shooting Live View/Movie shooting

With certain functions, the feature guide is displayed also in the

secondary screen.

Tap on the Feature guide to turn it off.

When [zHelp] is displayed at the bottom of the menu screen, the

feature’s description (Help) can be displayed. Press the button

to display the Help. Press it again to turn off the Help display. If the Help

fills more than one screen, a scroll bar will appear on the right edge. In

such a case, press <W> <X> keys or turn the <5> dial to scroll.

Example: [z3: High ISO speed NR]

Example: [54: Multi function lock]

Example: [8C.Fn II-1: Tracking sensitivity]

Help



Scroll bar



Help

You can select the text size for the Help display. By default, it is set to

[Small].

1Select [Help text size].

Under the [53] tab, select [Help text

size], then press <0>.

2Set the text size.

Select [Small] or [Standard], then

press <0>.

Example: [z3: High ISO speed NR]

Help Display Text Size

Text size: Small Text size: Standard

Basic Shooting

This chapter describes how to use the Basic Zone

modes on the Mode Dial for best results.

With Basic Zone modes, all you do is point and shoot, and the

camera sets everything automatically (p.127, 526). Also,

because advanced shooting function settings cannot be

changed, you can enjoy shooting photographs without

worrying about botched pictures due to misoperation.

Before Shooting in the <8> Mode

When you use the <8> mode for shooting with the LCD

monitor turned off, press the <Q> button or button to

check which shooting mode is set, then start shooting.

<A> is a fully automatic mode. The camera analyzes the scene

and sets the optimum settings automatically. It can also adjust focus

automatically on either the still or moving subject by detecting the

motion of the subject (p.97).

1Set the Mode Dial to <A>.

Turn the Mode Dial while holding

down the lock release button at the

center.

When the shooting mode description

appears on the LCD monitor, press

<0> to hide it (p.89).

2Aim the Area AF frame over the

subject.

All the AF points will be used to focus,

and the camera will basically focus on

the closest object.

Aiming the center of the Area AF

frame over the subject will make

focusing easier.

3Focus on the subject.

Press the shutter button halfway. The

lens elements will shift to focus.

When achieving focus, the AF point

that has achieved focus will be

displayed. At the same time, the

beeper will sound and the focus

indicator <o> in the viewfinder will

light up.

In low light, the AF point(s) will light

up briefly in red.

Fully Automatic Shooting (Scene Intelligent Auto)

Area AF frame

Focus indicator

A Fully Automatic Shooting (Scene Intelligent Auto)

4Take the picture.

Press the shutter button completely to

take the picture.

The captured image will be displayed

for approx. 2 sec. on the LCD

monitor.

The focus indicator <o> blinks and focus is not achieved.

Aim the Area AF frame over an area with good contrast, then press

the shutter button halfway (p.56). If you are too close to the subject,

move away and shoot again.

Even when focus is achieved, the AF points do not light up in

red.

The AF points light up in red only when focus is achieved in low light

or with a dark subject.

Multiple AF points light up simultaneously.

Focus has been achieved at all those points. You can take the

picture as long as an AF point covering the target subject is lighting

up.

FAQ

The <A> mode makes the colors look more impressive in nature,

outdoor, and sunset scenes. If you do not obtain the desired color tones,

change the mode to a Creative Zone mode (p.36) and select a Picture

Style other than <D>, then shoot again (p.176).

By pressing the <Q> button, you can use Quick Control for [Drive

mode] and [AF point selection]. For the setting procedures, refer to

those for the <C> mode described on pages 100-104.

A Fully Automatic Shooting (Scene Intelligent Auto)

The beeper continues to beep softly. (The focus indicator <o>

does not light up.)

It indicates that the camera is focusing continuously on a moving

subject. (The focus indicator <o> does not light up.) You can take

sharp pictures of a moving subject.

Note that focus lock (p.97) will not work in this case.

Pressing the shutter button halfway does not focus the subject.

If the focus mode switch on the lens is set to <MF> (manual focus),

set it to <AF> (autofocus).

The shutter speed display is blinking.

Since it is too dark, taking the picture may result in a blurred subject

due to camera shake. Using a tripod or a Canon EX-series Speedlite

(sold separately, p.278) is recommended.

When the external flash was used, the bottom part of the

picture came out unnaturally dark.

If a hood is attached to the lens, it may obstruct the flash light. If the

subject is close, detach the hood before taking the picture with flash.

Silent single shooting (p.157), Single shooting in Live View shooting,

etc. are effective. Mirror lockup (p.265) is also effective when the

shooting mode is set to one of the Creative Zone modes.

For continuous shooting, using Silent continuous shooting (p.157) or

Live View continuous shooting is effective.

Use a sturdy tripod that can bear the weight of the shooting

equipment. Mount the camera securely on the tripod.

Using a remote switch or a remote controller is recommended

(p.271, 273).

Minimizing Blurred Photos

Depending on the scene, positioning the subject toward the left or right to

include a balanced background will result in a picture with better perspective.

In the <A> mode, pressing the shutter button halfway to focus on a

still subject will lock the focus on that subject. Recompose the shot

while keeping the shutter button pressed halfway, and then press the

shutter button completely to take the picture. This is called “focus lock”.

Focus lock is also possible in other Basic Zone modes (except in these

<8> modes: <5> <C> <r>).

In the <A>

mode, if the subject moves (distance to camera changes)

during or after focusing, AI Servo AF will take effect to focus on the

subject continuously. (The beeper will continue beeping softly.) As long

as you keep the Area AF frame positioned over the subject while

pressing the shutter button halfway, focusing will be continuous. At the

decisive moment, press the shutter button completely to take the picture.

Full Auto Techniques (Scene Intelligent Auto)

Recomposing the Shot

Shooting a Moving Subject

A Full Auto Techniques (Scene Intelligent Auto)

You can shoot while viewing the image on the LCD monitor. This is

called “Live View shooting”. For details, see page 289.

1Set the Live View shooting/Movie

shooting switch to <A>.

2Display the Live View image on

the LCD monitor.

Press the <0> button.

The Live View image will appear on

the LCD monitor.

3Focus on the subject.

Press the shutter button halfway to

focus.

When focus is achieved, the AF point

will turn green and the beeper will

sound.

4Take the picture.

Press the shutter button completely.

The picture is taken and the captured

image is displayed on the LCD

monitor.

When the playback display ends, the

camera will return to Live View

shooting automatically.

Press the <0> button to exit the

Live View shooting.

A Live View Shooting

A Full Auto Techniques (Scene Intelligent Auto)

You can also rotate the LCD monitor to shoot at different angles. For

details, see page 46.

Normal angle Low angle High angle

100

<C> is a fully-automatic shooting mode that is a step more advanced

from <A>. You can first adjust the photo’s ambience, background blur,

etc. before shooting.

By pressing the <Q> button, you can set 1. Ambience-based shots, 2.

Background blur setting, 3. Drive mode, and 4. AF point selection with

Quick Control.

* <C> stands for Creative Auto.

1Set the Mode Dial to <C>.

2Press the <Q> button (7).

The Quick Control screen (p.126) will

appear.

3Set the desired functions.

Press the <W> <X> or <Y> <Z>

keys to select a function.

The settings of the selected function

and Feature guide (p.90) will appear.

For the setting procedure and details

on each function, see pages 101-104.

4Take the picture.

Press the shutter button completely to

take the picture.

When you use the Live View function

to see the resulting effects on the

LCD monitor while shooting, see

page 105.

C Creative Auto Shooting

101

C Creative Auto Shooting

(1) Ambience-based shots

You can select and shoot with the

ambience you want to convey in your

images. Turn the <6> or <5> dial to

select the ambience.

With the (1) item selected, press <0>

to display the screen shown on the left.

You can then select the ambience from

the displayed list. Press the <W> <X>

keys to select the desired ambience.

Note that you can preview the resulting effect of “Ambience-based

shots” before shooting by pressing the <0> button and switching to

Live View shooting (p.105).

(1) Ambience-based

shots

(2) Background

blur

Battery level

Possible shots

Image-recording quality

(4) AF point selection

(3) Drive mode

Ambience Ambience Effect

g Ambience: Standard No setting

h Vivid Low / Standard / Strong

i Soft Low / Standard / Strong

j Warm Low / Standard / Strong

k Intense Low / Standard / Strong

l Cool Low / Standard / Strong

m Brighter Low / Medium / High

n Darker Low / Medium / High

o Monochrome Blue / B/W / Sepia

C Creative Auto Shooting

102

gAmbience: Standard

This provides standard image characteristics.

hVivid

The subject looks crisp, sharp and vivid. Effective for making the

picture look more impressive than with [g Ambience: Standard].

iSoft

The subject is less defined, giving the picture a softer and daintier

look. Good for portraits, pets, flowers, etc.

jWarm

The subject is less defined with a warmer color cast, giving the

picture a warmer and gentler look. Good for portraits, pets, and other

subjects to which you want to give a warm look.

kIntense

While the overall brightness is slightly lowered, the subject is

emphasized for a more intense feeling in the picture. Effective for

making the human or living subject stand out more.

lCool

The overall brightness is slightly lowered with a cooler color cast in

the picture. Effective for making a subject in the shade look more

calm and impressive.

mBrighter

The picture looks brighter.

nDarker

The picture looks darker.

oMonochrome

The picture becomes monochrome. You can select the monochrome

color to be blue, black and white, or sepia.

Ambience Settings

103

C Creative Auto Shooting

(2) Background blur

You can adjust the degree of background

blur. Turn the <6> or <5> dial to set

the effect.

With the (2) item on page 101 selected,

press <0> to display the screen shown

on the left. While looking at the gauge,

you can turn the <6> or <5> dial to

set the degree.

Note that you can preview the resulting effect of “Background blur”

before shooting by pressing the <0> button and switching to Live

View shooting (p.106).

OFF : The camera sets the aperture automatically to match the

brightness. You can take the picture with the degree of

background blur automatically set by the camera.

Blurred : The further left (Blurred end) you set the orange bar, the

more blurred the background of the subject in the picture will

be.

Sharp : The further right (Sharp end) you set the orange bar, the

sharper the background of the subject in the picture will be.

Depending on the lens used and shooting conditions, the background in

the picture may not look as blurred or sharp as expected.

This function cannot be set if you use an external flash.

Depending on the speed of the lens used (open aperture f/number),

certain setting positions may not be selectable.

If you want to blur the background, see “Shooting Tips” for “Shooting

Portraits” on page 109 for shooting.

C Creative Auto Shooting

104

(3) Drive mode

You can select single shooting,

continuous shooting, or self-timer. Turn

the <6> or <5> dial to select the

desired mode.

Pressing <0> will display the screen

shown on the left. Turn the <6> dial to

select the desired setting.

For drive modes, see page 156.

(4) AF point selection

Turn the <6> or <5> dial to select the

desired AF Area selection mode.

Pressing <0> will display the screen

shown on the left. You can then select

the AF Area selection mode and AF

point.

If you then press the button in this status, you can select the AF

Area selection mode. When the AF Area selection mode is set to other

than [Auto selection AF], you can use <9> to select the AF point or

zone.

For AF area selection modes, see pages 134-136. For AF point

selection, see page 137.

105

C Creative Auto Shooting

In the <C> mode, when you set the [Ambience-based shots] or

[Background blur], shooting while checking the resulting effect on the

Live View image is recommended.

1Display the Live View image.

Set the Live View/Movie shooting

switch to <A>, then press the <0>

button.

Press the shutter button halfway, then

focus on the subject.

2Press the <Q> button.

The Quick Control screen will appear

(7).

3Select the desired ambience.

Press the <W> <X> keys to select

[Ambience-based shots].

Turn the <6> or <5> dial to select

the ambience (p.101).

The LCD monitor will display how the

image will look with the selected

ambience.

4Set the ambience effect.

Press the <W> <X> keys to select

[Effect].

Turn the <6> or <5> dial to select

the desired degree or setting of the

effect.

Using Effect Preview in Live View Shooting

C Creative Auto Shooting

106

5Set [Background Blur].

Press the <Q> button to exit the

Quick Control.

Turn the <6> or <5> dial to adjust

the blur while checking it on the

screen (p.103). While you adjust it,

[Simulating blur] will be displayed.

6Take the picture.

Press the shutter button completely.

To return to viewfinder shooting,

press the <0> button to exit Live

View shooting.

The Live View image shown with the ambience setting applied will not

look exactly the same as the captured image.

If the <g> icon (p.293) blinks during [Simulating blur], the simulated

image displayed may have more noise or may be darker than the actual

image being recorded.

If you use an external flash, the ambience effect may look less

pronounced.

In bright outdoors, the Live View image you see on the LCD monitor may

not have the same brightness or ambience as the actual image captured.

Set the brightness of the LCD monitor to the level “4” under [52: LCD

brightness] to avoid ambient brightness as much as possible when

checking the resulting effect.

If you change the shooting mode or turn the power switch to <2>, the

[Ambience], [Background blur], [Drive mode], and [AF point

selection] settings will revert to their default settings.

<8> Mode [Brightness] and [Color tone]

When the Mode Dial is set to the <8> mode, you can adjust the

[Brightness] and [Color tone] with the shooting mode. In step 3, when you

select [Brightness] or [Color tone], you can adjust the [Brightness] to

Darker/Brighter (3 steps each) or the [Color tone] to Cool tone/Warm tone

(2 steps each) while watching the Live View image.

107

The camera will automatically choose the appropriate settings when

you select a shooting mode for your subject or scene.

* <8> stands for Special Scene.

1Set the Mode Dial to <8>.

2Press the <Q> button (7).

The Quick Control screen will appear.

3Select [Choose scene].

Press the <W> <X> or <Y> <Z>

keys to select [Choose scene], then

press <0>.

4Select a shooting mode.

Press the <W> <X> keys to select

the shooting mode, then press <0>.

You can also select the shooting

mode by turning the <6> or <5>

dial.

8: Special Scene Mode

Cautions for the shooting modes are on page 122. Read the cautions before

shooting.

8: Special Scene Mode

108

SCN Modes

2: Portrait (p.109) q: Group Photo

(p.110)

3: Landscape (p.111)

5: Sports (p.112) C: Kids (p.113) r: Panning (p.114)

4: Close-up (p.116) P: Food (p.117) y: Candlelight (p.118)

6: Night Portrait

(p.119)

F: Handheld Night

Scene (p.120)

G: HDR Backlight

Control (p.121)

109

The <2> (Portrait) mode blurs the background to make the human

subject stand out. It also makes skin tones and hair look softer.

Select the location where the distance between the subject and

the background is the farthest.

The further the distance between the subject and background, the

more blurred the background will look. The subject will also stand

out better against an uncluttered dark background.

Use a telephoto lens.

If you have a zoom lens, use the telephoto end to fill the frame with

the subject from the waist up. Move in closer if necessary.

Focus on the face.

Check that the AF point covering the face lights up. For close-ups of

the face, focus on the eyes.

8: 2 Shooting Portraits

Shooting Tips

The default setting is (Low-speed continuous shooting). If you keep

holding down the shutter button, you can shoot continuously (max. approx.

3.0 shots/sec.) to capture changes in the subject’s facial expression and

pose.

110

Use the <q> (Group Photo) mode to shoot group photos. You can take

a picture in which both the people in the front and people in the back are

all in focus.

Use a wide-angle lens.

When using a zoom lens, use the wide-angle end to make it easy to

get all the people in the group in focus at once, from the front row to

the back. Also, if you place a little distance between the camera and

the subjects (so that the subjects’ entire bodies are in the shot), the

focus range increases in depth.

Take multiple shots of the group.

It is recommended to shoot multiple photos in case some people

close their eyes.

Shooting Group Photos

Shooting Tips

See the cautions on page 122.

When shooting indoors or in low-light, hold the camera steady or use a

tripod to prevent camera shake.

By pressing the <Q> button and selecting [Brightness], you can adjust

the image brightness.

111

Use the <3> (Landscape) mode for expansive scenery or to have

everything in focus from near to far. For vivid blues and greens, and

very sharp and crisp images.

With a zoom lens, use the wide-angle end.

When using a zoom lens, set the lens to the wide-angle end to make

the objects near and far in focus. It also adds breadth to landscapes.

Shooting night scenes.

Shooting with <3> while handholding the camera may cause

camera shake. Using a tripod is recommended.

8: 3 Shooting Landscapes

Shooting Tips

See the cautions on page 122.

112

Use the <5> (Sports) mode to shoot a moving subject, such as a

running person or a moving vehicle.

Use a telephoto lens.

Use of a telephoto lens is recommended to enable shooting from a

distance.

Track the subject with the Area AF frame.

After aiming the Area AF frame over the subject, press the shutter

button halfway to start focusing. During autofocusing, the beeper will

continue beeping softly. If focus cannot be achieved, the focus

indicator <o> will blink.

Shoot continuously.

The default setting is <o> (High-speed continuous shooting). At

the decisive moment, press the shutter button completely to take the

picture. If you keep holding down the shutter button, you can shoot

continuously while maintaining autofocusing to capture changes in

the subject’s movement. (Viewfinder shooting: max. approx. 6.5

shots/sec., Live View shooting: max. approx. 4.0 shots/sec.)

8: 5 Shooting Moving Subjects

Shooting Tips

See the cautions on page 122.

113

To photograph the children running around, use <C> (Kids). Skin tones

will look healthy.

Track the subject with the Area AF frame.

After aiming the Area AF frame over the subject, press the shutter

button halfway to start focusing. During autofocusing, the beeper will

continue beeping softly. If focus cannot be achieved, the focus

indicator <o> will blink.

Shoot continuously.

The default setting is <o> (High-speed continuous shooting). At

the decisive moment, press the shutter button completely to take the

picture. If you keep holding down the shutter button, you can shoot

continuously while maintaining autofocusing to capture changes in

the subject’s facial expression and movement. (Viewfinder shooting:

max. approx. 6.5 shots/sec., Live View shooting: max. approx. 4.0

shots/sec.)

8: C Photographing Children

Shooting Tips

See the cautions on page 122.

114

If you want to take a picture with the feel of speed and a blurred motion

effect on the subject’s background, use <r> (Panning). With Live

View shooting, if you use a lens supporting the <r> mode, subject

blur is detected, corrected, and reduced.

Turn the camera to follow the moving subject.

When shooting, turn the camera smoothly as you track the moving

subject. Aim the AF point over the part of the moving subject where

you want to focus, then press the shutter button halfway and keep

holding it down as you turn the camera to match the subject’s speed

and movement. Press the shutter button completely while moving

the camera to take the picture. Keep tracking the subject with the

camera.

Panning

Shooting Tips

115

8: r Panning

Set the level of background motion blur.

With [Effect], you can set the level of background motion blur. The

[Max] setting will set a slower shutter speed to increase the

background motion blur around the subject. If the subject blur is

noticeable, set [Effect] to [Med] or [Min] to reduce the blur.

See the cautions on page 122.

To see which lenses support the <r> mode, refer to the Canon Web

site.

When using a lens supporting the <r> mode during Live View

shooting, subject blur can be corrected and the shutter speed will be set

automatically according to the setting of [Effect], regardless of the lens’s

Image Stabilizer setting.

For viewfinder shooting, the AF Area selection mode’s default setting is

Large Zone AF with the “Center Zone” selected.

With Live View shooting, [z2: AF method] will be set automatically to

[Smooth zone].

To prevent camera shake, it is recommended that you hold the camera

with both hands, tighten your arms close to your body, and track the

subject’s movement smoothly to take pictures.

This effect is most effective with trains, cars, etc. that move at a constant

speed in one direction.



Taking test shots or checking the image by playing it back immediately

after shooting is recommended.

By default, (Low-speed continuous shooting) is set. When the

decisive moment comes, press the shutter button completely. If you keep

holding down the shutter button while moving the camera to follow the

subject movement, you can shoot continuously while maintaining

autofocusing (Maximum approx. 4.3 shots/sec. with viewfinder shooting

and approx. 2.7 shots/sec. with Live View shooting (at 1/30 sec. shutter

speed with maximum aperture).)

116

When you want to shoot flowers or small things up close, use the <4>

(Close-up) mode. To make small things appear much larger, use a

macro lens (sold separately).

Use a simple background.

A simple background makes small objects such as flowers stand out

better.

Move in as close as possible to the subject.

Check the lens for its minimum focusing distance. The lens minimum

focusing distance is measured from the <V> (focal plane) mark on

the top of the camera to the subject. If you are too close to the

subject and focus cannot be achieved, the focus indicator <o> will

blink.

With a zoom lens, use the telephoto end.

If you have a zoom lens, using the telephoto end will make the

subject look larger.

8: 4 Shooting Close-ups

Shooting Tips

117

When you want to take pictures of food, use (Food). The photo will

look bright and appetizing. Also, depending on the light source, the

reddish tinge will be suppressed in the pictures taken under tungsten

lights, etc.

Change the color tone.

You can change [Color tone]. To increase the food’s reddish tinge,

set it toward [Warm]. Set it toward [Cool] if it looks too red.

8: P Shooting Food

Shooting Tips

See the cautions on page 123.

118

When you want to photograph a person in candlelight, use <y>

(Candlelight). The atmosphere of candlelight is reflected in the color

tones of the picture.

Use the center AF point to focus.

Aim the center AF point in the viewfinder on the subject, then shoot.

Prevent camera shake if the numeric display (shutter speed) in

the viewfinder blinks.

Under low light, the viewfinder’s shutter speed display will blink.

Hold the camera steady or use a tripod. When using a zoom lens,

you can reduce the blur caused by camera shake by setting the lens

to the wide-angle end.

Change the color tone.

You can change [Color tone]. To increase the candlelight’s reddish

tinge, set it toward [Warm]. Set it toward [Cool] if it looks too red.

8: y Shooting Candlelight Portraits

Shooting Tips

Live View shooting is not possible.

See the cautions on page 123.

119

When you want to photograph people at night and obtain a natural-

looking night scene in the background, use the <6> (Night Portrait)

mode. Note that an external Speedlite is required for shooting.

Using a tripod is recommended.

Use a wide-angle lens and a tripod.

When using a zoom lens, use the wide-angle end to obtain a wide

night view. Also, since camera shake is prone to occur with

handheld shooting, use a tripod.

Check the subject’s brightness.

Note that it is recommended to play back the captured image on

location to check the image brightness. If the subject looks dark,

move nearer and shoot again.

Also shoot in other shooting modes.

Since camera shake is prone to occur with night shots, shooting also

with <A> and <F> is recommended.

8: 6

Shooting Night Portraits (With a Tripod)

Shooting Tips

See the cautions on page 124.

If you use the self-timer together with an external Speedlite, the self-timer

lamp will light up briefly after the picture is taken.

120

Using a tripod when shooting a night scene gives the best results.

However, the <F> (Handheld Night Scene) mode enables you to shoot

night scenes even while handholding the camera. In this shooting

mode, four shots are taken consecutively for each picture, and the

resulting one image with reduced camera shake is recorded.

Hold the camera firmly.

During shooting, hold the camera firmly and steadily. In this mode,

four shots are aligned and merged into a single image. However, if

there is significant misalignment in any of the four shots due to

camera shake, they may not align properly in the final image.

For portraits, use an external Speedlite.

If you are to include people in the picture, use an external Speedlite.

To take a nice portrait, the first shot will use flash. Tell the subject not

to move until all four consecutive shots are taken.

8: F

Shooting Night Scenes (Handheld)

Shooting Tips

See the cautions on page 124.

121

When shooting a scene having both the bright and dark areas, use the

<G> (HDR Backlight Control) mode. When you take one picture in this

mode, three consecutive shots are taken at different exposures. This

results in one image, with a wide tonal range, that has minimized the

clipped shadows caused by backlighting.

* HDR stands for High Dynamic Range.

Hold the camera firmly.

During shooting, hold the camera firmly and steadily. In this mode,

three shots are aligned and merged into a single image. However, if

there is significant misalignment in any of the three shots due to

camera shake, they may not align properly in the final image.

8: G Shooting Backlit Scenes

Shooting Tips

See the cautions on page 125.

122

Cautions for the <8> Modes

•<q> Group Photo

Since distortion correction is applied, the camera records an image area

narrower than the one seen through the viewfinder. (The image

periphery is slightly trimmed and the resolution looks slightly lowered.)

Also, during Live View shooting, the angle of view changes slightly.

Depending on the shooting conditions, focus may not be attained for

everyone from the front to the back of the image.

•<3> Landscape

If you are using an external Speedlite, the Speedlite will fire.

•<5> Sports

Under low light where camera shake tends to occur, the viewfinder’s

shutter speed display on the lower left will blink. Hold the camera steady

and shoot.

During Live View shooting, if the lens’s focus mode switch is set to <AF>,

you cannot select 41 or 61.

If you are using an external Speedlite, the Speedlite will fire.

•<C> Kids

During Live View shooting, if the lens’s focus mode switch is set to <AF>,

you cannot select 41 or 61.

During Live View shooting, using an external Speedlite will decrease the

continuous shooting speed. Note that even if the external Speedlite does

not fire, the continuous shooting speed will still decrease.

•<r> Panning

The shutter speed will become slower. Therefore, this mode is not

suitable for any shooting except for panning.

By default, is set. Note that <o> or <M> cannot be selected.

For Live View shooting, you cannot select 41 or 61.

External Speedlites cannot be used. (It will not fire.)

If you use Live View shooting with a lens supporting the <r> mode, the

Image Stabilizer effect of the lens will be reflected to the captured

images. However, you cannot see the effect in the Live View image

during shooting. (The Image Stabilizer function and subject blur

correction function are activated only at the moment the picture is taken,

regardless of the lens’s Image Stabilizer setting.)

123

•<r> Panning (continued)

If the lens does not support the <r> mode, subject blur will not be

corrected. However, the automatic shutter speed adjustment alone will

take effect according to the setting of [Effect].

When shooting under bright light such as a sunny summer day or when

shooting a slow subject, the set degree of panning effect may not be

obtained.

With Live View shooting and a lens supporting the <r> mode, subject

blur may not be corrected properly when shooting the following subjects

or under the following shooting conditions.

• Subjects with very low contrast.

• Subjects in low light.

• Strongly backlit or reflective subjects.

• Subjects with repetitive patterns.

• Subjects with less patterns or monotonous patterns.

• Subjects with reflections (images reflected in glass, etc.).

• Subjects smaller than the Zone AF frame.

• When there are multiple subjects moving within the Zone AF frame.

• Subjects moving in irregular directions or at irregular speeds.

• Subjects whose movements are partly irregular. (For example, the

vertical movement of a runner.)

• Subjects whose speed changes dramatically. (For example, right after

the start of movement or while turning along a curve.)

• When you move the camera too fast or too slow.

• When the camera’s movement does not match the subject’s

movement.

• Food

The warm color cast of subjects may fade.

When multiple light sources are included in the scene, the warm color

cast of the picture may not be reduced.

If you use an external Speedlite, [Color tone] will be set to Standard.

If there are people in the picture, the skin tone may not be reproduced

properly.

•<y> Candlelight

External Speedlites cannot be used. (It will not fire.)

If focus cannot be achieved with autofocus, use the EOS-dedicated

Speedlite’s AF-assist beam.

124

•<6> Night Portrait

Tell the subject to keep still even after the flash fires.

During Live View shooting, achieving focus may be difficult when the

face of the subject looks dark. In such a case, set the lens’s focus mode

switch to <MF> and focus manually.

When you shoot a night scene with Live View shooting, achieving focus

with AF may be difficult if point sources of light are found in the AF point.

In such a case, set the lens’s focus mode switch to <MF> and focus

manually.

The Live View image displayed will not look exactly the same as the

actual captured image.

•<F> Handheld Night Scene

Compared to other shooting modes, the image area will be smaller.

RAW image quality cannot be set.

When you shoot a night scene with Live View shooting, achieving focus

with AF may be difficult if point sources of light are found in the AF point.

In such a case, set the lens’s focus mode switch to <MF> and focus

manually (p.154).

The Live View image displayed will not look exactly the same as the

actual captured image.

If you use an external Speedlite and the subject is close, overexposure

may result.

If you use an external Speedlite for a night scene with limited lighting, the

shots may not align correctly. This may result in a blurry picture.

If you use an external Speedlite with a human subject close to the

background that is also illuminated by the flash, the shots may not align

correctly. This may result in a blurry picture. Unnatural shadows and

unsuitable colors may also appear.

Flash coverage angle with an external Speedlite:

• When using a Speedlite with automatic flash coverage setting, the

zoom position will be fixed to the wide (wide-angle) end regardless of

the lens’s zoom position.

• When using a Speedlite requiring manual flash coverage setting, set

the flash head to the normal position.

125

•<F> Handheld Night Scene (continued)

If you shoot a moving subject, the subject’s movement may leave

afterimages, or the surrounding area of the subject may become dark.

The image alignment may not function properly with repetitive patterns

(lattice, stripes, etc.), flat or single-tone images, or images significantly

misaligned due to camera shake.

It takes some time to record images to the card since they are merged

after shooting. During the processing of the images, “buSY” will be

displayed in the viewfinder and on the LCD panel, and you cannot take

another picture until the processing is complete.

•<G> HDR Backlight Control

Compared to other shooting modes, the image area will be smaller.

RAW image quality cannot be set.

External Speedlites cannot be used. (It will not fire.)

Note that the image may not be rendered with a smooth gradation and

may look irregular or have significant noise.

HDR Backlight Control may not be effective for excessively backlit

scenes or extremely high-contrast scenes.

When shooting subjects that are sufficiently bright as they are, for

example for normally lit scenes, the image may look unnatural due to the

HDR effect.

If you shoot a moving subject, the subject’s movement may leave

afterimages, or the surrounding area of the subject may become dark.

The image alignment may not function properly with repetitive patterns

(lattice, stripes, etc.), flat or single-tone images, or images significantly

misaligned due to camera shake.

It takes some time to record images to the card since they are merged

after shooting. During the image processing, “buSY” will be displayed in

the viewfinder and on the LCD panel, and you cannot take another

picture until the processing is complete.

126

In Basic Zone modes, pressing the <Q> button sets the items shown in

the tables on the next page with the Quick Control.

1Set the Mode Dial to a Basic Zone

mode.

2Press the <Q> button (7).

The Quick Control screen will appear.

3Set the desired function.

Press the <W> <X> or <Y> <Z>

keys to select a function.

The settings of the selected function

and Feature guide (p.90) will appear.

Turn the <6> or <5> dial to

change the setting.

You can also select it from a list by

selecting a function and pressing

<0>.

Q Quick Control

Example: <A> mode

You can also tap on the screen for Quick Control settings.

127

Q Quick Control

Settable Functions in Basic Zone Modes

o: Default setting*1 k: User selectable : Not selectable

*1: If you change the shooting mode or set the power switch to <2>, all the

functions will revert to their default settings (except the self-timer).

*2: Settable only with viewfinder shooting.

Function AC

Ambience-based shots (p.101) k

Background blur (p.103) k

Drive

mode

(p.156)

Single shooting o o

High-speed continuous shooting k k

Low-speed continuous shooting k k

Silent single shooting*2 k k

Silent continuous shooting*2 k k

10-sec. self-timer/Remote control k k

2-sec. self-timer/Remote control k k

Self-timer: Continuous shooting k k

AF point selection (p.136, 137) k k

Function 8

2q3 5 C r

Panning (p.114) k

Brightness (p.106) k k k k k k

Drive

mode

(p.156)

Single shooting k o o k k k

High-speed continuous

shooting k k k o o

Low-speed continuous shooting o k k k k o

Silent single shooting*2 k k k k k k

Silent continuous shooting*2 kkkkk

10-sec. self-timer/Remote

control k k k k k k

2-sec. self-timer/Remote control k k k k k k

Self-timer: Continuous shooting k k k k k k

AF point selection (p.136, 137) k k k k k k

Q Quick Control

128

o: Default setting*1 k: User selectable : Not selectable

*1: If you change the shooting mode or set the power switch to <2>, all the

functions will revert to their default settings (except the self-timer).

*2: Settable only with viewfinder shooting.

Using Live View shooting is recommended when setting [Ambience-

based shots], [Background blur], [Brightness], or [Color tone].

For the operating procedures for Live View shooting, see “Using Effect

Preview in Live View Shooting” on page 105 and see “<8> mode

[Brightness] and [Color tone]” on page 106. You can adjust the effects

while looking at the Live View image.

Function 8

4 P y 6 F G

Color tone (p.106) k k

Brightness (p.106) kkkkk

Drive

mode

(p.156)

Single shooting oooooo

High-speed continuous shooting kkkkkk

Low-speed continuous shooting kkkkkk

Silent single shooting*2 kkkkkk

Silent continuous shooting*2 kkkkkk

10-sec. self-timer/Remote control kkkkkk

2-sec. self-timer/Remote control kkkkkk

Self-timer: Continuous shooting kkkkkk

AF point selection (p.136, 137) kk kkk

Adjusting Ambience-based shots, Background blur,

Brightness, and Color tone

129

Setting the AF and

Drive Modes

The AF points in the viewfinder

are arranged to make AF shooting

suitable for a wide variety of

subjects and scenes.

You can also select the AF operation and drive mode

that best match the shooting conditions and subject.



The

icon

at the upper right of the page title indicates that

the function is available only in Creative Zone modes

(<d>, <s>, <f>, <a>, <F

>).

In Basic Zone modes, the AF operation is set automatically.

<AF> stands for autofocus. <MF> stands for manual focus.

130

You can select the AF operation characteristics to suit the shooting

conditions or subject. In Basic Zone modes, the optimum AF operation

is set automatically for the respective shooting mode.

1Set the lens’s focus mode switch

to <AF>.

2Turn the Mode Dial to a Creative

Zone mode.

3Press the <f> button (9).

4Select the AF operation.

While looking at the LCD panel or the

viewfinder, turn the <6> or <5>

dial.

X: One-Shot AF

9: AI Focus AF

Z: AI Servo AF

f: Selecting the AF OperationN

In Creative Zone modes, you can also press the button to

autofocus.

131

f: Selecting the AF OperationN

Suited for still subjects. When you

press the shutter button halfway, the

camera will focus only once.

The AF point that achieves focus is

displayed, and the focus indicator

<o> in the viewfinder will also light

up.

With the camera in the default

settings and the metering mode set to

the evaluative metering (p.243), the

exposure setting is set at the same

time the focus is achieved.

While you keep holding down the

shutter button halfway, the focus will

be locked. You can then recompose

the shot if desired.

One-Shot AF for Still Subjects

Focus indicator

AF point

If focus cannot be achieved, the focus indicator <o> in the viewfinder

will blink. If this occurs, the picture cannot be taken even if the shutter

button is pressed completely. Recompose the shot and try to focus again

or see “When Autofocus Fails” (p.153).

If [54: Beep] is set to [Disable], the beeper will not sound when focus is

achieved.

After achieving focus with One-Shot AF, you can lock the focus on a

subject and recompose the shot. This is called “focus lock”. This is useful

in cases such as when you want to focus on a peripheral subject not

covered by the Area AF frame.

With a lens equipped with electronic MF, setting [z1: Lens electronic

MF] to [Enable after One-Shot AF] will enable you to manually adjust

the focus after achieving focus with AF (p.155).

132

f: Selecting the AF OperationN

This AF operation is suited for

moving subjects when the focusing

distance keeps changing. While you

hold down the shutter button halfway,

the camera will keep focusing on the

subject continuously.

The exposure is set at the moment the picture is taken.

When the AF area selection mode (p.139) is set to Automatic

selection AF, focus tracking will continue as long as the Area AF

frame covers the subject.

AI Focus AF switches the AF

operation from One-Shot AF to AI

Servo AF automatically if a still

subject starts moving.

After the subject is focused in One-Shot AF, if the subject starts

moving, the camera will detect the movement, change the AF

operation automatically to AI Servo AF, and start tracking the moving

subject.

AI Servo AF for Moving Subjects

AI Focus AF for Switching the AF Operation Automatically

With AI Servo AF, the beeper will not sound even when focus is achieved.

Also, the focus indicator <o> in the viewfinder will not light up.

When focus is achieved with AI Focus AF with the Servo operation active,

the beeper will continue beeping softly. However, the focus indicator <o> in

the viewfinder will not light up. Note that focus lock is not possible in this

case.

133

f: Selecting the AF OperationN

By default, the AF points light up in red when focus is achieved in low-

light conditions or on a dark subject. In Creative Zone modes, you can

set whether to have the AF points light up in red when focus is achieved

(p.488).

AF Points Lighting Up in Red

134

The camera has 45 AF points for autofocusing. You can select the AF

area selection mode and AF point(s) suiting the scene or subject.

You can select one of five AF area selection modes. For the selection

procedure, see page 136.

NSingle-point Spot AF

(Manual selection)

For pinpoint focusing.

ESingle-point AF

(Manual selection)

Select one AF point to focus.

FZone AF

(Manual selection of zone)

The AF area is divided into nine focusing

zones for focusing.

S Selecting the AF Area and AF Point

AF Area Selection Mode

Depending on the lens used, the number of usable AF points, AF point

patterns, Area AF frame shape, etc. vary. For details, see “Lenses and

Usable AF Points” on page 145.

135

S Selecting the AF Area and AF Point

GLarge Zone AF

(Manual selection of zone)

The AF area is divided into three

focusing zones (left, center, and right) for

focusing.

H Automatic selection AF

The Area AF frame (entire AF area) is

used to focus.

136

S Selecting the AF Area and AF Point

1Press the <S> or button

(9).

Look through the viewfinder and

press the <S> or button.

2Press the button.

Each time you press the

button, the AF area selection mode

changes.

Selecting the AF Area Selection Mode

In the <8: y> mode, you cannot select the AF area. Single-point AF

(fixed at center) is applied for shooting.

In Basic Zone modes, any of the following operations will revert the AF

area and AF point settings to the default.

• Changing the shooting mode.

• Setting the power switch to <2>.

• Opening the battery compartment cover or card slot cover.

With [8C.Fn II-8: Select AF area selec. mode], you can limit the

selectable AF area selection modes to only those you want to use

(p.481).

If you set [8C.Fn II-9: AF area selection method] to [1:S9Main

Dial], you can select the AF area selection mode by pressing the <S>

or button, then turning the <6> dial (p.482).

137

S Selecting the AF Area and AF Point

You can manually select the AF point or zone.

1Press the <S> or button

(9).

The AF points will be displayed in the

viewfinder.

In the Zone AF mode or Large Zone

AF mode, the selected zone will be

displayed.

2Select an AF point.

The AF point selection will change in

the direction you tilt <9>. If you

press <0>, the center AF point (or

center zone) will be selected.

You can also select a horizontal AF

point by turning the <6> dial and

select a vertical AF point by turning

the <5> dial.

In the Zone AF and Large Zone AF

modes, turning the <6> or <5>

dial will change the zone (in a looping

sequence for Zone AF).

Selecting the AF Point Manually

When you keep holding down the <Q> button and turn the <6> dial,

you can select an AF point in vertical direction.

When [8C.Fn II-11: Initial AF pt, AI Servo AF] is set to [Initial

AF pt selected] (p.484), you can use this method to manually select the

AI Servo AF’s initial position.

When you press the <S> or button, the LCD panel displays the

following:

• Single-point Spot AF and Single-point AF: SEL (Center), SEL AF

(Off center)

• Zone AF, Large Zone AF, and Automatic selection AF: AF

138

S Selecting the AF Area and AF Point

Pressing the <S> or button lights up the AF points that are

cross-type AF points for high-precision autofocusing. The blinking AF

points are horizontal-line or vertical-line sensitive. For details, see

pages 143-148.

AF Point Display Indications

139

For pinpoint focusing over a narrower area than

with Single-point AF. Select one AF point <O> to

focus.

Effective for pinpoint focusing or focusing on

overlapping subjects such as an animal in a cage.

Since Single-point Spot AF covers a very small

area, focusing may be difficult during handheld or

low-light shooting or for a moving subject.

Select one AF point <S> to be used for focusing.

The AF area is divided into nine focusing zones for focusing. Since all

the AF points in the selected zone are used for Automatic selection AF,

it is superior to Single-point AF in tracking the subject, and it is also

effective for moving subjects.

However, since it is inclined to focus on the nearest subject, focusing on

a specific target may be more difficult.

The AF point(s) achieving focus is displayed as <S>.

AF Area Selection Mode

Single-point Spot AF (Manual selection)

Single-point AF (Manual selection)

Zone AF (Manual selection of zone)

140

AF Area Selection Mode

The AF area is divided into three focusing zones (left, center, and right)

for focusing. Since the focusing area is larger than with Zone AF and all

the AF points in the selected zone are used for Automatic selection AF,

it is superior to Single-point AF in tracking the subject, and it is effective

for moving subjects.

However, since it is inclined to focus on the nearest subject, focusing on

a specific target may be more difficult.

The AF point(s) achieving focus is displayed as <S>.

The Area AF frame (entire AF area) is used to focus. The AF point(s)

achieving focus is displayed as <S>.

With One-Shot AF, pressing the shutter button

halfway will display the AF point(s) <S> that

achieved focus. If multiple AF points are

displayed, it means they all have achieved focus.

This mode tends to focus on the nearest subject.

With AI Servo AF, you can set the AI Servo AF’s

initial position with [8C.Fn II-11: Initial AF pt,

AI Servo AF] set to [1: Initial AF pt

selected] or [2: Manual S AF pt] (p.484). As

long as the Area AF frame can track the subject

during shooting, focusing will continue.

Large Zone AF (Manual selection of zone)

Automatic selection AF

141

AF Area Selection Mode

When AI Servo AF mode is set for Zone AF, Large Zone AF, or Automatic

selection AF, the active AF point <r> will keep switching to track the

subject. However, under certain shooting conditions (such as when the

subject is small), it may not be able to track the subject.

With Single-point Spot AF, focusing with an EOS-dedicated, external

Speedlite’s AF-assist beam may be difficult.

If a peripheral AF point or a wide-angle or telephoto lens is used,

achieving focus may be difficult with an EOS-dedicated, external

Speedlite’s AF-assist beam. In such a case, use the center AF point or

an AF point close to the center.

When the AF point(s) light up, part or all of the viewfinder may light up in

red. This is a characteristic of AF point display.

In low temperatures, the AF point display may be difficult to see or have

a slower tracking response due to the characteristics of AF point display

device (using liquid crystal).

With [8C.Fn II-10: Orientation linked AF point], you can set the AF area

selection mode + AF point or only the AF point separately for the horizontal

and vertical orientations (p.483).

142

AF Area Selection Mode

With the camera in its default state, if the AF area selection mode is set

to Zone AF (Manual selection of zone), Large Zone AF (Manual

selection of zone), or Auto selection AF, color tracking AF detecting

colors comparable to human skin tones will be performed (except in

<8: 3r4Py6F> modes).

For details, see [8C.Fn II-12: Auto AF pt sel.:Color Tracking] on

page 485.

AF Using Color Tracking

143

The camera’s AF sensor has 45 AF points. The illustration below shows

the AF sensor pattern corresponding to each AF point. When using

lenses with a maximum aperture of f/2.8 or faster, high-precision AF is

possible at the viewfinder center.

AF Sensor

Depending on the lens used, the number of usable AF points, AF point

patterns, Area AF frame shape, etc. vary. For details, see “Lenses and

Usable AF Points” on page 145.

Diagram

Cross-type focusing: f/5.6 vertical + f/5.6 horizontal

(some also supporting f/8)

Dual cross-type focusing:

f/2.8 right diagonal + f/2.8 left diagonal

f/5.6 vertical + f/5.6 horizontal

(also supporting f/8)

144

AF Sensor

This focusing sensor is geared to obtain higher

precision focusing for lenses with a maximum

aperture of f/2.8 or faster. A diagonal cross pattern

makes it easier to focus on the subjects that may be

difficult to focus. It is provided at the center AF point.

These focusing sensors are geared for lenses with a

maximum aperture of f/5.6 or faster (and some

supporting f/8). Since they have a horizontal pattern,

they can detect vertical lines. They cover all 45 AF

points.

These focusing sensors are geared for lenses with a

maximum aperture of f/5.6 or faster (and some

supporting f/8). Since they have a vertical pattern,

they can detect horizontal lines. They cover all 45 AF

points.

145

Autofocusing with 45 points is possible. All the AF area selection modes

are selectable.

Dual cross-type AF point. Subject

tracking performance is superior and

the focusing precision is higher than

with other AF points.

: Cross-type AF point. Subject

tracking performance is superior and

high-precision focusing is achieved.

Lenses and Usable AF Points

Group A

Although the camera has 45 AF points, the number of usable AF

points, focusing patterns, Area AF frame shape, etc. vary

depending on the lens. The lenses are thereby classified into eight

groups from A to H.

Using a lens in Groups E to H will have fewer usable AF points.

Lens groups are listed on pages 149-152. Check which group your

lens belongs to.

When you press the <S> or button, the AF points at the position

indicated by the mark will blink. (The / AF points will stay lit.)

Regarding lighting up or blinking of the AF points, see page 138.

Regarding new lenses released after the EOS 6D Mark II (in the second

half of 2017), check the Canon Web site to see which group they belong

to.

Some lenses may not be available in certain countries or regions.

146

Lenses and Usable AF Points

Autofocusing with 45 points is possible. All the AF area selection modes

are selectable.

: Cross-type AF point. Subject

tracking performance is superior and

high-precision focusing is achieved.

Autofocusing with 45 points is possible. All the AF area selection modes

are selectable.

: Cross-type AF point. Subject

tracking performance is superior and

high-precision focusing is achieved.

: AF points sensitive to horizontal

lines.

Autofocusing with 45 points is possible. All the AF area selection modes

are selectable.

: Cross-type AF point. Subject

tracking performance is superior and

high-precision focusing is achieved.

: AF points sensitive to horizontal

lines.

Group B

Group C

Group D

147

Lenses and Usable AF Points

Autofocusing with the 35 points is possible. (Not possible with all 45 AF

points.) All the AF area selection modes are selectable. During

automatic AF point selection, the outer frame marking the AF area

(Area AF frame) will be different from 45-point Automatic selection AF.

: Cross-type AF point. Subject

tracking performance is superior and

high-precision focusing is achieved.

: AF points sensitive to horizontal

lines.

: Disabled AF points (not displayed).

Autofocusing with the 35 points is possible. (Not possible with all 45 AF

points.) All the AF area selection modes are selectable. During

automatic AF point selection, the outer frame marking the AF area

(Area AF frame) will be different from 45-point Automatic selection AF.

: Cross-type AF point. Subject

tracking performance is superior and

high-precision focusing is achieved.

: AF points sensitive to vertical lines

(AF points in the horizontal array at

the top and bottom) or horizontal

lines (AF points in a vertical array on

the left and right).

: Disabled AF points (not displayed).

Group E

Group F

148

Lenses and Usable AF Points

Autofocusing with 27 points is possible. (Not possible with all 45 AF

points.) Large Zone AF (manual selection of zone) cannot be selected

in AF area selection mode. During automatic AF point selection, the

outer frame marking the AF area (Area AF frame) will be different from

45-point Automatic selection AF.

: Cross-type AF point. Subject

tracking performance is superior and

high-precision focusing is achieved.

: AF points sensitive to horizontal

lines.

: Disabled AF points (not displayed).

Autofocusing is possible only with the center AF point.

: Cross-type AF point. Subject

tracking performance is superior and

high-precision focusing is achieved.

: Disabled AF points (not displayed).

Group G

Group H

If the maximum aperture is slower than f/5.6 (greater than f/5.6 but not

exceeding f/8), focus may not be achieved with AF when shooting low-

contrast or low-light subjects.

If the maximum aperture is slower than f/8 (greater than f/8), AF is not

possible during viewfinder shooting.

149

Lenses and Usable AF Points

EF14mm f/2.8L USM A

EF14mm f/2.8L II USM A

EF15mm f/2.8 Fisheye A

EF20mm f/2.8 USM A

EF24mm f/1.4L USM A

EF24mm f/1.4L II USM A

EF24mm f/2.8 A

EF24mm f/2.8 IS USM A

EF28mm f/1.8 USM A

EF28mm f/2.8 A

EF28mm f/2.8 IS USM A

EF35mm f/1.4L USM A

EF35mm f/1.4L II USM A

EF35mm f/2 A

EF35mm f/2 IS USM A

EF40mm f/2.8 STM A

EF50mm f/1.0L USM A

EF50mm f/1.2L USM A

EF50mm f/1.4 USM A

EF50mm f/1.8 A

EF50mm f/1.8 II A

EF50mm f/1.8 STM A

EF50mm f/2.5 Compact Macro B

EF50mm f/2.5 Compact Macro

+ LIFE SIZE Converter B

EF85mm f/1.2L USM A

EF85mm f/1.2L II USM A

EF85mm f/1.8 USM A

EF100mm f/2 USM A

EF100mm f/2.8 Macro B

EF100mm f/2.8 Macro USM E

EF100mm f/2.8L Macro IS USM B

EF135mm f/2L USM A

EF135mm f/2L USM

+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III A

EF135mm f/2L USM

+ Extender EF2x I/II/III B

EF135mm f/2L USM B

EF135mm f/2.8 (Softfocus) A

EF180mm f/3.5L Macro USM B

EF180mm f/3.5L Macro USM

+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III F

EF200mm f/1.8L USM A

EF200mm f/1.8L USM

+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III A*

EF200mm f/1.8L USM

+ Extender EF2x I/II/III B*

EF200mm f/2L IS USM A

EF200mm f/2L IS USM

+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III A

EF200mm f/2L IS USM

+ Extender EF2x I/II/III B

EF200mm f/2.8L USM A

EF200mm f/2.8L USM

+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III B

EF200mm f/2.8L USM

+ Extender EF2x I/II/III B

EF200mm f/2.8L II USM A

EF200mm f/2.8L II USM

+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III B

EF200mm f/2.8L II USM

+ Extender EF2x I/II/III B

EF300mm f/2.8L USM A

EF300mm f/2.8L USM

+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III B*

EF300mm f/2.8L USM

+ Extender EF2x I/II/III B*

EF300mm f/2.8L IS USM A

EF300mm f/2.8L IS USM

+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III B

EF300mm f/2.8L IS USM

+ Extender EF2x I/II/III B

EF300mm f/2.8L IS II USM A

EF300mm f/2.8L IS II USM

+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III B

EF300mm f/2.8L IS II USM

+ Extender EF2x I/II/III B

EF300mm f/4L USM B

EF300mm f/4L USM

+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III B

EF300mm f/4L USM

+ Extender EF2x I/II/III H (f/8)

Lens Group Designations

150

Lenses and Usable AF Points

EF300mm f/4L IS USM B

EF300mm f/4L IS USM

+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III B

EF300mm f/4L IS USM

+ Extender EF2x I/II/III H (f/8)

EF400mm f/2.8L USM A

EF400mm f/2.8L USM

+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III B*

EF400mm f/2.8L USM

+ Extender EF2x I/II/III B*

EF400mm f/2.8L II USM A

EF400mm f/2.8L II USM

+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III B*

EF400mm f/2.8L II USM

+ Extender EF2x I/II/III B*

EF400mm f/2.8L IS USM A

EF400mm f/2.8L IS USM

+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III B

EF400mm f/2.8L IS USM

+ Extender EF2x I/II/III B

EF400mm f/2.8L IS II USM A

EF400mm f/2.8L IS II USM

+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III B

EF400mm f/2.8L IS II USM

+ Extender EF2x I/II/III B

EF400mm f/4 DO IS USM B

EF400mm f/4 DO IS USM

+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III B

EF400mm f/4 DO IS USM

+ Extender EF2x I/II/III H (f/8)

EF400mm f/4 DO IS II USM B

EF400mm f/4 DO IS II USM

+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III B

EF400mm f/4 DO IS II USM

+ Extender EF2x I/II/III H (f/8)

EF400mm f/5.6L USM B

EF400mm f/5.6L USM

+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III H (f/8)

EF500mm f/4L IS USM B

EF500mm f/4L IS USM

+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III B

EF500mm f/4L IS USM

+ Extender EF2x I/II/III H (f/8)

EF500mm f/4L IS II USM B

EF500mm f/4L IS II USM

+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III B

EF500mm f/4L IS II USM

+ Extender EF2x I/II/III H (f/8)

EF500mm f/4.5L USM B

EF500mm f/4.5L USM

+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III H (f/8)*

EF600mm f/4L USM B

EF600mm f/4L USM

+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III B*

EF600mm f/4L USM

+ Extender EF2x I/II/III H (f/8)*

EF600mm f/4L IS USM B

EF600mm f/4L IS USM

+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III B

EF600mm f/4L IS USM

+ Extender EF2x I/II/III H (f/8)

EF600mm f/4L IS II USM B

EF600mm f/4L IS II USM

+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III B

EF600mm f/4L IS II USM

+ Extender EF2x I/II/III H (f/8)

EF800mm f/5.6L IS USM E

EF800mm f/5.6L IS USM

+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III H (f/8)

EF1200mm f/5.6L USM E

EF1200mm f/5.6L USM

+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III H (f/8)*

EF8-15mm f/4L Fisheye USM B

EF11-24mm f/4L USM C

EF16-35mm f/2.8L USM A

EF16-35mm f/2.8L II USM A

EF16-35mm f/2.8L III USM A

EF16-35mm f/4L IS USM B

EF17-35mm f/2.8L USM A

EF17-40mm f/4L USM B

EF20-35mm f/2.8L A

EF20-35mm f/3.5-4.5 USM C

EF22-55mm f/4-5.6 USM F

EF24-70mm f/2.8L USM A

EF24-70mm f/2.8L II USM A

EF24-70mm f/4L IS USM B

EF24-85mm f/3.5-4.5 USM D

EF24-105mm f/3.5-5.6 IS STM B

EF24-105mm f/4L IS USM B

EF24-105mm f/4L IS II USM B

151

Lenses and Usable AF Points

EF28-70mm f/2.8L USM A

EF28-70mm f/3.5-4.5 E

EF28-70mm f/3.5-4.5 II E

EF28-80mm f/2.8-4L USM B

EF28-80mm f/3.5-5.6 E

EF28-80mm f/3.5-5.6 USM E

EF28-80mm f/3.5-5.6 II E

EF28-80mm f/3.5-5.6 II USM E

EF28-80mm f/3.5-5.6 III USM E

EF28-80mm f/3.5-5.6 IV USM E

EF28-80mm f/3.5-5.6 V USM E

EF28-90mm f/4-5.6 B

EF28-90mm f/4-5.6 USM B

EF28-90mm f/4-5.6 II B

EF28-90mm f/4-5.6 II USM B

EF28-90mm f/4-5.6 III B

EF28-105mm f/3.5-4.5 USM B

EF28-105mm f/3.5-4.5 II USM B

EF28-105mm f/4-5.6 F

EF28-105mm f/4-5.6 USM F

EF28-135mm f/3.5-5.6 IS USM B

EF28-200mm f/3.5-5.6 B

EF28-200mm f/3.5-5.6 USM B

EF28-300mm f/3.5-5.6L IS USM B

EF35-70mm f/3.5-4.5 E

EF35-70mm f/3.5-4.5A E

EF35-80mm f/4-5.6 F

EF35-80mm f/4-5.6 PZ E

EF35-80mm f/4-5.6 USM F

EF35-80mm f/4-5.6 II E

EF35-80mm f/4-5.6 III F

EF35-105mm f/3.5-4.5 B

EF35-105mm f/4.5-5.6 H

EF35-105mm f/4.5-5.6 USM H

EF35-135mm f/3.5-4.5 B

EF35-135mm f/4-5.6 USM C

EF35-350mm f/3.5-5.6L USM D

EF38-76mm f/4.5-5.6 E

EF50-200mm f/3.5-4.5 B

EF50-200mm f/3.5-4.5L B

EF55-200mm f/4.5-5.6 USM D

EF55-200mm f/4.5-5.6 II USM D

EF70-200mm f/2.8L USM A

EF70-200mm f/2.8L USM

+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III B**

EF70-200mm f/2.8L USM

+ Extender EF2x I/II/III B**

EF70-200mm f/2.8L IS USM A

EF70-200mm f/2.8L IS USM

+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III B

EF70-200mm f/2.8L IS USM

+ Extender EF2x I/II/III B

EF70-200mm f/2.8L IS II USM A

EF70-200mm f/2.8L IS II USM

+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III B

EF70-200mm f/2.8L IS II USM

+ Extender EF2x I/II/III B

EF70-200mm f/4L USM B

EF70-200mm f/4L USM

+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III B

EF70-200mm f/4L USM

+ Extender EF2x I/II/III H (f/8)

EF70-200mm f/4L IS USM B

EF70-200mm f/4L IS USM

+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III B

EF70-200mm f/4L IS USM

+ Extender EF2x I/II/III H (f/8)

EF70-210mm f/3.5-4.5 USM B

EF70-210mm f/4 B

EF70-300mm f/4-5.6 IS USM B

EF70-300mm f/4-5.6 IS II USM B

EF70-300mm f/4-5.6L IS USM B

EF70-300mm f/4.5-5.6 DO IS USM B

EF75-300mm f/4-5.6 B

EF75-300mm f/4-5.6 USM C

EF75-300mm f/4-5.6 II B

EF75-300mm f/4-5.6 II USM B

EF75-300mm f/4-5.6 III B

EF75-300mm f/4-5.6 III USM B

EF75-300mm f/4-5.6 IS USM B

EF80-200mm f/2.8L A

EF80-200mm f/4.5-5.6 D

EF80-200mm f/4.5-5.6 USM E

EF80-200mm f/4.5-5.6 II E

EF90-300mm f/4.5-5.6 D

152

Lenses and Usable AF Points

EF90-300mm f/4.5-5.6 USM D

EF100-200mm f/4.5A B

EF100-300mm f/4.5-5.6 USM C

EF100-300mm f/5.6 B

EF100-300mm f/5.6L B

EF100-400mm f/4.5-5.6L IS USM B

EF100-400mm f/4.5-5.6L IS USM

+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III H (f/8)

EF100-400mm f/4.5-5.6L IS II USM B

EF100-400mm f/4.5-5.6L IS II USM

+ Extender EF1.4x I/II H (f/8)

EF100-400mm f/4.5-5.6L IS II USM

+ Extender EF1.4x III G (f/8)

EF200-400mm f/4L IS USM

Extender 1.4x B

EF200-400mm f/4L IS USM

Extender 1.4x: With built-in Ext. 1.4x B

EF200-400mm f/4L IS USM

Extender 1.4x + Extender EF1.4x I/II/III B

EF200-400mm f/4L IS USM

Extender 1.4x: With built-in Ext.1.4x

+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III H (f/8)

EF200-400mm f/4L IS USM

Extender 1.4x + Extender EF2x I/II H (f/8)

EF200-400mm f/4L IS USM

Extender 1.4x + Extender EF2x III G (f/8)

TS-E17mm f/4L B

TS-E24mm f/3.5L B

TS-E24mm f/3.5L II B

TS-E45mm f/2.8 A

TS-E90mm f/2.8 A

If you use a TS-E lens, manual focusing will be required. The lens group

designation of TS-E lenses applies only when you do not use the tilt or shift

function.

If Extender EF2x (I/II/III) is attached to the EF180mm f/3.5L Macro USM

lens, AF is not possible.

When using a lens and Extender EF1.4x III/EF2x III in a combination

marked with an asterisk “*” or a lens and extender in a combination

marked with two asterisks “**”, precise focus may not be achieved with

AF. In such a case, refer to the Instruction Manual of the lens or extender

used.

153

Autofocus may fail to achieve focus (focus indicator <o> in the

viewfinder blinks) with special subjects such as the following:

Subjects Difficult to Focus on

Subjects with very low contrast

(Example: Blue skies, solid-color flat surfaces, etc.)

Subjects in very low light

Strongly backlit or reflective subjects

(Example: Cars with highly reflective bodies, etc.)

Near and distant subjects positioned close to an AF point

(Example: Animals in cages, etc.)

Light source such as dots of light positioned close to an AF point

(Example: Night scenes, etc.)

Subjects with repetitive patterns

(Example: Skyscraper windows, computer keyboards, etc.)

Subjects with finer patterns than an AF point

(Example: Faces or flowers as small as or smaller than an AF point,

etc.)

In such cases, focus in either of the following two ways.

(1) With One-Shot AF, focus on an object at the same distance as the

subject and lock the focus, then recompose the shot (p.131).

(2) Set the lens’s focus mode switch to <MF> and focus manually

(p.154).

When Autofocus Fails

Depending on the subject, focus may be achieved by slightly

recomposing the shot and performing AF operation again.

For conditions that make focusing difficult with AF during Live View

shooting or movie shooting, see page 316.

154

If focus cannot be achieved with autofocus, follow the procedure below

to focus manually.

1Set the lens’s focus mode switch

to <MF>.

<4 L> will be displayed on the

LCD panel.

2Focus on the subject.

Turn the lens focusing ring until the

subject looks sharp in the viewfinder.

MF: Manual Focus

Focusing ring

If you press the shutter button halfway during manual focusing, the AF

point that achieved focus will be displayed, and the focus indicator <o>

will light up in the viewfinder.

With Automatic selection AF, when the center AF point achieves focus,

the focus indicator <o> will light up.

155

With the following USM and STM lenses equipped with electronic

manual focusing, you can set whether to use electronic manual

focusing after autofocusing in One-Shot AF mode.

The default setting is [Disable after One-Shot AF].

1Select [Lens electronic MF].

Under the [z1] tab, select [Lens

electronic MF], then press <0>.

2Set the desired setting.

Select the option to be set, then press

<0>.

: Disable after One-Shot AF

Manual focus adjustment after the AF operation is disabled.

: Enable after One-Shot AF

You can manually adjust the focus after the AF operation if you keep

holding down the shutter button halfway.

3 Setting Lens Electronic MFN

EF50mm f/1.0L USM EF300mm f/2.8L USM EF600mm f/4L USM

EF85mm f/1.2L USM EF400mm f/2.8L USM EF1200mm f/5.6L USM

EF85mm f/1.2L II USM EF400mm f/2.8L II USM EF28-80mm f/2.8-4L USM

EF200mm f/1.8L USM EF500mm f/4.5L USM EF70-300mm f/4-5.6 IS II USM

EF40mm f/2.8 STM

EF50mm f/1.8 STM EF24-105mm f/3.5-5.6 IS STM

156

Single and continuous drive modes are provided. You can select the

drive mode suiting the scene or subject.

1Press the <R> button (9).

2Select the drive mode.

While looking at the LCD panel or in

the viewfinder, turn the <6> dial.

u:Single shooting

When you press the shutter button completely, only one shot will

be taken.

o:High-speed continuous shooting

When you hold down the shutter button completely, you can

shoot continuously at max. approx. 6.5 shots/sec. while you

keep holding it down.

However, the maximum continuous shooting speed may become

slower under the following conditions:

 With Anti-flicker shooting:

The continuous shooting speed will be

max.

approx. 5.6 shots/sec.

 With Live View shooting:

When [

AF operation

] is set to [

One-Shot AF

], or when

[

Manual Focus

] is set, the continuous shooting speed will be

max. approx. 6.5 shots/sec.

When [

AF operation

] is set to [

Servo AF

], the continuous

shooting speed of

max. approx. 4.0 shots/sec.

will be given

priority.

Note that if an EX-series Speedlite is used with Live View shooting,

the continuous shooting speed will be

max. approx.

1.7 shots/sec.

i Selecting the Drive Mode

157

i Selecting the Drive Mode

Low-speed continuous shooting

While you hold down the shutter button completely, you can

shoot continuously at max. approx. 3.0 shots/sec. (except the

<r> mode).

Note that during Live View shooting, if [AF operation] is set to

[Servo AF], subject tracking is given priority (Subject-tracking

priority) at a continuous shooting speed of max. approx. 3.0

shots/sec. (except the <r> mode).

Silent single shooting

You can perform single shooting while suppressing the

mechanical sound during viewfinder shooting. This cannot be set

for Live View shooting.

Silent continuous shooting

During viewfinder shooting, you can shoot continuously at max.

approx. 3.0 shots/sec. while suppressing the mechanical sound

(compared to the setting). This cannot be set for Live View

shooting.

10-sec. self-timer/remote control

2-sec. self-timer/remote control

Self-timer: Continuous

For self-timer shooting, see page 159. For remote control

shooting, see page 271.

During <o> high-speed continuous shooting, the maximum

continuous shooting speed varies depending on the shooting conditions.

For details, see the next page.

The continuous shooting speed in the <r> Panning mode is described

on page 115.

158

i Selecting the Drive Mode

The approx. 6.5 shots/sec. maximum high-speed continuous shooting

speed <o> (p.156) is achieved under the following conditions: Fully

charged battery pack, 1/500 sec. or faster shutter speed, maximum

aperture (varies depending on the lens), at room temperature (23°C /

73°F), flicker reduction disabled, and Live View shooting with One-Shot

AF*.

* With the AF mode set to One-Shot AF and the Image Stabilizer turned off when

using the following lenses: EF300mm f/4L IS USM, EF28-135mm f/3.5-5.6 IS

USM, EF75-300mm f/4-5.6 IS USM, EF100-400mm f/4.5-5.6L IS USM.

The continuous shooting speed for <o> high-speed continuous

shooting may decrease depending on the temperature, battery level,

flicker reduction, shutter speed, aperture, subject conditions, brightness,

AF operation, lens, Live View shooting, flash use, shooting function

settings, etc.

With [z4: Anti-flicker shoot.] set to [Enable] (p.206), shooting under

flickering light will decrease the maximum continuous shooting speed.

Also, the continuous shooting interval may become irregular and the

release time lag may become longer.

For Live View shooting, if [AF operation] is set to [Servo AF] (p.305),

the maximum continuous shooting speed will decrease.

With AI Servo AF, the maximum continuous shooting speed may become

slower depending on the subject conditions and the lens used.

Using an EX-series Speedlite will decrease the maximum continuous

shooting speed.

If the battery temperature is low due to a low ambient temperature, the

maximum continuous shooting speed may decrease.

If or <M> is set, the time lag from when you press the shutter

button completely until the shutter is released will be longer than normal.

When internal memory becomes full during continuous shooting, the

continuous shooting speed may drop off because shooting will be

temporarily disabled (p.167).

Under [51: Wireless communication settings], if [Bluetooth

function] is set to [Smartphone], remote control shooting is not

possible. (The remote controller icon <R> is not displayed.)

159

Use the self-timer when you want to be in the picture such as a

commemorative photograph.

1Press the <R> button (9).

2Select the self-timer.

While looking at the LCD panel or in

the viewfinder, turn the <6> dial.

Q:Shoot in 10 sec.

The picture is taken approx. 10

sec. after you press the shutter

button completely. Remote

control shooting is also

possible (p.271).

k:Shoot in 2 sec.

The picture is taken approx. 2 sec. after you press the shutter

button completely. Remote control shooting is also possible.

:10-sec. self-timer plus consecutive shots

Turn the <5> dial to set the number of multiple shots (2 to

10) to be taken with the self-timer. The picture is taken in 10

sec. after you press the shutter button completely. Remote

control shooting (p.271) is not possible.

3Take the picture.

Look through the viewfinder, focus on

the subject, then press the shutter

button completely.

You can check the self-timer

operation with the self-timer lamp,

beeper, and countdown display (in

seconds) on the LCD panel.

Approx. 2 sec. before the picture is

taken, the self-timer lamp will light up

and the beeper will sound faster.

j Using the Self-timer

160

j Using the Self-timer

If you do not look through the viewfinder when you press the shutter

button, attach the eyepiece cover (p.270). If stray light enters the

viewfinder when the picture is taken, it may throw off the exposure.

With <q>, the interval between multiple shots may be prolonged

depending on shooting conditions such as the image-recording quality

and external flash use.

<k> enables you to shoot without touching the camera mounted on a

tripod. This prevents camera shake if you shoot still lifes or long

exposures.

After taking self-timer shots, playing back the image (p.388) to check

focus and exposure is recommended.

When using the self-timer to shoot yourself, use focus lock (p.97) on an

object at the same distance as where you will stand.

To cancel the self-timer after it starts, either tap on the LCD monitor or

press the <R> button.

If remote control shooting is enabled, it will take approx. 2 min. for auto

power off to take effect even if [52: Auto power off] is set to [1 min.].

If [z4: Bulb timer] is set to [Enable], <q> ([Self-timer: Continuous])

cannot be selected.

161

Image Settings

This chapter describes image-related functions: Image-

recording quality, aspect ratio, ISO speed, Picture Style,

white balance, Auto Lighting Optimizer, noise reduction,

highlight tone priority, lens aberration correction, anti-

flicker shooting, and other functions.



The

icon

at the upper right of the page title indicates that

the function is available only in Creative Zone modes

(<d>, <s>, <f>, <a>, <F

>).

162

You can select the pixel count and the image quality. Seven JPEG

quality settings are provided: 73, 83, 74, 84, 7a, 8a, and b.

Three RAW image-recording quality settings are provided: 1, 41,

and 61 (p.166).

1Select [Image quality].

Under the [z1] tab, select [Image

quality], then press <0>.

2Set the image-recording quality.

To select a RAW setting, turn the

<6> dial. To select a JPEG setting,

press the <Y> or <Z> keys.

On the upper right, the “**M

(megapixels) ****x****” number

indicates the recorded pixel count,

and [***] is the number of possible

shots (displayed up to 9999).

Press <0> to set it.

Setting the Image-Recording Quality

The image size [****x****] and number of possible shots [****] displayed on

the image-recording quality setting screen always apply to the [3:2] setting

regardless of the [z4: Aspect ratio] setting (p.168).

If [-] is set for both the RAW image and JPEG image, 73 will be set.

163

3 Setting the Image-Recording Quality

Image-recording Quality Setting Examples

73 only

61+741+73

1 only

164

3 Setting the Image-Recording Quality

Guide to Image-Recording Quality Settings (Approx.)

Image

Quality

Pixels

Recorded

Size

File Size

(MB)

Possible

Shots

Maximum Burst

Standard High

Speed

JPEG

73 26M A2 7.5 1000 110 150

83 3.8 1950 150 150

74 12M A3 4.0 1870 150 150

84 2.1 3570 150 150

7a6.5M A4 2.6 2820 150 150

8a1.4 5310 150 150

b3.8M A5 1.8 4170 150 150

RAW

126M A2 32.6 200 18 21

41 15M A3 25.3 250 21 23

61 6.5M A4 17.4 340 25 25

RAW+JPEG

26M

A2 32.6 + 7.5 160 17 19

15M

26M

A2 25.3 + 7.5 200 18 18

6.5M

26M

A2 17.4 + 7.5 250 19 19

b is in 7 (Fine) quality.

165

3 Setting the Image-Recording Quality

The number of possible shots is based on Canon’s testing standards and an

8GB card.

The maximum burst during continuous shooting is based on Canon’s standard

testing SD card (Standard: 8 GB, High-speed: UHS-I 16 GB) and testing

standards (<o> High-speed continuous shooting, 3:2 aspect ratio, ISO 100,

Standard Picture Style).

The file size, number of possible shots, and maximum burst will vary

depending on the subject, card brand, aspect ratio, ISO speed, Picture

Style, Custom Functions, and other settings.

Even if you use a high-speed SD card, maximum burst indicator will not

change. The maximum burst in the table on the preceding page will apply

instead.

If you select both RAW and JPEG, each time you shoot, the image will be

recorded simultaneously to the card in both RAW and JPEG at the

image-recording qualities that were set. The two images will be recorded

with the same file numbers (file extension: .JPG for JPEG and .CR2 for

RAW).

The image-recording quality icons indicate as follows: 1 (RAW),

41 (Medium RAW), 61 (Small RAW), JPEG (JPEG), 7 (Fine), 8

(Normal), 3(Large), 4 (Medium), 6 (Small).

166

3 Setting the Image-Recording Quality

A RAW image is raw data output by the image sensor converted to

digital data. It is recorded to the card as is, and you can select the

quality as follows: 1, 41, or 61.

A 1 image can be processed with [31: RAW image processing]

(p.438) and saved as a JPEG image. (41 and 61 images cannot

be processed with the camera.) As the RAW image itself does not

change, you can process the RAW image to create any number of

JPEG images with various processing conditions.

You can use Digital Photo Professional (EOS software, p.594) to

process RAW images. You can make various adjustments to images

depending upon how they will be used and can generate JPEG, TIFF, or

other types of images reflecting the effects of those adjustments.

RAW Images

RAW Image Processing Software

To display RAW images on a computer, using Digital Photo Professional

(hereafter DPP, EOS software) is recommended.

Previous versions of DPP Ver.4.x cannot process RAW images taken

with this camera. If a previous version of DPP Ver.4.x is installed on your

computer, obtain and install the latest version of DPP from the Canon

Web site to update it (p.596). (The previous version will be overwritten.)

Note that DPP Ver.3.x or earlier cannot process RAW images taken with

this camera.

Commercially-available software may not be able to display RAW

images taken with this camera. For compatibility information, contact the

software manufacturer.

167

3 Setting the Image-Recording Quality

The approximate maximum burst is

displayed at the bottom right of the

viewfinder and Quick Control screen.

If the maximum burst for continuous

shooting is 99 or higher, “99” will be

displayed.

Maximum Burst for Continuous Shooting

The maximum burst is displayed even when a card is not inserted in the

camera. Make sure that a card is inserted before taking a picture.

If the maximum burst is displayed as “99”, it indicates that you can shoot 99

or more shots continuously. If the maximum burst decreases to 98 or lower

and the internal buffer memory becomes full, “buSY” will be displayed in the

viewfinder and on the LCD panel. Shooting will then be disabled temporarily.

If you stop continuous shooting, the maximum burst will increase. After all

the captured images are written to the card, you can resume continuous

shooting and shoot up to the maximum burst listed in the table on page 164.

168

You can change the image’s aspect ratio. [3:2] is set by default. When

[4:3], [16:9], or [1:1] is set, frame lines indicating the image area will be

displayed in the viewfinder. During Live View shooting, the image

appears with the surrounding area masked in black on the LCD monitor.

1Select the aspect ratio.

Under the [z4] tab, select [Aspect

ratio], then press <0>.

2Set the aspect ratio.

Select an aspect ratio, then press

<0>.

JPEG images

The images will be recorded with the set aspect ratio.

RAW images

The images will always be recorded in the [3:2] aspect ratio. The

selected aspect ratio information is added to the RAW image file.

When you process the RAW image with Digital Photo Professional

(EOS software), this allows you to generate an image with the same

aspect ratio set for shooting.

3 Setting the Aspect RatioN

169

3 Setting the Aspect RatioN

Aspect Ratio

4:3 16:9 1:1

With

viewfinder

shooting

With Live

View

shooting

Image

Quality

Aspect Ratio and Pixel Count (Approx.)

3:2 4:3 16:9 1:1

6240x4160

(26.0 megapixels)

5536x4160*

(23.0 megapixels)

6240x3504*

(21.9 megapixels)

4160x4160

(17.3 megapixels)

4160x2768*

(11.5 megapixels)

3680x2768*

(10.2 megapixels)

4160x2336*

(9.7 megapixels)

2768x2768

(7.7 megapixels)

3120x2080

(6.5 megapixels)

2768x2080

(5.8 megapixels)

3120x1752

(5.5 megapixels)

2080x2080

(4.3 megapixels)

2400x1600

(3.8 megapixels)

2112x1600

(3.4 megapixels)

2400x1344

(3.2 megapixels)

1600x1600

(2.6 megapixels)

The actual aspect ratio of images in the sizes marked with an asterisk “*”

will differ from the aspect ratio indicated.

The image area displayed for the asterisked “*” aspect ratio may be

slightly different from the actual image area. Check the captured images

on the LCD monitor during shooting.

The picture will be taken at the [3:2] aspect ratio setting for the multiple-

exposures.

When you play back RAW images shot in the [4:3], [16:9], or [1:1] aspect

ratio, they will be displayed with lines indicating the respective aspect ratio.

(These lines are not recorded in the image.)

170

Set the ISO speed (image sensor’s sensitivity to light) to suit the

ambient light level. In Basic Zone modes, the ISO speed is set

automatically (p.172).

Regarding the ISO speed during movie shooting, see pages 327 and

331.

1Press the button (9).

2Set the ISO speed.

While looking at the LCD panel or the

viewfinder, turn the <6> or <5>

dial.

ISO speed can be set within ISO 100

- ISO 40000 in 1/3-stop increments.

“A” indicates ISO Auto. The ISO

speed will be set automatically

(p.172).

ISO Speed Guide

* High ISO speeds will result in grainier images.

: Setting the ISO Speed for Still Photos

ISO Speed Shooting Situation

(No flash) Flash Range

L (50), ISO 100 - ISO 400 Sunny outdoors

The higher the ISO speed,

the farther the effective

flash range will be.

ISO 400 - ISO 1600 Overcast skies or

evening time

ISO 1600 - ISO 40000,

H1 (51200), H2 (102400) Dark indoors or night

You can also set the ISO speed with the [z2: zISO speed settings]

menu’s [ISO speed] screen.

171

i: Setting the ISO Speed for Still PhotosN

As H1 (equivalent to ISO 51200) and H2 (equivalent to ISO 102400) are

expanded ISO speed settings, noise (dots of light, banding, etc.) and

irregular colors will be more noticeable, and the resolution lower

compared with the standard setting.

As L (equivalent to ISO 50) is an expanded ISO speed setting, the

dynamic range will be somewhat narrower compared with the standard

setting.

If [z3: Highlight tone priority] is set to [Enable] (p.199), L (equivalent

to ISO 50), ISO 100/125/160, H1 (equivalent to ISO 51200), and H2

(equivalent to ISO 102400) cannot be selected.

When shooting with a high ISO speed, high temperature, long exposure,

or multiple exposure, image noise (rough grain, dots of light, banding,

etc.), irregular colors, or color shift may become noticeable.

When shooting in conditions that produce an extreme amount of noise,

such as a combination of high ISO speed, high temperature, and long

exposure, images may not be recorded properly.

If you use a high ISO speed and flash to shoot a close subject,

overexposure may result.

With [ISO speed range] under [z2: zISO speed settings], you can

expand the settable ISO speed range from L (equivalent to ISO 50) to H1

(equivalent to ISO 51200) or H2 (equivalent to ISO 102400) (p.173).

172

i: Setting the ISO Speed for Still PhotosN

If the ISO speed is set to “A” (Auto), the

actual ISO speed to be set will be

displayed when you press the shutter

button halfway.

As indicated below, the ISO speed will

be set automatically to suit the shooting

mode.

* The actual ISO speed range depends on the [Minimum] and [Maximum] set

with [Auto range].

ISO Auto

Shooting Modes ISO Speed

No Flash With Flash

A/CISO 100 - ISO 12800 ISO 100 - ISO 1600

8Automatically set

(Varies depending on the 8 shooting mode)

d/s/f/aISO 100 - ISO 40000* ISO 100 - ISO 1600*

FISO 400* ISO 400*

173

i: Setting the ISO Speed for Still PhotosN

You can set the manually-settable ISO speed range (minimum and

maximum limits). You can set the minimum limit within L (equivalent to

ISO 50) to H1 (equivalent to ISO 51200), and the maximum limit within

ISO 100 to H2 (equivalent to ISO 102400).

1Select [zISO speed settings].

Under the [z2] tab, select [zISO

speed settings], then press <0>.

2Select [ISO speed range].

3Set the minimum limit.

Select the minimum limit box, then

press <0>.

Select the ISO speed, then press

<0>.

4Set the maximum limit.

Select the maximum limit box, then

press <0>.

Select the ISO speed, then press

<0>.

5Select [OK].

3 Setting the Manually-Settable ISO Speed Range

174

i: Setting the ISO Speed for Still PhotosN

You can set the automatic ISO speed range for ISO Auto within ISO 100

- ISO 40000. You can set the minimum limit within ISO 100 - ISO 25600,

and the maximum limit within ISO 200 - ISO 40000.

1Select [Auto range].

2Set the minimum limit.

Select the minimum limit box, then

press <0>.

Select the ISO speed, then press

<0>.

3Set the maximum limit.

Select the maximum limit box, then

press <0>.

Select the ISO speed, then press

<0>.

4Select [OK].

3 Setting the ISO Speed Range for ISO Auto

The [Minimum] and [Maximum] settings will also function as the minimum

and maximum speeds for ISO speed safety shift (p.473).

175

i: Setting the ISO Speed for Still PhotosN

You can set the minimum shutter speed so that the shutter speed set

automatically will not be too slow when ISO Auto is set.

This is effective in the <d> and <f> modes when you use a wide-

angle lens to shoot a moving subject or when you use a telephoto lens.

It helps to reduce camera shake and blurred subjects.

1Select [Min. shutter spd.].

2Set the desired minimum shutter

speed.

Select [Auto] or [Manual].

If you select [Auto], turn the <6>

dial to set the desired speed, slower

or faster compared to the standard

speed, then press <0>.

If you select [Manual], turn the <6>

dial to select the shutter speed, then

press <0>.

3 Setting the Minimum Shutter Speed for ISO Auto

Automatically set

Manually set

If a correct exposure cannot be obtained with the maximum ISO speed

limit set with [Auto range], a shutter speed slower than the [Min. shutter

spd.] will be set to obtain the standard exposure.



This function will not be applied to flash photography and movie shooting.

When [Auto: 0] is set, the minimum shutter speed will be the reciprocal of

the lens focal length. A single step from [Slower] to [Faster] is equivalent to

a single stop of the shutter speed.

176

Just by selecting a preset Picture Style, you can obtain image

characteristics effectively matching your photographic expression or the

subject.

In Basic Zone modes, [D] (Auto) is set automatically.

1Select [Picture Style].

Under the [z3] tab, select [Picture

Style], then press <0>.

The Picture Style selection screen will

appear.

2Select a Picture Style.

Select a Picture Style, then press

<0>.

The Picture Style will be set.

Selecting a Picture Style

177

3 Selecting a Picture StyleN

D Auto

The color tone will be adjusted automatically to suit the scene. The

colors will look vivid for blue skies, greenery and sunsets,

particularly in nature, outdoor and sunset scenes.

P Standard

The image looks vivid, sharp, and crisp. This is a general-purpose

Picture Style suitable for most scenes.

Q Portrait

For nice skin tones. The image looks softer. Suited for close-up

portraits.

By changing the [Color tone] (p.181), you can adjust the skin

tone.

R Landscape

For vivid blues and greens, and very sharp and crisp images.

Effective for impressive landscapes.

u Fine Detail

Suited for detailed outline and fine texture description of the

subject. The colors will be slightly vivid.

S Neutral

Suited for processing the image with a computer. For natural

colors and subdued images with modest brightness and color

saturation.

Picture Style Characteristics

If the desired color tone is not obtained with [Auto], use another Picture

Style.

178

3 Selecting a Picture StyleN

U Faithful

Suited for processing the image with a computer. The color of a

subject that is captured in sunlight at a color temperature of 5200K

will be adjusted to match the subject’s colorimetrical color. For

subdued images with modest brightness and color saturation.

V Monochrome

Creates black-and-white images.

W User Defined 1-3

You can register a basic style such as [Portrait], [Landscape], a

Picture Style file, etc. and adjust it as desired (p.183). With any of

the User Defined Picture Style that has not yet been set, pictures

will be taken with the same characteristics settings as with the

default settings of [Auto].

Be careful not to leave the [Monochrome] setting on when you want to

shoot photos in color again. Black-and-white images shot in JPEG cannot

be turned into color.

You can set the camera to display <z> in the viewfinder and on the LCD

panel for when [Monochrome] is set (p.489).

179

3 Selecting a Picture StyleN

The Picture Style selection screen has icons for [Strength], [Fineness],

or [Threshold] for [Sharpness] as well as [Contrast] and other

parameters. The numerals indicate the values for these parameters set

for the respective Picture Style.

Symbols

Sharpness

AStrength

BFineness

CThreshold

hContrast

iSaturation

jColor tone

kFilter effect (Monochrome)

lToning effect (Monochrome)

During movie shooting, an asterisk “*” will be displayed for both [Fineness]

and [Threshold] for [Sharpness]. [Fineness] and [Threshold] will not be

applied to movies.

180

You can customize the Picture Styles. You can change or adjust the

parameter settings of Picture Styles such as [Strength], [Fineness], or

[Threshold] for [Sharpness] as well as [Contrast] and other

parameters from the default settings. To see the resulting effects, take

test shots. To customize [Monochrome], see page 182.

1Select [Picture Style].

Under the [z3] tab, select [Picture

Style], then press <0>.

The Picture Style selection screen will

appear.

2Select a Picture Style.

Select the Picture Style to be

adjusted, then press the

button.

3Select a parameter.

Select the parameter (such as

[Strength] of [Sharpness]) to be set,

then press <0>.

See the next page for settings and

effects.

Customizing a Picture Style

181

3 Customizing a Picture StyleN

4Set the parameter.

Press the <Y> <Z> keys to adjust

the parameter, then press <0>.

Press the <M> button to save the

adjusted parameter settings. The

Picture Style selection screen will

reappear.

The value of parameter settings

different from the default will be

displayed in blue.

*1: Indicates the fineness of the outlines to be emphasized. The smaller the

number, the finer the outlines that can be emphasized.

*2: Sets how much the outline is emphasized based on the difference in contrast

between the subject and the surrounding area. The smaller the number, the

more the outline will be emphasized when the contrast difference is low.

However, noise tends to be more noticeable when the number is smaller.

Parameter Settings and Effects

Sharpness

AStrength 0: Weak outline emphasis 7: Strong outline emphasis

BFineness*11: Fine 5: Grainy

CThreshold*21: Low 5: High

h Contrast -4: Low contrast +4: High contrast

i Saturation -4: Low saturation +4: High saturation

j Color tone -4: Reddish skin tone +4: Yellowish skin tone

For movie shooting, [Fineness] and [Threshold] for [Sharpness] cannot

be set (not displayed).

By selecting [Default set.] in step 3, you can revert the parameter

settings of the respective Picture Style to their defaults.

To shoot with the Picture Style you adjusted, first select the adjusted

Picture Style, then shoot.

182

3 Customizing a Picture StyleN

Besides the effects described on the preceding page such as

[Contrast], or [Strength], [Fineness] and [Threshold] for

[Sharpness], you can also set [Filter effect] and [Toning effect].

kFilter effect

With a filter effect applied to a

monochrome image, you can make

white clouds or green trees stand out

more.

lToning effect

By applying a toning effect, you can

create a monochrome image in the

selected color. Effective when you want

to create more impressive images.

The following can be selected: [N:None],

[S:Sepia], [B:Blue], [P:Purple] or

[G:Green].

V Monochrome Adjustment

Filter Sample Effects

N: None Normal black-and-white image with no filter effects.

Ye: Yellow The blue sky will look more natural, and the white clouds will

look crisper.

Or: Orange The blue sky will look slightly darker. The sunset will look more

brilliant.

R: Red The blue sky will look quite dark. Fall leaves will look crisper

and brighter.

G: Green Skin tones and lips will appear muted. Green tree leaves will

look crisper and brighter.

Increasing the [Contrast] will make the filter effect more pronounced.

183

You can select a base Picture Style such as [Portrait] or [Landscape],

adjust its parameters as desired and register it under [User Def. 1],

[User Def. 2], or [User Def. 3]. Useful when you want to preset multiple

Picture Styles with different settings.

You can also adjust the parameters of a Picture Style that is registered

to the camera with EOS Utility (EOS software, p.594) here.

1Select [Picture Style].

Under the [z3] tab, select [Picture

Style], then press <0>.

The Picture Style selection screen will

appear.

2Select [User Def. *].

Select [User Def. *], then press the

button.

3Press <0>.

With [Picture Style] selected, press

<0>.

4Select the base Picture Style.

Select the base Picture Style, then

press <0>.

To adjust the parameters of a Picture

Style registered to the camera with

EOS Utility (EOS software), select the

Picture Style here.

Registering a Picture Style

184

3 Registering a Picture StyleN

5Select a parameter.

Select the parameter (such as

[Strength] under [Sharpness]) to be

set, then press <0>.

6Set the parameter.

Adjust the effect level of the

parameter, then press <0>. For

details, see “Customizing a Picture

Style” (p.180).

Press the <M> button to register

the adjusted parameter settings. The

Picture Style selection screen will

then reappear.

The base Picture Style will be

indicated on the right of [User Def. *].

If the parameter settings in the

Picture Style registered under [User

Def. *] have been modified from the

default, the Picture Style’s name will

be displayed in blue.

If a Picture Style is already registered under [User Def. *], changing the

base Picture Style in step 4 will clear the parameter settings of the

previously registered User Defined Picture Style.

If you perform [55: Clear all camera settings] (p.75), all the [User

Def. *] settings will revert to their defaults.

To shoot with a registered Picture Style, select the registered

[User Def. *], then shoot.

Regarding the procedure to register a Picture Style file to the camera,

refer to the EOS Utility Instruction Manual (p.596).

185

White balance (WB) is for making the white areas look white. Normally,

the Auto [Q] (Ambience priority) or [Qw] (White priority) setting will

obtain the correct white balance. If natural-looking colors cannot be

obtained with Auto, you can select the white balance to match the light

source or set it manually by shooting a white object.

In Basic Zone modes, [Q] (Ambience priority) is set automatically. (In

the mode, [Qw] (White priority) is set.)

1Select [White balance].

Under the [z2] tab, select [White

balance], then press <0>.

2Select a white balance setting.

Select the desired setting, then press

<0>.

(Approx.)

* Applicable with Speedlites having a color temperature transmission function.

Otherwise, it will be fixed to approx. 6000 K.

B: Setting the White BalanceN

Display Mode Color Temperature (K: Kelvin)

QAuto (Ambience priority, p.187) 3000 - 7000

QwAuto (White priority, p.187)

WDaylight 5200

EShade 7000

RCloudy, twilight, sunset 6000

YTungsten light 3200

UWhite fluorescent light 4000

DFlash use Automatically set*

OCustom (p.188) 2000 - 10000

PColor temperature (p.190) 2500 - 10000

186

B: Setting the White BalanceN

To the human eye, a white object looks white regardless of the type of

lighting. With a digital camera, the white for color correction basis is

decided depending on the color temperature of the illumination, and

then the color is adjusted with software to make the white areas look

white. With this function, you can take the pictures with natural color

tones.

White Balance

187

B: Setting the White BalanceN

With [Q] (Ambience priority), you can increase the intensity of the

image’s warm color cast when shooting a tungsten-light scene. If you

select [Qw] (White priority), you can reduce the intensity of the

image’s warm color cast.

If you want to match the Auto white balance of previous EOS DIGITAL

camera models, select [Q] (Ambience priority).

1Select [White balance].

Under the [z2] tab, select [White

balance], then press <0>.

2Select [Q].

With [Q] selected, press the

button.

3Select the desired item.

Select [Auto: Ambience priority] or

[Auto: White priority], then press

<0>.

Q: Auto: Ambience priority

Qw: Auto: White priority

Q Auto White Balance

Cautions for Setting [Qw] (White priority)

The warm color cast of subjects may fade.

When multiple light sources are included in the scene, the warm color

cast of the picture may not be lessened.

When using flash, the color tone will be the same as with [Q]

(Ambience priority).

188

B: Setting the White BalanceN

With custom white balance, you can manually set the white balance for

the specific light source of the shooting location. Make sure to perform

this procedure under the light source at the actual location of the shoot.

1Shoot a white object.

Look through the viewfinder and aim

the entire dotted line box (shown in

the illustration) over a plain, white

object.

Focus manually and shoot with the

standard exposure set for the white

object.

You can use any of the white balance

settings.

2Select [Custom White Balance].

Under the [z2] tab, select [Custom

White Balance], then press <0>.

The custom white balance selection

screen will appear.

3Import the white balance data.

Turn the <5> dial to select the

image captured in step 1, then press

<0>.

On the dialog screen that appears,

select [OK], and the data will be

imported.

Press the <M> button to exit the

menu.

O Custom White Balance

189

B: Setting the White BalanceN

4Select [White balance].

Under the [z2] tab, select [White

balance], then press <0>.

5Select the custom white balance.

Select [O], then press <0>.

If the exposure obtained in step 1 differs greatly from the standard

exposure, a correct white balance may not be obtained.

In step 3, the following images cannot be selected: Images captured with

the Picture Style set to [Monochrome], multiple-exposure images,

cropped images, and images shot with another camera.

Instead of shooting a white object, you can also shoot a gray chart or

standard 18% gray reflector (commercially-available).

190

B: Setting the White BalanceN

You can set the white balance’s color temperature numerically. This is

for advanced users.

1Select [White balance].

Under the [z2] tab, select [White

balance], then press <0>.

2Set the color temperature.

Select [P].

Turn the <6> dial to set the desired

color temperature, then press <0>.

The color temperature can be set

from approx. 2500 K to 10000 K in

100 K increments.

Setting the Color Temperature

When setting the color temperature for an artificial light source, set the

white balance correction (magenta or green bias) as necessary.

If you set [P] to the reading taken with a commercially-available color

temperature meter, take test shots and adjust the setting to compensate

for the difference between the color temperature meter’s reading and the

camera’s color temperature reading.

191

You can correct the white balance that is set. This adjustment will have the same

effect as using a commercially-available color temperature conversion filter or

color compensating filter. Each color can be corrected to one of nine levels.

This function is for advanced users, particularly for those users who

understand the use of color temperature conversion and color

compensating filters and their effects.

1Select [WB Shift/Bkt.].

Under the [z2] tab, select [WB

Shift/Bkt.], then press <0>.

2Set the white balance correction.



Use <

> to move the

“ ” mark to the

appropriate position.



B is for blue, A for amber, M for

magenta, and G for green. The image’s

color balance will be adjusted toward

the color in the direction of the move.

On the right of the screen, “Shift”

indicates the direction and correction

amount, respectively.

Pressing the <L> button will cancel

all the [WB Shift/Bkt.] settings.

Press <0> to exit the setting.

u White Balance CorrectionN

White Balance Correction

Sample setting: A2, G1

You can set the camera to display <z> in the viewfinder and on the

LCD panel for when white balance correction has been set (p.489).

One level of the blue/amber correction is equivalent to approx. 5 mireds

of a color temperature conversion filter. (Mired: Unit of measure for color

temperature used to indicate values such as the density of a color

temperature conversion filter.)

192

u White Balance CorrectionN

With just one shot, three images with different color tones can be

recorded simultaneously. Based on the color temperature of the current

white balance setting, the image will be bracketed with a blue/amber

bias and magenta/green bias. This function is called white balance

bracketing (WB Bkt.). White balance bracketing is possible up to ±3

levels in single-level increments.

Set the white balance bracketing

amount.



In step 2 for “White Balance

Correction”, when you turn the <

dial

, the “ ” mark on the screen will

change to “ ” (3 points).

Turning the dial clockwise

sets the B/A

bracketing, and

turning it

counterclockwise

sets the M/G

bracketing.

On the right, “Bracket” indicates the

bracketing direction and correction

amount.

Pressing the <L> button will cancel

all the [WB Shift/Bkt.] settings.

Press <0> to exit the setting.

Bracketing Sequence

The images will be bracketed in the following sequence: 1. Standard

white balance, 2. Blue (B) bias, and 3. Amber (A) bias, or 1.

Standard white balance, 2. Magenta (M) bias, and 3. Green (G) bias.

White Balance Auto Bracketing

B/A bias ±3 levels

193

u White Balance CorrectionN

During white balance bracketing, the maximum burst for continuous

shooting will be lower.

Since three images are recorded for one shot, it takes longer to record

the image to the card.

You can also set white balance correction and AEB together with white

balance bracketing. If you set AEB in combination with white balance

bracketing, a total of nine images will be recorded for a single shot.

During Live View shooting with WB bracketing set, the white balance

icon will blink.

You can change the sequence (p.472) and number of shots (p.472) for

the white balance bracketing.

“Bkt.” stands for bracketing.

194

If the image comes out dark or the contrast is low, the brightness and

contrast can be corrected automatically. This function is called Auto

Lighting Optimizer. The default setting is [Standard]. With JPEG

images, the correction is applied when the image is captured.

In Basic Zone modes, [Standard] is set automatically.

1Select [Auto Lighting Optimizer].

Under the [z2] tab, select [Auto

Lighting Optimizer], then press

<0>.

2Select the setting.

Select the desired setting, then press

<0>.

3Take the picture.

The image will be recorded with the

brightness and contrast corrected as

necessary.

Auto Correction of Brightness and Contrast

Depending on the shooting conditions, noise may increase.

If the effect of Auto Lighting Optimizer is too strong and the image is too

bright, set [Low] or [Disable].

If a setting other than [Disable] is set and you use exposure

compensation or flash exposure compensation to darken the exposure,

the image may still come out bright. If you want a darker exposure, set

this function to [Disable].

When you set multiple exposures (p.258), HDR mode (p.253), or

highlight tone priority (p.199), [z2: Auto Lighting Optimizer] will be

automatically set to [Disable].

In step 2, if you press the button and remove the checkmark [X] for

[Disabled in M or B modes] setting, the [z2: Auto Lighting Optimizer]

can also be set even in the <a> and <F> modes.

195

This function reduces the noise generated in the image. Although noise

reduction is applied at all ISO speeds, it is particularly effective at high

ISO speeds. When shooting at low ISO speeds, the noise in the darker

parts of the image (shadow areas) can further be reduced.

1Select [High ISO speed NR].

Under the [z3] tab, select [High ISO

speed NR], then press <0>.

2Set the level.

Select the desired noise reduction

level, then press <0>.

M: Multi Shot Noise Reduction

Applies the noise reduction with higher image quality than [High].

For a single photo, four shots are taken continuously and aligned

and merged automatically into a single JPEG image.

If the image-recording quality is set to RAW or RAW+JPEG, you

cannot set [Multi Shot Noise Reduction].

3Take the picture.

The image will be recorded with noise

reduction applied.

3 Setting Noise ReductionN

High ISO Speed Noise Reduction

You can set the camera to display <z> in the viewfinder and on the LCD

panel for when Multi Shot Noise Reduction is set (p.489).

196

3 Setting Noise ReductionN

Cautions for Setting Multi Shot Noise Reduction

If there is significant misalignment in the image due to camera shake, the

noise reduction effect may become smaller.

If you are handholding the camera, keep it steady to prevent camera

shake. Using a tripod is recommended.

If you shoot a moving subject, the moving subject may leave

afterimages.

Auto image alignment may not function properly with repetitive patterns

(lattice, stripes, etc.) or flat, single-tone images.

If the subject’s brightness changes as the four consecutive shots are

taken, irregular exposure in the image may result.

After shooting, it may take some time to record an image to the card after

performing noise reduction and merging the images. During the

processing of the images, “buSY” will be displayed in the viewfinder and

on the LCD panel, and you cannot take another picture until the

processing is complete.

You cannot use AEB and white balance bracketing.

If [z3: Long exp. noise reduction], [z3: Multiple exposure], [z3:

HDR Mode], AEB shooting, white balance bracketing, or Live View

shooting with Servo AF is set, [Multi Shot Noise Reduction] cannot be

set.

This cannot be set for bulb shooting.

Flash photography is not possible. Note that the AF-assist beam of EOS-

dedicated, external Speedlites will be emitted according to the [8C.Fn

II-6: AF-assist beam firing] setting.

[Standard] will be set automatically if you do any of the following: Setting

the power switch to <2>, replacing battery, replacing card, setting

shooting mode to other than <d>, <s>, <f>, or <a>, or switching

to movie shooting.

197

3 Setting Noise ReductionN

For images exposed for 1 sec. or longer, noise (dots of light and

banding) typical of long exposures can be reduced.

1Select [Long exp. noise

reduction].

Under the [z3] tab, select [Long

exp. noise reduction], then press

<0>.

2Set the desired setting.

Select the desired setting, then press

<0>.

Auto

For exposures of 1 sec. or longer, noise reduction is performed

automatically if noise typical of long exposures is detected. This

[Auto] setting is effective enough in most cases.

Enable

Noise reduction is performed for all exposures of 1 sec. or longer.

The [Enable] setting may reduce noise that cannot be detected with

the [Auto] setting.

3Take the picture.

The image will be recorded with noise

reduction applied.

Long Exposure Noise Reduction

198

3 Setting Noise ReductionN

With [Auto] or [Enable] set, the noise reduction process after the picture

is taken may take the same amount of time as that for the exposure.

However, even when noise reduction process is in progress, you can

continue to take pictures as long as the maximum burst indicator in the

viewfinder shows “1” or higher.

Images taken at high ISO speeds may look grainier with the [Enable]

setting than with the [Disable] or [Auto] setting.

With [Auto] or [Enable] set, if long exposure is used with the Live View

image displayed, “BUSY” will be displayed during the noise reduction

process. The Live View display will not appear until the noise reduction is

complete. (You cannot take another picture.)

199

You can reduce overexposed, clipped highlights.

1Select [Highlight tone priority].

Under the [z3] tab, select

[Highlight tone priority], then press

<0>.

2Select [Enable].

Highlight details are improved. The

dynamic range is expanded from the

standard 18% gray to bright

highlights. The gradation between the

grays and highlights becomes

smoother.

3Take the picture.

The image will be recorded with

highlight tone priority applied.

3 Highlight Tone PriorityN

When [Enable] is set, noise may increase slightly.

When [Enable] is set, the settable ISO speed range will start from ISO

200. Expanded ISO speeds cannot be set.

When you set multiple exposures (p.258) or HDR mode (p.253), [z3:

Highlight tone priority] will be automatically set to [Disable].

When highlight tone is set, <A> is displayed in the viewfinder and on the

LCD panel.

200

Peripheral light fall-off is a phenomenon that makes the image corners

look darker due to the optical characteristics of the lens. Color fringing

along subject outlines is called chromatic aberration. Image distortion

due to optical characteristics of the lens is called distortion. And

decreased image sharpness due to the aperture is called diffraction

phenomenon. These lens aberrations can be corrected.

By default, [Peripheral illum corr], [Chromatic aberr corr], and

[Diffraction correction] are set to [Enable], and [Distortion

correction] is set to [Disable].

If the lens correction data is registered (saved) in the camera,

peripheral illumination corrrection, chromatic aberration corrrection, and

diffraction correction will be applied in Basic Zone modes. (In the <q>

mode, distortion correction is also applied.)

If the setting screen displays [Correction data not available] or the

[ ] icon, it means that the correction data for the respective lens is not

registered in the camera. See “Lens Correction Data” on page 204.

1Select [Lens aberration

correction].

Under the [z1] tab, select [Lens

aberration correction], then press

<0>.

2Select [Peripheral illum corr].

3 Correction of Lens Aberrations due

to Optical CharacteristicsN

Peripheral Illumination Correction

201

3 Correction of Lens Aberrations due to Optical CharacteristicsN

3Select [Enable].

Check that [Correction data

available] is displayed for the

attached lens.

Select [Enable], then press <0>.

4Take the picture.

The image will be recorded with the

peripheral illumination corrected.

1Select [Chromatic aberr corr].

2Select [Enable].

Check that [Correction data

available] is displayed for the

attached lens.

Select [Enable], then press <0>.

3Take the picture.

The image will be recorded with the

chromatic aberration corrected.

Chromatic Aberration Correction

Depending on shooting conditions, noise may appear on the image

periphery.

The higher the ISO speed, the lower the correction amount will be.

The correction amount applied will be lower than the maximum correction

amount that can be applied with Digital Photo Professional (EOS software,

p.594).

202

3 Correction of Lens Aberrations due to Optical CharacteristicsN

1Select [Distortion correction].

2Select [Enable].

Check that [Correction data

available] is displayed for the

attached lens.

Select [Enable], then press <0>.

3Take the picture.

The image will be recorded with the

distortion corrected.

Distortion Correction

Since distortion correction is applied, the camera records an image

range narrower than the one seen through the viewfinder. (The image

periphery is slightly trimmed and the resolution looks slightly lowered.)

You cannot see the effect of the distortion correction in the viewfinder.

During movie shooting, [Distortion correction] will not be displayed

(correction is not possible).

Using distortion correction during Live View shooting will slightly affect

the angle of view.

When you magnify the image during Live View shooting, distortion

correction is not applied to the image displayed. Therefore, magnifying

the periphery of the image may display parts of the image that will not be

recorded.

Images with distortion correction applied will not have the Dust Delete

Data (p.452) appended. Also, the AF point(s) will not be displayed

(p.397) for image playback.

203

3 Correction of Lens Aberrations due to Optical CharacteristicsN

1Select [Diffraction correction].

2Select [Enable].

Select [Enable], then press <0>.

3Take the picture.

The image will be recorded with the

diffraction corrected.

Diffraction Correction

Depending on shooting conditions, noise may be intensified together

with the effects of correction.

The higher the ISO speed, the lower the correction amount will be.

For movie shooting, [Diffraction correction] will not appear. (Correction

is not possible.)

With “Diffraction correction”, degraded resolution due to the low-pass filter,

etc. is corrected in addition to diffraction. Therefore, correction is effective

even at an aperture close to the open aperture.

204

3 Correction of Lens Aberrations due to Optical CharacteristicsN

The lens correction data for lens aberration corrections is registered

(stored) in the camera. With [Enable] selected, the peripheral

illumination correction, chromatic aberration correction, distortion

correction, and diffraction correction will be applied automatically.

With EOS Utility (EOS software, p.594), you can check which lenses

have their correction data registered in the camera. You can also

the EOS Utility Instruction Manual.

For lenses incorporating the correction data, it is not necessary to

Lens Correction Data

205

3 Correction of Lens Aberrations due to Optical CharacteristicsN

General Cautions for Lens Aberration Correction

Peripheral illumination correction, chromatic aberration correction,

distortion correction, and diffraction correction cannot be applied to

JPEG images already taken.

When using a non-Canon lens, setting the corrections to [Disable] is

recommended even if [Correction data available] is displayed.

If you use the magnified view during Live View shooting, the peripheral

illumination correction and distortion correction will not be reflected in the

image displayed on the screen.

During Live View shooting, magnifying the periphery of the image may

display parts of the image that will not be recorded.

The correction amount will be less (except for diffraction correction) if the

lens used does not have distance information.

General Notes for Lens Aberration Correction

The effect of the lens aberration correction varies depending on the lens

used and shooting conditions. Also, the effect may be difficult to discern

depending on the lens used, shooting conditions, etc.

If the correction is difficult to discern, magnifying and checking the image

after shooting is recommended.

Corrections can be applied even when an extender or life-size converter

is attached.

If the correction data for the attached lens is not registered to the

camera, the result will be the same as when the correction is set to

[Disable] (except for diffraction correction).

206

If you shoot an image with a fast shutter speed under a light source

such as fluorescent light, the blinking of the light source causes flicker

and the image may be vertically unevenly exposed. If continuous

shooting is used under these conditions, uneven exposures or colors

across the images may result. When you use this feature during

viewfinder shooting, the camera detects the flickering frequency of the

light source and takes the picture when the flicker causes less effect on

exposure or color tone.

1Select [Anti-flicker shoot.].

Under the [z4] tab, select [Anti-

flicker shoot.], then press <0>.

2Select [Enable].

3Take the picture.

The picture will be taken with reduced

unevenness of exposure or color tone

caused by the flicker.

Reducing Flicker

When [Enable] is set and you shoot under a flickering light source, the

shutter-release time lag may become longer. Also, the continuous

shooting speed may become slower, and the shooting interval may

become irregular.

This function does not work with mirror lockup, Live View shooting, or

movie shooting.

In the <d> or <f> mode, if the shutter speed changes during

continuous shooting or if you shoot multiple shots of the same scene at

different shutter speeds, the color tone may become inconsistent. To

avoid inconsistent color tones, use the <s> or <a> mode at a fixed

shutter speed.

207

3 Reducing FlickerN

The color tone of the captured images when [z4: Anti-flicker shoot.] is

set to [Enable] may look different from when [Disable] is set.

Flicker at a frequency other than 100 Hz or 120 Hz cannot be detected.

Also, if the flickering frequency of the light source changes during

continuous shooting, effects of the flicker cannot be reduced.

If the subject is against a dark background or if there is a bright light in

the image, flicker may not be properly detected.

Under certain special types of lighting, the camera may not be able to

reduce the effects of the flicker even when <G> is displayed in the

viewfinder.

Depending on the light source, flicker may not be detected properly.

If you recompose a shot, <G> may appear and disappear

intermittently.

Depending on the light sources or shooting conditions, the expected

result may not be obtained even if you use this function.

Taking test shots in advance is recommended.

If <G> is not displayed in the viewfinder, add a checkmark [X] to

[Flicker detection] in [Show/hide in viewfinder] (p.82). When you

shoot with flicker reduction, <G> will light up. Under a light source

that does not flicker or with no flicker detected, <G> will not be

displayed.

If a checkmark [X] is added to [Flicker detection] and [z4: Anti-

flicker shoot.] is set to [Disable], metering under a flickering light source

will cause <G> to blink in the viewfinder as a warning. Setting to

[Enable] before shooting is recommended.

In Basic Zone modes, <G> will not be displayed, but the effects of

flicker will be reduced when you shoot.

Flicker reduction also works with flash photography. However, the

expected result may not be obtained for wireless flash photography.

208

The range of reproducible colors is called “color space”. With this

camera, you can set the color space for captured images to sRGB or

Adobe RGB. For normal shooting, sRGB is recommended.

In Basic Zone modes, [sRGB] is set automatically.

1Select [Color space].

Under the [z2] tab, select [Color

space], then press <0>.

2Set the desired color space.

Select [sRGB] or [Adobe RGB], then

press <0>.

This color space is mainly used for commercial printing and other

industrial uses. This setting is not recommended if you are not familiar

with image processing, Adobe RGB, and Design rule for Camera File

System 2.0 (Exif 2.21 or higher). The image will look very subdued in an

sRGB computer environment and with printers not compliant to Design

rule for Camera File System 2.0 (Exif 2.21 or higher). Post-processing

of the image with computer software will therefore be required.

3 Setting the Color SpaceN

Adobe RGB

If the still photo is shot in the Adobe RGB color space, the first character

in the file name will be an underscore “_”.



The ICC profile is not appended. For the descriptions about the ICC

profile, refer to the Digital Photo Professional Instruction Manual (EOS

software, p.596).

209

You can freely create and select the folder where the captured images

are to be saved.

This operation is optional since a folder will be created automatically for

saving captured images.

1Select [Select folder].

Under the [51] tab, select [Select

folder], then press <0>.

2Select [Create folder].

3Select [OK].

A new folder with the folder number

increased by one is created.

3 Creating and Selecting a Folder

Creating a Folder

210

3 Creating and Selecting a Folder

Select a folder on the

folder selection

screen, then press <

The folder where the captured

images will be saved is selected.

Subsequently captured images will

be recorded into the selected folder.

Selecting a Folder

Number of images in folder

Folder name

Lowest file number

Highest file number

Folders

As with “100CANON” for example, the folder name starts with three digits

(the folder number) followed by five alphanumeric characters. A folder can

contain up to 9999 images (file number 0001 - 9999). When a folder

becomes full, a new folder with the folder number increased by one is

created automatically. Also, if manual reset (p.213) is executed, a new

folder will be created automatically. Folders numbered from 100 to 999 can

be created.

Creating Folders with a Computer

With the card open on the screen, create a new folder named “DCIM”. Open

the DCIM folder and create as many folders as necessary to save and

organize your images. The folder name must follow the format

“100ABC_D”. The first three digits are always the folder number from 100 to

999. The last five characters can be any combination of upper- and lower-

case letters from A to Z, numerals, and the underscore “_”. The space

cannot be used. Also note that two folder names cannot share the same

three-digit folder number (for example, “100ABC_D” and “100W_XYZ”)

even if the remaining five characters in each name are different.

211

The captured images are assigned a

sequential four-digit file number from 0001

to 9999 and saved in one folder. You can

change how the file number is assigned.

1Select [File numbering].

Under the [51] tab, select

[

File

numbering

], then press <

2Set the file numbering method.

Select [Numbering], then press

<0>.

Select [Continuous] or [Auto reset],

then press <0>.

If you want to reset the file

numbering, select [Manual reset].

Select [OK] to create a new folder,

and the file number will start with

0001.

3 File Numbering Methods

(Example) IMG_0001.JPG

File number

If the file number in folder 999 reaches 9999, shooting will not be possible

even if the card still has storage capacity. The LCD monitor will display a

message telling you to replace the card. Replace it with a new card.

For both JPEG and RAW images, the file name will start with “IMG_”.

Movie file names will start with “MVI_”.

The extension will be “.JPG” for JPEG images, “.CR2” for RAW images,

“.MP4” for movies, and “.MOV” for Time-lapse movies.

212

3 File Numbering Methods

When you wish to continue the file numbering sequence even after

the card is replaced or a new folder is created.

Even after you replace the card or create a new folder, the file

numbering continues in sequence up to 9999. This is useful when you

want to save images numbered anywhere between 0001 to 9999 on

multiple cards or in multiple folders into one folder on a computer.

If the replacement card or existing folder already contains images

recorded previously, the file numbering of the new images may continue

from the file numbering of the existing images on the card or in the

folder. If you want to use continuous file numbering, it is recommended

that you use a newly-formatted card each time.

Continuous

0051 0052

Card 1 Card 2

Next sequential file number

100

0051

101

0052

Card 1

File numbering after replacing the card File numbering after creating a folder

213

3 File Numbering Methods

When you wish to restart the file numbering from 0001 each time

the card is replaced or a new folder is created.

When you replace the card or create a folder, the file numbering restarts

from 0001 for the new images saved. This is useful if you want to

organize images by cards or folders.

If the replacement card or existing folder already contains images

recorded previously, the file numbering of the new images may continue

from the file numbering of the existing images on the card or in the

folder. If you want to save images with the file numbering starting from

0001, use a newly formatted card each time.

When you wish to reset the file numbering to 0001 or to start from

file number 0001 in a new folder.

When you reset the file numbering manually, a new folder is created

automatically and the file numbering of images saved to that folder

starts from 0001.

This is useful, for example, if you want to use different folders for the

images taken yesterday and the ones taken today.

Auto Reset

Manual Reset

0051 0001

Card 1 Card 2

File numbering is reset

100

0051

101

0001

Card 1

File numbering after replacing the card File numbering after creating a folder

214

When you set the copyright information, it will be recorded to the image

as Exif information.

1Select [Copyright information].

Under the [55] tab, select [Copyright

information], then press <0>.

2Select the item to be set.

Select [Enter author’s name] or

[Enter copyright details], then press

<0>.

3Enter text.

Operate the <W> <X> <Y> <Z>

keys or turn the <6> or <5> dial

to move the n and select the desired

character. Then press <0> to enter

it.

You can enter up to 63 characters.

To delete a character, press the <L>

button.

By selecting [Aaz1@], you can

change the input mode.

To cancel the text entry, press the

button, then select [OK].

4Exit the setting.

After entering the text, press the

<M> button, then select [OK].

The set information is saved.

3 Setting Copyright InformationN

Character palette

Input mode

215

3 Setting Copyright InformationN

When you select [Display copyright

info.] in step 2, you can check the

[Author] and [Copyright] information

that you entered.

When you select [Delete copyright information] in step 2, you can

delete the [Author] and [Copyright] information.

Checking the Copyright Information

Deleting the Copyright Information

If the entry for “Author” or “Copyright” is long, it may not be displayed

entirely when you select [Display copyright info.].

If you cannot enter text in step 3, press the <Q> button and use the

character palette when the blue frame appears.

You can also set or check the copyright information with EOS Utility

(EOS software, p.594).

216

217

GPS Settings

This chapter describes the camera’s built-in GPS

settings. The EOS 6D Mark II can receive satellite

navigation signals from GPS satellites (USA),

GLONASS satellites (Russia), and Quasi-Zenith

Satellite System (QZSS) “Michibiki” (Japan).



The GPS function is set to [

Disable

] by default.



This manual uses the term “GPS” to refer to the satellite

navigation function.

When [GPS] is set to [Mode 1] (p.221), the camera will

continue to receive GPS signals at regular intervals

even after the camera’s power switch is set to <2>.

The battery will thereby drain faster and the number of

possible shots will decrease. When you do not not use

GPS, setting [GPS] to [Disable] or [Mode 2] is

recommended.

When using GPS function, be sure to check the countries and

regions where its use is allowed, and use the function in

accordance with the laws and regulations of the country or region.

Be particularly careful when using GPS outside your home

country.

218

Geotag information*1 (latitude,

longitude, elevation) and coordinated

universal time*2 can be appended to

images.

Shooting locations of geotagged

images can be displayed on a map on

a computer.

*1: Certain traveling conditions or GPS settings may cause inaccurate geotag

information to be added to images.

*2: Coordinated Universal Time, abbreviated as UTC, is essentially the same as

Greenwich Mean Time.

You can use the GPS logging function to automatically record the route

the camera travels by logging location information at set intervals. The

location information for the route the camera has traveled can be

viewed on a map displayed on a computer.

* Certain traveling conditions, locations, or GPS settings may cause inaccurate

geotag information to be added to images.

The time information obtained from GPS signals can be set on the

camera.

GPS Features

Geotagging Images

Logging the Route Traveled

Setting the Camera Time

219

GPS Features

The GPS information recorded to the images and movies may include

information that can personally identify yourself. Therefore, be careful when

giving geotagged still photos or movies to other people or displaying them

online to the public.

220

 Countries and Regions Permitting GPS Function Use

Use of GPS function is restricted in some countries and regions, and

illegal use may be punishable under national or local regulations. To

avoid violating GPS function regulations, visit the Canon Web site to

check where the use is allowed.

Note that Canon cannot be held liable for any problems arising from

GPS function use in other countries and regions.

 Model Number

EOS 6D Mark II : DS126631

(including GPS module model: ES300)

In certain countries and regions, the use of GPS function may be

restricted. Therefore, be sure to use GPS function in accordance

with the laws and regulations of your country or region. Be

particularly careful when using GPS function outside your home

country.

Be careful about using GPS function where the operation of

electronic devices is restricted.

Others may be able to locate or identify you by using location data in

your geotagged pictures or movies. Be careful when sharing these

geotagged images, movies or GPS log files with others, such as

when posting them online where many people can view them.

GPS signal reception may take a longer time in some cases.

Hereby, Canon Inc., declares that this DS126631 is in compliance with the

essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 2014/53/EU.

The full text of the EU declaration of conformity is available at the following

internet address: http://www.canon-europe.com/ce-documentation

GPS Specifications

Frequency band(s): 1575.42±1.023 MHz, 1597.5515 - 1605.886MHz

CANON EUROPA N.V.

Bovenkerkerweg 59, 1185 XB Amstelveen, The Netherlands

CANON INC.

30-2, Shimomaruko 3-chome, Ohta-ku, Tokyo 146-8501, Japan

GPS Precautions

221

To acquire GPS signals, take the camera outside where the sky is

unobstructed. Face the top of the camera toward the sky while keeping

your hands, etc. away from the camera top.

When the signal acquisition conditions are good, it will take the camera

approx. 30 sec. to 60 sec. to acquire the GPS satellite signals after you

set [GPS] to [Mode 1] or [Mode 2]. Check that [r] is displayed on

the LCD panel, then shoot.

1Select [GPS settings].

Under the [53] tab, select [GPS

settings], then press <0>.

2Select [GPS].

3Select the mode.

Select [Mode 1] or [Mode 2].

[r] will be displayed on the LCD

panel.

Mode 1

The camera will continue to receive GPS signals at regular intervals

even when the power switch is set to <1> or <2>.

Mode 2

When the power switch is set to <1>, the camera will receive

GPS signals. When the power switch is set to <2>, the GPS

function will also turn off. However, if auto power off is in effect, the

camera will continue to receive GPS signals at regular intervals.

Acquiring GPS Signals

222

Acquiring GPS Signals

The GPS acquisition status is indicated

by the [r] icon displayed on the

camera’s LCD panel.

Constant r: Signal acquired

Blinking r: Signal not acquired yet

When you shoot while [r] is

constantly displayed, the image will be

geotagged.

GPS Acquisition Status

When [Mode 1] is set, the camera will continue to receive GPS signals at

regular intervals even when the power switch is set to <2>. This will

exhaust the battery sooner and fewer shots can be taken. If you will not

use the camera for a prolonged period, set it to [Disable].

When [Mode 2] is set, the camera will continue to receive GPS signals at

regular intervals even during auto power off. Therefore, if auto power off

is prolonged, the battery will drain faster and fewer shots can be taken. If

you will not use the camera for a prolonged period, set the power switch

to <2>.

The built-in GPS antenna is located in front of the hot shoe on the right

when viewed from the back of the camera (p.28). Note that GPS signal

can be acquired even when an external Speedlite is attached to the hot

shoe, but the acquisition sensitivity will slightly decrease.

GPS Receiver GP-E2 (sold separately) cannot be used.

223

Acquiring GPS Signals

Poor GPS Coverage

Under the following conditions, the GPS satellite signal will not be properly

acquired. As a result, the geotag information may not be recorded or

inaccurate geotag information may be recorded.

Indoors, underground, in tunnels or forests, between buildings, or in

valleys.

Near high-voltage power lines or mobile phones operating on the 1.5

GHz band.

When the camera is left inside a bag, etc.

When traveling a long distance.

When traveling through different environments.

Since GPS satellites move as time passes, satellite movement can

interfere with geotagging and cause missing or inaccurate location

information even in conditions other than the above. Additionally, the

location information may also include different location information with a

route traveled even if the camera was used at just one location.

The battery level may be low when you start using the camera due to the

effect of the GPS function. If necessary, recharge the battery or prepare

a charged, spare battery (sold separately).

The camera can receive GPS signals even when shooting in the vertical

orientation.

224

Acquiring GPS Signals

1Check the [GPS] setting.

Check that [GPS] is set to [Mode 1]

or [Mode 2].

2Select [GPS information display].

The GPS information will be

displayed.

3Take the picture.

When you shoot after GPS signal

acquisition, the image will be

geotagged.

Viewing GPS Information

Generally, elevation is not as accurate as latitude and longitude due to the

nature of GPS.

The <A> icon indicates signal conditions. When <C> is displayed, the

elevation is also recorded. Note that the elevation cannot be recorded

when is displayed.

UTC (Coordinated Universal Time) is essentially the same as Greenwich

Mean Time.

225

Acquiring GPS Signals

Play back the images and press the button to display the

shooting information screen (p.392). Then tilt <9> up or down to check

the geotag information.

Geotagging Information

Latitude

Elevation

Longitude

UTC (Coordinated Universal Time)

When you shoot a movie, the GPS information at the time when shooting

begins is recorded. Note that signal reception conditions are not recorded.

226

The interval (time) to update the geotag information can be set.

Although updating the geotag information at shorter intervals will record

more accurate location information, it will reduce the number of possible

shots because it will drain the battery faster.

1Check the [GPS] setting.

Check that [GPS] is set to [Mode 1]

or [Mode 2].

2Select [Position update intvl].

3Set the desired update interval.

Select the option to be set, then press

<0>.

Setting the Positioning Interval

If you are in a location where the GPS acquisition condition is not good,

the number of possible shots will decrease.

The nature of GPS may cause some inconsistency in update intervals.

227

The time information obtained from GPS signals can be set on the

camera. The margin of error is approx. ±1 sec.

1Check the [GPS] setting.

Check that [GPS] is set to [Mode 1]

or [Mode 2].

2Select [Auto time setting].

3Select the desired setting.

Select [Auto update] or [Set now],

then press <0>.

[Auto update] updates the time when

the camera is turned on and a GPS

signal is received.

Setting Time from GPS on the Camera

If signals from at least five GPS satellites cannot be acquired, the time

cannot be auto updated. [Set now] will be grayed out and not selectable.

Even if [Set now] can be selected, updating the time may not be

possible due to an unfavorable timing of the GPS signal acquisition.

When [Auto time setting] is set to [Auto update], the date or time

cannot be manually set with [52: Date/Time/Zone].

228

When using the GPS logging function,

the geotag information of the route the

camera travels is automatically

recorded in the camera’s internal

memory.

1Check the [GPS] setting.

Check that [GPS] is set to [Mode 1]

or [Mode 2].

2Select [GPS Logger].

3Set [Log GPS position] to

[Enable].

Select [Log GPS position], then

press <0>.

Select [Enable], then press <0>.

[x] will be displayed on the LCD

panel.

Logging the Route Traveled

With [GPS] set to [Mode 1], the GPS logging function will continue to

work even when the power switch is set to <2>.

When [Mode 2] is set, setting the power switch to <2> will also turn

off the GPS logging function. However, the GPS logging function will

continue to work during auto power off.

229

Logging the Route Traveled

Geotag information for the route the camera travels is recorded at the

intervals set with [Position update intvl] (p.226). The log data is saved

in the camera’s internal memory by date. The table below shows how

many days’ worth of data can be saved.

Log Data Capacity by Positioning Interval (Approx.)

* When recording eight hours of log data per day.

The log data saved in the internal memory can be transferred as a

log file to a card (p.230).

Log file names consist of the date and number (e.g. 17051800). A

log file is created for each day. If the time zone changes (p.49), a

new log file will be created.

If the camera’s internal memory becomes full, the oldest log data will

be erased, and the newest log data will be saved.

When [GPS] is set to [Mode 1], the camera will continue to receive GPS

signals at regular intervals even after the camera’s power switch is set

to <2>. If [Mode 2] is set, the camera will continue to receive GPS

signals at regular intervals even during auto power off. The battery will

thereby drain faster and the number of possible shots will decrease.

Additionally, when [Log GPS position] is set to [Enable], shorter

update intervals will drain the battery more quickly.

When you are not traveling or when GPS signals are weak, setting

[GPS] to [Disable] is recommended.

Geotag Information Logs

Update Interval Log Data Update Interval Log Data

Every 1 sec. 4.1 days Every 30 sec. 100 days

Every 5 sec. 20 days Every 1 min. 100 days

Every 10 sec. 41 days Every 2 min. 100 days

Every 15 sec. 61 days Every 5 min. 100 days

Battery Consumption During Logging

230

Logging the Route Traveled

The log data in the camera’s internal memory can be downloaded to a

computer with EOS Utility (EOS software, p.594) or downloaded from a

card after transferring the data to the card.

Transferring the log data to a card for downloading

When [Transfer log data to card] is

selected, you can transfer the log

data in the internal memory as log

files to a card.

Note that when log files are

transferred to a card, that log data is

erased from the camera’s internal

memory.

The log files imported to the card will be stored in the “GPS” folder in

the “MISC” folder. The extension is “.LOG”.

Selecting [Delete log data] will erase the log data saved in the

internal memory. Erasing the data may take approx. one minute.

Importing the log data using EOS software

With the camera connected to a computer with an interface cable

(sold separately), you can download the log data to the computer

with EOS Utility (EOS software). For details, refer to the EOS Utility

Instruction Manual (p.596).

Downloading Log Data to a Computer

231

Logging the Route Traveled

The GPS antenna is located at the top of the camera body. For this

reason, even when carrying the camera, such as in a bag, try to keep the

top of the camera facing upwards, and do not place anything on top of it.

Set the camera time and date as accurately as possible. Also, set correct

time zone and daylight saving time for the shooting location.

232

233

Advanced Operations for

Photographic Effects

In Creative Zone modes, you

can change various settings of

the camera as you desire to

obtain a wide variety of

shooting results, by selecting

the shutter speed and/or

aperture, adjusting the

exposure as you prefer, etc.



The

icon

at the upper right of the page title indicates that

the function is available only in Creative Zone modes

(<d>, <s>, <f>, <a>, <F

>).

After you press the shutter button halfway and let go, the

exposure settings will remain displayed in the viewfinder

and on the LCD panel for approx. 4 sec. (0) by the

metering timer function.

For the functions settable in each shooting mode, see page

526.

Set the <R> switch downward.

234

The camera automatically sets the shutter speed and aperture to suit

the subject’s brightness. This is called Program AE.

*<d> stands for Program.

* AE stands for Auto Exposure.

1Set the Mode Dial to <d>.

2Focus on the subject.

Look through the viewfinder and aim

the AF point over the subject. Then

press the shutter button halfway.

When focus is achieved, the focus

indicator <o> in the viewfinder will

light up (in One-Shot AF mode).

The shutter speed and aperture will

be set automatically and displayed in

the viewfinder and on the LCD panel.

3Check the display.

The standard exposure will be

obtained as long as the shutter speed

and aperture displays do not blink.

4Take the picture.

Compose the shot and press the

shutter button completely.

Program AE

If a description of the shooting mode appears on the LCD monitor when you

do step 1, press <0> to hide it (p.89).

235

d: Program AE

If the “30"” shutter speed and the lowest f/number

blink, it indicates underexposure.

Increase the ISO speed or use flash.

If the “4000” shutter speed and the highest f/number

blink, it indicates overexposure.

Lower the ISO speed or use an ND filter (sold

separately) to reduce the amount of light entering the

lens.

Differences Between <d> and <A> Modes

In the <A> mode, many functions, such as the AF operation and metering

mode, are set automatically to prevent spoiled shots. The functions you can

set are limited. On the other hand, with <d> mode, only the shutter speed

and aperture are set automatically. You can freely set the AF operation,

metering mode, and other functions (p.526).

Program Shift

In the Program AE mode, you can freely change the shutter speed and

aperture combination (Program) set automatically by the camera while

maintaining the same exposure. This is called Program shift.

To shift the program, press the shutter button halfway, then turn the

<6> dial until the desired shutter speed or aperture is displayed.

Program shift will be canceled automatically when the metering timer

(0) ends (exposure setting display turns off).

Program shift cannot be used with flash.

236

In this mode, you set the shutter speed and the camera automatically

sets the aperture to obtain the standard exposure matching the

brightness of the subject. This is called shutter-priority AE. A faster

shutter speed can freeze the action of a moving subject. A slower

shutter speed can create a blurred effect, giving the impression of

motion.

* <s> stands for Time value.

1Set the Mode Dial to <s>.

2Set the desired shutter speed.

While looking at the LCD panel or

viewfinder, turn the <6> dial.

3Focus on the subject.

Press the shutter button halfway.

The aperture is set automatically.

4Check the viewfinder display and

shoot.

As long as the aperture is not

blinking, the standard exposure will

be obtained.

Shutter-Priority AE

Blurred motion

(Slow shutter speed: 1/30 sec.)

Frozen motion

(Fast shutter speed: 1/2000 sec.)

237

s: Shutter-Priority AE

If the lowest f/number blinks, it indicates

underexposure.

Turn the <6> dial to set a slower shutter speed until

the aperture stops blinking or set a higher ISO speed.

If the highest f/number blinks, it indicates

overexposure.

Turn the <6> dial to set a faster shutter speed until

the aperture stops blinking or set a lower ISO speed.

Shutter Speed Display

The shutter speeds from “4000” to “4” indicate the denominator of the

fractional shutter speed. For example, “125” indicates 1/125 sec., “0"5”

indicates 0.5 sec., and “15"” is 15 sec.

238

In this mode, you set the desired aperture and the camera sets the

shutter speed automatically to obtain the standard exposure matching

the subject brightness. This is called aperture-priority AE. A higher

f/number (smaller aperture hole) will make more of the foreground and

background fall within acceptable focus. On the other hand, a lower

f/number (larger aperture hole) will make less of the foreground and

background fall within acceptable focus.

* <f> stands for Aperture value (aperture opening).

1Set the Mode Dial to <f>.

2Set the desired aperture.

While looking at the LCD panel or

viewfinder, turn the <6> dial.

3Focus on the subject.

Press the shutter button halfway.

The shutter speed is set

automatically.

4Check the viewfinder display and

shoot.

As long as the shutter speed is not

blinking, the standard exposure will

be obtained.

Aperture-Priority AE

Sharp foreground and background

(With a high aperture f/number: f/32)

Blurred background

(With a low aperture f/number: f/5.6)

239

f: Aperture-Priority AE

If the “30"” shutter speed blinks, it indicates

underexposure.

Turn the <6> dial to set a larger aperture (lower f/

number) until the shutter speed blinking stops or set a

higher ISO speed.

If the “4000” shutter speed blinks, it indicates

overexposure.

Turn the <6> dial to set a smaller aperture (higher f/

number) until the shutter speed blinking stops or set a

lower ISO speed.

Aperture Value Display

The higher the f/number, the smaller the aperture opening will be. The

f/number displayed varies depending on the lens. If no lens is attached to

the camera, “00” will be displayed for the aperture.

240

f: Aperture-Priority AE

The aperture opening (diaphragm) changes only at the moment when

the picture is taken. Otherwise, the aperture remains fully open.

Therefore, when you look at the scene through the viewfinder or on the

LCD monitor, the depth of field will look narrow (shallow).

Press the depth-of-field preview button

to stop down the lens to the current

aperture setting and check the depth of

field (range of acceptable focus).

Depth-of-Field PreviewN

With an external Speedlite, pressing the camera’s depth-of-field preview

button will fire a modeling flash. (Depth-of-field preview will not work.)

A higher f/number will make more of the foreground and background fall

within acceptable focus. However, the viewfinder will look darker.

The depth-of-field effect can be clearly seen on the Live View image as

you change the aperture and press the depth-of-field preview button

(p.290).

The exposure will be locked (AE lock) while the depth-of-field preview

button is being pressed.

241

In this mode, you set both the shutter speed and aperture as desired. To

determine the exposure, refer to the exposure level indicator in the

viewfinder or use a commercially-available exposure meter. This

method is called manual exposure.

* <a> stands for Manual.

1Set the Mode Dial to <a>.

2Set the ISO speed (p.170).

3Set the shutter speed and

aperture.

To set the shutter speed, turn the

<6> dial. To set the aperture, turn

the <5> dial.

If it cannot be set, set the <R>

switch downward, then turn the

<6> or <5> dial.

4Focus on the subject.

Press the shutter button halfway.



The exposure setting will be displayed

in the viewfinder and on the LCD panel.



Check the exposure level mark <

> to

see how far the current exposure level

is from the standard exposure level.

5Set the exposure and take the

picture.

Check the exposure level indicator

and set the desired shutter speed and

aperture.

If the exposure level exceeds ±3

stops from the standard exposure,

the end of the exposure level

indicator will display or <J>.

a: Manual Exposure

Shutter speed

Aperture

Exposure level mark

Standard exposure index

242

a: Manual Exposure

If the ISO speed is set to A (AUTO) for manual exposure shooting, you

can set exposure compensation (p.245) as follows:

[z2: Expo.comp./AEB]

Under [8C.Fn III-4: Custom Controls], with [ : Expo comp

(hold btn, turn )] (p.502).

Quick Control (p.61)

Exposure Compensation with ISO Auto

If ISO Auto is set, the ISO speed setting will change to obtain the

standard exposure with the set shutter speed and aperture. Therefore,

you may not obtain the desired exposure effect. In such a case, set the

exposure compensation.

The set exposure value will not be applied to movie shooting.

Under [z2: Auto Lighting Optimizer], if the checkmark [X] for

[Disabled in M or B modes] is removed, Auto Lighting Optimizer can be

set even in the <a> mode (p.194).

With the camera set to the <a> mode + ISO Auto + <q> (Evaluative

metering) and [8C.Fn I-8: Meter. mode, AE locked after focus] set to

the default setting (p.474), holding down the shutter button halfway will

lock the ISO speed after focus is achieved with One-Shot AF.

When ISO Auto is set, you can press the <A> button to lock the ISO

speed.

If you press the <A> button and recompose the shot, you can see the

exposure level difference on the exposure level indicator compared to

when the <A> button was pressed.

If exposure compensation (p.245) was applied in <d>, <s>, or <f>

mode, the exposure compensation amount already set will still be

maintained when the shooting mode is switched to <a> with ISO Auto

set.

With ISO Auto set and [8C.Fn I-1: Exposure level increments] set to

[1/2-stop], any 1/2-stop exposure compensation will be implemented

with the ISO speed (1/3 stop) and shutter speed. However, the shutter

speed displayed will not change.

243

You can select one of four methods to measure the subject brightness.

In Basic Zone modes, evaluative metering is set automatically. (In the

<8: y> mode, center-weighted average metering is set

automatically.)

1Press the <q> button (9).

2Select the metering mode.

While looking at the LCD panel or the

viewfinder, turn the <6> or <5>

dial.

q: Evaluative metering

w: Partial metering

r: Spot metering

e: Center-weighted average

metering

q: Evaluative metering

General-purpose metering mode suited even for

backlit subjects. The camera adjusts the exposure

automatically to suit the scene.

w Partial metering

Effective where there are much brighter lights

around the subject due to backlight, etc. Partial

metering covers approx. 6.5% of the viewfinder

area at the center.

q Selecting the Metering ModeN

244

q Selecting the Metering ModeN

r Spot metering

Effective when metering a specific part of the

subject or scene. Spot metering covers approx.

3.2% of the viewfinder area at the center. The spot

metering circle will be displayed in the viewfinder.

e Center-weighted average metering

The metering is averaged for the entire scene with

the viewfinder center weighted more heavily.

By default, the camera will set the exposure as follows. With <q>

(Evaluative metering), holding down the shutter button halfway will lock

the exposure setting (AE lock) after focus is achieved with One-Shot AF.

In the <w> (Partial metering), <r> (Spot metering), and <e>

(Center-weighted average metering) modes, the exposure is set at the

moment the picture is taken. (Pressing the shutter button halfway does

not lock the exposure.)

With [8C.Fn I-8: Meter. mode, AE locked after focus], you can set

whether or not to lock the exposure (AE lock) when focus is achieved

with One-Shot AF (p.474).

245

Exposure compensation can brighten (increased exposure) or darken

(decreased exposure) the standard exposure set by the camera.

Exposure compensation can be set in the <d>, <s>, and <f>

shooting modes. Although you can set the exposure compensation up

to ±5 stops in 1/3-stop increments for viewfinder shooting, the exposure

compensation indicator in the viewfinder and on the LCD panel can

display the setting only up to ±3 stops. If you want to set the exposure

compensation setting beyond ±3 stops, use the Quick Control (p.61) or

follow the instructions for [z2: Expo.comp./AEB] on page 247.

If the <a> mode and ISO Auto are both set, see page 242 to set the

exposure compensation.

1Check the exposure.

Press the shutter button halfway

(0) and check the exposure level

indicator.

2Set the compensation amount.

While looking at the viewfinder or

LCD panel, turn the <5> dial.

If it cannot be set, set the <R>

switch downward, then turn the <5>

dial.

For exposure compensation, the

<O> icon will be displayed in the

viewfinder and on the LCD panel.

3Take the picture.

To cancel exposure compensation,

set the exposure level indicator <h/N>

to the standard exposure index (<a/

C>).

Setting the Desired Exposure Compensation

Increased exposure for a

brighter image

Decreased exposure for a

darker image

246

O Setting the Desired Exposure CompensationN

For Live View and movie shooting, the exposure compensation can be

set only up to ±3 stops.

If [z2: Auto Lighting Optimizer] (p.194) is set to any setting other than

[Disable], the image may still look bright even if a decreased exposure

compensation for a darker image is set.

The set exposure compensation amount will not be applied to movie

shooting.

The exposure compensation amount will remain in effect even after you

set the power switch to <2>.

After setting the exposure compensation amount, you can set the

<R> switch upward to prevent the exposure compensation amount

from changing inadvertently.

If the exposure compensation amount exceeds ±3 stops, the end of the

exposure level indicator will display or <J>.

With [8C.Fn I-7: Exposure comp. auto cancel], you can set whether

to cancel the exposure compensation setting when the power switch is

set to <2> (p.474).

247

By changing the shutter speed, aperture, or ISO speed automatically,

you can bracket the exposure up to ±3 stops in 1/3-stop increments for

three consecutive shots. This is called AEB.

* AEB stands for Auto Exposure Bracketing.

1Select [Expo.comp./AEB].

Under the [z2] tab, select

[Expo.comp./AEB], then press

<0>.

2Set the AEB range.

Turn the <6> dial to set the AEB

range. By pressing the <Y> <Z>

keys, you can set the exposure

compensation amount.

Press <0> to set it.

When you exit the menu, the AEB

range will be displayed on the LCD

panel.

3Take the picture.

Three bracketed shots will be taken

according to the drive mode set in this

sequence: Standard exposure,

decreased exposure, and increased

exposure.

AEB will not be automatically

canceled. To cancel AEB, follow step

2 to turn off the AEB range display.

h Auto Exposure Bracketing (AEB)N

AEB range

Standard exposure

Increased exposure

Decreased exposure

248

h Auto Exposure Bracketing (AEB)N

If [z2: Auto Lighting Optimizer] (p.194) is set to any setting other than

[Disable], the effect of AEB may be reduced.

During AEB shooting, <A> will blink in the viewfinder.

If the drive mode is set to or , press the shutter button three

times for each shot. When <o>, , or <M> is set and you hold

down the shutter button completely, the three bracketed shots will be

taken consecutively and the camera will automatically stop shooting.

When <Q> or <k> is set, the three bracketed shots will be taken

consecutively after a 10-sec. or 2-sec. delay. When <q> is set, the

three bracketed shots multiplied by the number of shots set with [Self-

timer: Continuous] will be taken consecutively after a 10-sec. delay.

You can set AEB in combination with exposure compensation.

If the AEB range exceeds ±3 stops, the end of the exposure level

indicator will display or <J>.

AEB cannot be used with flash, bulb exposures, or when Multi Shot

Noise Reduction or HDR Mode is set.

AEB will be canceled automatically if you do any of the following: Setting

the power switch to <2>, switching to movie shooting, or when the

flash is fully charged.

249

You can lock the exposure when you want to set the focus and

exposure separately or when you are to take multiple shots at the same

exposure setting. Press the <A> button to lock the exposure, then

recompose and take the picture. This is called AE lock. It is effective for

shooting backlit subjects, etc.

1Focus on the subject.

Press the shutter button halfway.



The exposure setting will be displayed.

2Press the <A> button (0).

The <A> icon lights up in the

viewfinder to indicate that the

exposure setting is locked (AE lock).



Each time you press the <

> button,

the current exposure setting is locked.

3Recompose and take the picture.

When you are to take more pictures

while maintaining the AE lock, keep

holding down the <A> button and

press the shutter button to take

another picture.

* When the <q> mode is set and the lens’s focus mode switch is set to <MF>,

AE lock is applied with the exposure weighted on the center AF point.

Locking the Exposure for Shooting (AE Lock)

AE Lock Effects

Metering Mode

(p.243)

AF Point Selection Method (p.136, 137)

Automatic Selection Manual Selection

qAE lock is applied at the AF

point that achieved focus.

AE lock is applied at the

selected AF point.

wre AE lock is applied at the center AF point.

AE lock is not possible with bulb exposures.

250

In this mode, the shutter stays open as long as you hold down the

shutter button completely, and closes when you let go of the shutter

button. This photographic technique is called “bulb exposure”. Use bulb

exposures for night scenes, fireworks, the heavens, and other subjects

requiring long exposures.

1Set the Mode Dial to <F>.

2Set the desired aperture.

While looking at the LCD panel or the

viewfinder, turn the <6> or <5>

dial.

3Take the picture.

The exposure will continue for as long

as you keep the shutter button

pressed completely.

The elapsed exposure time will be

displayed on the LCD panel.

F: Long (Bulb) Exposures

Elapsed exposure time

Do not point the camera toward an intense light source, such as the sun

or an intense artificial light source. Doing so may damage the image

sensor or the camera’s internal components.

Long bulb exposures produce more noise in the image than usual.

If ISO Auto is set, ISO 400 will be set (p.172).

When shooting bulb exposures without using the bulb timer, if you use

both the self-timer and mirror lockup, keep pressing the shutter button

completely (for self-timer delay time + bulb exposure time). If you let go

of the shutter button during the self-timer countdown, there will be a

shutter-release sound, but no picture will be taken. If you use the bulb

timer under the same shooting conditions, you need not keep holding

down the shutter button completely.

251

F: Long (Bulb) Exposures

You can preset the bulb exposure’s exposure time. With the bulb timer,

you need not keep holding down the shutter button during the bulb

exposure. This reduces camera shake.

The bulb timer can be set only in the <F> (bulb exposure). It cannot be

set (or will not function) in any other mode.

1Select [Bulb timer].

Under the [z4] tab, select [Bulb

timer], then press <0>.

2Select [Enable].

Select [Enable], then press the

button.

H Bulb TimerN

With [z3: Long exp. noise reduction], you can reduce the noise

generated during long exposures (p.197).

For bulb exposures, using a tripod and bulb timer is recommended. You

can also use mirror lockup (p.265) in combination.

You can also shoot bulb exposures by using Remote Switch RS-80N3

(sold separately) or Timer Remote Controller TC-80N3 (sold separately,

p.276).

You can also use Remote Controller RC-6 (sold separately, p.271) or

Wireless Remote Control BR-E1 (sold separately, p.273) for bulb

exposures. When you press the remote controller’s transmit button, the

bulb exposure will start immediately or 2 sec. later. Press the button

again to stop the bulb exposure.

252

F: Long (Bulb) Exposures

3Set the desired exposure time.

Select the hour, minute, or second.

Press <0> so <r> is displayed.

Set the desired number, then press

<0>. (Returns to <s>.)

4Select [OK].

The set time will be displayed on the

menu screen.

When you exit the menu, <H>

will be displayed on the LCD panel.

5Take the picture.

Press the shutter button completely,

and the bulb exposure will start and

continue until the set time elapses.

During bulb timer shooting, <H>

will blink.

To cancel the timer setting, set

[Disable] in step 2.

Bulb timer

Elapsed exposure time

While the bulb timer is operating, if you press the shutter button

completely and let go of it, the bulb exposure will stop.

If you keep pressing the shutter button completely after the exposure

starts, the bulb exposure will continue even after the set exposure time

elapses. (The bulb exposure will not stop automatically when the set

exposure time elapses.)

If the drive mode is set to <q> (Self-timer: Continuous), the bulb timer

cannot be set.

Doing any of the following will cancel the bulb timer (reverts to

[Disable]): Setting the power switch to <2>, replacing the battery,

replacing the card, switching to movie shooting, or changing the shooting

mode to a mode other than <F>.

253

You can shoot still photos with clipped highlights and shadows reduced

for a high dynamic range of tones even in high-contrast scenes. HDR

shooting is effective for landscape and still-life shots.

With HDR shooting, three images of different exposures (standard

exposure, underexposure, and overexposure) are captured

consecutively for each shot and then merged together

automatically. The HDR image is recorded as a JPEG image.

* HDR stands for High Dynamic Range.

1Select [HDR Mode].

Under the [z3] tab, select [HDR

Mode], then press <0>.

2Set [Adjust dyn range].

Select the desired dynamic range

setting, then press <0>.

Selecting [Auto] will have the

dynamic range set automatically

depending on the image’s overall

tonal range.

The higher the number, the wider the

dynamic range will be.

To exit HDR shooting, select [Disable

HDR].

3Set [Effect].

Select the desired effect, then press

<0>.

: HDR (High Dynamic Range) Shooting

254

w: HDR (High Dynamic Range) ShootingN

P: Natural

For images preserving a wide tonal range where the highlight and

shadow details would otherwise be lost. Clipped highlights and

shadows will be reduced.

A: Art standard

While the clipped highlights and shadows will be reduced more than

with [Natural], the contrast will be lower, and the gradation flatter to

have the picture look like a painting. The subject outlines will have

bright (or dark) edges.

B: Art vivid

The colors are more saturated than with [Art standard], and the low

contrast and flat gradation create a graphic art effect.

C: Art bold

The colors are the most saturated, making the subject pop out, and

the picture looks like an oil painting.

D: Art embossed

The color saturation, brightness, contrast and gradation are

decreased to make the picture look flat. The picture looks faded and

old. The subject outlines will have bright (or dark) edges.

Effects

Art standard Art vivid Art bold Art embossed

Saturation Standard High Higher Low

Outline emphasis Standard Weak Strong Stronger

Brightness Standard Standard Standard Dark

Tone Flat Flat Flat Flatter

Each effect will be applied based on the characteristics of the Picture Style

currently set (p.176).

255

w: HDR (High Dynamic Range) ShootingN

4Set [Continuous HDR].

Select either [1 shot only] or [Every

shot], then press <0>.

With [1 shot only], HDR shooting will

be canceled automatically after the

shooting ends.

With [Every shot], HDR shooting

continues until the setting in step 2 is

set to [Disable HDR].

5Set [Auto Image Align].

For handheld shooting, select

[Enable]. When using a tripod, select

[Disable], then press <0>.

6Take the picture.

HDR shooting is possible with

viewfinder shooting and Live View

shooting.

When you press the shutter button

completely, three consecutive images

will be captured, and the HDR image

will be recorded to the card.

256

w: HDR (High Dynamic Range) ShootingN

You cannot select RAW or RAW+JPEG image quality. The HDR mode

cannot be set if RAW or RAW+JPEG is set.

HDR shooting is not possible with expanded ISO speeds (L, H1, H2).

HDR shooting is possible within ISO 100 - ISO 40000 (varies depending

on the settings of [Minimum] and [Maximum] for [ISO speed range]).

The flash will not fire during HDR shooting.

HDR shooting will automatically have the following set to [Disable]:

[Distortion correction] under [z1: Lens aberration correction],

[z2: Auto Lighting Optimizer], and [z3: Highlight tone priority].

AEB cannot be set.

If you shoot a moving subject, the moving subject may leave

afterimages.

In HDR shooting, 3 images are captured with different shutter speeds set

automatically. Therefore, even in the <s> and <a> shooting modes,

the shutter speed will be shifted based on the shutter speed you set.

To prevent camera shake, a high ISO speed may be set.

You can set the camera to display <z> in the viewfinder and on the

LCD panel for when the HDR mode is set (p.489).

257

w: HDR (High Dynamic Range) ShootingN

When shooting HDR images with [Auto Image Align] set to [Enable],

AF point display information (p.397) and Dust Delete Data (p.452) will

not be appended to the image.

If you perform handheld HDR shooting with [Auto Image Align] set to

[Enable], image periphery will be slightly trimmed and resolution will be

slightly lowered. Also, if the images cannot be aligned properly due to

camera shake, etc., auto image alignment may not take effect. Note that

when shooting with excessively bright (or dark) exposure settings, auto

image alignment may not work properly.

If you perform handheld HDR shooting with [Auto Image Align] set to

[Disable], the 3 images may not be properly aligned and the HDR effect

may be reduced. Using a tripod is recommended.

Auto image alignment may not function properly with repetitive patterns

(lattice, stripes, etc.) or flat, single-tone images.

The color gradation of the sky or white walls may not be reproduced

correctly. Irregular colors, irregular exposure or noise may appear.

HDR shooting under fluorescent or LED lighting may result in unnatural

color reproduction of the illuminated areas.

With HDR shooting, the images will be merged, then saved to the card,

so it may take some time. During the processing of the images, “buSY”

will be displayed in the viewfinder and on the LCD panel, and you cannot

take another picture until the processing is complete.

If you set HDR shooting and then switch to movie shooting, the HDR

shooting setting may be canceled (the [Adjust dyn range] setting may

be changed to [Disable HDR]).

258

You can shoot two to nine exposures to be merged into one image. With

Live View shooting (p.289), you can see in real time how the exposures

are merged when you shoot multiple-exposure images.

1Select [Multiple exposure].

Under the [z3] tab, select [Multiple

exposure], then press <0>.

2Set [Multiple exposure].

Select [Enable], then press <0>.

To exit shooting multiple exposures,

select [Disable].

3Set [Multi-expos ctrl].

Select the desired multiple-exposure

control method, then press <0>.

Additive

The exposure of each single image captured is added cumulatively.

Based on the [No. of exposures], set a negative exposure

compensation. Follow the basic guide below to set the exposure

compensation amount.

Exposure Compensation Setting Guide by Number of

Exposures

Two exposures: -1 stop, three exposures: -1.5 stop, four exposures:

-2 stops

Average

Based on the [No. of exposures], negative exposure compensation

is set automatically as you shoot multiple exposures. If you shoot

multiple exposures of the same scene, the exposure of the subject’s

background will be automatically controlled to obtain the standard

exposure.

P Multiple ExposuresN

259

P Multiple ExposuresN

4Set the [No. of exposures].

Select the number of exposures, then

press <0>.

You can set it from 2 to 9 exposures.

5Set [Continue Mult-exp].

Select either [1 shot only] or

[Continuously], then press <0>.

With [1 shot only], multiple-exposure

shooting will be canceled

automatically after the shooting ends.

With [Continuously], multiple-

exposure shooting continues until the

setting in step 2 is set to [Disable].

6Shoot the first exposure.

The captured image will be displayed.

The icon will blink.

You can check the remaining

exposures in brackets [ ] displayed in

the viewfinder or on the screen.

Pressing the <x> button enables

you to view the captured image

(p.263).

Remaining number of

exposures

260

P Multiple ExposuresN

7Shoot subsequent exposures.

The captured image combining the

multiple exposures will be displayed.

When you perform Live View

shooting, the multiple-exposure

images merged so far will be

displayed. By pressing the

button, you can display only the Live

View image.

Multiple-exposure shooting will end

when the set number of exposures

are taken. With continuous shooting,

if you keep holding down the shutter

button, the shooting will stop after the

set number of exposures are taken.

While shooting, you can press the <x> button to check the multiple-

exposure image created so far or delete the last single exposure (p.263).

The shooting information for the last shot will be recorded and appended

to the multiple-exposure image.

Only the multiple-exposure image will be saved. The multiple exposures

taken in steps 6 and 7 will not be saved.

During continuous shooting, the continuous shooting speed will

decrease greatly.

The image-recording quality, ISO speed, Picture Style, high ISO speed

noise reduction, color space, etc. set for the first single exposure will also

be set for the subsequent exposures.

You cannot set an aspect ratio for multiple-exposure shooting. Pictures

will be taken with a 3:2 aspect ratio.

261

P Multiple ExposuresN

For multiple-exposure shooting, the settings will be automatically

switched to [Disable] for the following: all the items of [z1: Lens

aberration correction], [z2: Auto Lighting Optimizer], and [z3:

Highlight tone priority].

If [z3: Picture Style] is set to [Auto], [Standard] will be applied for

shooting.

With [Additive] set, the noise, irregular colors, banding, etc. of the image

displayed during shooting may look different from the multiple-exposure

image recorded in the end.

With multiple exposures, the more exposures there are, the more

noticeable the noise, irregular colors, and banding will be.

If [Additive] is set, the image processing after taking the multiple

exposures will take time. (The access lamp will light up longer.)

If you perform Live View shooting with [Additive] set, the Live View

function will stop automatically when the multiple-exposure shooting

ends.

If the number of multiple exposures is less than the number of

continuous shots set with <q> (Self-timer: Continuous), the multiple

exposure shooting will end after the number of exposures set with [No.

of exposures] is taken.

In step 7, the brightness and noise of the multiple-exposure image

displayed during Live View shooting will be different from those of the

final multiple-exposure image recorded.

Doing any of the following will cancel the multiple-exposure shooting:

Setting the power switch to <2>, replacing the battery, replacing the

card, or switching to movie shooting.

During multiple-exposure shooting, [Clean nowf] or [Clean

manually] under [54: Sensor cleaning] cannot be selected.

While shooting, if you switch to a Basic Zone mode or to <w> or <x>,

the multiple-exposure shooting will end.

If you connect the camera to a computer, multiple-exposure shooting will

not be possible. If you connect the camera to a computer during

shooting, multiple-exposure shooting will end.

262

P Multiple ExposuresN

You can select a 1 image recorded on the card as the first single

exposure. The image data of the selected 1 image will remain intact.

You can only select 1 images. You cannot select 41/61 or

JPEG images.

1Select [Select image for multi.

expo.].

The images on the card will be

displayed.

2Select the first image.

Turn the <5> dial to select the image to be used as the first

single exposure, then press <0>.

Select [OK].

The file number of the selected image will be displayed at the

bottom of the screen.

3Take the picture.

When you select the first image, the number of remaining

exposures as set with [No. of exposures] will decrease by 1.

For example, if [No. of exposures] is 3, you can shoot two

exposures.

Merging Multiple Exposures with an

Image Recorded on the Card

The following cannot be selected as the first single exposure: Images

shot with [z3: Highlight tone priority] set to [Enable] or images with

[z4: Aspect ratio] not set to [3:2] (p.168).

[Disable] will be applied for [z1: Lens aberration correction] and

[z2: Auto Lighting Optimizer] regardless of the settings of the 1

image selected as the first single exposure.

The ISO speed, Picture Style, high ISO speed noise reduction, color

space, etc. set for the first 1 image will also be applied for the

subsequent images.

If Picture Style is [Auto] for the 1 image selected as the first 1

image, [Standard] will be applied for shooting.

You cannot select an image taken with another camera.

263

P Multiple ExposuresN

Before you finish shooting the set

number of exposures, you can press the

<x> button to check the current

exposure level, overlap alignment, and

overall effect of the merged multiple-

exposure image.

Pressing the <L> button will display the

operations possible during multiple-

exposure shooting.

Checking and Deleting Multiple Exposures During Shooting

You can also select a 1 multiple-exposure image as the first single

exposure.

If you select [Deselect img], the image selection for the first image will

be canceled.

Operation Description

2 Return to previous screen The screen before you pressed the <L> button

will reappear.

q Undo last image

Deletes the last image you shot (shoot another

image). The number of remaining exposures

will increase by 1.

W Save and exit

The image shot so far will be saved as a

multiple-exposure image and the multiple-

exposure shooting will end.

r Exit without saving The multiple-exposure shooting will end without

saving the image.

During multiple-exposure shooting, you can only play back multiple-

exposure images.

264

P Multiple ExposuresN

Are there any restrictions on the image-recording quality?

All JPEG image-recording quality settings can be selected. If 41

or 61 is set, the merged multiple-exposure image will be saved

as a 1 image.

Can I merge images recorded on the card?

With [Select image for multi. expo.], you can select the first single

exposure from the images recorded on the card (p.262). Note that

you cannot merge multiple images already recorded on the card.

Are multiple exposures possible with Live View shooting?

You can shoot multiple exposures with Live View shooting (p.289).

Will auto power off take effect during multiple-exposure

shooting?

As long as [52: Auto power off] is set to any setting other than

[Disable], the power will turn off automatically after approx. 30 min.

If the auto power off takes effect, multiple-exposure shooting will

end, and multiple-exposure settings will be canceled.

Before starting the multiple-exposure shooting, the auto power off

will take effect at the time set with the camera, and multiple-

exposure settings will be canceled.

FAQ

Image Quality Setting Merged Multiple-Exposure

JPEG JPEG

1 1

41/61 1

1+JPEG 1+JPEG

41/61+JPEG 1+JPEG

265

Camera vibrations caused by the mirror’s reflex action when the picture

is taken is called “mirror shock”. Mirror lockup keeps the mirror up

before and during exposure to reduce blur caused by camera

vibrations. Useful when shooting close-ups (macro photography), using

a super telephoto lens, shooting at slow shutter speeds, etc.

1Select [Mirror lockup].

Under the [z4] tab, select [Mirror

lockup], then press <0>.

2Select [Enable].

3Focus on the subject, then press

the shutter button completely.

The mirror will swing up.

4Press the shutter button

completely again.

The picture is taken and the mirror

goes back down.

2 Mirror LockupN

266

2 Mirror LockupN

Do not point the camera toward an intense light source, such as the sun

or an intense artificial light source. Doing so may damage the image

sensor or the camera’s internal components.

In very bright light, such as at the beach or a ski slope on a sunny day,

take the picture promptly after mirror lockup is stabilized.

During mirror lockup, shooting function settings and menu operations are

disabled.

When [Enable] is set, single shooting will take effect even if the drive

mode is set to continuous.

You can also use the self-timer with mirror lockup.

If approx. 30 sec. elapse after the mirror has locked up, it will go back

down automatically. Pressing the shutter button completely locks up the

mirror again.

When shooting with mirror lockup, using a tripod and Remote Switch RS-

80N3 (sold separately) or Timer Remote Controller TC-80N3 (sold

separately) is recommended (p.276).

You can also use Remote Controller RC-6 (sold separately, p.271) or

Wireless Remote Control BR-E1 (sold separately, p.273) with mirror

lockup. Setting the remote controller to a 2-sec. delay is recommended.

267

With the interval timer, you can set the shooting interval and the number

of shots. The camera will repeat taking one shot with the set interval

until the set number of shots are taken.

1Select [Interval timer].

Under the [z4] tab (the [z1] tab in

Basic Zone modes), select [Interval

timer], then press <0>.

2Select [Enable].

Select [Enable], then press the

button.

3Set the shooting interval and

number of shots.

Select the item to be set (hours:

minutes: seconds / number of shots).

Press <0> so <r> is displayed.

Set the desired number, then press

<0>. (Returns to <s>.)

Interval

Settable in the range from [00:00:01] to [99:59:59].

Number of shots

Settable in the range from [01] to [99]. If you set [00], the camera will

keep shooting an unlimited number of shots until you stop the

interval timer shooting.

H Interval Timer Shooting

268

H Interval Timer Shooting

4Select [OK].

The interval timer settings will be

displayed on the menu screen.

When you exit the menu, <H>

will be displayed on the LCD panel.

5Take the picture.

First shot is taken and shooting

continues according to the interval

timer settings.

During interval timer shooting,

<H> will blink.

After the set number of shots are

taken, the interval timer shooting will

stop and be automatically canceled.

Shooting interval

Number of shots

Interval timer

Using a tripod is recommended.

Taking test shots in advance is recommended.

After the interval timer shooting starts, you can still press the shutter

button completely to take a picture as usual. However, approx. 5 sec.

before the next interval timer shooting, the shooting function settings,

menu operation, image playback, and other operations will be

suspended, and the camera will go back to shooting-ready state.

If a picture is being taken or an image is being processed when the next

shot is scheduled on the interval timer, the shot set for that time will be

skipped. The camera will thereby shoot fewer shots than the number set

for interval timer shooting.

Auto power off takes effect also with the interval timer after approx. 8

sec. of non-operation regardless of the [52: Auto power off] setting.

The power will automatically turn on approx. 1 min. before the next shot.

Interval timer shooting can also be combined with AEB, white balance

bracketing, multiple exposures, and HDR mode.

You can stop the interval timer shooting in progress by selecting

[Disable] or turning the power switch to <2>.

269

H Interval Timer Shooting

Do not point the camera toward an intense light source, such as the sun

or an intense artificial light source. Doing so may damage the image

sensor or the camera’s internal components.

If the lens’s focus mode switch is set to <AF>, the camera will not shoot

when focus is not achieved. Setting it to <MF> and focusing manually

before shooting is recommended.

Live View shooting, movie shooting, or bulb exposures cannot be

performed with interval timer.

If the shooting time is long, using the household power outlet

accessories (sold separately, p.520) is recommended.

If a shutter speed longer than the shooting interval, such as a long

exposure, is set, the camera cannot shoot with the set interval. The

camera will thereby shoot fewer shots than the number set for interval

timer shooting. Also, the number of shots may decrease when the

shutter speed and the shooting interval are nearly the same.

If the time it takes to record to the card exceeds the interval between

shots due to the shooting functions set or card performance, some of the

shots may not be taken with the set intervals.

If you use flash with interval timer shooting, set an interval longer than

the flash’s recharging time. If the interval is too short, the flash may not

fire.

If the shooting interval is too short, the camera may not take a picture or

may capture an image without autofocusing.

Interval timer shooting will be canceled and reset to [Disable] if you do

any of the following: Setting the power switch to <2>, displaying the

Live View shooting or movie shooting screen, setting the shooting mode

to <F>, <w>, or <x>, or using EOS Utility (EOS software, p.594).

After interval timer shooting starts, you cannot use remote control

shooting (p.271) or remote-release shooting with an EOS-dedicated,

external Speedlite.

If your eye will not remain on the viewfinder eyepiece during interval

timer shooting, attach the eyepiece cover (p.270). If stray light enters the

viewfinder when the picture is taken, it may throw off the exposure.

270

When you take a picture without looking through the viewfinder, such as

when you use the self-timer, bulb exposure, or a remote switch, stray

light entering the viewfinder may cause the picture to look dark

(underexposed). To prevent this, use the eyepiece cover (p.38)

attached to the camera strap.

Note that attaching the eyepiece cover is not necessary in Live View

shooting or movie shooting.

1Detach the eyecup.

Push the bottom of the eyecup to

detach it.

2Attach the eyepiece cover.

Slide the eyepiece cover down into

the eyepiece groove to attach it.

After you finish shooting, detach the

eyepiece cover and attach the

eyecup.

Using the Eyepiece Cover

271

You can use Remote Controller RC-6 (with infrared control, sold

separately) or Wireless Remote Control BR-E1 (with Bluetooth, sold

separately) for remote control shooting.

You can shoot remotely up to approx. 5 meters/

16.4 feet away from the camera. You can either shoot

immediately or with a 2-sec. delay.

1Focus on the subject.

2Set the lens’s focus mode switch

to <MF>.

You can also shoot with <f>.

3Press the <R> button (9).

4Select the self-timer/remote

controller.

Look at the LCD panel or viewfinder

and turn the <6> dial to select

<Q> or <k>.

Remote Control Shooting

Remote Controller RC-6 (Sold Separately)

272

Remote Control Shooting

5Press the remote controller’s

release (transmit) button.

Point the remote controller toward the

camera’s remote control sensor, then

press the release (transmit) button.

The self-timer/remote control lamp

lights up and the picture is taken.

Remote

control

sensor

If you select <q> in step 4, you cannot perform remote control

shooting.

Under [51: Wireless communication settings], if [Bluetooth

function] is set to [Smartphone] or [Remote], you cannot use infrared

remote controllers such as the RC-6 for remote control shooting.

Fluorescent or LED lighting may cause camera misoperation by

triggering the shutter inadvertently. Try to keep the camera away from

such light sources.

If you point a remote controller for a TV set toward the camera and

operate it, it may cause camera misoperation by triggering the shutter

inadvertently.

If flash light is emitted from a flash on another camera around this

camera, it may cause camera malfunction by triggering the shutter

inadvertently. Do not expose the remote control sensor to flash light from

a flash on another camera.

You can also use Remote Controller RC-1 and RC-5 (infrared remote

controller).

Remote control shooting is also possible with devices such as an EX-

series Speedlite equipped with a remote-release function (sold

separately).

If remote control shooting is enabled, the auto power off will take effect in

approx. 2 min. even if [52: Auto power off] is set to [1 min.

Remote control also works with movie shooting (p.381).

273

Remote Control Shooting

Wireless Remote Control BR-E1 (sold separately) compatible with

Bluetooth® low energy technology enables remote control shooting up

to approx. 5 meters/16.4 feet from the camera.

To use the BR-E1, you must first pair the camera and remote

controller so they recognize each other.

1Select [Wireless communication

settings].

Under the [51] tab, select [Wireless

communication settings], then

press <0>.

2Select [Bluetooth function].

3Select [Bluetooth function].

4Select [Remote].

If the message “Register a nickname

to identify the camera.” appears,

press <0> and register a nickname.

For the procedure to register a

nickname, refer to page 13 of the “Wi-

Fi (Wireless Communication)

Function Instruction Manual”.

Wireless Remote Control BR-E1 (Sold Separately)

Pairing

274

Remote Control Shooting

5Select [Pairing].

Select [Pairing], then press <0>.

Press and hold the <W> button and

<T> button on the BR-E1

simultaneously for 3 sec. or more.

Pairing starts.

For instructions after the pairing is

complete, refer to the BR-E1’s

Instruction Manual.

When the pairing is complete, the

remote controller will be registered in

the camera and the screen shown on

the left will appear.

Even if the camera’s power is turned off by the auto power off function,

the camera battery will still be consumed with the Bluetooth connection

established.

If you selected [Smartphone] or [Remote] in step 4, you cannot use

infrared remote control units such as Remote Controller RC-6 (sold

separately).

When you do not use the Bluetooth function, setting it to [Disable] in

step 4 is recommended. To use the remote controller again, just select

[Remote] again to automatically reconnect with the camera.

If remote control shooting is enabled, the auto power off will take effect in

approx. 2 min. even if [52: Auto power off] is set to [1 min.

The remote controller can also be used for movie shooting (p.381).

During shooting, the camera’s self-timer/remote control lamp will light up

briefly.

For the Bluetooth connection indicator, refer to “Wi-Fi (Wireless

Communication) Function Instruction Manual” (p.4).

275

Remote Control Shooting

To pair the camera with another Wireless Remote Control BR-E1 (sold

separately), clear the paring (registration) with the current remote

controller. You can check the connection status of the camera and

remote controller on the [Check/clear connection info] screen in step

1Select [Wireless communication

settings].

Under the [51] tab, select [Wireless

communication settings], then

press <0>.

2Select [Bluetooth function].

3Select [Check/clear connection

info].

4Check the display.

The BR-E1’s Bluetooth address is

indicated by [Connect to].

If the remote controller is not used,

[Connecting...] will be displayed for

[Connection].

5Press the button.

6Clear the connection information.

Select [OK].

Pairing with the remote controller

(registration of the remote controller)

will be cleared.

Canceling the Pairing

276

You can connect any EOS accessory equipped with an N3-type

terminal such as the Remote Switch RS-80N3 or Timer Remote

Controller TC-80N3 (each sold separately) to shoot with the camera

(p.515).

To operate the accessory, refer to its Instruction Manual.

1Open the terminal cover.

2Connect the plug to the remote

control terminal.

Connect the plug as shown in the

illustration.

To disconnect the plug, grasp the

silver part and pull it out.

Using a Remote Switch

277

Flash Photography

This chapter describes how to shoot with external EX-

series Speedlites (sold separately) and how to set

Speedlite settings on the camera’s menu screen.

278

Using an EX-series Speedlite (sold separately) makes flash

photography easy.

For operation procedures, refer to the EX-series Speedlite’s

Instruction Manual. This camera is a Type-A camera that can use all

the features of EX-series Speedlites.

To set the flash functions and flash Custom Functions on the camera’s

menu screen, see pages 281-287.

Flash exposure compensation

You can adjust the flash output (flash exposure compensation) with

Quick Control (p.61) or with [Flash function settings] under [z1:

External Speedlite control] (p.283). You can set flash exposure

compensation up to ±3 stops in 1/3-stop increments.

FE lock

This enables you to attain an appropriate flash exposure for a

specific part of the subject. Aim the viewfinder center over the

subject, press the camera’s <A> button, then compose the shot

and take the picture.

D Flash Photography

EOS-dedicated, EX-series Speedlites

Macro Lites

Shoe-mount Speedlites

279

D Flash Photography

With an EZ/E/EG/ML/TL-series Speedlite set to A-TTL or TTL

autoflash mode, the flash can be fired at full output only.

Set the camera’s shooting mode to <a> manual exposure or

<f> aperture-priority AE and adjust the aperture setting before

shooting.

When using a Speedlite that has manual flash mode, shoot in the

manual flash mode.

Canon Speedlites Other Than the EX-series

If the [z2: Auto Lighting Optimizer] (p.194) setting is not [Disable], the

image may still look bright even if a decreased exposure compensation is

set for a darker exposure.

If it is difficult to achieve focus with autofocus, the EOS-dedicated, external

Speedlite will automatically emit the AF-assist beam as necessary.

280

D Flash Photography

Sync Speed

The camera can synchronize with non-Canon compact flash units at

1/180 sec. and slower speeds. With large studio flash units, the flash

duration is longer than that of a compact flash unit and varies

depending on the model. Be sure to check before shooting if flash

sync is properly performed by test shooting at a sync speed of

approx. 1/60 sec. to 1/30 sec.

Cautions for Live View Shooting

If you use a non-Canon flash unit with Live View shooting, set [z5:

Silent LV shoot.] to [Disable] (p.303). The flash will not be fired if it

is set to [Mode 1] or [Mode 2].

Non-Canon Flash Units

If the camera is used with a flash unit or flash accessory dedicated to

another camera brand, the camera not only may not operate properly,

but malfunction may result.

Do not attach a high-voltage flash unit to the camera’s hot shoe. It may

not be fired.

281

With an EX-series Speedlite having compatible flash function settings,

you can use the camera’s menu screen to set the Speedlite’s functions

and Custom Functions. Attach the Speedlite to the camera and turn

on the Speedlite before setting the flash functions.

For details on the Speedlite’s functions, refer to the Speedlite’s

Instruction Manual.

1Select [External Speedlite

control].

Under the [z1] tab, select [External

Speedlite control], then press <0>.

The external Speedlite control screen

will appear.

2Select the desired item.

Select the menu option to be set, then

press <0>.

To enable flash photography, set

[Enable]. To enable only the AF-assist

beam to be emitted, set [Disable].

For normal flash exposures, set it to

[Evaluative]. If [Average] is set, the

flash exposure will be averaged for the

entire metered scene. Depending on the

scene, flash exposure compensation

may be necessary. This setting is for

advanced users.

3 Setting the Flash FunctionN

Flash Firing

E-TTL II Flash Metering

282

3 Setting the Flash FunctionN

You can set the flash-sync speed for

flash photography in the <f> aperture-

priority AE mode.

: Auto

The flash sync speed is set automatically within a range of 1/180

sec. to 30 sec. to suit the scene’s brightness. High-speed sync is

also possible.

: 1/180-1/60sec. auto

Prevents a slow shutter speed from being set in low-light conditions.

It is effective for preventing subject blur and camera shake.

However, while the subject will be properly exposed with the flash,

the background may come out dark.

: 1/180 sec. (fixed)

The flash sync speed is fixed at 1/180 sec. This more effectively

prevents subject blur and camera shake than with [1/180-1/60sec.

auto]. However, in low light, the subject’s background will come out

darker than with [1/180-1/60sec. auto].

Flash Sync. Speed in Av Mode

If [1/180-1/60sec. auto] or [1/180 sec. (fixed)] is set, high-speed sync is not

possible in the <f> mode.

283

3 Setting the Flash FunctionN

The screen display and setting options will vary depending on the

Speedlite model, current flash mode, Speedlite’s Custom Function

settings, etc.

For details on the Speedlite’s functions, refer to the Speedlite’s

Instruction Manual.

Sample display

Flash mode

You can select the flash mode to suit your desired flash

photography.

[E-TTL II flash metering] is the standard

mode of EX-series Speedlites for

automatic flash photography.

[Manual flash] is for setting the

Speedlite’s [Flash output level]

yourself.

Regarding other flash modes, refer to the

Instruction Manual of a Speedlite

compatible with the respective flash

mode.

Flash Function Settings

Flash mode

Flash zoom

(Flash coverage)

Flash exposure

compensation

Wireless functions / Flash ratio control

Shutter

synchronization

Flash exposure

bracketing

284

3 Setting the Flash FunctionN

Wireless functions / Flash ratio control

Wireless (multiple) flash photography is

possible with radio or optical

transmission.

For details on wireless flash, refer to the

Instruction Manual of a Speedlite

compatible with wireless flash

photography.

With a macro flash (MR-14EX II, etc.)

compatible with flash function settings,

you can set the flash ratio between flash

tubes or flash heads A and B, or use

wireless flash with additional receiver

units.

For details on flash ratio control, refer to

the macro flash’s Instruction Manual.

Flash zoom (Flash coverage)

With Speedlites having a zooming flash

head, you can set the flash coverage.

Normally, set this to [AUTO] so that the

camera will automatically set the flash

coverage to match the lens focal length.

285

3 Setting the Flash FunctionN

Shutter synchronization

Normally, set this to [First-curtain

synchronization] so that the flash fires

immediately after the exposure starts.

If [Second-curtain synchronization] is set, the flash will be fired right

before the shutter closes. When this is combined with a slow shutter

speed, you can create a trail of light such as from car headlights at night

with a more natural feel. When second-curtain synchronization is set

together with [E-TTL II flash metering], the flash will be fired twice in a

row: once when you press the shutter button completely and once right

before the end of the exposure.

If [High-speed synchronization] is set, the flash can be used at all

shutter speeds. This is effective when you want to shoot with

background blur (open aperture) in locations such as outdoors in

daylight.

Flash exposure compensation

You can set flash exposure

compensation up to ±3 stops in 1/3-stop

increments.

For details, refer to the Speedlite’s

Instruction Manual.

Flash exposure bracketing

While changing the flash output

automatically, three shots will be taken.

For details, refer to the Instruction

Manual of a Speedlite equipped with

flash exposure bracketing.

286

3 Setting the Flash FunctionN

For details on the Speedlite’s Custom Functions, refer to the Speedlite’s

(sold separately) Instruction Manual.

1Select [Flash C.Fn settings].

2Set the desired functions.

Select the number, then press <0>.

Select the setting, then press <0>.

Flash Custom Function Settings

When using second-curtain synchronization, set the shutter speed to 1/25

sec. or slower. If the shutter speed is 1/30 sec. or faster, first-curtain

synchronization will be applied automatically even if [Second-curtain

synchronization] is set.

With an EX-series Speedlite not compatible with flash function settings,

you can only set the following: [Flash firing], [E-TTL II meter.], and

[Flash exposure compensation] under [Flash function settings].

([Shutter synchronization] can also be set with certain EX-series

Speedlites.)

If flash exposure compensation is set with the Speedlite, you cannot set

the flash exposure compensation with the camera. If it is set with both

the camera and Speedlite, the Speedlite’s setting overrides the camera’s.

With an EX-series Speedlite, the Speedlite will always fire at full output if the

[Flash metering mode] Custom Function is set to [TTL] (autoflash).

287

3 Setting the Flash FunctionN

1Select [Clear settings].

2Select the settings to be cleared.

Select [Clear flash settings] or

[Clear all Speedlite C.Fn’s], then

press <0>.

On the confirmation dialog, select

[OK]. Then the flash settings or

Custom Function settings will all be

cleared.

Clearing Flash Function Settings / Flash C.Fn Settings

The Speedlite’s Personal Function (P.Fn) cannot be set or canceled on the

camera’s [z1: External Speedlite control] screen. Set it directly on the

Speedlite.

288

289

Shooting with the LCD

Monitor

(Live View Shooting)

You can shoot while viewing the

image on the camera’s LCD

monitor. This is called “Live View

shooting”.

Live View shooting is enabled by

setting the Live View shooting/

Movie shooting switch to <A>.

If you handhold the camera and shoot while viewing the

LCD monitor, camera shake may cause blurred images.

Using a tripod is recommended in such cases.

For instructions on how to hold the camera, see page 99.

Remote Live View Shooting

With EOS Utility (EOS software, p.594) installed on your computer,

you can connect the camera to the computer and shoot remotely

while viewing the computer screen. For details, refer to the EOS

Utility Instruction Manual (p.596).

290

1Set the Live View shooting/Movie

shooting switch to <A>.

2Display the Live View image.

Press the <0> button.

The Live View image will appear on

the LCD monitor.

The Live View image will be displayed

in the brightness level closely

matching that of the actual image to

be captured.

3Select a shooting mode.

Turn the Mode Dial to select the

shooting mode.

4Focus on the subject.

When you press the shutter button

halfway, the camera will focus with

the current AF method (p.308).

You can also tap on the screen to

select the face or subject (p.319).

5Take the picture.

Press the shutter button completely.

The picture is taken and the captured

image is displayed on the LCD

monitor.

When the playback display ends, the

camera will return to Live View

shooting automatically.

Press the <0> button to exit Live

View shooting.

A Shooting with the LCD Monitor

291

A Shooting with the LCD Monitor

Set [z4: Live View shoot.] (under the

[z1] tab in Basic Zone modes) to

[Enable].

Number of Possible Shots with Live View Shooting

(Approx. number of shots)

The figures above are based on a fully-charged Battery Pack LP-E6N and

CIPA (Camera & Imaging Products Association) testing standards.

With Battery Grip BG-E21 (sold separately) loaded with two LP-E6N battery

packs, the number of possible shots will be approximately doubled.

With a fully-charged Battery Pack LP-E6N, the continuous Live View shooting

time will be as follows: At room temperature (23°C/73°F): Approx. 3 hr. 10 min.,

At low temperatures (0°C/32°F): Approx. 2 hr. 50 min.

For <o> High-speed continuous shooting or Low-speed

continuous shooting during Live View shooting with the image-recording

quality set to JPEG or 1 (except 41 and 61), holding down the

shutter button will display (play back) the captured images continuously.

When the continuous shooting ends (shutter button is returned to

halfway position), the Live View image will be displayed.

Enabling Live View Shooting

Temperature Room Temperature

(23°C / 73°F)

Low Temperatures

(0°C / 32°F)

Possible Shots 380 340

Continuous Shooting Display

Depending on the shooting conditions such as when shooting long

exposures, the captured images may not be displayed (played back)

continuously.

292

A Shooting with the LCD Monitor

Do not point the camera toward an intense light source, such as the sun

or an intense artificial light source. Doing so may damage the image

sensor or the camera’s internal components.

In the <8: y> mode, Live View shooting is not possible.

In the <8: q> mode, the angle of view changes slightly in Live View

shooting because distortion correction is applied.

In the <8: FG> modes or when [z3: HDR Mode] is set, the

shooting area will become smaller.

“General Live View Shooting Cautions” are on pages 323-324.

The image’s field of view coverage is approx. 100% (with image-

recording quality set to JPEG 73 and aspect ratio set to 3:2).

You can set exposure compensation up to ±3 stops by setting the

<R> switch downward and turning the <5> dial (except in Basic

Zone modes).

To check the depth of field, press the depth-of-field preview button.

If you shoot with the image-recording quality set to 41 or 61,

“BUSY” will be displayed and shooting will be disabled temporarily.

You can also focus by pressing the button.

When flash is used, there will be two shutter sounds, but only one shot

will be taken. Also, the time it takes to take the picture after you press the

shutter button completely will be slightly longer than with viewfinder

shooting.

If the camera is not operated for a prolonged period, the power will turn

off automatically after the time set in [52: Auto power off] (p.73). If [52:

Auto power off] is set to [Disable], Live View shooting will end

automatically after approx. 30 min. (camera power remains on).

With the HDMI cable HTC-100 (sold separately), you can display the

Live View image on a TV set (p.427). Note that no sound will be output. If

the picture does not appear on the TV screen, check if the [53: Video

system] is correctly set to [For NTSC] or [For PAL] (depending on the

video system of your TV set).

You can also use a remote controller (sold separately, p.271) for Live

View shooting.

293

A Shooting with the LCD Monitor

Each time you press the <

> button, the information display will change.

The display will show only the settings currently applied.

Information Display

Metering mode

ISO speed

Possible shots/Seconds

remaining on self-timer

Exposure level indicator

Aperture

Shutter speed

Battery level

Drive mode

AF method

AF point (Live 1-point AF)

AEB/FEB

Highlight tone priority

Histogram display

Flash ready/Flash off/High-speed sync

Picture Style

Auto Lighting

Optimizer

Maximum burst

Touch Shutter

White balance/

White

balance correction

Exposure compensation

Number of remaining multiple exposures

Magnify button

Shooting mode/

Scene icon

AE lock

Wi-Fi signal strength/Eye-Fi

card transmission status

AF operation

Quick Control button

Image-recording

quality

GPS acquisition status

Flash exposure compensation

Exposure

simulation

Temperature warning

HDR shooting/

Multiple exposures/

Multi Shot Noise

Reduction

Electronic level

Wi-Fi function

Bluetooth function

294

A Shooting with the LCD Monitor

Warnings

Do not hold the camera in the same position for long periods of time.

Even if the camera does not feel too hot, prolonged contact with the same

body part may cause skin redness or blistering due to low-temperature contact

burns. Using a tripod is recommended when using the camera in very hot

places or for people with circulation problems or poor skin sensation.

The histogram can be displayed when [z5: Expo. simulation] is set to

[Enable] (p.303).

You can display the electronic level by pressing the button

(p.80). Note that if the AF method is set to [u+Tracking] or the camera

is connected to a TV set with an HDMI cable, the electronic level cannot

be displayed.

When <g> is displayed in white, it indicates that the Live View image

is displayed at the brightness level closely matching that of the actual

image to be captured.

If <g> is blinking, it indicates that the Live View image is displayed at

a brightness that differs from the actual shooting result because of low-

or bright-light conditions. However, the actual image recorded will reflect

the exposure setting. Note that the noise may be more noticeable than

the actual image recorded.

Exposure simulation (p.303) will not work with either of the <8: FG>

modes, bulb exposures, flash photography, Multi Shot Noise Reduction,

or the HDR mode. The <g> icon and histogram will be displayed in

gray. The image will be displayed on the LCD monitor at the standard

brightness. The histogram may not be properly displayed in low- or

bright-light conditions.

295

A Shooting with the LCD Monitor

In the <A> shooting mode, the camera detects the scene type and

sets everything automatically to suit the scene. The detected scene

type is indicated on the upper left of the screen.

*1:Displayed only when the AF method is set to [u+Tracking]. If another AF method is

set, the “Non-portrait” icon will be displayed even if a person is detected.

*2:Displayed when the attached lens has distance information. With an extension tube

or close-up lens, the icon displayed may not match the actual scene.

Scene Icons

Subject Portrait*1 Non-portrait

Background

Color

Background

Movement

Nature and

Outdoor

Scene

Movement

Close*2

Bright

Gray

Backlit

Blue Sky

Included Light blue

Backlit

Sunset *3 *3

Orange

Spotlight

Dark blue

Dark

With

Tripod

*4*5 *3 *4*5 *3

For certain scenes or shooting conditions, the icon displayed may not match

the actual scene.

296

A Shooting with the LCD Monitor

*3: The icon of the scene selected from the detectable scenes will be displayed.

*4: Displayed when all the following conditions apply:

The shooting scene is dark, it is a night scene, and the camera is mounted on a

tripod.

*5: Displayed with any of the lenses below:

EF300mm f/2.8L IS II USM EF400mm f/2.8L IS II USM

EF500mm f/4L IS II USM EF600mm f/4L IS II USM

Image Stabilizer lenses released in and after 2012.

*4+*5: If the conditions in both *4 and *5 are met, the shutter speed will slow

down.

297

A Shooting with the LCD Monitor

Final image simulation is a function that shows the Live View image with

the effects of the current settings for Picture Style, white balance, and

other shooting functions applied.

The Live View image will automatically reflect the function settings listed

below. However, the displayed image may be slightly different from the

resulting image.

Final Image Simulation During Live View Shooting

Picture Style

* Sharpness (Strength), contrast, color saturation, and color tone will be

reflected.

White balance

White balance correction

Ambience-based shots (in <C> mode)

Background blur (in <C> mode)

* You can check the effect only during the setting procedure (when

[Simulating blur] is displayed).

Color tone (in mode)

Brightness

Metering mode

Exposure (with [z5: Expo. simulation: Enable] set)

Depth of field (with depth-of-field preview button ON)

Auto Lighting Optimizer

Peripheral illumination correction

Chromatic aberration correction

Distortion correction

Highlight tone priority

Aspect ratio (Image area confirmation)

Final Image Simulation

298

A Shooting with the LCD Monitor

You can set the information to be displayed on the image for when you

press the button during Live View shooting or movie shooting.

Select [zbutton LV display

options].

Under the [54] tab, select

[zbutton LV display options],

then press <0>.

Live View info switch setting

1Select [Live View info switch

setting].

2Select a number.



The numbers 1 to 4 indicate the

number of times to press the <

button to display the respective

information starting with nothing

displayed on the screen.

Select the number for the displayed

information you want to change, then

press the button.

To remove a number’s checkmark

[X], press <0>. Note that you

cannot remove the [X] for all four

display options.

The default settings are shown below.

B Button Display Options

Information / Number 1234

IBasic shooting info k k k –

JDetailed shooting info –k k –

KOn-screen buttons k k k –

LHistogram – – k–

MElectronic level – – k–

299

A Shooting with the LCD Monitor

3Edit the options.

Select what you want to be displayed

and press <0> to add a checkmark

[X].

For the information you do not want to

be displayed, press <0> to remove

the checkmark [X].

Then select [OK] to register the

setting.

Repeat steps 2 and 3 as necessary.

Histogram display

• Brightness/RGB

The histogram (p.398) to be displayed when you press the

button can be either the [Brightness] or [RGB] histogram.

Under [Histogram disp], select

[Brightness/RGB] and select

[Brightness] or [RGB].

• Display size

You can change the display size of the histogram.

Under [Histogram disp], select

[Display size] and select [Large] or

[Small].

Reset

In step 1, if you select [Reset], the [54: zbutton LV display

options] setting will be cleared.

300

When the Live View image is displayed, if you press the <f>,

<R>, , or <q> button, the setting screen will appear on the

LCD monitor and you can turn the <6> or <5> dial to set the

respective shooting function.

After pressing the <f> button, you can turn the <6> dial to set

the AF method (p.308) or press the <Y> <Z> keys to set the AF

operation (p.305).

Shooting Function Settings

f/R/i/q Settings

With Live View shooting, the or <M> drive mode cannot be set.

Also, the continuous shooting mode set for viewfinder shooting will not be

applied to Live View shooting.

When you set <w> (Partial metering) or <r> (Spot metering), a metering

circle will be displayed at the center of the screen.

301

Shooting Function Settings

With the image displayed on the LCD monitor, you can press the <Q>

button and set the following functions.

In Creative Zone modes, the following can be set: AF method, AF

operation, Drive mode, Metering mode, Image quality, White balance,

Picture Style, and Auto Lighting Optimizer.

In Basic Zone modes, you can set the functions shown in boldface

and those in the table on page 127 (except background blur).

1Press the <Q> button (7).

The settable functions will be

displayed.

2Select a function and set it.

Press the <W> <X> keys to select a

function.

The settings of the selected function

and Feature guide will appear on the

screen.

Turn the <6> or <5> dial to set it.

Press the button for the following: To set the RAW image-

recording quality, drive mode’s <q> setting, the white balance shift

or white balance bracketing, or the Picture Style parameters.

To set Auto white balance, select [Q] (or [Qw]), then press

<0>.

To return to Live View shooting, press <0> or the <Q> button.

You can also select [2] to return to Live View shooting.

Q Quick Control

With [AF operation] set to [Servo AF], you cannot select 41 or 61

when setting the quality for a RAW image with [Image quality].

302

With Live View shooting, menu options

exclusive to Live View shooting will

appear under the [z5] tab (the [z2]

tab in Basic Zone modes).

The settable functions on this menu screen apply only to Live View

shooting. They do not work with viewfinder shooting (settings are

disabled).

AF method

You can select [u+Tracking], [Smooth zone], or [Live 1-point AF].

See pages 308-314 for the AF method.

Touch Shutter

You can set Touch Shutter to [Disable] or [Enable]. Just by tapping

on the LCD monitor screen, you can focus and take the picture

automatically. For details, see page 319.

Metering timerN

You can change how long the exposure setting is displayed (AE lock

time).

Grid display

With [3x3 l] or [6x4 m], you can display grid lines to help you

level the camera vertically or horizontally. Also, with [3x3+diag n],

the grid is displayed together with diagonal lines to help you

compose with better balance by aligning the intersections over the

subject.

3 Menu Function Settings

303

3 Menu Function Settings

Exposure simulationN

Exposure simulation simulates and displays how the brightness

(exposure) of the actual image will look.

•Enable (g)

The displayed image brightness will be close to the actual

brightness (exposure) of the resulting image. If you set exposure

compensation, the image brightness will change accordingly.

• During e

Normally, the image is displayed at the standard brightness to

make the Live View image easy to see (E). The image will be

displayed with a brightness (exposure) close to that of the actual

image to be captured only while you hold down the depth-of-field

preview button (g).

• Disable (E)

The image is displayed at the standard brightness to make the Live

View image easy to see. Even if you set exposure compensation,

the image is displayed at the standard brightness.

Silent LV shootingN

•Mode 1

Mechanical sound during shooting is suppressed, compared with

viewfinder shooting. Continuous shooting is also possible.

•Mode 2

When the shutter button is pressed completely, only one shot will

be taken. While you keep holding down the shutter button, the

camera operation will be suspended. Then when you return to the

shutter button’s halfway position, the camera operation will

resume. The release sound at the moment of shooting can thereby

be minimized. Even if continuous shooting is set, only a single shot

will be taken.

304

3 Menu Function Settings

• Disable

Be sure to set it to [Disable] if you use a TS-E lens (other than

those listed in ) for shifting or tilting the lens or if you use an

extension tube. If [Mode 1] or [Mode 2] is set, the standard

exposure may not be obtained, or an irregular exposure may

result.

With [Mode 2] set, continuous shooting will not work even if you set the

drive mode to <o> or .

If you use flash with the flash mode set to E-TTL II/E-TTL autoflash,

shutter release will be performed by the same internal operation

mechanism as with viewfinder shooting. Therefore, shooting while

suppressing the mechanical sound will not be possible (regardless of the

[Silent LV shoot.] setting).

When using a non-Canon flash unit, set it to [Disable]. The flash will not

be fired if it is set to [Mode 1] or [Mode 2].

If [Mode 2] is set and you use a remote controller (p.271), the operation

will be the same as with [Mode 1].

Selecting [z3: Dust delete data] or either [Clean manually] or [Clean

nowf] under [54: Sensor cleaning] will stop the Live View shooting.

To start Live View shooting again, press the <0> button.

With the TS-E17mm f/4L or TS-E24mm f/3.5L II lens, you can use [Mode 1]

or [Mode 2].

305

You can select the AF operation characteristics to suit the shooting

conditions or subject. In Basic Zone modes, the optimum AF operation

is set automatically for the respective shooting mode.

1Press the <f> button.

2Select the AF operation.

Press the <Y> <Z> keys to select

the desired AF operation, then press

<0>.

X: One-Shot AF

K: Servo AF

3Focus on the subject.

Aim the AF point over the subject and

press the shutter button halfway. The

camera will then autofocus in the

selected AF operation.

Selecting the AF OperationN

Settable only for Live View shooting (not settable for movie shooting).

If focus cannot be achieved, the AF point will turn orange. If this occurs,

the picture cannot be taken even if the shutter button is pressed

completely. Recompose the shot and try to focus again. Or, see

“Shooting Conditions that Make Focusing Difficult” (p.316).

306

Selecting the AF OperationN

Suited for still subjects. When you press the shutter button

halfway, the camera will focus only once.

When focus is achieved, the AF point will turn green and the beeper

will sound.

The focus remains locked while you hold down the shutter button

halfway, allowing you to recompose the image before taking the

picture.

When the drive mode is set to <o> for high-speed continuous

shooting, the maximum continuous shooting speed is approx. 6.5

shots/sec.

When the drive mode is set to for low-speed continuous

shooting, the maximum continuous shooting speed is approx. 3.0

shots/sec.

When an external Speedlite is used, the continuous shooting

speed will become slower. Regardless of the <o> and

settings, the maximum continuous shooting speed will be approx.

1.7 shots/sec.

One-Shot AF for Still Subjects

If [54: Beep] is set to [Disable], the beeper will not sound when focus is

achieved.

307

Selecting the AF OperationN

This AF operation is suited for moving subjects. While you hold

down the shutter button halfway, the camera will keep focusing on

the subject continuously.

When focus is achieved, the AF point will turn blue.

The exposure is set at the moment the picture is taken.

When [z5: AF method] is set to [u+Tracking] or [Smooth zone],

focusing will be continuous as long as the Area AF frame or Zone AF

frame keeps tracking the subject.

When the drive mode is set to <o> for high-speed continuous

shooting, the maximum continuous shooting speed is approx. 4.0

shots/sec. The pictures will be taken with priority given to the

continuous shooting speed.

When the drive mode is set to for low-speed continuous

shooting, the maximum continuous shooting speed is approx. 3.0

shots/sec. The pictures will be taken with priority given to subject

tracking.

When an external Speedlite is used, the continuous shooting speed

will become slower. Regardless of the <o> and settings,

the maximum continuous shooting speed will be approx. 1.7 shots/

sec.

Servo AF for Moving Subjects

With Servo AF, the beeper will not sound even when focus is achieved

(except with <8: 5Cr> mode).

Depending on the lens used, the distance to the subject and the subject’s

speed, the camera may not be able to achieve correct focus.

Zooming during continuous shooting may throw off the focus. Zoom first,

then recompose and shoot.

When [Servo AF] is set, the image-recording quality cannot be set to

41 or 61. If 41 or 61 is set, the image will be recorded in

1 quality.

When [Servo AF] is set and [Multi Shot Noise Reduction] is set

(p.195), [High ISO speed NR] will automatically switch to [Standard].

308

You can set the AF method to [u+Tracking] (p.309), [Smooth zone]

(p.311), or [Live 1-point AF] (p.313) to suit the shooting conditions and

subject.

If you want to focus manually, set the lens’s focus mode switch to

<MF>, magnify the image, and focus manually (p.321).

Select the AF method.

Under the [z5] tab, select [AF

method]. (For movie shooting, it is

under the [z4] tab. In Basic Zone

modes, under the [z2] tab.)

Select the desired AF method, then

press <0>.

While the Live View image is

displayed, you can also select the AF

method by pressing the <f> button

and turning the <6> dial.

Focusing with AF (AF Method)

Selecting the AF Method

The descriptions on pages 309-314 assume that [AF operation] is set to

[One Shot AF] (p.305). With [Servo AF] (p.307) set, the AF point will

turn blue when focus is achieved.

Regarding the Touch Shutter (AF and shutter release by touch

operation), see page 319.

309

Focusing with AF (AF Method)

The camera detects and focuses on human faces. If a face moves, the

AF point also moves to track the face.

1Display the Live View image.

Press the <0> button.

The Live View image will appear on

the LCD monitor.

The Area AF frame will appear.

2Check the AF point.



When a face is detected, <

> will

appear over the face to be focused on.

If multiple faces are detected, <q>

will be displayed. Use <9> to move

<q> over the face you want to

focus on.

You can also tap on the LCD monitor

screen to select the face or subject. If

you tap on a subject other than a

human face, the AF point will switch

to < >.

3Focus on the subject.

Press the shutter button halfway to

focus.

If no faces can be detected or if you

do not tap anything on the screen,

focus will be achieved within the Area

AF frame.

When focus is achieved, the AF point

will turn green and the beeper will

sound.

If focus is not achieved, the AF point

will turn orange.

u(face)+Tracking: c

Area AF frame

310

Focusing with AF (AF Method)

4Take the picture.

Check the focus and exposure, then

press the shutter button completely to

take the picture (p.290).

Focusing on a subject other than a human face

• Tap on the subject (or spot) where you want to focus.

• Press the <0> or <L> button and the AF point < > will appear

on the screen, and the AF point can be moved with <9>.

• Once the AF point < > achieves focus, the AF point will also

move to track the subject if you change the composition or if the

subject moves.

If the subject’s face is significantly out of focus, face detection will not be

possible. Adjust the focus manually (p.321) so that the face can be

detected, then perform AF.

An object other than a human face may be detected as a face.

Face detection will not work if the face is very small or large in the

picture, too bright or too dark, or partially hidden.

The may cover only a part of the face, not the whole face.

AF is not possible on a face or subject along the periphery (outside the

Area AF frame). Aim the Area AF frame over the subject for focusing.

The size of the AF point changes depending on the subject.

311

Focusing with AF (AF Method)

Focus can be achieved with a larger area (Zone AF frame) than the AF

point of [Live 1-point AF] (p.313).

1Display the Live View image.

Press the <0> button.

The Live View image will appear on

the LCD monitor.

The Zone AF frame will appear.

2Select the AF point.

Use <9> to move the Zone AF

frame to where you want to focus. (It

cannot go to the edge of the screen.)

Pressing <0> or the <L> button

will return the Zone AF frame to the

screen center.

You can also touch the LCD monitor

screen to move the Zone AF frame.

3Focus on the subject.

Aim the Zone AF frame over the

subject and press the shutter button

halfway.

When focus is achieved, the AF

points achieving focus will turn green

and the beeper will sound.

If focus is not achieved, the Zone AF

frame will turn orange.

Smooth Zone: o

Zone AF frame

312

Focusing with AF (AF Method)

4Take the picture.

Check the focus and exposure, then

press the shutter button completely to

take the picture (p.290).

If the camera does not focus on the target subject, switch to [Live 1-point

AF] (p.313) and focus again.

313

Focusing with AF (AF Method)

The camera focuses with a single AF point. This is effective when you

want to focus on a particular subject.

1Display the Live View image.

Press the <0> button.

The Live View image will appear on

the LCD monitor.

The AF point < > will appear.

2Move the AF point.

Use <9> to move the AF point to

where you want to focus. (It cannot

go to the edge of the screen.)

Pressing <0> or the <L> button

will return the AF point to the screen

center.

You can also touch the LCD monitor

screen to move the AF point.

3Focus on the subject.

Aim the AF point over the subject and

press the shutter button halfway.

When focus is achieved, the AF point

will turn green and the beeper will

sound.

If focus is not achieved, the AF point

will turn orange.

Live 1-point AF: d

AF point

314

Focusing with AF (AF Method)

4Take the picture.

Check the focus and exposure, then

press the shutter button completely to

take the picture (p.290).

During movie shooting, if [z4: Movie Servo AF] is set to [Enable], the AF

point will be displayed larger in step 1.

315

Focusing with AF (AF Method)

AF Operation

Even when focus is achieved, pressing the shutter button halfway

will focus again.

The image brightness may change during and after the AF

operation.

Depending on the subject and shooting conditions, it may take

longer to focus, or the continuous shooting speed may decrease.

If the light source changes while the Live View image is displayed,

the screen may flicker and focusing may be difficult. If this happens,

exit Live View shooting and perform AF under the actual light source

under which you are shooting.

Notes for AF

If you cannot achieve focus with AF, set the lens’s focus mode switch to

<MF> and focus manually (p.321).

If you shoot the subject at the periphery and it is slightly out of focus,

recompose to move the subject (or AF point or Zone AF frame) toward

the screen center, focus again, then take the picture.

The external Speedlite will not emit the AF-assist beam. However, if an

EX-series Speedlite (sold separately) equipped with an LED light is used,

the LED light will turn on for AF-assist as necessary.

With certain lenses, it may take more time to achieve focus with

autofocus, or accurate focusing may not be achieved.

316

Focusing with AF (AF Method)

Shooting Conditions that Make Focusing Difficult

Subject with low-contrast such as the blue sky, solid-color flat

surfaces or when highlight or shadow details are clipped.

Subjects in low light.

Stripes and other patterns where there is contrast only in the

horizontal direction.

Subjects with repetitive patterns (Example: Skyscraper windows,

computer keyboards, etc.).

Fine lines and subject outlines.

Under a light source whose brightness, color, or pattern keeps

changing.

Night scenes or points of light.

The image flickers under fluorescent or LED lighting.

Extremely small subjects.

Subjects at the edge of the screen.

Strongly backlit or reflective subjects (Example: Car with a highly

reflective body, etc.).

Near and distant subjects covered by an AF point (Example: Animal

in a cage, etc.).

Subjects that keep moving within the AF point and will not stay still

due to camera shake or subject blur.

Performing AF when the subject is very far out of focus.

Soft focus effect is applied with a soft focus lens.

A special effect filter is used.

Noise (dots of light, banding, etc.) appears on the screen during AF.

317

Focusing with AF (AF Method)

When the AF method is [Smooth zone]

or [Live 1-point AF] mode, either press

the button or tap on [d] displayed

on the bottom right of the screen. You

can magnify the image by approx. 5x or

10x and check the focus.

Magnified view is not possible with

[u+Tracking].

To move the AF point or Zone AF frame, use <9> or tap on the spot

you want to magnify.

Press the button or tap on [d] to magnify the image. Each

time you press the button or tap, the magnification changes.

When [Smooth zone] is set, the image will be magnified at the

center of the Zone AF frame. When [Live 1-point AF] is set, image

will be magnified around the position of the AF point.

At 100% (approx. 1x) magnification, use <9> or touch the screen to

move the magnifying frame. Pressing the <0> or <L> button will

return the magnifying frame to the screen center.

Either press the button or tap on [d] to magnify the area

covered by the magnifying frame.

When the image is magnified by approx. 5x or 10x, you can move

the magnified area by using <9> or tapping on the triangle on the

screen top, bottom, left, or right.

When you press the shutter button halfway, the normal view will

return for [Smooth zone]. For [Live 1-point AF], AF will proceed

with the magnified view.

With Servo AF, if you press the shutter button halfway in the

magnified view, the camera will return to the normal view for

focusing.

Magnified View

318

Focusing with AF (AF Method)

If focusing is difficult in the magnified view, return to the normal view and

perform AF.

If you perform AF in the normal view and then use the magnified view,

accurate focus may not be achieved.

AF speed differs between normal view and magnified view.

When in magnified view, Movie Servo AF (p.373) will not function.

With the magnified view, achieving focus becomes more difficult due to

camera shake. Using a tripod is recommended.

319

Just by tapping on the LCD monitor screen, you can focus and take the

picture automatically.

1Display the Live View image.

Press the <0> button.

The Live View image will appear on

the LCD monitor.

2Enable the Touch Shutter.

Tap [y] on the screen’s bottom left.

Each time you tap on the icon, it will

toggle between [y] and [x].

[x] (Touch Shutter: Enable)

The camera will focus on the spot

you tap on, then the picture will be

taken.

[y] (Touch Shutter: Disable)

You can tap on a spot to perform

focusing on the spot. Press the

shutter button completely to take the

picture.

3Tap on the screen to shoot.

Tap on the face or subject on the

screen.

On the point you tap, the camera will

focus (Touch AF) with the AF method

that was set (p.308-314).

When [x] is set, the AF point turns

green when focus is achieved, then

the picture is taken automatically.

If focus is not achieved, the AF point

turns orange and the picture cannot

be taken. Tap on the face or subject

on the screen again.

x Shooting with the Touch Shutter

320

x Shooting with the Touch Shutter

Even if you set the drive mode to <o> or , the camera will still

shoot in the single shooting mode.

Even if [AF operation] is set to [Servo AF], tapping on the screen will

focus on the image with [One-Shot AF].

Tapping on the screen in magnified view will not focus or take the picture.

If you shoot by tapping on the screen with [z1: Image review] set to

[Hold], you can press the shutter button halfway to take the next shot.

If you use [8C.Fn III-4: Custom Controls] to assign a button with

[ONE SHOTzAI SERVO/SERVO] or the function that activates the

metering timer (p.497), Touch Shutter shooting is not possible while you

keep holding down the respective button.

You can also set the Touch Shutter with [z5: Touch Shutter] (the [z2]

tab in Basic Zone modes).

With [z5: AF method] set to [Smooth zone] and [x] (Touch Shutter:

Enable) set, tapping the screen will focus with [Live 1-point AF] and take

the picture.

To shoot with bulb exposure, tap on the screen twice. The first tap on the

screen will start the bulb exposure. Tapping it again will stop the bulb

exposure. Be careful not to shake the camera when tapping on the

screen.

321

You can magnify the image and focus precisely with MF (manual focus).

1Set the lens’s focus mode switch

to <MF>.

Turn the lens focusing ring to focus

roughly.

2Display the magnifying frame.

Press the button or tap on [d]

on the lower right of the screen.

The magnifying frame will appear.

3Move the magnifying frame.

Either operate <9> or tap on the

spot you want to magnify to move the

magnifying frame to where you want

to focus.

Pressing the <0> or <L> button

will return the magnifying frame to the

screen center.

4Magnify the image.

Each time you press the button

or tap on [d] on the lower right of

the screen, the screen will change in

the following sequence:

While in magnified view, you can use

<9> or tap on the triangle on the top,

bottom, left, or right of the screen to

scroll around the magnified image.

MF: Focusing Manually

Magnifying frame

AE lock

Magnified area position

Magnification (Approx.)

Normal view 9 1x 9 5x 9 10x

322

MF: Focusing Manually

5Focus manually.

While looking at the magnified image,

turn the lens focusing ring to focus.

After achieving focus, press the

button to return to the normal view.

6Take the picture.

Check the exposure, then press the

shutter button completely to take the

picture (p.290).

In magnified view, the exposure is locked. (Shutter speed and aperture

will be displayed in red.)

Even with manual focusing, you can use the Touch Shutter to take a

picture.

323

General Live View Shooting Cautions

Image Quality

When you shoot at high ISO speeds, noise (such as dots of light and

banding) may become noticeable.

Shooting in high temperatures may cause noise and irregular colors in

the image.

If Live View shooting is used continuously for a prolonged period, the

camera’s internal temperature may rise, and image quality may

deteriorate. Always exit Live View shooting when you are not shooting.

If you shoot a long exposure while the camera’s internal temperature is

high, image quality may deteriorate. Exit Live View shooting and wait a

few minutes before shooting again.

White <s> and Red <E> Internal Temperature Warning Icons

If the camera’s internal temperature increases due to prolonged Live

View shooting or a high ambient temperature, a white <s> or red <E>

icon will appear.

The white <s> icon indicates that the image quality of still photos will

deteriorate. It is recommended that you temporarily exit Live View

shooting and allow the camera to cool down before shooting again.

The red <E> icon indicates that the Live View shooting will soon stop

automatically. If this happens, you will not be able to shoot again until the

camera’s internal temperature decreases. Temporarily exit the Live View

shooting or turn off the power and let the camera rest for a while.

Using Live View shooting at a high temperature for a prolonged period

will cause a white <s> or red <E> icon to appear earlier. When you are

not shooting, always turn off the camera.

If the camera’s internal temperature is high, the quality of images shot

with a high ISO speed or long exposure may deteriorate even before the

white <s> icon is displayed.

Shooting Results

In magnified view, the shutter speed and aperture will be displayed in

red. If you take the picture in magnified view, the exposure may not come

out as desired. Return to the normal view before taking the picture.

Even if you take the picture in magnified view, the image will be captured

with the image area of the normal view.

324

General Live View Shooting Cautions

Live View Image

Under low- or bright-light conditions, the Live View image may not reflect

the brightness of the captured image.

Even if a low ISO speed is set, noise may be noticeable in the displayed

Live View image under low light. However, when you shoot, the image

recorded will have less noise. (The image quality of the Live View image

is different from that of the recorded image.)

If the light source (illumination) within the image changes, the screen

may flicker. If this happens, exit Live View shooting and resume Live

View shooting under the actual light source.

If you point the camera in a different direction, it may throw off the Live

View image’s correct brightness momentarily. Wait until the brightness

level stabilizes before shooting.

If there is a very bright light source in the image, the bright area may

appear black on the LCD monitor. However, the actual captured image

will correctly show the bright area.

In low light, if you set the [52: LCD brightness] to a bright setting, noise

or irregular colors may appear in the Live View image. However, the

noise or irregular colors will not be recorded in the captured image.

When you magnify the image, the image sharpness may look more

pronounced than in the actual image.

Custom Functions

During Live View shooting, certain Custom Functions will not work

(certain settings become invalid). For details, see page 469.

Lens and Flash

If the attached lens has an Image Stabilizer and you set the Image

Stabilizer (IS) switch to <1>, the Image Stabilizer will operate at all

times even if you do not press the shutter button halfway. The Image

Stabilizer consumes battery power and may decrease the number of

possible shots depending on the shooting conditions. When the Image

Stabilizer is not necessary, such as when using a tripod, it is

recommended that you set the IS switch to <2>.

The focus preset function is possible for Live View shooting only when

using a (super) telephoto lens equipped with the focus preset mode

released in and after the second half of 2011.

FE lock and modeling flash will not work if an external Speedlite is used.

325

Shooting Movies

Movie shooting is enabled by

setting the Live View shooting/

Movie shooting switch to <k>.

Before shooting movies, see page 343 and make sure

the card is able to record movies at the desired movie-

recording quality setting.

If you handhold the camera and shoot movies, camera

shake can cause blurred movies. Using a tripod is

recommended in such cases.

For instructions on how to hold the camera, see page 99.

Full HD 1080

Full HD 1080 indicates compatibility with High-

Definition featuring 1080 vertical pixels (scanning

lines).

326

When the shooting mode is set to <A>, <C>, <d>, <s>, <f>,

or <F>, autoexposure control will take effect to suit the scene’s current

brightness.

1Set the Live View shooting/Movie

shooting switch to <k>.

The Live View image will appear on

the LCD monitor.

2Set the Mode Dial to

>, <

>, or <

3Focus on the subject.



Before shooting a movie, focus with

AF or manual focus (

p.308, 321).

By default, [z4: Movie Servo AF] is

set to [Enable] so that the camera

always keeps focusing (p.373).

When you press the shutter button

halfway, the camera will focus with

the current AF method.

4Shoot the movie.

Press the <0> button to start

shooting a movie.

While the movie is being shot, the

“o” mark will be displayed on the

upper right of the screen.

Stereo sound is recorded by the built-

in microphones.

To stop shooting the movie, press the

<0> button again.

k Shooting Movies

/ Autoexposure Shooting

Recording movie

Built-in microphones

327

k Shooting Movies

ISO Speed in the <A> and <C> Modes

The ISO speed will be set automatically within ISO 100 - ISO 25600.

ISO Speed in the <d>, <s>, <f>, and <F> Modes

The ISO speed will be set automatically within ISO 100 - ISO 25600.

Under [z2: k ISO speed settings], if you set [ISO Auto] to

[Max.:H2 (102400)] (p.372), the maximum limit of the automatic ISO

speed setting range will be expanded to H2 (equivalent to ISO

102400). If you select [Max.:6400] or [Max.:12800], you can narrow

the automatic ISO speed setting range (maximum limit is lowered).

If [z3: Highlight tone priority] is set to [Enable] (p.199), the

automatic ISO speed setting range’s minimum limit will be ISO 200.

Also, even if [ISO Auto] is set to [Max.: H1 (51200)] or [Max.: H2

(102400)], the maximum limit will not be expanded.

When the <8> mode is set, HDR movie shooting takes effect (p.348).

Even if you set the <s> or <f> mode, movie shooting with priority

given to shutter speed or aperture cannot be performed. Autoexposure

shooting takes effect as in the <d> mode.

For movie shooting, the ISO speed cannot be expanded to L (equivalent

to ISO 50).

When switching from still photo shooting to movie shooting, check the

camera settings again before shooting movies.

Regarding the ISO speed for time-lapse movie shooting, see page 354

and 372.

328

k Shooting Movies

Cautions for the <A>, <C>, <d>, <s>, <f>, and <F> Modes

In the <A> and <C> modes, the scene icon for the scene detected by

the camera is displayed on the upper left of the screen (p.329).

You can lock the exposure (AE lock) by pressing the <A> button

(except in the <A>, <C> and <8> modes, p.249). After applying

AE lock during movie shooting, you can cancel it by pressing the <S>

button. (AE lock setting is retained until you press the <S> button.)

You can set exposure compensation up to ±3 stops by setting the

<R> switch downward and turning the <5> dial (except in the

<A>, <C>, and <8> modes).

The ISO speed, shutter speed, and aperture will not be recorded in the

movie’s Exif information.

With autoexposure movie shooting (except in time-lapse movie

shooting), this camera supports the Speedlite’s function to turn on the

LED light automatically in low-light conditions. For details, refer to the

Instruction Manual of the EX-series Speedlite equipped with an LED

light.

329

k Shooting Movies

In the <A> and <C> modes, the camera detects the scene type and

sets the exposure automatically to suit the scene. The detected scene

type is indicated on the upper left of the screen.

*1: Displayed only when the AF method is set to [u+Tracking]. If another AF method is

set, the “Non-portrait” icon will be displayed even if a person is detected.

During time-lapse movie shooting, the “Non-portrait” icon will be displayed even if a

person is detected.

*2: Displayed when the attached lens has distance information. With an extension tube

or close-up lens, the icon displayed may not match the actual scene.

*3: The icon of the scene selected from the detectable scenes will be displayed.

Scene Icons

Subject

Portrait*1

Non-Portrait Background

Color

Background

Nature and

Outdoor Scene Close*2

Bright

Gray

Backlit

Blue Sky Included

Light blue

Backlit

Sunset *3 *3 Orange

Spotlight

Dark blue

Dark

For certain scenes or shooting conditions, the icon displayed may not match

the actual scene.

330

k Shooting Movies

You can manually set the shutter speed, aperture, and ISO speed for

movie shooting. Using manual exposure to shoot movies is for

advanced users.

1Set the Live View shooting/Movie

shooting switch to <k>.

2Set the Mode Dial to <a>.

3Set the ISO speed.

Press the button.

The ISO speed setting screen will

appear on the LCD monitor.

Turn the <6> or <5> dial to set it.

For details on the ISO speed, see the

next page.

4Set the shutter speed and

aperture.

Press the shutter button halfway and

check the exposure level indicator.

To set the shutter speed, turn the

<6> dial. To set the aperture, turn

the <5> dial.

The settable shutter speeds vary

depending on the frame rate. See

page 333.

5Focus and shoot the movie.

The procedure is the same as steps 3

and 4 for “Autoexposure Shooting”

(p.326).

Manual Exposure Shooting

Shutter speed

Aperture

331

k Shooting Movies

ISO Speed in the <a> Mode

With [AUTO] (A), the ISO speed will be set automatically within ISO

100 - ISO 25600. Under [z2:k ISO speed settings], if you set

[ISO Auto] to [Max.:H2 (102400)] (p.372), the maximum limit of the

automatic ISO speed setting range will be expanded to H2

(equivalent to ISO 102400). If you select [Max.:6400] or

[Max.:12800], you can narrow the automatic ISO speed setting

range (maximum limit is lowered).

You can set the ISO speed manually within ISO 100 - ISO 25600 in

1/3-stop increments. Under [z2:k ISO speed settings], if you set

[Maximum] to [H2 (102400)] for [ISO speed range] (p.372), the

maximum limit for the manual ISO speed setting range will be

expanded to H2 (equivalent to ISO 102400). Note that you can also

set the [Maximum] and [Minimum] to a range narrower than the

default range (ISO 100 - ISO 25600).

If [z3: Highlight tone priority] is set to [Enable] (p.199), the

automatic and manual ISO speed setting range’s minimum limit will

be ISO 200. Also, even if the ISO speed’s maximum limit is set to be

expanded to [H1 (ISO 51200)] or [H2 (ISO 102400)], the maximum

limit will not be expanded.

332

k Shooting Movies

For movie shooting, the ISO speed cannot be expanded to L (equivalent

to ISO 50).

When switching from still photo shooting to movie shooting, check the

camera settings again before shooting movies.

During movie shooting, avoid changing the shutter speed or aperture.

Doing so may record the changes in the exposure or create more noise

at high ISO speeds.

When shooting a movie of a moving subject, a shutter speed of approx.

1/25 sec. to 1/125 sec. is recommended. The faster the shutter speed,

the less smooth the subject’s movement will look.

If you change the shutter speed while shooting under fluorescent or LED

lighting, image flicker may be recorded.

Regarding the ISO speed for time-lapse movie shooting, see page 354.

In step 4, if you cannot set the shutter speed or aperture, set the

<R> switch downward and turn the <6> or <5> dial.

Under [8C.Fn III-4: Custom Controls], if [ : Expo comp (hold btn,

turn )] is set (p.502), you can set exposure compensation with ISO

Auto set.

When ISO Auto is set, you can press the <A> button to lock the ISO

speed. After locking the ISO speed during movie shooting, you can

cancel it by pressing the <S> button. (ISO speed lock is maintained

until you press the <S> button.)

If you press the <A> button and recompose the shot, you can see the

exposure level difference on the exposure level indicator compared to

when the <A> button was pressed.

With the camera ready to shoot in the <a> mode, you can display the

histogram by pressing the button.

333

k Shooting Movies

The settable shutter speeds in the <a> manual exposure shooting

mode vary depending on the frame rate of the movie recording quality.

(sec.)

Still photos cannot be taken during movie shooting. To take still

photos, stop the movie shooting and take still photos using viewfinder

shooting or Live View shooting.

Settable Shutter Speeds

Frame Rate Shutter Speed

81/4000 - 1/60

71/4000 - 1/50

61/4000 - 1/30

5 4 1/4000 - 1/25

Still Photo Shooting

The settable shutter speeds will differ for time-lapse movie shooting (p.349).

334

k Shooting Movies

Each time you press the <

> button, the information display will change.

* Applies to a single movie clip.

The display will show only the settings currently applied.

Information Display

Movie shooting mode/Scene icon

• : Autoexposure (A/C)

• : Autoexposure (d/s/f/F)

• : Manual exposure (a)

•u: HDR movie shooting (8)

•a: Time-lapse movie shooting

Picture Style

AF point

(Live 1-point AF)

Exposure compensation amount

Aperture

Shutter speed

White balance/

White balance

correction

AF method

Battery level

ISO speed

Sound-recording level

indicator (Manual)

Auto Lighting

Optimizer

Movie shooting remaining time*/Elapsed

shooting time/Video snapshot shooting time

Wind filter: Disable

Attenuator

Movie Servo AF

Highlight tone priority

Sound-recording

level (Manual)

Recording movie

Temperature

warning

Writing indicator

AE lock

Magnify button

Exposure level indicator

GPS acquisition status

Movie recording format

Movie recording size/

Frame rate

Wi-Fi signal strength/

Eye-Fi card transmission status

Wi-Fi function

Bluetooth function

Movie digital IS

Video snapshot

Time-lapse movie

335

k Shooting Movies

When the [z4: AF method] is [Smooth zone] or [Live 1-point AF], you

can press the button to display the electronic level (p.80).

You can set what is displayed for when you press the button

(p.298).

If [z4: AF method] is set to [u+Tracking] or if the camera is

connected to a TV set with an HDMI cable, the electronic level cannot be

displayed.

The electronic level, grid lines, or histogram cannot be displayed during

movie shooting. (The display will disappear when you start shooting a

movie.)

When movie shooting starts, the movie shooting remaining time will

change to the elapsed time.

336

k Shooting Movies

Cautions for Movie Shooting

Do not point the camera toward an intense light source, such as the sun

or an intense artificial light source. Doing so may damage the image

sensor or the camera’s internal components.

If you shoot something that has fine detail, moire or false colors may

result.

If <Q> or <Qw> is set and the ISO speed or aperture changes during

movie shooting, the white balance may also change.

If you shoot a movie under fluorescent or LED lighting, the movie image

may flicker.

If you perform AF with a USM lens during movie shooting in low light,

horizontal banding noise may be recorded in the movie. The same type

of noise may occur if you focus manually with certain lenses equipped

with an electronic focusing ring.

Shooting a few test movies is recommended if you intend to perform

zooming during movie shooting. Zooming during movie shooting may

result in recording of changes in exposure or mechanical sound of the

lens, or images may be out of focus.

During movie shooting, if you perform AF, any of the following may occur:

The focus is temporarily greatly thrown off, changes in movie brightness

is recorded, the movie recording stops momentarily, and the mechanical

sound of the lens is recorded.

During movie shooting, you cannot magnify the image even if you press

the button.

Be careful not to cover the built-in microphones (p.326) with your fingers,

etc.

If you connect or disconnect the HDMI cable during movie shooting, the

movie shooting will end.

“General Movie Shooting Cautions” are on pages 382-383.

If necessary, also read “General Live View Shooting Cautions” on

pages 323-324.

337

k Shooting Movies

Warnings

Do not hold the camera in the same position for long periods of time.

Even if the camera does not feel too hot, prolonged contact with the same

body part may cause skin redness or blistering due to low-temperature contact

burns. Using a tripod is recommended when using the camera in very hot

places or for people with circulation problems or poor skin sensation.

Notes for Movie Shooting

Each time you shoot a movie, a new movie file is created on the card.

The movie’s field of view coverage for shooting Full HD and HD movies

is approx. 100%.

You can also focus by pressing the button.

With [ /k] or [q/k] selected under [z4: V btn function], you

can press the shutter button completely to start or stop the movie

shooting (p.378, under the [z2] tab in Basic Zone modes).

Stereo sound is recorded by the camera’s built-in microphones (p.326).

If you connect the Directional Stereo Microphone DM-E1 (sold

separately) to the camera’s external microphone IN terminal (p.29), the

external microphone is given the priority (p.347).

Most external microphones equipped with a 3.5 mm diameter mini plug

can be used.

With a fully-charged Battery Pack LP-E6N, the possible movie shooting

time will be as follows: approx. 2 hr. 40 min. at room temperatures (23°C

/ 73°F) and approx. 2 hr. 20 min. at low temperatures (0°C / 32°F) (with

[z1: Movie rec. size]: L654X and [z4: Movie Servo

AF: Disable] set).

The focus preset function can be used for movie shooting when using a

(super) telephoto lens equipped with the focus preset mode, released in

and after the second half of 2011.

The color sampling recorded will be YCbCr 4:2:0 (8-bit), and the color

matrix recorded will be Rec. ITU-R BT.709.

338

k Shooting Movies

Final image simulation is a function that shows the movie as it will look

with the current settings for the Picture Style, white balance and other

shooting functions applied.

During movie shooting, the image will automatically reflect the function

settings listed below. However, the displayed image may be slightly

different from the resulting image.

Final Image Simulation for Movie Shooting

Picture Style

* Sharpness (Strength), contrast, color saturation, and color tone will be

reflected.

White balance

White balance correction

Exposure

Depth of field (except during the time-lapse movie shooting)

Auto Lighting Optimizer

Peripheral illumination correction

Chromatic aberration correction

Highlight tone priority

HDR movie

Final Image Simulation

During time-lapse movie shooting, if the exposure is not being simulated

correctly, the <g> icon will blink.

339

With the image displayed on the LCD monitor, if you press the <f> or

button, the setting screen will appear on the LCD monitor and

you can turn the <6> dial to set the respective function.

During manual-exposure shooting (p.330), you can press the

button to set the ISO speed.

You cannot set the AF operation, drive mode, or metering mode.

With the image displayed on the LCD monitor, you can press the <Q>

button to set the following functions.

In Creative Zone modes, you can set the following:

AF method

Movie

recording size

Movie digital IS

, Sound-recording level (only when set

manually), White balance, Picture Style, Auto Lighting Optimizer, and

Video snapshots

In the <A> or <C> mode, only the functions in bold above can

be set. For <8> mode, only the AF method can be set.

1 Press the <Q> button (7).

The settable functions will be

displayed.

Shooting Function Settings

f/i Settings

Q Quick Control

340

Shooting Function Settings

2 Select a function and set it.

Press the <W> <X> keys to select a function.

The settings of the selected function and Feature guide will

appear on the screen.

Turn the <6> or <5> dial to set it.

To set the white balance correction or Picture Style parameters,

press the button.

To set Auto white balance, select [Q] (or [Qw]), then press

<0>.

To return to movie shooting, press <0> or the <Q> button.

You can also select [2] to return to movie shooting.

With [z1: Sound recording] set to [Manual] and [z5: Time-lapse

movies] set to [Enable], pressing the <Q> button will not display the

sound-recording level (only when set manually).

During movie shooting, you can press the <Q> button to set the sound-

recording level (only when set manually).

341

With [z1: Movie rec. size], you can set

the movie recording quality (image size,

frame rate, and compression method).

The movie will be recorded as an MP4

file.

The frame rate displayed on the [z1:

Movie rec. size] screen switches

automatically depending on the [53:

Video system] setting (p.541).

Image size

L 1920x1080

The movie will be recorded in Full High-Definition (Full HD)

quality. The aspect ratio is 16:9.

w 1280x720

The movie will be recorded in High-Definition (HD) quality. The

aspect ratio is 16:9.

Setting the Movie Recording Quality

Movie Recording Size

The card’s writing and reading speeds required for recording movies

vary depending on the movie recording quality. Before shooting

movies, see page 343 to check the performance requirements of the

card.

If you change the [53: Video system] setting, also set [z1: Movie rec.

size] again.

You cannot shoot Standard Definition (VGA) movies.

342

3 Setting the Movie Recording Quality

Frame rate (fps: frame per second)

8 59.94fps/6 29.97fps

For areas where the TV system is NTSC (North America, Japan,

South Korea, Mexico, etc.).

7 50.00 fps/5 25.00 fps

For areas where the TV system is PAL (Europe, Russia, China,

Australia, etc.).

4 23.98 fps

Selectable when [53: Video system] is set to [For NTSC].

Mainly for motion pictures.

Compression method

X IPB (Standard)

Compresses multiple frames at a time efficiently for recording.

IPB (Light)

Since the movie is recorded at a bit rate lower than with IPB

(Standard), the file size will be smaller than with IPB (Standard)

and the playback compatibility will be higher. This will make the

possible shooting time longer than with IPB (Standard) (with a

card having the same capacity).

Movie recording format

C MP4

The movie will be recorded in the MP4 format (file extension

“.MP4”). This file format provides higher compatibility for playback

than with MOV.

343

3 Setting the Movie Recording Quality

When shooting movies, use a large-capacity card with a writing/reading

speed (required card performance) shown in the table below or higher

than the standard specification. Test the card by taking a few movies in

the desired quality (p.341) and make sure the card can properly record

the movie.

* The required card performance for time-lapse movies applies to reading speed.

Cards that Can Record Movies

Movie Recording Quality SD Card

Normal movie

SD Speed Class 10 or higher

654

HDR movies SD Speed Class 6 or higher

65 V SD Speed Class 4 or higher

w87 X SD Speed Class 6 or higher

65 V SD Speed Class 4 or higher

Time-lapse movie (p.349)

H65 JDUHS-I 90 MB/sec. or faster

UHS-I Speed Class 3 or higher

If you use a slow-writing card when shooting movies, the movie may not

be recorded properly. Also, if you play back a movie on a card with a

slow reading speed, the movie may not be played back properly.

When movies cannot be recorded normally, format the card and try

again. If formatting the card does not resolve the problem, refer to the

card manufacturer’s Web site, etc.



The camera is not compatible with UHS-II, the ultra high speed transfer

standard of SDHC/SDXC cards. (Compatible with UHS-I.) With a UHS-II-

compatible card, high-speed transfer via UHS-I may not be possible

depending on the card specification.

344

3 Setting the Movie Recording Quality

Normal movie (Approx.)

Time-lapse movie (Approx.)

* For the movie recording time (playback time) for time-lapse movie shooting, see

page 351.

Total Movie Recording Time and File Size Per Minute

Movie Recording

Quality

Total Possible Recording Time on Card

File Size

8 GB 32 GB 128 GB

L: Full HD movie

17 min. 70 min. 283 min. 431 MB/min.

654 35 min. 140 min. 563 min. 216 MB/min.

HDR Movie 35 min. 140 min. 563 min. 216 MB/min.

65 V 86 min. 347 min. 1391 min. 87 MB/min.

w: HD movie

87 X 40 min. 162 min. 649 min. 184 MB/min.

65 V 250 min. 1001 min. 4004 min. 30 MB/min.

Movie Recording

Quality

Total Possible Recording Time on Card

File Size

8 GB 32 GB 128 GB

H: 4K Time-lapse movie

65 J2 min. 8 min. 34 min. 3576 MB/min.

L: Full HD Time-lapse movie

65 W 11 min. 47 min. 189 min. 643 MB/min.

To obtain better performance with the card, formatting the card with the

camera before shooting movies is recommended (p.75).

To check the card’s writing/reading speed, refer to the card

manufacturer’s Web site, etc.

For bit rates, see page 574.

An increase of the camera’s internal temperature may cause movie shooting

to stop before the total recording time shown in the table (p.382).

345

3 Setting the Movie Recording Quality

Even if you shoot a movie exceeding 4 GB, you can keep shooting

without interruption (except the time-lapse movie shooting).

Using SD/SDHC cards formatted with the camera

If you use the camera to format an SD/SDHC card, the camera

will format it in FAT32.

With a FAT32-formatted card, if you shoot a movie and the file

size exceeds 4 GB, a new movie file will be created automatically.

When you play back the movie, you will have to play back each

movie file individually. Movie files cannot be played back

automatically in consecutive order. After the movie playback ends,

select the next movie and play it back.

Using SDXC cards formatted with the camera

If you use the camera to format an SDXC card, the camera will

format it in exFAT.

When using an exFAT-formatted card, even if the file size exceeds

4 GB during movie shooting, the movie will be saved as a single

file (rather than being split into multiple files).

The maximum recording time of one movie clip is 29 min. 59 sec. If the

movie shooting time reaches 29 min. 59 sec., the movie shooting will

stop automatically. You can start shooting a movie again by pressing

the <0> button. (The movie will be recorded as a new movie file.)

Movie Files Exceeding 4 GB

Movie Shooting Time Limit

When downloading movie files exceeding 4 GB to a computer, use either

the EOS Utility (p.594) or a card reader (p.599). Movie files exceeding

4 GB will not be downloaded if you perform image download with the

computer’s operating system.

For 4K time-lapse movie shooting (p.350), using an SDXC card is

recommended.

346

You can shoot movies while recording

sound with the built-in stereo

microphones or an external stereo

microphone. You can also freely adjust

the sound-recording level.

Use [z1: Sound recording] to set

sound recording functions.

Auto : The sound-recording level is adjusted automatically. Auto

level control will take effect automatically in response to the

sound level.

Manual : For advanced users. You can adjust the sound-recording

level to one of 64 levels.

Select [Rec. level] and press the <Y> <Z> keys while

looking at the level meter to adjust the sound-recording

level. Look at the peak hold indicator, and adjust so that the

level meter sometimes lights up on the right of the “12” (-12

dB) mark for the loudest sounds. If it exceeds “0”, the sound

will be distorted.

Disable : Sound will not be recorded.

When set to [Auto], it reduces wind noise when there is wind outdoors.

This feature works only when you use the built-in microphones for

movie shooting. When the wind filter function takes effect, part of the

low bass sounds will also be reduced.

3 Setting the Sound Recording

Sound Recording/Sound-Recording Level

Wind Filter

347

3 Setting the Sound Recording

Automatically suppresses sound distortion caused by loud noises. Even

if [Sound rec.] is set to [Auto] or [Manual] for shooting, sound

distortion may still result if there is a very loud sound. In such a case,

setting it to [Enable] is recommended.

Using a microphone

Normally, the built-in microphones will record the sound in stereo.

If an external stereo microphone equipped with a miniature stereo

plug (3.5 mm diameter) is connected to the camera’s external

microphone IN terminal (p.29), the external microphone will be given

the priority. Using the Directional Stereo Microphone DM-E1 (sold

separately) is recommended.

Attenuator

If you use the Wi-Fi (wireless communication) function with an external

microphone, the sound noise may be recorded. During sound recording,

using the wireless communication function is not recommended.

The camera’s built-in microphones will also record the operation sound

and mechanical sound of the camera during shooting. Using Directional

Stereo Microphone DM-E1 (sold separately) may reduce such sounds in

the movie.

When connecting an external microphone to the camera, be sure to

insert the plug all the way in.

Do not connect anything other than an external microphone to the

camera’s external microphone IN terminal.

In Basic Zone modes, the settings available for [Sound recording] will

be [On] or [Off]. If [On] is set, the sound-recording level will be adjusted

automatically (same as with [Auto]), and the wind filter function will take

effect.

The sound volume balance between L (left) and R (right) cannot be

adjusted.

Sound is recorded at a 48 kHz/16-bit sampling rate.

348

If you set the Mode Dial to <8>, you can shoot movies with clipped

highlights reduced for a high dynamic range of tones even in high-

contrast scenes.

HDR movie will be recorded in L6X (NTSC) or L5X

(PAL).

* HDR stands for High Dynamic Range.

1Set the Mode Dial to <8>.

2Shoot an HDR movie.

Shoot the movie in the same way as

normal movie shooting.

Shooting HDR Movies

Since multiple frames are merged to create an HDR movie, certain parts of

the movie may look distorted. During handheld shooting, camera shake may

make the distortion look more noticeable. Using a tripod is recommended.

Note that even if a tripod is used for shooting, afterimages or noise may

become more noticeable when the HDR movie is played back frame-by-

frame or in slow-motion compared to normal playback.

349

Still photos shot at a set interval can be stitched together automatically

to create a 4K or Full HD time-lapse movie. A time-lapse movie shows

how a subject changes in a much shorter period of time than the actual

time it took. It is effective for a fixed-point observation of changing

scenery, growing plants, celestial motion, etc.

Time-lapse movies will be recorded in the MOV format at the following

quality: H6J (NTSC) /H5J (PAL) for 4K, and L 6

W (NTSC)/L 5 W (PAL) for Full HD.

Note that the frame rate will be switched automatically according to the

[53: Video system] setting (p.541).

1Select a shooting mode.

As with normal movie shooting, in the

<A>, <C>, <d>, <s>, <f>,

and <F

> modes, autoexposure

shooting takes effect. In the <

mode, manual exposure shooting

takes effect.

2Set the Live View shooting/Movie

shooting switch to <k>.

The Live View image will appear on

the LCD monitor.

3Select [Time-lapse movie].

Under the [z5] tab (the [z3] tab in

<A> and <C> modes), select

[Time-lapse movie], then press

<0>.

4Select [Time-lapse].

a Shooting Time-lapse Movies

Even if you set the <s> or <f> mode, time-lapse movie shooting with

priority given to shutter speed or aperture cannot be performed.

Autoexposure shooting takes effect as in the <d> mode.

350

a Shooting Time-lapse Movies

5Select the desired movie

recording size.

Select [EnableH (3840x2160)] or

[EnableL (1920x1080)].

EnableH (3840x2160)

The movie is recorded in 4K quality. The aspect ratio is 16:9. The

frame rate of the recorded movie is 29.97fps (6) for NTSC and

25.00fps (5) for PAL, and its recording format is Motion JPEG

(J) and its movie file format is MOV (D).

EnableL (1920x1080)

The movie is recorded in Full High-Definition (Full HD) quality. The

aspect ratio is 16:9. The frame rate of the recorded movie is

29.97fps (6) for NTSC and 25.00fps (5) for PAL, and its

recording format is ALL-I (W), and its movie file format is MOV

(D).

Movie recording method / Compression rate

J MJPG

Each frame is compressed one at a time and recorded. The

compression rate is low, but the movie is better suited for editing.

W ALL-I (For editing/I-only)

Each frame is compressed one at a time and recorded. The

compression rate is low, but the movie is better suited for editing

than with IPB.

Movie recording format

D MOV

The movie is recorded in the MOV format (file extension “.MOV”).

351

a Shooting Time-lapse Movies

6Set the shooting interval.

Select [Interval].

Check the [k Time required

]

and

[3: Playback time

] displayed at the

bottom of the screen to set the

number.

Select the hour, minute, or second.

Press <0> to display <r>.

Set the desired number, then press <0>. (Returns to <s>.)

Settable in the range from [00:00:01] to [99:59:59].

Select [OK] to set the shooting interval.

7Set the number of shots.

Select [No. of shots].

Check the [k: Time required and

[3: Playback time]

displayed at the

bottom of the screen to set the

number.

Select the digit.

Press <0> to display <r>.

Set the desired number, then press <0>. (Returns to <s>.)

Settable in the range from [0002] to [3600].

Check that [3: Playback time] is not displayed in red.

Select [OK] to set the number of shots.

Time required Playback time

For cards that can record time-lapse movies (card performance

requirements), see page 343.

If the number of shots is set to 3600, the time-lapse movie will be approx.

2 min. in NTSC and approx. 2 min. 24 sec. in PAL.

352

a Shooting Time-lapse Movies

8Select the exposure’s setting

method.

Select [Auto exposure].

Fixed 1st frame

When taking the first shot, metering is performed to set the exposure

automatically to match the brightness. The exposure setting for the

first shot will be applied to subsequent shots. Other shooting-related

settings for the first shot will also be applied for subsequent shots.

Each frame

Metering is also performed for each subsequent shot to set the

exposure automatically to match the brightness. Note that if

functions such as Picture Style and white balance are set to [Auto],

they will be set automatically for each subsequent shot.

9Set whether the image is to be

displayed.

Select [LCD auto off].

Disable

Even during time-lapse movie shooting, the image will be displayed.

(The LCD monitor turns off only at the time of shooting.) Note that the

LCD monitor will turn off when approx. 30 min. elapse after the

shooting started.

Enable

The LCD monitor will turn off when approx. 10 sec. elapse after the

shooting started.

During time-lapse movie shooting, you can press the button to turn

on/off the LCD monitor.

353

a Shooting Time-lapse Movies

Set the beeper.

Select [Beep as img taken].

If [Disable] is set, the beeper will not

sound for shooting.

Check the settings.

Time required

Indicates the time required to shoot the set number of shots with the

set interval. If it exceeds 24 hours, “*** days” will be displayed.

Playback time

Indicates the movie recording time (time required to play back the

movie) when creating the time-lapse movie in 4K movie or Full HD

movie from the still photos taken with the set intervals.

Exit the menu.

Press the <M> button to turn off

the menu screen.

Time required Playback time

If [54: Beep] is set to [Disable], the setting in step 10 cannot be set.

354

a Shooting Time-lapse Movies

Read the message.

Read the message and select [OK].

Take test shots.

As with Live View shooting, set the

exposure and shooting functions,

then press the shutter button halfway

to focus.

Press the shutter button completely to

take test shots. The still photos will be

recorded to the card.

If there are no problems with the test

shots, go to the next step.

To take test shots again, repeat this

step.

The test shots are recorded with the [z1: Movie rec. size] setting.

In the <a> mode, you can set the shutter speed within a range of

1/4000 sec. to 30 sec.

With autoexposure shooting (except for the <A> and <C> modes) or

manual exposure shooting + ISO Auto, the maximum limit of the ISO

speed set automatically can be set with [aISO Auto] under [z2:

kISO speed settings] (p.372).

For manual exposure shooting, if you set [Maximum] for [ISO speed

range] to [H2(102400)] under [z2: kISO speed settings], the

maximum limit of the manual setting range will be expanded to H2

(equivalent to ISO 102400).

355

a Shooting Time-lapse Movies

Press the <0> button.

The camera will be ready to start

shooting a time-lapse movie.

To return to step 13, press the <0>

button again.

Shoot the time-lapse movie.

Press the button and check

again the “Time required” and

“Interval” displayed on the screen.

Press the shutter button halfway to

check the focus and exposure.

Press the shutter button

completely to start shooting the

time-lapse movie.

AF will not work during time-lapse

movie shooting.

During time-lapse movie shooting,

<a> will blink on the LCD panel.

Also, < > will appear on the left of

“o”.

Since the electronic shutter is used

for shooting, the reflex mirror and

shutter make no mechanical sound

during time-lapse movie shooting.

When the set number of shots are

taken, the time-lapse movie shooting

ends.

The time-lapse movie shooting is

canceled automatically.

Time-lapse movie

Shots remaining

Time required Interval

Number of shots

356

a Shooting Time-lapse Movies

Using a tripod is recommended.

Taking test shots for still photos as in step 14 and shooting test movies

for time-lapse movies beforehand is recommended.

Regardless of the [z1: Movie rec. size] setting, 4K time-lapse movies

are recorded in H6J(NTSC)/H5J(PAL), while Full HD

time-lapse movies are recorded in L 6 W(NTSC)/L 5

W(PAL).

The movie’s field of view coverage for shooting 4K and Full HD movies is

approx. 100%.

To cancel the time-lapse movie shooting in progress, either press the

shutter button completely or press the <0> button ([Disable] will be

set). The time-lapse movie shot so far will be recorded on the card.

If the time required for shooting is more than 24 hours but not more than

48 hours, “2 days” will be indicated. If three or more days are required,

the number of days will be indicated in 24-hour increments.

Even if the time-lapse movie’s playback time is less than 1 sec., a movie

file will still be created. For [Playback time], “00:00:00” will be displayed.

If the shooting time is long, using the household power outlet

accessories (sold separately, p.520) is recommended.

In the <A> and <C> modes, the scene icon for the scene detected by

the camera is displayed on the upper left of the screen (p.329).

The color sampling recorded will be YCbCr 4:2:2 (8-bit) for 4K time-lapse

movies, and YCbCr 4:2:0 (8-bit) for Full HD time-lapse movies. The color

matrix recorded will be Rec. ITU-R BT.601 for 4K time-lapse movies, and

Rec. ITU-R BT.709 for Full HD time-lapse movies.

If the card does not have enough free space to record the set number of

shots, [Playback time] (p.353) will be displayed in red. Although the

camera can continue shooting, the shooting will stop when the card

becomes full.

If the card has no available capacity, “Number of shots” (p.355) will be

displayed in red as “z0000”, and you will not be able to shoot.

If the movie file size exceeds 4 GB with the [No. of shots] settings and

the card is not formatted in eXFAT (p.71), [Play time] will be displayed in

red (p.353). If you keep shooting in this condition and the movie file size

reaches 4 GB, the time-lapse movie shooting will stop.

357

a Shooting Time-lapse Movies

Do not point the camera toward an intense light source, such as the sun

or an intense artificial light source. Doing so may damage the image

sensor or the camera’s internal components.

If the camera is connected to a computer with the interface cable (sold

separately), or if an HDMI cable is connected to the camera, you cannot

select [Enable].

Movie Servo AF will not function.

If the shutter speed is 1/30 sec. or slower, the exposure of the movie may

not be displayed properly (may differ from that of the resulting movie).

Do not zoom the lens during time-lapse movie shooting. Zooming the

lens may cause the image to be out of focus, the exposure to change, or

the lens aberration correction not to function properly.

When shooting a time-lapse movie under a flickering light, noticeable

image flickering, horizontal stripes (noise), or irregular exposures may be

recorded.

The image displayed during time-lapse movie shooting and the resulting

movie may look different (in terms of flicker, depth of field, etc.).

When shooting a time-lapse movie under low light, the image displayed

during shooting may look different from what is actually recorded in the

movie. In such cases, the <g> icon will blink.

If you move the camera from left to right (panning) or shoot a moving

subject during time-lapse movie shooting, the image may look extremely

distorted.

During time-lapse movie shooting, auto power off will not take effect.

Also, you cannot adjust the shooting function and menu function

settings, play back images, etc.

Sound is not recorded for time-lapse movies.

With time-lapse movie shooting, you can press the shutter button

completely to start or stop the movie shooting regardless of the [V btn

function] setting.

With [Interval] set to less than 3 sec. and [Auto exposure] set to [Each

frame], if the brightness differs greatly from the preceding shot, the

camera may not shoot at the set interval.

358

a Shooting Time-lapse Movies

If a shutter speed longer than the shooting interval such as when the

long exposure is set, or if a slow shutter speed is set automatically, the

camera may not be able to shoot at the set interval. Also, shooting may

not be performed when the shutter speed and the shooting interval are

nearly the same.

If the next scheduled shot is not possible, it will be skipped. This may

shorten the recording time of the created time-lapse movie.

Even if [LCD auto off] is set to [Disable], the LCD monitor will turn off

during the exposure. Also, if the shooting interval is 1 sec., no image will

be displayed.

Even if [LCD auto off] is set to [Disable], the image may not be

displayed for the short interval before the next shot.

If the time it takes to record to the card exceeds the shooting interval due

to the shooting functions set or card performance, some of the shots may

not be taken with the set intervals.

The captured images are not recorded as still photos. Even if you cancel

the time-lapse movie shooting after only one shot is taken, it will be

recorded as a movie file.

If you connect the camera to a computer with the interface cable (sold

separately) and use EOS Utility (EOS software), set [z5: Time-lapse

movie] to [Disable]. If it is set to [Enable], the camera cannot

communicate with the computer.

During time-lapse movie shooting, the lens’s Image Stabilizer will not

operate.

If the power switch is set to <2>, the Live View shooting/Movie

shooting switch is operated, etc. time-lapse movie shooting will be

terminated and the setting will be switched to [Disable].

Even if a flash is used, it will not fire.

Shooting-ready state of the time-lapse movie is canceled and the setting

is switched to [Disable] with the following operations:

• Selecting either [Clean manually] or [Clean nowf] under [54:

Sensor cleaning] or selecting [55: Clear all camera settings].

• Selecting the <8>, <w>, or <x> shooting mode.

359

a Shooting Time-lapse Movies

When time-lapse movie shooting ends, the settings are cleared

automatically, and the camera returns to normal movie shooting. Note

that if you set a slow shutter speed for time-lapse movie shooting and the

settings are automatically cleared, the shutter speed may be

automatically changed to a speed within the settable range for normal

movie shooting.

If you start time-lapse movie shooting while the white <s> temperature

warning (p.334) is displayed, the image quality of the time-lapse movie

may deteriorate. It is recommended that you start time-lapse movie

shooting after the white <s> disappears (camera’s internal temperature

decreases).

If you play back a 4K time-lapse movie with the camera or select [Slow

motion] and set it to the fastest speed (by turning <5> all the way to

the right) (p.420), every other frame will be skipped for playback.

You cannot extract the frames from 4K time-lapse movie during playback

(no 4K frame grab feature).

When shooting with [Auto Exposure] set to [Each frame], the following

will not be recorded in the time-lapse movie’s Exif information.

• Autoexposure shooting: Shutter speed, Aperture

You can shoot time-lapse movies with a fully-charged Battery Pack LP-E6N

for roughly as long as shown in the table below (approx. time from start of

shooting until the battery becomes exhausted). The possible movie shooting

time varies depending on the shooting conditions.

Total Possible Time for Time-lapse Movie Shooting (Approx.)

Time-lapse Movie

Shooting Room Temperature

(23°C / 73°F)

Low Temperatures

(0°C / 32°F)

Interval LCD

monitor

1 sec. Turned o n 5 hr. 10 min. 4 hr. 30 min.

Turned off

10 sec. Turned on 3 hr. 10 min. 2 hr. 50 min.

Turned off 7 hr. 00 min. 6 hr. 20 min.

360

a Shooting Time-lapse Movies

You can use Remote Controller RC-6 (sold separately, p.271) or Wireless

Remote Control BR-E1 (sold separately, p.273) to start and stop the time-

lapse movie shooting. Set [z5: Remote control] to [Enable] beforehand.

With Remote Controller RC-6

With Wireless Remote Control BR-E1

• First pair the Wireless Remote Control BR-E1 with the camera (p.273).

• Take test shots, then when the camera is ready to shoot (as in step 15

on page 355), set the BR-E1’s release mode/movie shooting switch to

<o> (immediate release) or <2> (release after 2-sec. delay).

• If the remote controller’s switch has been set to <k>, the time-lapse

movie shooting cannot start.

Camera Status/

Remote Control Setting <2> (2-sec. delay) <o> (Immediate

release)

Test-shooting screen To shooting-ready Shoots still photo

Shooting-ready To test-shooting

screen Starts shooting

During time-lapse movie

shooting Ends shooting Ends shooting

Camera Status/

Remote Control Setting

<2> (2-sec. delay)

<o> (Immediate

release)

<k> (Movie

shooting)

Test-shooting screen Shoots still photo To shooting-ready

Shooting-ready Starts shooting To test-shooting

screen

During time-lapse movie

shooting Ends shooting Ends shooting

361

You can shoot a series of short movie clips lasting approx. 2 sec., 4

sec., or 8 sec. called video snapshots. The video snapshots can be

joined together into a single movie called a video snapshot album. You

can thereby show short and quick highlights of a trip or event.

A video snapshot album can also be played back together with

background music (p.368, 426).

1Set the Mode Dial to a mode other

than <8>.

2Select [Video snapshot].

Under the [z5] tab (the [z3] tab in

Basic Zone modes), select [Video

snapshot], then press <0>.

3Select [Enable].

3 Shooting Video Snapshots

Setting the Video Snapshot Shooting Duration

Video Snapshot Album Concept

Video snapshot album

Video

snapshot 1

Video

snapshot 2

Video

snapshot**

362

3 Shooting Video Snapshots

4Select [Album settings].

5Select [Create a new album].

6Select [Snapshot length].

7Set the snapshot length.

Select the desired snapshot length,

then press <0>.

Select [OK].

8Exit the menu.

Press the <M> button to exit the

menu.

A blue bar will appear to indicate the

snapshot length.

Go to “Creating a Video Snapshot

Album” (p.363).

Shooting duration

363

3 Shooting Video Snapshots

9Shoot the first video snapshot.

Press the <0> button, then shoot.

The blue bar indicating the shooting

duration will gradually decrease. After

the set shooting duration elapses, the

shooting stops automatically.

The confirmation screen will appear

(p.364-365).

Save as a video snapshot album.

Select [J Save as album], then

press <0>.

The movie clip will be saved as the

video snapshot album’s first video

snapshot.

Continue to shoot more video

snapshots.

Repeat step 9 to shoot the next video

snapshot.

Select [J Add to album], then press

<0>.

To create another video snapshot

album, select [W Save as a new

album].

Repeat step 11 as necessary.

Exit the video snapshot shooting.

Set [Video snapshot] to [Disable].

To return to normal movie

shooting, be sure to set [Disable].

Press the <M> button to exit the

menu, and return to the normal movie

shooting.

Creating a Video Snapshot Album

364

3 Shooting Video Snapshots

Options in Steps 10 and 11

Function Description

JSave as album (Step 10) The movie clip will be saved as the video

snapshot album’s first video snapshot.

JAdd to album (Step 11)

The video snapshot just recorded will be

added to the album recorded immediately

before.

WSave as a new album

(Step 11)

A new video snapshot album is created and

the movie clip is saved as the first video

snapshot. The new album will be a different file

from the previously recorded album.

1 Playback video snapshot

(Step 10 and 11)

The video snapshot just recorded will be

played back. For playback operations, see the

table on the next page.

rDo not save to album

(Step 10)

rDelete without saving to

album (Step 11)

The video snapshot just recorded will be erased

instead of being saved to the album. Select

[

] on the confirmation dialog.

If you want to shoot another video snapshot right after shooting a video

snapshot, set [Disable] for [Show confirm msg] under [z5: Video

snapshot]. This setting will allow you to immediately shoot the next video

snapshot without the confirmation screen appearing after you shoot each

time.

365

3 Shooting Video Snapshots

[1 Playback video snapshot] Operations in Steps 10 and 11

*With [Skip backward] and [Skip forward], the skipping length corresponds to

the number of seconds set under [Video snapshot] (approx. 2 sec., 4 sec., or 8

sec.).

Function Playback Description

7 Play By pressing <0>, you can play back or pause the video

snapshot recorded immediately before.

5 First frame Displays the first scene of the album’s first video

snapshot.

T Skip backward* Each time you press <0>, the video snapshot skips

back by a few seconds.

3 Previous frame Displays the previous frame each time you press <0>.

Holding <0> down will rewind the movie.

6 Next frame Plays the movie frame-by-frame each time you press

<0>. Holding <0> down will fast forward the movie.

v Skip forward* Each time you press <0>, the video snapshot skips

forward by a few seconds.

4 Last frame Displays the last scene of the album’s last video

snapshot.

Playback position

mm’ ss” Playback time (minutes:seconds)

9 Volume Turn the <6> dial to adjust the volume of the built-in

speaker (p.419).

32Pressing the <M> button returns to the previous

screen.

366

3 Shooting Video Snapshots

1Select [Add to existing album].

Follow step 5 on page 362 to select

[Add to existing album], then press

<0>.

2Select an existing album.

Turn the <5> dial to select an

existing album, then press <0>.

Select [OK], then press <0>.

Certain video snapshot settings will

change to match the existing album’s

settings.

3Exit the menu.

Press the <M> button to exit the

menu.

The video snapshot shooting screen

will appear.

4Shoot the video snapshot.

See “Creating a Video Snapshot

Album” (p.363) to shoot the video

snapshot.

Adding to an Existing Album

You cannot select an album shot with another camera.

367

3 Shooting Video Snapshots

Cautions for Shooting Video Snapshots

You can add to an album only the video snapshots with the same

duration (approx. 2 sec., 4 sec., or 8 sec. each).

Note that if you do any of the following while shooting video snapshots, a

new album will be created for subsequent video snapshots.

• Changing the [z1: Movie rec. size] setting.

• Changing the [Sound rec.] setting from [Auto] or [Manual] to

[Disable] or from [Disable] to [Auto] or [Manual].

• Updating the firmware.

The shooting duration of a video snapshot is only approximate.

Depending on the frame rate, the shooting duration displayed during

playback may not be exact.

368

3 Shooting Video Snapshots

You can play back a video snapshot album in the same way as a normal

movie (p.419).

1Play back the movie.

Press the <x> button to display an

image.

2Select the album.

In the single-image display, the

[st] icon displayed on the upper

left of the screen indicates a video

snapshot album.

Turn the <5> dial to select an

album.

3Play back the album.

Press <0>.

On the movie playback panel

displayed, select [7] (Play), then

press <0>.

Playing Back an Album

Background Music

You can play background music when you play back albums, normal

movies, and slide shows on the camera (p.420, 426). To play

background music, you must first copy the background music to the card

using EOS Utility (EOS software). For information on how to copy the

background music, refer to the EOS Utility Instruction Manual (p.596).

Music recorded on the memory card must be used only for private

enjoyment. Do not violate the rights of the copyright holder.

369

3 Shooting Video Snapshots

After shooting, you can rearrange, delete, or play back the video

snapshots in the album.

1Select [X].

On the movie playback panel

displayed, select [X] (Edit), then

press <0>.

The editing screen will be displayed.

2Select an editing operation.

Select an editing option, then press

<0>.

Editing an Album

Function Description

T Move snapshot

Press the <Y> <Z> keys to select the video snapshot

you want to move, then press <0>. Press the <Y>

<Z> keys to move the snapshot, then press <0>.

L Delete snapshot

Press the <Y> <Z> keys to select the video snapshot

you want to delete, then press <0>. The [L] icon will

be displayed on the selected video snapshot. Pressing

<0> again will cancel the selection and [L] will

disappear.

7 Play snapshot Press the <Y> <Z> keys to select the video snapshot

you want to play back, then press <0>.

370

3 Shooting Video Snapshots

3Save the edited album.

Press the <M> button to return to

the Editing panel at the screen

bottom.

Select [W] (Save), then press <0>.

The save screen will appear.

To save it as a new album, select

[New file]. To save it and overwrite

the original album, select

[Overwrite], then press <0>.

If the card does not have enough free space, [New file] will not be

available.

When the battery level is low, editing albums is not possible. Use a fully-

charged battery.

371

When the Live View shooting/Movie

shooting switch is set to <k>, some

menu options under the [z1] tab will be

switched to movie shooting items.

Movie recording size

You can set the movie recording quality (image size, frame rate, and

compression method). For details, see pages 341-342.

Sound recording

You can set sound recording functions. For details, see page 346.

When the Live View shooting/Movie

shooting switch is set to <k>, the menu

options for the ISO speed settings will be

switched to [z2: kISO speed

settings]. (In Basic Zone modes,

[kISO speed settings] will not be

displayed.)

3 Menu Function Settings

For more information about the items under the [z1] tab, see the following

pages: [Image quality] on page 162, [Lens aberration correction] on page

200, and [Lens electronic MF] on page 155.

For more information about the items under the [z2] tab, see the following

pages: [Exposure compensation] on page 245, [Auto Lighting

Optimizer] on page 194, [White balance] on page 185, [Custom White

Balance] on page 188, and [WB Shift/Bkt.] on page 191.

372

3 Menu Function Settings

kISO speed settingsN

ISO speed

In the <a> mode, you can set the ISO speed manually. You can

also select ISO Auto. You can also use the button for these

settings.

ISO speed range

For movie shooting, you can set the manual ISO speed setting

range (minimum and maximum limits). By default, it is set to ISO

100 - ISO 25600. You can set the minimum limit within ISO 100 to

H1 (equivalent to ISO 51200), and the maximum limit within ISO

200 to H2 (equivalent to ISO 102400).

 ISO Auto

In the <d>, <s>, <f>, and <F> modes or with the <a>

mode + ISO Auto setting, you can set the maximum limit for the

ISO speed to be set automatically for movie shooting. By default, it

is set to is [Max.:25600]. You can set the maximum limit within

[Max.:6400] to [Max.:H2 (102400)].

aISO Auto

In the <d>, <s>, <f>, and <F> modes or with the <a>

mode + ISO Auto setting, you can set the maximum limit for the

ISO speed to be set automatically for time-lapse movie shooting.

The default setting is [Max.:12800]. You can set the maximum limit

within [Max.:400] to [Max.:25600].

For movie shooting, ISO 32000 and ISO 40000 are the expanded ISO

speeds. When you set them, [H] will be displayed.

Regarding [z2: zISO speed settings] for still photo shooting

(viewfinder or Live View shooting), see pages 170-174.

373

3 Menu Function Settings

When the Live View shooting/Movie

shooting switch is set to <k>, the [z4]

tab will be displayed as the menu options

exclusive to movie shooting. (In Basic

Zone modes, it will be the [z2] tab.)

Movie Servo AF

With this function enabled, the camera focuses on the subject

continuously during movie shooting. The default setting is [Enable].

When [Enable] is set:

The camera focuses on the subject continuously even when you

are not pressing the shutter button halfway.

If you want to keep the focus at a specific point or if you do not

want the lens mechanical sound to be recorded, you can

temporarily stop Movie Servo AF as follows.

• Tap [Z] on the screen’s bottom left.

• If you assign [Pause Movie Servo AF] (p.500) to <0>, under

[8C.Fn III-4: Custom controls], you can press <0> to pause

the Movie Servo AF. When you press <0> again, Movie Servo

AF will resume.

• If you assign a button to [AF stop] (p.500), you can pause the

Movie Servo AF while holding that button down. When you let go

of the button, Movie Servo AF will resume.

When Movie Servo AF is paused, if you return to movie shooting

after operations such as pressing the <M> or <x> button or

changing the AF method, Movie Servo AF will resume.

374

3 Menu Function Settings

When [Disable] is set:

Press the shutter button halfway or press the button to

focus.

AF method

You can select [u+Tracking], [Smooth zone], or [Live 1-point AF].

See pages 308-314 for the AF method.

Cautions When [Movie Servo AF] is Set to [Enable]

Shooting Conditions that Make Focusing Difficult

• A fast-moving subject approaching or moving away from the camera.

• A subject moving at a close distance to the camera.

• When shooting with a higher f/number.

• Also see “Shooting Conditions that Make Focusing Difficult” on page

316.

Since the lens is driven continuously and battery power consumed, the

possible movie shooting time (p.344) will be shortened.

With certain lenses, the mechanical sound for focusing may be recorded.

In such a case, using Directional Stereo Microphone DM-E1 (sold

separately) may reduce such sounds in the movie.

Movie Servo AF will pause during zooming or magnified view.

During movie shooting, if a subject approaches or moves away or if the

camera is moved vertically or horizontally (panning), the recorded movie

image may momentarily expand or contract (change in image

magnification).

If you want to set the lens’s focus mode switch to <MF> during Movie

Servo AF, first set the Live View shooting/Movie shooting switch to

<A>.

375

3 Menu Function Settings

Movie Servo AF tracking sensitivityN

You can change the Movie Servo AF’s

tracking sensitivity to one of seven

levels. This affects the responsiveness of

AF tracking sensitivity when the subject

strays from the AF points, such as during

panning or when an obstacle cuts across

the AF points.

This function is settable when [z4:

Movie Servo AF] is set to [Enable] and

[z4: AF method] is set to [Live 1-point

AF].

Locked on: -3/-2/-1

This setting makes the camera less inclined to track a different subject if

the AF point loses the original subject. The closer the setting is to the

minus (-) symbol, the less the camera is inclined to track a different

subject. It is effective when you want to prevent the AF points from

rapidly tracking something that is not the intended subject during

panning or when an obstacle cuts across the AF points.

Responsive: +1/+2/+3

This makes the camera more responsive when tracking a subject that

covers the AF point. The closer the setting is to the plus (+) symbol, the

more responsive the camera is. It is effective when you want to keep

tracking a moving subject as its distance from the camera changes or to

rapidly focus on another subject.

Setting [z4: AF method] to [u+ tracking] or [Smooth zone] results in the

same effect as when [0] is set.

376

3 Menu Function Settings

Movie Servo AF SpeedN

You can set the Movie Servo AF’s AF

speed and its operation conditions.

This function is settable when [z4:

Movie Servo AF] is set to [Enable] and

[z4: AF method] is set to [Live 1-point

AF].

Additionally, the function is enabled

when using a lens supporting slow focus

transition during movie shooting*.

When active:

You can set [Always on] to have the AF speed take effect at all times

for movie shooting (before and during movie shooting) or set [During

shooting] to have the AF speed take effect only during movie shooting.

AF speed:

You can adjust the AF speed (focus transition speed) from the standard

speed (0) to slow (one of seven levels) or fast (one of two levels) to

obtain the desired effect for the movie creation.

* Lenses supporting slow focus transition during movie shooting

USM and STM lenses released in and after 2009 are compatible. For

details, refer to the Canon Web site.

With certain lenses, even if the AF speed is adjusted, the speed may not

change.

Setting [z4: AF method] to [u+ tracking] or [Smooth zone] results in

the same effect as setting [AF speed] to [Standard (0)].

If the [z4: Movie Servo AF Speed] setting is changed from the default,

an asterisk “*” will be displayed on the right end of [z4: Movie Servo

AF Speed].

377

3 Menu Function Settings

Metering timerN

You can change how long the exposure setting is displayed (AE lock

time).

Grid display

With [3x3 l] or [6x4 m], you can display grid lines to help you

level the camera vertically or horizontally. Also, with [3x3+diag n],

the grid is displayed together with diagonal lines to help you

compose with better balance by aligning the intersections over the

subject.

Note that the grid is not displayed on the LCD monitor during movie

shooting.

378

3 Menu Function Settings

V button function

You can set the functions performed by

pressing the shutter button halfway or

completely during movie shooting.

If [ /k] or [q/k] is set, besides pressing the <0> button,

you can start or stop the movie shooting by pressing the shutter

button completely or by using Remote Switch RS-80N3 (sold

separately, p.276), Timer Remote Controller TC-80N3 (sold

separately, p.276) or Wireless Remote Control BR-E1 (sold

separately, p.273).

Setting Pressing halfway Pressing completely

/- Metering and AF No function

q/- Metering only No function

/kMetering and AF Starts/stops movie shooting

q/kMetering only Starts/stops movie shooting

Even if [z4:V btn function] is set to [ /-] or [q/-], pressing the

shutter button completely during time-lapse movie shooting will start or

stop the time-lapse movie shooting.

During movie shooting, the [z4: V btn function] setting overrides any

function assigned to the shutter button with [8C.Fn III-4: Custom

Controls].

379

3 Menu Function Settings

When the Live View shooting/Movie

shooting switch is set to <k>, the [z5]

tab will be displayed as the menu options

exclusive to movie shooting. (In Basic

Zone modes, it will be the [z3] tab.)

Video snapshot

You can shoot video snapshots. For details, see page 361.

Time-lapse movie

You can shoot time-lapse movies. For details, see page 349.

380

3 Menu Function Settings

Movie digital IS

In-camera image stabilization electronically corrects camera shake

during movie shooting. This function is called “Movie digital IS”. With

Movie digital IS, images can be stabilized even when using a lens

without Image Stabilizer. When using a lens with built-in optical

Image Stabilizer, Movie digital IS will function when the lens’s Image

Stabilizer switch is set to <1>.

Disable (v) : Image stabilization with Movie digital IS is

disabled.

Enable (w) : Camera shake will be corrected. The image will

be slightly magnified.

Enhanced(x) : Compared to when [Enable] is set, stronger

camera shake can be corrected. The image will

be more magnified.

Movie digital IS will not function when the lens’s optical Imager Stabilizer

switch is set to <2> (tu).

With a lens whose focal length is longer than 800 mm, Movie digital IS

will not function.

Movie digital IS cannot be set during HDR movie shooting (with SCN

mode set) or time-lapse movie shooting.

The wider the angle of view (wide angle), the more effective the image

stabilization will be. The narrower the angle of view (telephoto), the less

effective the image stabilization will be.

When using a tripod, setting Movie digital IS to [Disable] is

recommended.

Depending on the subject and shooting conditions, the subject may blur

noticeably (the subject momentarily looks out of focus) due to the effects

of the Movie digital IS.

When using a TS-E lens, fish-eye lens, or non-Canon lens, setting Movie

digital IS to [Disable] is recommended.

The effect of Movie digital IS will not be reflected in any magnified image.

Since Movie digital IS magnifies the image, the image looks more grainy.

Noise, dots of light, etc. may also become noticeable.

When Movie digital IS is set, the size of AF points will also change.

Certain lenses do not support Movie digital IS. For details, refer to the

Canon Web site.

381

3 Menu Function Settings

Remote control shooting

When [Enable] is set, you can start or stop movie shooting using

Remote Controller RC-6 (sold separately, p.271) or Wireless

Remote Control BR-E1 (sold separately, p.273).

• When using Remote Controller RC-6

Set the switch to the <2> position, then press the transmit button. If

the switch is set to <o> (immediate release), the [z4:V btn

function] setting will take effect.

• With Wireless Remote Control BR-E1

Set the release mode/movie shooting switch to the <k> position,

then press the release button.

For Time-lapse movie shooting, see page 360.

382

3 Menu Function Settings

General Movie Shooting Cautions

Red <E> Internal Temperature Warning Icon

If the camera’s internal temperature increases due to prolonged movie

shooting or under a high ambient temperature, a red <E> icon will

appear.

The red <E> icon indicates that movie shooting will soon be terminated

automatically. If this happens, you will not be able to shoot again until the

camera’s internal temperature decreases. Turn off the power and let the

camera rest for a while.

Shooting a movie at a high temperature for a prolonged period will cause

the red <E> icon to appear earlier. When you are not shooting, always

turn off the camera.

Recording and Image Quality

If the attached lens has an Image Stabilizer and you set the Image

Stabilizer (IS) switch to <1>, the Image Stabilizer will operate at all

times even if you do not press the shutter button halfway. The Image

Stabilizer consumes battery power and may shorten the total movie

shooting time depending on the shooting conditions. When the Image

Stabilizer is not necessary, such as when using a tripod, it is

recommended that you set the IS switch to <2>.

If the brightness changes during autoexposure movie shooting, the

movie image may freeze temporarily. In such a case, shoot movies with

manual exposure.

If there is a very bright light source in the image, the bright area may

appear black on the LCD monitor. The movie will be recorded almost

exactly as it appears on the LCD monitor.

In low light, noise or irregular colors may appear in the image. The movie

will be recorded almost exactly as it appears on the LCD monitor.

If you play back a movie with other devices, image or sound quality may

deteriorate or playback may not be possible (even if the devices support

MP4/MOV format).

383

3 Menu Function Settings

General Movie Shooting Cautions

Recording and Image Quality

If you use a card with a slow writing speed, a five-

level indicator may appear on the right of the

screen during movie shooting. It indicates how

much data has not yet been written to the card

(remaining capacity of the internal buffer memory).

The slower the card, the faster the indicator will

climb upward. If the indicator becomes full, movie

shooting will stop automatically.

If the card has a fast writing speed, the indicator will

either not appear or the level (if displayed) will hardly go upward. First,

shoot a few test movies to see if the card can write fast enough.

If the indicator indicates that the card is full and movie shooting stops

automatically, the sound near the end of the movie may not be recorded

properly.

If the card’s writing speed is slow (due to fragmentation) and the indicator

appears, formatting the card may make the writing speed faster.

Playback and TV Connection

If you connect the camera to a TV set (p.427) and shoot a movie, the TV

set will not output any sound during the shooting. However, the sound

will be properly recorded.

Indicator

Restrictions on MP4-format Movies

Note that generally, the following restrictions apply to MP4-format movies.

Sound will not be recorded for approx. the last two frames.

When you play back movies on Windows, movie images and sound may

become slightly out of synchronization.

384

385

386

387

Image Playback

This chapter describes how to play back and erase the

captured images (still photos/movies), how to view them

on a TV screen, and other playback-related functions.

Images shot and saved with another device

The camera may not be able to properly display images captured

with a different camera, edited with a computer, or that have had their

file names changed.

388

1Play back the image.

Press the <x> button.

The last image captured or played

back will appear.

2Select an image.

To play back images starting with the

last image captured, turn the <5>

dial counterclockwise. To play back

images starting with the first captured

image, turn the dial clockwise.

Each time you press the

button, the display will change.

x Image Playback

Single-Image Display

No information Basic information

display

Shooting information display

389

x Image Playback

3Exit the image playback.

Press the <x> button to exit the

image playback and return to

shooting-ready state.

With the shooting information screen displayed (p.388), you can press

the <W> <X> keys to change the shooting information displayed at the

screen bottom as follows. For details, see pages 392-395.

Shooting Information Display

When RAW images shot with [z4: Aspect ratio] set to an option other

than [3:2] (p.168) are played back, frame lines indicating the image area

will be displayed.

If the search conditions are set with [32: Set image search

conditions] (p.402), only the found images will be displayed.

Detailed information

Lens / Histogram information

White balance information

Picture Style information 1

Picture Style information 2

GPS information

Lens aberration correction information

Color space / Noise reduction information

390

x Image Playback

In the single-image display, you can

overlay the grid on the image playback.

With [33: Playback grid], you can

select [3x3 l], [6x4 m], or [3x3+diag

n].

This function is convenient for checking

the image’s vertical or horizontal tilt as

well as composition.

3 Grid Display

The grid is not displayed during movie playback.

391

Basic information display

B: Shooting Information Display

Sample Information for Still Photos

Shutter speed

Folder number -

File numbering

Rating

Wi-Fi signal strength/

Eye-Fi transmission status

Playback No./

Total images/

Number of found

images

Protect images

Eye-Fi transfer completed

Battery level

Image-recording

quality/Edited

images/Cropping

Highlight tone priority

ISO speed

Aperture

Exposure compensation

amount

Wi-Fi function

Bluetooth function

If the image was taken by another camera, certain shooting information

may not be displayed.

It may not be possible to play back images taken with this camera on

other cameras.

392

B: Shooting Information Display

Shooting information display

• Detailed Information for Creative Zone Mode Images

* When you shoot in RAW+JPEG image quality, the RAW image file size will be

displayed.

* Lines indicating the image area will be displayed for images taken with the

aspect ratio set (p.168) and with RAW or RAW+JPEG set for image quality.

* During flash photography without flash exposure compensation, <0> will be

displayed.

* < > will be displayed for images shot with bounce flash photography.

* An icon for the effect (p.254) and the dynamic range adjustment amount will be

displayed for images shot with HDR shooting.

* will be displayed for images shot with multiple-exposure shooting.

*<M> will be displayed for images shot with Multi Shot Noise Reduction.

*<G> will be displayed for still photos taken as test shots for time-lapse movies.

* will be displayed for images created and saved after performing RAW

image processing, resizing, or cropping.

*<N> will be displayed for images cropped and then saved.

Exposure compensation amount

Shutter speed

Shooting mode/

Multiple exposure/

Time-lapse movie:

Test shots

ISO speed

Shooting date and time

Image-recording quality/

Edited images/Cropping

Histogram (Brightness/RGB)

White balance correction

White balance

AF Microadjustment

Highlight tone priority

Metering mode

File size

Flash exposure compensation/

Bounce/HDR shooting/

Multi Shot Noise Reduction

Picture Style/Settings

Auto Lighting

Optimizer

Scroll bar

Aperture

393

B: Shooting Information Display

• Detailed Information for Basic Zone Mode Images

*[Brightness] indicator is displayed for images whose brightness was adjusted

for shooting.

Ambience

Background blur

Level of the

ambience effect

Level of blurred

motion effect

Brightness

Color tone

394

B: Shooting Information Display

Histogram

(Brightness)

Lens name

Focal length

Histogram

(RGB)

• Lens / Histogram information

• White balance information

• Picture Style information 1 • Picture Style information 2

395

B: Shooting Information Display

• Color space /

Noise reduction information

• Lens aberration

correction information

Latitude

Elevation

Longitude

UTC (Coordinated Universal Time)

• GPS information

The GPS information screen is not displayed when GPS information is

not recorded to the images.

Even if you use the camera to play back an image taken by another

camera (with GPS information recorded), the GPS information will not be

displayed.

396

B: Shooting Information Display

•<y/u/k>: Shutter speed, aperture, and ISO speed are not displayed.

• < > + ISO Auto: ISO speed is not displayed.

•<a>, < > or < > will be displayed for time-lapse movies. Note that the

“Shutter speed”, “Aperture”, or “ISO speed” will not be displayed for time-lapse

movies when “Autoexposure shooting” is performed with [Each frame] set for

[Auto exposure] under [z5: Time-lapse movie]. “ISO speed” will not be

displayed for time-lapse movies shot with “Manual exposure shooting”.

•<t> will be displayed for video snapshots.

•<w> or <x> will be displayed for movies with camera shake corrected by

Movie digital IS.

Sample Movie Information Display

Movie shooting mode/

HDR movie (in 8

modes)/

Time-lapse movie/

Video snapshot File size

Shutter speed

Compression rate/

Movie recording method

Movie recording size

Recording time

Move playback/Video

snapshot playback

Aperture

Frame rate

ISO speed

Movie recording format

HDR movie/

Movie digital IS

During movie playback, “*, *” will be displayed for [Fineness] and

[Threshold] of [Picture Style]’s [Sharpness].

397

B: Shooting Information Display

Highlight alert

When [33: Highlight alert] is set to [Enable], overexposed,

clipped highlights will blink. To obtain more detailed gradation in the

blinking areas where you want the gradation to be faithfully

reproduced, set the exposure compensation to a negative amount

and shoot again for a better result.

AF point display

When [33: AF point disp.] is set to [Enable], the AF point that

achieved focus will be displayed in red. If automatic AF point

selection is set, multiple AF points may be displayed.

398

B: Shooting Information Display

Histogram

The brightness histogram shows the exposure level distribution and

overall brightness. The RGB histogram is for checking the color

saturation and gradation. The display can be switched with [33:

Histogram disp].

[Brightness] display

This histogram is a graph showing the

distribution of the image’s brightness level. The

horizontal axis indicates the brightness level

(darker on the left and brighter on the right)

while the vertical axis indicates how many

pixels exist for each brightness level. The more

pixels there are toward the left, the darker the

image. The more pixels there are toward the

right, the brighter the image. If there are too

many pixels on the left, the shadow detail will be

lost. If there are too many pixels on the right, the

highlight detail will be lost. The gradation in-

between will be reproduced. By checking the image and its

brightness histogram, you can see the exposure level inclination and

the overall gradation.

[RGB] display

This histogram is a graph showing the distribution of each primary

color’s brightness level in the image (RGB or red, green, and blue).

The horizontal axis indicates the color’s brightness level (darker on

the left and brighter on the right), while the vertical axis indicates how

many pixels exist for each color brightness level. The more pixels

there are toward the left, the darker and less prominent the color. The

more pixels there are toward the right, the brighter and denser the

color. If there are too many pixels on the left, the respective color

information will be lacking. If there are too many pixels on the right,

the color will be too saturated with no gradation. By checking the

image’s RGB histogram, you can see the color’s saturation and

gradation condition, as well as white balance inclination.

Sample Histograms

Dark image

Normal brightness

Bright image

399

Search for images quickly with the index display showing 4, 9, 36, or

100 images on one screen.

1Press the button.

During image playback or when the

camera is ready to shoot, press the

button.

[6u] will be displayed on the lower

right of the screen.

2Switch to the index display.



Turn the <

> dial counterclockwise.

The 4-image index display will

appear. The selected image is

highlighted with an orange frame.

Turning the <6> dial further counterclockwise will switch the

display from 9 images, 36 images, and to 100 images. If you turn the

dial clockwise, it will rotate through 100, 36, 9, 4, and single-image

display.

3Select an image.

Operate the <5> dial or <9

> to

move the orange frame and select the

image.

Press the button to turn off the

[6u] icon, then turn the <6> dial

to display the image(s) on the next or

previous screen.

Press <0> in the index display to display the selected image in the

single-image display.

Index display (Multiple-image Display)

 

If the search conditions are set with [32: Set image search conditions]

(p.402), only the found images will be displayed.

400

In the single-image display, you can turn the <6> dial to jump through

the images forward or backward according to the jump method set.

1Select [Image jump w/6].

Under the [32] tab, select [Image

jump w/6], then press <0>.

2Select the jump method.

Select the jump method, then press

<0>.

d:Display images one by one

e:Jump by 10 images

r:Jump images by the specified

number

g:Display by date

h:Display by folder

i:Display movies only

j:Display stills only

P:Display protected images

only

k:Display by image rating

(p.412)

Jump Display (Jumping Through Images)

With [Jump images by the specified number], you can turn the <6>

dial to select the number of images within 1 to 100 you want to jump by.

When you select [Display by image rating], turn the <6> dial to

specify the rating. If you browse images with 9 selected, all the rated

images will be displayed.

401

e Jump Display (Jumping Through Images)

3Browse by jumping.

Press the <x> button to play back

images.

In the single-image display, turn the

<6> dial.

You can browse by the set method.

Playback position

Jump method

To search images by shooting date, select [g: Date].

To search images by folder, select [h: Folder].

If the card contains both movies and still photos, select [i: Movies] or

[j: Stills] to display one or the other.

If the jump method is set to [P: Protect] or [k: Rating] but no images

are protected or have ratings, you cannot use the <6> dial to browse

through images.

If search conditions are set with [32: Set image search conditions]

(p.402), only the found images will appear in jump display.

402

You can play back images filtered according to search conditions. After

setting the image search conditions, you can play back and display only

the found images.

Note that the following can be done for the found images: Erase

protection, rating, slide show, deletion, print order, and photobook order.

This feature enables you to quickly do a specific task to the found

images in one batch.

1Select [Set image search

conditions].

Under the [32] tab, select [Set

image search conditions], then

press <0>.

2Set the search conditions.

Press the <W> <X> keys to select an

item.

Press the <Y> <Z> keys to set the

setting.

A checkmark [X] is appended to the

left of the item. (Specified as the

search condition.)

If you select the item and press the button, the checkmark

[X] will be removed. (The search condition is canceled.)

t Filtering Images for Playback

Checkmark

Item Setting

9Rating Images with the selected (rating) condition will be displayed.

dDate Images taken on the selected shooting date will be displayed.

nFolder Images in the selected folder will be displayed.

JProtect Images with the selected (protect) condition will be displayed.

fType of file

Displays images in the selected file type.

The following file formats can be set:

[z Stills], [z (RAW)], [z (RAW,RAW+JPEG)],

[z(RAW+JPEG)], [z (RAW+JPEG, JPEG)], [z (JPEG)],

and [k Movies].

403

t Filtering Images for Playback

3Implement the search conditions.

Read the message that appears.

Select [OK], then press <0>.

The search condition is specified.

4Display the found images.

Press the <3> button to play back

images.



Only the images that match the set

conditions (filtered) will be played back.



When the images are filtered, the

screen will have an outer yellow frame.

Display the screen in step 2, then press the <L> button to remove all

the checkmarks [X]. Press the <0> button, then select [OK] to clear

the search conditions.

Yellow frame

Clearing the Search Conditions

If there are no images matching the search conditions, pressing <0> on

the screen in step 2 will not enable [OK]. (Cannot proceed to step 3.)

Even if [52: Auto power off] is set to [1 min.], [2 min.], or [4 min.], the

auto power off time will be approx. 6 min. when the [32: Set image

search conditions] screen is displayed.



Doing any of the following will clear the search conditions, and the filtered

display will end. ([

Image search canceled

] may also appear on the screen.)

• Shooting is performed.

• Auto power off takes effect.

• Setting the power switch to <2>.

• Formatting the card.

• Opening the battery compartment cover or card slot cover.

• Adding an image (processing a RAW image, resizing an image,

cropping an image, etc.).

• When there are no longer any images matching the search conditions.

• All the camera settings are cleared.

404

You can magnify a captured image by approx. 1.5x to 10x on the LCD

monitor.

1Magnify the image.

The image can be magnified as

follows: 1. During image playback, 2.

During the image review after image

capture, and 3. From the shooting-

ready state.

Press the button.

The magnified view will appear. The

magnified area position and [6u]

will be displayed on the lower right of

the screen.

The image magnification increases

as you turn the <6> dial clockwise.

You can magnify the image up to

approx. 10x.

The image magnification decreases

as you turn the <6> dial

counterclockwise. In the case of 1

and 3 only, turning the dial further will

display the index display (p.399).

2Scroll around the image.

Use <9> to scroll around the

magnified image.

Press the button or <x>

button to exit the magnified view.

u Magnifying Images

Magnified area position

In the case of 1 and 3 only, you can turn the <5> dial to view another

image while maintaining the magnified view.

A movie cannot be magnified.

405

u Magnifying Images

Under the [33] tab, when you select

[Magnificatn (apx)], you can set the

initial magnification ratio and position for

the magnified view.

1x (no magnification)

The image is not magnified. The magnified view will start with the

single-image display.

2x, 4x, 8x, 10x (magnify from center)

The magnified view starts at the image center at the selected

magnification.

Actual size (from selected point)

The recorded image’s pixels will be displayed at approx. 100%. The

magnified view starts at the AF point that achieved focus. If the

photo is taken with manual focus, the magnified view starts at the

image center.

Same as last magnification (from center)

The magnification will be the same as the last time you exited the

magnified view with the <x> or button. The magnified view

starts at the image center.

3 Setting the Initial Magnification Ratio and Position

For images taken with [Live 1-point AF] (p.313) or with [Distortion

correction] set to [Enable] (p.202), the magnified view will start at the

image center even if [Actual size (from selected pt)] has been set.

406

The LCD monitor is a touch-sensitive panel that you can touch with your

fingers for various playback operations. First, press the <x> button

to play back images.

Swipe with one finger.

With single-image display, touch the

LCD monitor with one finger. You

can browse to the next or previous

image by swiping your finger to the

left or right.

Swipe to the left to see the next

(newer) image, or swipe to the right to

see the previous (older) image.



With index display, also touch the LCD

monitor with

one finger

. You can

browse to the next or previous screen

by swiping your finger up or down.

Swipe up to see the next (newer)

images or swipe down to see the

previous (older) images.

When you select an image, the orange

frame will appear. Tap on the image

again to display it as a single image.

Swipe with two fingers.

Touch the LCD monitor with two fingers.

When you swipe two fingers to the left or

right, you can jump through images with

the method set in [Image jump w/6]

under the [x2] tab.

d Playing Back with the Touch Screen

Browsing Images

Jumping through Images (Jump Display)

407

d Playing Back with the Touch Screen

Pinch two fingers.

Touch the screen with two fingers spread

apart, and pinch your fingers together on

the screen.

Each time you pinch your fingers, the

image will shrink. If you pinch the

single-image display, it will change to

the 4-image index display.

When you select an image, the orange frame will appear. Tap on the

image again to display it as a single image.

Spread two fingers apart.

Touch the screen with two fingers together,

then spread your fingers apart on the screen.

As you spread your fingers, the

image will be magnified.

The image can be magnified up to

approx. 10x.

To reduce the image, pinch your fingers together on the screen.

If you do this on a 4-image index display, it will change into the

single-image display.

Double-tap.

You can magnify the image by using one finger to quickly tap twice

(double-tap) on the LCD monitor. The image will be magnified on the

spot where you tap. To return to the single-image display, double-tap on

the image again.

To scroll around the position of magnified display in magnified view,

touch the LCD monitor with one finger and move it around.

Reducing Image (Index Display)

Magnifying Image

You cannot magnify the image by double-tapping in the index display.

Touch operations on the camera’s LCD monitor are also possible while

playing back images on a TV set connected to your camera (p.427).

408

You can rotate the displayed image to the desired orientation.

1Select [Rotate image].

Under the [31] tab, select [Rotate

image], then press <0>.

2Select an image.

Turn the <5> dial to select the

image to be rotated.

You can also select an image in the

index display (p.399).

3Rotate the image.

Each time you press <0>, the

image will rotate clockwise as follows:

90° 9 270° 9 0°.

To rotate another image, repeat steps

2 and 3.

b Rotating the Image

If you set [51: Auto rotate] to [OnzD] (p.435) before taking vertical

shots, you need not rotate the image as described above.

If the rotated image is not displayed in the rotated orientation during

image playback, set [51: Auto rotate] to [OnzD].

A movie cannot be rotated.

If the search conditions are set with [32: Set image search

conditions] (p.402), only the found images will be displayed.

409

You can protect important images from being accidentally erased by the

camera’s erase function.

1Select [Protect images].

Under the [31] tab, select

[

Protect

images], then press <0>.

2Select [Select images].

An image will be displayed.

3Select the image to be protected.

Turn the <5> dial to select the

image to be protected.

4Protect the image.

Press <0> to protect the selected

image. The <K> icon will appear at

the top of the screen.

To cancel the image protection, press

<0> again. The <K> icon will

disappear.

To protect another image, repeat

steps 3 and 4.

K Protecting Images

3 Protecting a Single Image

Image protection icon

If the search conditions are set with [32: Set image search conditions]

(p.402), only the found images will be displayed.

410

K Protecting Images

While looking at the images in the index display, you can specify the

first and last images for a range to protect all the specified images at

once.

1Select [Select range].

Under [31: Protect images], select

[Select range] and press <0>.

2Specify the range of images.

Select the first image (start point),

then press <0>.

Next, select the last image (end

point), then press <0>.

The images in the specified range will

be protected and the <K> icon will

appear.

To select another image to be

protected, repeat step 2.

3 Specifying the Range of Images to be Protected

If the search conditions are set with [32: Set image search

conditions] (p.402), only the found images will be displayed.

If you specify a protected image as the first image in the range, all

images in the range (from the first image to the last) will become

unprotected instead. (Protection will be canceled in the specified range.)

411

K Protecting Images

You can protect all the images in a folder or on a card at once.

When you select [All images in folder]

or [All images on card] in [31:

Protect images], all the images in the

folder or on the card will be protected.

To cancel the selection, select

[Unprotect all images in folder] or

[Unprotect all images on card].

If the search conditions are set with [32: Set image search

conditions] (p.402), the display will change to [All found images] and

[Unprotect all found].

If you select [All found images], all the

found images will be protected.

If you select [Unprotect all found], the

protection of all the found images will be

canceled.

3 Protecting All Images in a Folder or on a Card

If you format the card (p.70), the protected images will also be erased.

Movies can also be protected.

Once an image is protected, it cannot be erased by the camera’s erase

function. To erase a protected image, you must first cancel the

protection.

If you erase all the images (p.433), only the protected images will

remain. This is convenient when you want to erase all unnecessary

images at once.

412

You can rate images (still photos and movies) with one of the five rating

marks: l/m/n/o/p. This function is called rating.

1Select [Rating].

Under the [32] tab, select [Rating],

then press <0>.

2Select [Select images].

An image will be displayed.

3Select the image to be rated.

Turn the <5> dial to select the

image to be rated.

If you press the button and turn

the <6> dial counterclockwise, you

can select an image from a three-

image display. To return to the single-

image display, turn the dial clockwise.

4Rate the image.

Press <0>, and a blue highlight

frame will appear as shown in the

screen shown on the left.

Press the <W> <X> keys to select a

rating mark, then press <0>.

When you append a rating mark for

the image, the number beside the set

rating will increase by one.

To rate another image, repeat steps 3

and 4.

p Setting Ratings

3 Rating a Single Image

If the search conditions are set with [32: Set image search conditions]

(p.402), only the found images will be displayed.

413

p Setting Ratings

While looking at the images in the index display, you can specify the

first and last images for a range to rate all the specified images at once.

1Select [Select range].

Select [Select range] in [32:

Rating], then press <0>.

2Specify the range.

Select the first image (start point),

then press <0>.

Next, select the last image (end

point), then press <0>.

A checkmark [X] will be appended to

all the images within the range

between first and last images.

3Press the <Q> button.

4Rate the image.

Turn the <6> dial to select a rating

mark, then select [OK].

All the images in the specified range

will be rated (same rating) at once.

3 Rating by Specifying the Range

If the search conditions are set with [32: Set image search conditions]

(p.402), only the found images will be displayed.

414

p Setting Ratings

You can rate all the images in a folder or on a card at once.

Under [32: Rating], when you select

[All images in folder] or [All images on

card], all the images in the folder or on

the card will be rated.

Turn the <6> dial to select a rating,

then select [OK].

When you are not rating images or

cancelling the rating, select [OFF].

If the search conditions are set with [32: Set image search

conditions] (p.402), the display will change to [All found images].

If you select [All found images], all the

found images filtered by the search

conditions will be rated as specified.

3 Rating All Images in a Folder or on a Card

On the step 4 screen on page 412, the number next to the rating mark goes

up to only three digits (max. 999). If there are 1000 or more images with a

given rating, “###” will be displayed.

Taking Advantage of Ratings

With [32: Set image search conditions] and [32: Image jump w/

6], you can display only the images given a specific rating.

Depending on the computer’s operating system, you can see each file’s

rating as part of the file information display or in the provided, standard

image viewer (JPEG images only).

415

During playback, you can press the <Q> button to set the following:

[J: Protect images], [b: Rotate image], [9: Rating], [R: RAW

image processing (1 images only)], [S: Resize (JPEG image only)],

[N: Cropping (JPEG images only)], [ : Highlight alert], [ : AF point

display], [e: Image jump w/6], [t: Image search], and [q: Send

images to smartphone*].

For movies, only the functions in bold above can be set.

* Not selectable if [Wi-Fi] is set to [Disable] in [Wi-Fi setting] under [51: Wireless

communication settings].

1Press the <Q> button.

During image playback, press the

<Q> button.

The Quick Control options will

appear.

2Select an item and set it.

Press the <W> <X> keys to select a

function.

The setting of the selected function is

displayed at the bottom.

Turn the <6> or <5> dial to set it.



For protecting images (p.409) and

Rating (p.412), press <

> to set it.



For RAW image processing (p.438),

Resize (p.444), Cropping (p.446),

Image search (p.402), and Send

images to smartphone, press <

0> to

set it.

To cancel, press the <M> button.

Q Quick Control for Playback

416

Q Quick Control for Playback

3Exit the setting.

Press the <Q> button to exit the

Quick Control.

To rotate an image, set [51: Auto rotate] to [OnzD] (p.435). If [51:

Auto rotate] is set to [OnD] or [Off], the [b Rotate image] setting will be

recorded to the image, but the camera will not rotate the image for display.

Pressing the <Q> button during the index display will switch to the

single-image display, and the Quick Control screen will appear. Pressing

the <Q> button again will return to the index display.

For images taken with another camera, the options you can select may

be restricted.

417

The three main ways to play back and enjoy movies are as follows:

By connecting the camera to a TV set

with an HDMI cable, you can play back

the camera’s still photos and movies on

the TV set. Using the HDMI Cable HTC-

100 (sold separately) is recommended.

You can play back movies on the

camera’s LCD monitor.

You can also edit out the movie’s first

and last scenes and can play back the

still photos or movies on the card in an

automatic slide show.

k Enjoying Movies

Playback on a TV Set (p.427)

Playback on the Camera’s LCD Monitor (p.419)

Even if the camera is connected to a TV set with an HDMI cable and a

4K time-lapse movie is played back, it will be played back in Full HD

quality. (Playback in 4K quality is not possible.)

Since hard disk recorders do not have an HDMI IN terminal, the camera

cannot be connected to a hard disk recorder with an HDMI cable.

Even if the camera is connected to a hard disk recorder with a USB

cable, movies and still photos cannot be played back or saved.

A movie edited with a computer cannot be rewritten to the card and played

back with the camera.

418

k Enjoying Movies

The movie files recorded on the card can

be transferred to a computer and played

back or edited with pre-installed or

general-purpose software compatible

with the movie’s recording format.

Playback and Editing with a Computer

To play back or edit a movie with commercially-available software, use

software compatible with MP4-format and MOV-format movies. For

details on commercially-available software, contact the software

manufacturer.

You can play back 4K time-lapse movies with EOS MOVIE Utility (p.595).

419

1Play back the image.



Press the <

> button to play back an

image.

2Select a movie.

Turn the <5> dial to select the

movie to be played back.

In the single-image display, the

<s1> icon displayed on the upper

left indicates a movie. If the movie is a

video snapshot, <st> will be

displayed.

In the index display, perforations at

the left edge of a thumbnail indicate a

movie. As movies cannot be played

back from the index display, press

<0> to switch to the single-image

display.

3In the single-image display, press <0>.

The movie playback panel will appear at the bottom of the

screen.

4 Play back the movie.

Select [7] (Play), then press <0>.

The movie will start playing back.



You can pause the playback by

pressing <

>. Press it again to

resume the playback.

You can adjust the sound volume

even during movie playback by

turning the <6> dial.

For more details on the playback

procedure, see the next page.

k Playing Back Movies

Speaker

If the search conditions are set with [32: Set image search conditions]

(p.402), only the filtered images in step 2 will be displayed.

420

k Playing Back Movies

Movie Playback Panel

* For 4K time-lapse movie playback, the item name will be [Play (Frame skip)].

Operation Playback Description

7 Play* Pressing <0> toggles between playback and stop.

8 Slow motion

Adjusts the slow motion speed by turning the <5>

dial. The slow motion speed is indicated on the upper

right of the screen.

5 First frame Displays the movie’s first frame.

3 Previous frame Displays the previous frame each time you press

<0>. Holding <0> down will rewind the movie.

6 Next frame Plays the movie frame-by-frame each time you press

<0>. Holding <0> down will fast forward the movie.

4 Last frame Displays the movie’s last frame.

y Background music Plays back a movie with the selected background

music (p.426).

X Edit Displays the editing screen (p.422).

Playback position

mm’ ss” Playback time (minutes:seconds)

9 Volume Turn the <6> dial to adjust the volume of the built-in

speaker (p.419).

32Returns to the single-image display when <M>

button is pressed.

421

k Playing Back Movies

Tap [7] at the center of the

screen.

The movie will start playing back.

To display the movie playback panel,

tap <s1> or <st> on the

upper left of the screen.

To pause the movie while it is playing

back, tap on the screen. The movie

playback panel will also appear.

Playback with the Touch Screen

If you play back a 4K time-lapse movie on the camera, the playback

resolution will be equivalent to that of a Full HD movie played back on

the camera.

If you play back a 4K time-lapse movie with the camera or select [Slow

motion] and set it to the fastest speed (by turning <5> all the way to

the right), every other frame will be skipped during playback.

The camera may not be able to play back movies shot with another

camera.

If you connect the camera to a TV set to play back a movie (p.427),

adjust the sound volume with the TV set. (Turning the <6> dial will not

change the sound volume.)

If you attach or detach the lens, the card’s writing speed is slow, or the

movie file contains corrupted frames during movie playback, the movie

playback will stop.

If [Background music] is set, the sound recorded with the movie will not

be played during the movie playback.

For 4K time-lapse movies, when you select [7] on the movie playback

panel, [Play (Frame skip)] will be displayed.

With a fully-charged Battery Pack LP-E6N, the continuous playback time

at room temperature (23°C/73°F) will be approx. 4 hr. 40 min. (with L/

w set).

422

You can edit out the first and last scenes of a movie in approx. 1-sec.

increments.

1On the movie playback screen,

select [X].

The movie editing panel will be

displayed at the bottom of the screen.

2Specify the part to be edited out.

Select either [U] (Cut beginning) or

[V] (Cut end), then press <0>.

Press the <Y> <Z> keys to see the

previous or next frames. Keep

holding down the key to fast forward

or fast rewind the frames. Turn the

<5> dial for frame-by-frame

playback.

After deciding which part to edit out,

press <0>. The portion highlighted

in white on the top of the screen is

what will remain.

3Check the edited movie.

Select [7] and press <0> to play

back the edited movie.

To change the edited part, go back to

step 2.

To cancel the editing, press the

<M> button, then select [OK] on

the confirmation dialog.

Editing a Movie’s First and Last Scenes

423

X Editing a Movie’s First and Last Scenes

4Save the edited movie.

Select [W], then press <0>.

The save screen will appear.

To save it as a new movie, select

[New file]. To save it and overwrite

the original movie file, select

[Overwrite], then press <0>.

On the confirmation dialog, select

[OK] to save the edited movie and

return to the movie playback screen.

Since the editing is performed in approx. 1-sec. increments (position

indicated by [ ] on the top of the screen), the actual position where the

movie is edited may differ from the position you specified.

If the card does not have enough free space, [New file] will not be

available.

When the battery level is low, movie editing is not possible. Use a fully-

charged battery.

Movies shot with another camera cannot be edited with this camera.

You cannot edit a movie when the camera is connected to a computer.

424

You can play back the images on the card as an automatic slide show.

1Specify the images to be played

back.

To play back all the images on the

card, go to step 2.

If you want to specify the images to

be played back in the slide show, filter

the images with [Set image search

conditions] under the [32] tab

(p.402).

2Select [Slide show].

Under the [32] tab, select

[

Slide

show

], then press <

3Set the playback as desired.

Select [Set up], then press <0>.

Set the [Display time], [Repeat]

(repeated playback), [Transition

effect] (effect when changing

images), and [Background music]

for the still photos.

For [Background music], see page

426.

After completing the settings, press

the <M> button.

Slide Show (Auto Playback)

Display time Repeat

425

3 Slide Show (Auto Playback)

4Start the slide show.

Select [Start], then press <0>.

After [Loading image...] is displayed,

the slide show will start.

5Exit the slide show.

To exit the slide show and return to

the setting screen, press the

<M> button.

Transition effect Background music

When images for playback are already filtered (search conditions are

set) with [32: Set image search conditions], the images matching the

search conditions will be played back in the slide show.

To pause the slide show, press <0>. During pause, [G] will be

displayed on the upper left of the image. Press <0> again to resume

the slide show. You can also pause the slide show by tapping on the

screen.

During the automatic playback of still photos, you can press the

button to switch the display format (p.388).

During movie playback, you can adjust the sound volume by turning the

<6> dial.

During auto playback or pause, you can turn the <5> dial to view

another image.

During auto playback, auto power off will not take effect.

The display time may differ depending on the image.

To view the slide show on a TV set, see page 427.

426

3 Slide Show (Auto Playback)

If you use EOS Utility (EOS software, p.594) to copy background music

tracks to the card, you can play the background music together with the

slide show.

1Select [Background music].

Set [Background music] to [On],

then press <0>.

If the card has no background music,

you cannot perform step 2.

2Select the background music.

Press the <W> <X> keys to select

the desired background music.

To listen to a sample of a background

music track, press the

button. During playback, press the

<W> <X> keys to play another

background music track. Press the

again to stop playing the

background music track.

Adjust the sound volume by turning

the <6> dial.

Select a background music track and

press <0> to add a checkmark [X].

You can also select multiple

background music tracks.



The checkmarked [

] background

music will be played for the slide show.

Selecting the Background Music

At the time of purchase, the camera does not have background music.

For the procedure to save (copy) the background music tracks to a card,

refer to the EOS Utility Instruction Manual (p.596).

To delete the background music tracks saved on the card, press the

<L> button in step 2.

427

By connecting the camera to a TV set with an HDMI cable, you can play

back the camera’s still photos and movies on the TV set. For the HDMI

cable, HDMI Cable HTC-100 (sold separately) is recommended.

If the picture does not appear on the TV screen, check if the [53: Video

system] is correctly set to [For NTSC] or [For PAL] (depending on the

video system of your TV set).

1Connect the HDMI cable to the

camera.

With the plug’s <dHDMI MINI> logo

facing the front of the camera, insert it

into the <D> terminal.

2Connect the HDMI cable to the TV

set.

Connect the HDMI cable to the TV

set’s HDMI IN port.

3Turn on the TV set and switch the

TV set’s video input to select the

connected port.

4Set the camera’s power switch to

<1>.

5Press the <x> button.

The image will appear on the TV

screen. (Nothing will be displayed on

the camera’s LCD monitor.)

The images will automatically be

displayed at the optimum resolution

matching the connected TV set.

By pressing the button, you

can change the display format.

To play back movies, see page 419.

Viewing Images on a TV Set

428

Viewing Images on a TV Set

If the TV set connected to the camera with an HDMI cable is compatible

with HDMI CEC*, you can use the TV set’s remote control for playback

operations.

* An HDMI-standard function enabling HDMI devices to control each other so that

you can control them with one remote control unit.

1Select [Ctrl over HDMI].

Under the [33] tab, select [Ctrl over

HDMI], then press <0>.

2Select [Enable].

3Connect the camera to a TV set.

Use an HDMI cable to connect the

camera to the TV set.



The TV set’s input will switch

automatically to the HDMI port

connected to the camera. If it does not

switch automatically, use the TV set’s

remote control to select the HDMI IN

port the cable is connected to.

Using HDMI CEC TV Sets

When the camera is connected to a TV set with an HDMI cable, 4K time-

lapse movies will be played back in Full HD quality (cannot be played

back in 4K quality).

Adjust movie sound volume with the TV set. The sound volume cannot

be adjusted with the camera.

Before connecting or disconnecting the cable between the camera and

TV set, turn off the camera and TV set.

Depending on the TV set, part of the image displayed may be cut off.

Do not connect any other device’s output to the camera’s <D>

terminal. Doing so may cause a malfunction.

Certain TV sets may not display the images due to incompatibility.

429

Viewing Images on a TV Set

4Press the camera’s <x> button.

An image will appear on the TV

screen and you can use the TV set’s

remote control for playback.

5Select an image.

Point the remote control toward the

TV set and press the / button to

select an image.

6Press the remote control’s Enter

button.

The menu appears and you can

perform the playback operations

shown on the left.

Press the remote control’s /

button to select the desired option,

then press the Enter button.

If you select [Return] and press the

Enter button, the menu will disappear

and you can use the remote control’s

/ button to select an image.

Still photo playback menu

Movie playback menu

: Return

: 9-image index

: Play back movie

: Slide show

: Display shooting info

: Rotate

Certain TV sets require you to first enable the HDMI CEC connection.

For details, refer to the TV set’s Instruction Manual.

Certain TV sets, even those compatible with HDMI CEC, may not be able

to be operated properly. In such a case, set [33: Ctrl over HDMI] to

[Disable], and use the camera to control the playback operation.

You can set the images to be played back when [Slide show] is selected

with [32: Set image search conditions].

430

You can either select and erase unnecessary images one by one or

erase them in one batch. Protected images (p.409) will not be erased.

1Select the image to be erased.

Press the <x> button to play back

images.

Turn the <5> dial to select the

image to be erased.

2Press the <L> button.

The Erase menu will appear.

3Erase the image.

Select [Erase], then press <0>. The

image displayed will be erased.

L Erasing Images

Erasing a Single Image

Once an image is erased, it cannot be recovered. Make sure you no

longer need the image before erasing it. To prevent important images

from being erased accidentally, protect them. Note that erasing a

RAW+JPEG image will erase both the RAW and JPEG images.

If the search conditions are set with [32: Set image search conditions]

(p.402), only the found images will be displayed.

431

L Erasing Images

By adding checkmarks <X> to the images to be erased, you can erase

all those images at once.

1Select [Erase images].

Under the [31] tab, select [Erase

images], then press <0>.

2Select [Select and erase images].

An image will be displayed.

3Select the image to be erased.



Turn the <

> dial to select the image

to be erased, then press <

A checkmark [X] will be displayed on

the upper left of the screen.

If you press the button and turn

the <6> dial counterclockwise, you

can select an image from a three-

image display. To return to the single-

image display, turn the dial clockwise.

To select another image to be erased,

repeat step 3.

4Erase the image.

Press the <L> button, then press

[OK].

The selected images will be erased at

once.

3 Checkmarking [X] Images to Be Erased in a Batch

Under [32: Set image search conditions], if [Protect] is set to [Enable],

[31: Erase images] cannot be selected.

432

L Erasing Images

While looking at the images in the index display, you can specify the

first and last images for a range to erase all the specified images at

once.

1Select [Select range].

Select [Select range] in [31: Erase

images], then press <0>.

2Specify the range of images.

Select the first image (start point),

then press <0>.

Next, select the last image (end

point), then press <0>.

A checkmark [X] will be appended to

all the images within the specified

range.

3Press the <L> button.

4Erase the image.

Select [OK].

The images in the specified range will

be erased.

3 Specifying the Range of Images to be Erased

If the search conditions are set with [32: Set image search conditions]

(p.402), only the found images will be displayed.

433

L Erasing Images

You can erase all the images in a folder or on a card at once.

When [31: Erase images] is set to [All

images in folder] or [All images on

card], all the images in the folder or on

the card will be erased.

If the search conditions are set with [32: Set image search

conditions] (p.402), the display will change to [All found images].

If you select [All found images], all the

found images will be erased as specified.

3 Erasing All Images in a Folder or on a Card

To erase all the images including protected images, format the card (p.70).

434

You can adjust the brightness of the LCD monitor to make it easier to

view.

1Select [LCD brightness].

Under the [52] tab, select [LCD

brightness], then press <0>.

2 Adjust the brightness.

Referring to the gray chart, press the

<Y> <Z> keys to adjust the

brightness, then press <0>.

Adjusting the LCD Monitor Brightness

To check the image’s exposure, referring to the histogram is

recommended (p.398).

The last image played back will be displayed on the screen in step 2.

435

Images shot in vertical orientation are rotated

automatically to the proper orientation for viewing,

so they will not be displayed in horizontal

orientation when played back on the camera’s LCD

monitor or viewed on a computer screen. You can

change the setting of this feature.

1Select [Auto rotate].

Under the [51] tab, select [Auto

rotate], then press <0>.

2Set the display orientation.

Select the desired setting, then press

<0>.

OnzD

The vertical image is automatically rotated during playback on both

the camera’s LCD monitor and on the computer.

OnD

The vertical image is automatically rotated only on the computer.

Disable

The vertical image is not automatically rotated.

Setting the Auto Rotation of Vertical Images

Images captured with auto rotation set to [Off] will not rotate during playback

even if you later set auto rotation to [On].

The image displayed immediately after shooting will not be automatically

rotated.



If a picture is taken while the camera is pointing up or down, automatic

rotation to the proper orientation for viewing may not be performed correctly.

If the vertical image is not automatically rotated on the computer screen,

it means the software you are using does not support image rotation for

display. Using the EOS software is recommended.

436

437

Post-Processing

Images

This chapter describes RAW image processing, JPEG

image resizing, and JPEG image cropping.



The

icon

at the upper right of the page title indicates that

the function is available only in Creative Zone modes

(<d>, <s>, <f>, <a>, <F>).

The camera may not be able to process images taken with

another camera.

Post-processing images as described in this chapter cannot be

performed when the camera is connected to a computer with

an interface cable (sold separately).

438

You can process 1 images with the camera and save them as JPEG

images. As the RAW image itself does not change, you can apply

different processing conditions to create any number of JPEG images

from it.

Note that 41 and 61 images cannot be processed with the

camera. Use Digital Photo Professional (EOS software, p.594) to

process those images.

1Select [RAW image processing].

Under the [31] tab, select [RAW

image processing], then press

<0>.

1 images will be displayed.

Select the image to be processed.

Turn the <5> dial to select the

image you want to process.

If you press the button and turn

the <6> dial counterclockwise, you

can select an image from the index

display.

3Set the desired processing

conditions.

Press <0> and wait until the RAW-

processing options appear (p.441).

Use <9> to select an option, then

turn the <6> or <5> dial to switch

the setting.

The displayed image will reflect such

settings as “Brightness adjustment”,

“White balance”, etc.

To return to the image settings at the

time of shooting, press the

button.

Processing RAW Images with the Camera

439

R Processing RAW Images with the CameraN

Displaying the setting screen

Press <0> to display the selected

function’s setting screen. Turn the

<6> or <5> dial to change the

setting. Press <0> to finalize the

setting and return to the previous

screen.

4 Save the image.

Select [W] (Save), then press <0>.

When you select [OK], the JPEG

image created by the processing will

be saved to the card.

Check the destination folder and

image file number, then select [OK].

To process another image, repeat

steps 2 to 4.

440

R Processing RAW Images with the CameraN

You can magnify the image by pressing the button in step 3. The

magnification will vary depending on the [Image quality] setting under

[x1: RAW image processing]. With <9>, you can scroll around the

magnified image.

To cancel the magnified view, press the button again.

With [z4: Aspect ratio] (p.168) set to an option other than [3:2], frame

lines indicating the image area will be displayed on the shot 1

images. JPEG images generated from 1 images will be saved with

the set aspect ratio.

Magnified View

Images with Aspect Ratio Setting

When you process multiple-exposure 1 images, certain settings cannot

be changed.

441

R Processing RAW Images with the CameraN

 Brightness adjustment

You can adjust the image brightness up to ±1 stop in 1/3-stop

increments. The displayed image will reflect the setting’s effect.

 White balance (p.185)

You can select the white balance. If you select [Q] and press the

button, you can select [Auto: Ambience priority] or [Auto:

White priority]. If you select [P] and press the button, you

can set the color temperature. The displayed image will reflect the

setting’s effect.

 Picture Style (p.176)

You can select the Picture Style. By pressing the button,

you can adjust the sharpness, contrast, and other parameters. The

displayed image will reflect the setting’s effect.

 Auto Lighting Optimizer (p.194)

You can set the Auto Lighting Optimizer. The displayed image will

reflect the setting’s effect.

 High ISO speed noise reduction (p.195)

You can set the noise reduction processing for high ISO speeds. The

displayed image will reflect the setting’s effect. If the effect is difficult

to discern, magnify the image (p.440).

73 Image quality (p.162)

You can set the image quality when creating a JPEG image.

RAW Image Processing Options

442

R Processing RAW Images with the CameraN

 Color space (p.208)

You can select either sRGB or Adobe RGB. Since the camera’s LCD

monitor is not compatible with Adobe RGB, the difference in the

image will hardly be perceptible when either color space is set.

 Lens aberration correction

 Peripheral illumination correction (p.200)

A phenomenon that makes the image corners look darker due to

the lens characteristics can be corrected. If [Enable] is set, the

corrected image will be displayed. If the effect is difficult to

discern, magnify the image (p.440) and check the four corners.

The peripheral illumination correction applied with the camera will

be less pronounced than that applied with the Digital Photo

Professional (EOS software, p.594) at maximum correction

amount. If the effects of correction are not apparent, use Digital

Photo Professional to apply the peripheral illumination correction.

 Distortion correction (p.202)

Image distortion due to lens characteristics can be corrected. If

[Enable] is set, the corrected image will be displayed. The image

periphery will be trimmed in the corrected image.

Since the image resolution may look slightly lower, adjust the

sharpness with the Picture Style’s [Sharpness] parameter setting

as necessary.

 Chromatic aberration correction (p.201)

Chromatic aberrations (color fringing along the subject’s outline)

due to the lens characteristics can be corrected. If [Enable] is set,

the corrected image will be displayed. If the effect is difficult to

discern, magnify the image (p.440).

443

R Processing RAW Images with the CameraN

 Diffraction correction (p.203)

The diffraction by the lens aperture degrading the image

sharpness can be corrected. If [Enable] is set, the corrected

image will be displayed. If the effect is difficult to discern, magnify

the image (p.440).

Processing RAW images in the camera will not produce exactly the

same results as processing RAW images with Digital Photo Professional

(EOS software).

If you perform [Brightness adjustment], noise, banding, etc. may be

intensified with the effects of adjustment.

When processing images with [Distortion correction] set to [Enable],

AF point display information (p.397) or Dust Delete Data (p.452) will not

be appended to the image.

The effect of the lens aberration correction varies depending on the lens

used and shooting conditions. Also, the effect may be difficult to discern

depending on the lens used, shooting conditions, etc.

The lens correction data for lens aberration corrections is registered (stored)

in the camera.

444

You can resize a JPEG image to make the pixel count lower and save it

as a new image. Resizing an image is possible only with JPEG 3, 4,

and a images. JPEG b and RAW images cannot be resized.

1Select [Resize].

Under the [32] tab, select [Resize],

then press <0>.

An image will be displayed.

2Select an image.

Turn the <5> dial to select the

image you want to resize.

If you press the button and turn

the <6> dial counterclockwise, you

can select an image from the index

display.

3Select the desired image size.

Press <0> to display the image

sizes.

Select the desired image size, then

press <0>.

4Save the image.

Select [OK] to save the resized

image.

Check the destination folder and

image file number, then select [OK].

To resize another image, repeat steps

2 to 4.

S Resizing JPEG Images

Target sizes

445

S Resizing JPEG Images

Resize Options by Original Image Quality

Sizes for resized images are shown below.

(Approx. pixels)

Original Image

Quality

Available Resize Settings

4a b

3kkk

4kk

Image Sizes

Image Quality Full-frame (3:2) 4:3 (aspect ratio)

44160x2768* (11.5 megapixels) 3680x2768* (10.2 megapixels)

a3120x2080 (6.5 megapixels) 2768x2080* (5.8 megapixels)

b2400x1600 (3.8 megapixels) 2112x1600* (3.4 megapixels)

Image Quality 16:9 (aspect ratio) 1:1 (aspect ratio)

44160x2336* (9.7 megapixels) 2768x2768 (7.7 megapixels)

a3120x1752* (5.5 megapixels) 2080x2080 (4.3 megapixels)

b2400x1344* (3.2 megapixels) 1600x1600 (2.6 megapixels)

The actual aspect ratio of images in the sizes marked with an asterisk “*”

will differ from the aspect ratio indicated.

The image may be cropped slightly depending on the resizing conditions.

446

You can crop a captured JPEG image and save it as another image.

Cropping an image is possible only with JPEG 3, 4, a, and b

images. Images shot in RAW cannot be cropped.

1Select [Cropping].

Under the [x2] tab, select

[Cropping], then press <0>.

An image will be displayed.

2Select an image.

Turn the <5> dial to select the

image you want to crop.

If you press the button and turn

the <6> dial counterclockwise, you

can select an image from the index

display.

3Set the cropping frame.

Press <0> to display the cropping

frame.

The image area within the cropping

frame will be cropped.

Changing the Cropping Frame Size

Turn the <6> dial to change the cropping frame size. The smaller

the cropping frame, the more magnified the cropped image will look.

Changing the Aspect Ratio and Orientation

Turn the <5> dial to change the cropping frame’s aspect ratio. You

can select the aspect ratio as follows: [3:2], [16:9], [4:3], or [1:1].

Turn the <5> dial to change the orientation of the cropping frame. If

you select [2:3], [9:16], or [3:4], you can crop a horizontal image to

look as if it was shot in vertical orientation.

N Cropping JPEG Images

447

N Cropping JPEG Images

Moving the Cropping Frame

Use <9> to move the frame over the image vertically or

horizontally. Move the cropping frame until it covers the desired

image area.

Correcting the Tilt

You can correct image tilt by ±10°. Press the button, then

while checking the tilt against the grid, turn the <5> dial (in 0.1°

increments) or tap the left or right wedge (in 0.5° increments) on the

upper left of the screen to correct the tilt. After completing the tilt

correction, press <0>.

4Check the image area to be

cropped.

Press the <Q> button.

The image area to be cropped will be

displayed.

To return to the original display, press

the <Q> button again.

5Save the image.

Press <0>, then select [OK] to save

the cropped image.

Check the destination folder and

image file number, then select [OK].

To crop another image, repeat steps 2

to 5.

The position and size of the cropping frame may change depending on

the angle set for tilt correction.

Once a cropped image is saved, it cannot be cropped again or resized.

AF point display information (p.397) and Dust Delete Data (p.452) will

not be appended to the cropped images.

448

449

Sensor Cleaning

The camera has a Self Cleaning Sensor Unit to

automatically shake off dust adhered to the image

sensor’s front layer (low-pass filter).

The Dust Delete Data can also be appended to the

image so that the dust spots remaining can be deleted

automatically by Digital Photo Professional (EOS

software, p.594).

Smudges adhering to the front of the sensor

Besides dust entering the camera from outside, in rare cases,

lubricant from the camera’s internal parts may adhere to the front of

the sensor. If visible spots still remain after the automatic sensor

cleaning, having the sensor cleaned by a Canon Service Center is

recommended.

450

Whenever you set the power switch to <1> or <2>, the Self

Cleaning Sensor Unit automatically shakes off the dust on the front of

the sensor. Normally, you need not pay attention to this operation.

However, you can manually perform sensor cleaning or can disable this

unit as follows.

1Select [Sensor cleaning].

Under the [54] tab, select [Sensor

cleaning], then press <0>.

2Select [Clean nowf].

Select [Clean nowf], then press

<0>.

Select [OK].

The screen will indicate that the sensor is being cleaned. (A small

sound may be heard.) Although there will be a mechanical sound of

the shutter during sensor cleaning, the picture will not be recorded to

the card.

After sensor cleaning is finished, the camera will automatically

restart (turn off and on).

f Automatic Sensor Cleaning

Activating the Sensor Cleaning Manually

451

f Automatic Sensor Cleaning

In step 2, select [Auto cleaningf] and set it to [Disable].

The sensor will no longer be cleaned when you set the power switch

to <1> or <2>.

Disabling Automatic Sensor Cleaning

For best results, perform the sensor cleaning with the camera placed

upright and stable on a table or other flat surface.

Even if you repeat the sensor cleaning, the result will not improve much.

Immediately after the sensor cleaning is finished, the [Clean nowf]

option remains disabled temporarily.

Dots of light may appear on images if the sensor is affected by cosmic

rays, etc. By selecting [Clean nowf], their appearance may be

suppressed (p.565).

452

Normally, the Self Cleaning Sensor Unit will eliminate most of the dust

that may be visible on captured images. However, for the case where

visible dust still remains, you can append the Dust Delete Data to the

image for erasing the dust spots later. The Dust Delete Data is used by

Digital Photo Professional (EOS software, p.594) to erase the dust

spots automatically.

Prepare a solid white object such as a sheet of paper.

Set the lens focal length to 50 mm or longer.

Set the lens’s focus mode switch to <MF> and set the focus to

infinity (∞). If the lens has no distance scale, rotate the camera to

face toward you and turn the focusing ring clockwise all the way.

1Select [Dust Delete Data].

Under the [z3] tab, select [Dust

Delete Data], then press <0>.

2Select [OK].

After the automatic self-cleaning of

the sensor is performed, a message

will appear. Although there will be a

mechanical sound of the shutter

during the cleaning, no picture is

taken.

3 Appending Dust Delete DataN

Preparation

Obtaining the Dust Delete Data

453

3 Appending Dust Delete DataN

3Shoot a solid-white object.

At a distance of 20 cm - 30 cm (0.7 ft.

- 1.0 ft.), fill the viewfinder with a

patternless, solid-white object and

take a picture.

The picture will be taken in aperture-

priority AE mode at an aperture of

f/22.

Since the image will not be saved, the

data can still be obtained even if there

is no card in the camera.

When the picture is taken, the camera

will start collecting the Dust Delete

Data. When the Dust Delete Data is

obtained, a message will appear.

If the data is not obtained

successfully, an error message will

appear. Follow the “Preparation”

procedure on the preceding page,

then select [OK]. Take the picture

again.

454

3 Appending Dust Delete DataN

After the Dust Delete Data is obtained, it is appended to all the JPEG

and RAW images captured thereafter. Before an important shoot, it is

recommended that you update the Dust Delete Data by obtaining it

again.

For details about using Digital Photo Professional (EOS software,

p.594) to erase dust spots automatically, refer to the Digital Photo

Professional Instruction Manual (p.596).

The Dust Delete Data appended to the image is so small that it hardly

affects the image file size.

Dust Delete Data

Be sure to use a solid-white object such as a new sheet of white paper. If the

object has any pattern or design, it may be recognized as dust data and

affect the accuracy of the dust deletion with the Digital Photo Professional

(EOS software).

455

Dust that could not be removed by the automatic sensor cleaning can

be removed manually with a commercially-available blower, etc. Before

cleaning the sensor, detach the lens from the camera.

The image sensor is extremely delicate. If the sensor needs to be

cleaned directly, having it done by a Canon Service Center is

recommended.

1Select [Sensor cleaning].

Under the [54] tab, select [Sensor

cleaning], then press <0>.

2Select [Clean manually].

3Select [OK].

In a moment, the reflex mirror will lock

up and the shutter will open.

“CLn” will blink on the LCD panel.

4Clean the sensor.

5End the cleaning.

Set the power switch to <2>.

3 Manual Sensor CleaningN

If you will clean the sensor manually, make sure to use a fully-charged

battery.

Using the household power outlet accessories (sold separately, p.520) is

recommended.

456

3 Manual Sensor CleaningN

While cleaning the sensor, never do any of the following. If the

power is cut off, the shutter will close and the reflex mirror will go

back down. These may result in damaging the image sensor,

shutter curtains, and reflex mirror.

• Setting the power switch to <2>.

• Removing or inserting the battery.

The surface of the image sensor is extremely delicate. Clean the sensor

with care.

Use a plain blower without any brush attached. A brush can scratch the

sensor.

Do not insert the blower tip inside the camera beyond the lens mount. If

the power is turned off, the shutter will close and the shutter curtains or

reflex mirror may get damaged.

Never use pressurized air or gas to clean the sensor. Pressurized air

may damage the sensor, and sprayed gas may freeze on the sensor and

scratch it.

If the battery level becomes low while cleaning the sensor, the beeper

will sound as a warning. Stop cleaning the sensor.

If a smudge that cannot be removed with a blower remains, having the

sensor cleaned by a Canon Service Center is recommended.

457

Print order and

Photobook Set-up

Digital Print Order Format (DPOF) (p.458)

You can specify printing instructions such as the image

selection, quantity to print, etc. for the images recorded on

the card.

Specifying Images for a Photobook (p.464)

You can specify the images for printing in a photobook from

those saved on the card.

458

DPOF (Digital Print Order Format) enables you to print images recorded

on the card according to your printing instructions such as the image

selection, quantity to print, etc. You can print multiple images in one

batch or create a print order for a photofinisher.

You can set the print settings such as print type, date imprinting, file

number imprinting, etc. The print settings will be applied to all the

images specified for printing. (They cannot be set individually for each

image.)

1Select [Print order].

Under the [31] tab, select [Print

order], then press <0>.

2Select [Set up].

3Set the options as desired.

Set the [Print type], [Date], and [File

No.].

Select the option to be set, then press

<0>. Select the desired setting,

then press <0>.

W Digital Print Order Format (DPOF)

3 Setting the Printing Options

Print type Date File number

459

W Digital Print Order Format (DPOF)

4Exit the setting.

Press the <M> button.

The print order screen will reappear.

Next, select [Sel.Image] or [Multiple]

to order the images to be printed.

Print type

KStandard Prints one image on one sheet.

LIndex Multiple thumbnail images are printed on

one sheet.

LBoth Prints both the standard and index prints.

Date On [On] imprints the recorded date of the captured

image.

Off

File number On [On] imprints the file number.

Off

460

W Digital Print Order Format (DPOF)

RAW images or movies cannot be specified for printing.

If you print an image with a large image size using the [Index] or [Both]

setting (p.458), the index print may not be printed with certain printers. In

such a case, resize the image (p.444), then print the index print.

Even if [Date] and [File No.] are set to [On], the date or file number may

not be imprinted, depending on the print type setting and printer.

With [Index] prints, the [Date] and [File No.] cannot both be set to [On]

at the same time.

When printing with DPOF, use the card for which print order

specifications are set. You cannot print in the specified print order if you

extract just the images from the card for printing.

Certain DPOF-compliant printers and photofinishers may not be able to

print the images as you specified. Refer to the printer’s instruction

manual before printing, or check with your photofinisher about

compatibility when ordering prints.

While installing images into this camera, do not specify a new print order

for images that had a print order set by a different camera. All the print

orders may be overwritten inadvertently. Also, the print order may not be

possible, depending on the image type.

You can send images from the camera via Wi-Fi to a PictBridge-compatible

(Wireless LAN) printer and print the images (direct printing). For details,

refer to the “Wi-Fi (Wireless Communication) Function Instruction Manual”

(p.4).

461

W Digital Print Order Format (DPOF)

Selecting Images

Select and specify the images one by

one.

If you press the button and turn the

<6> dial counterclockwise, you can

select an image from a three-image

display. To return to the single-image

display, turn the dial clockwise.

Press the <M> button to save the

print order to the card.

Standard / Both

Press <0> to print a copy of the

displayed image. By pressing the <W>

<X> keys, you can set the number of

copies to be printed up to 99.

Index

Press <0> to add a checkmark to the

box [X]. The image will be included in

the index print.

3 Specifying Images for Printing

Quantity

Total images selected

Index icon

Checkmark

If the search conditions are set with [32: Set image search conditions]

(p.402), only the found images will be displayed.

462

W Digital Print Order Format (DPOF)

Selecting Multiple Images

Select Range

Under [Multiple], select [Select

range]. Select the first and last

images of the desired range, then all

the images in the range will be

marked with the checkmark [X]. A

print order for one copy of each

image will be set.

If an image marked with [X] is set as

the first image, the images with [X]

within the range from the first image

to the last will be canceled. (The

specified range will have no [X].)

All Images in a Folder

Select [Mark all in folder] and select the folder. A print order for one

copy of all the images in the folder will be specified.

If you select [Clear all in folder] and select the folder, the print order

for all the images in the folder will be canceled.

All Images on a Card

If you select [Mark all on card], one copy of all the images on the

card will be specified for printing.

If you select [Clear all on card], the print order will be cleared for all

the images on the card.

463

W Digital Print Order Format (DPOF)

If the search conditions are set with [32: Set image search

conditions] (p.402) and you select [Multiple], the display will change to

[Mark all found images] and [Clear all found images].

All found images

If you select [Mark all found

images], a print order for one copy of

all the images filtered by the search

will be set.

If you select [Clear all found

images], the print order will be

cleared for all the found images.

RAW images or movies cannot be specified for printing. Note that RAW

images or movies will not be specified for printing even if you specify all

images with [Multiple].

When using a PictBridge-compatible printer, do not specify more than

400 images for one print order. If you specify more than this, the images

may not all be printed.

464

You can specify up to 998 images to be printed in a photobook. When

you use EOS Utility (EOS software) to transfer images to a computer,

the specified images for a photobook will be copied to a dedicated

folder. This function is useful for ordering photobooks online.

1Select [Photobook Set-up].

Under the [x1] tab, select

[Photobook Set-up], then press

<0>.

2Select [Select images].

3Select the image to be specified.

Turn the <5> dial to select the

image to be specified for a

photobook, then press <0>.

If you press the button and turn

the <6> dial counterclockwise, you

can select an image from a three-

image display. To return to the single-

image display, turn the dial clockwise.

To select other images to be specified

for a photobook, repeat step 3.

p Specifying Images for a Photobook

3 Specifying One Image at a Time

465

p Specifying Images for a Photobook

While looking at the images in the index display, you can specify the

first and last images for a range to all the specified images at once.

1Select [Multiple].

Under [31: Photobook set-up],

select [Multiple], then press <0>.

2Select [Select range].

3Specify the range of images.

Select the first image (start point),

then press <0>.

Next, select the last image (end

point), then press <0>.

A checkmark [X] will be appended to

all the images within the specified

range.

To select other images to be specified

for a photobook, repeat step 3.

3 Specifying the Image Range for a Photobook

If the search conditions are set with [32: Set image search

conditions] (p.402), only the found images will be displayed.

If an image marked with the checkmark [X] is set as the first image, the

images with [X] within the range from the first image to the last will be

canceled. (The specified range will have no [X].)

466

p Specifying Images for a Photobook

You can specify all the images in a folder or on a card at once for a

photobook.

Under [x1: Photobook Set-up], you

can set [Multiple] to [All images in

folder] or [All images on card] to

specify all the images in the folder or on

the card for a photobook.

To cancel the selection, select [Clear all

in folder] or [Clear all on card].

If the search conditions are set with [32: Set image search

conditions] (p.402) and you select [Multiple], the display will change to

[All found images] and [Clear all found images].

If you select [All found images], all the

found images will be specified for the

photobook.

If you select [Clear all found images],

all the found images will be cleared for

the photobook.

3 Specifying All Images in a Folder or on a Card

RAW images or movies cannot be specified for the photobook. Note that

RAW images or movies will not be specified for the photobook even if

you specify all images with [Multiple].

Do not specify images already specified for a photobook in another

camera for another photobook with this camera. All the photobook

settings may be overwritten inadvertently.

467

Customizing the

Camera

You can make fine adjustments to various camera

functions and change the functionality of buttons and

dials to suit your picture-taking preferences with

Custom Functions and Custom Controls.

You can also save the camera’s current settings to the

<w> and <x> modes.

The functions described in this chapter are settable and

usable in Creative Zone modes.

468

1Select the [8] tab.

2Select the desired group.

Select [C.Fn I: Exposure], [C.Fn II:

Autofocus], or [C.Fn III: Operation/

Others], then press <0>.

3Select the Custom Function

number.

Press the <Y> <Z> keys to select

the Custom Function number, then

press <0>.

4Change the setting as desired.

Press the <W> <X> keys to select

the desired setting (number), then

press <0>.

Repeat steps 2 to 4 if you want to set

another Custom Function.



At the bottom of the screen, the current

Custom Function settings are indicated

below the respective function numbers.

5Exit the setting.

Press the <M> button.

The screen in step 2 will reappear.

In step 2, selecting [Clear all Custom Func. (C.Fn)] will clear all the

Custom Function settings.

3 Setting Custom FunctionsN

Custom Function number

Clearing All Custom Functions

Even if you perform [Clear all Custom Func.(C.Fn)], the settings for

[8C.Fn III-4: Custom Controls] will not be cleared.

469

*1: If an EX-series Speedlite (sold separately) equipped with an LED light is used,

the AF-assist light will turn on when necessary.

*2: Enabled only with time-lapse movie shooting.

3 Custom FunctionsN

C.Fn I: Exposure A LV

Shooting

Movie

Shooting

1Exposure level increments

p.471

k k

2 ISO speed setting increments kIn a

3Bracketing auto cancel k

4Bracketing sequence

p.472

5 Number of bracketed shots k

6Safety shift p.473 k

7Exposure compensation auto cancel

p.474

k k

8 Metering mode, AE locked after focus k

C.Fn II: AF A LV

Shooting

Movie

Shooting

1 Tracking sensitivity p.475

2Acceleration/deceleration tracking p.476

3AF point auto switching p.477

4 AI Servo 1st image priority p.478

5AI Servo 2nd image priority p.479

6AF-assist beam firing p.480 *1 *1*2

7 Lens drive when AF impossible

p.481

8Select AF area selection mode

Shaded Custom Functions do not function during Live View (LV) shooting or

movie shooting. (Settings are disabled.)

470

3 Custom FunctionsN

C.Fn II: AF A LV

Shooting

Movie

Shooting

9AF area selection method p.482

10 Orientation linked AF point p.483

11 Initial AF point, AI Servo AF p.484

12 Auto AF point selection: Color p.485

13 AF point selection movement p.486

14 AF point display during focus p.487

15 Viewfinder display illumination

p.488

16 AF Microadjustment

C.Fn III: Operation/Others A LV

Shooting

Movie

Shooting

1 Warnings z in viewfinder p.489

2 Dial direction during Tv/Av

p.490

3 Retract lens on power off kk

4 Custom Controls Depends on setting

471

Custom Function Settings

C.Fn I: Exposure

C.Fn I-1 Exposure level increments

0: 1/3-stop

1: 1/2-stop

Sets 1/2-stop increments for the shutter speed, aperture, exposure

compensation, AEB, flash exposure compensation, etc.

C.Fn I-2 ISO speed setting increments

0: 1/3-stop

1: 1-stop

You can change the manual ISO speed setting increments to a

whole-stop.

C.Fn I-3 Bracketing auto cancel

0: Enable

When you set the power switch to <2>, the AEB and white

balance bracketing settings will be canceled. AEB settings will also

be canceled when the flash is ready to fire or if you switch to movie

shooting.

1: Disable

The AEB and white balance bracketing settings will not be

canceled even if you set the power switch to <2>. (If the flash

is ready to fire or if you switch to movie shooting, AEB will be

canceled temporarily, but the AEB range will be retained.)

When [1:1/2-stop] is set, the display will be as shown below.

Even if [1: 1-stop] is set, ISO speed will be automatically set in 1/3-stop

increments when ISO Auto is set.

Even when [1: 1-stop] is set, you can set ISO 40000 (for still photo

shooting).

472

3 Custom Function SettingsN

C.Fn I-4 Bracketing sequence

The AEB shooting sequence and white balance bracketing sequence

can be changed.

0: 09-9+

1: -909+

2: +909-

C.Fn I-5 Number of bracketed shots

The number of shots taken with AEB and white balance bracketing can

be changed from the default 3 shots, to 2, 5, or 7 shots.

When [8C.Fn I-4: Bracketing sequence] is set to [0, -, +], the

bracketed shots will be taken as shown in the table below.

0: 3 shots 2: 5 shots

1: 2 shots 3: 7 shots

(1-stop/step increments)

AEB White Balance Bracketing

B/A Direction M/G Direction

0 : Standard exposure 0 : Standard white balance

0 : Standard white balance

- : Decreased exposure

- : Blue bias - : Magenta bias

+ : Increased exposure

+ : Amber bias + : Green bias

1st Shot 2nd Shot 3rd Shot 4th Shot 5th Shot 6th Shot 7th Shot

3: 3 shots

Standard (0)

-1 +1

2: 2 shots

Standard (0)

±1

5: 5 shots

Standard (0)

-2 -1 +1 +2

7: 7 shots

Standard (0)

-3 -2 -1 +1 +2 +3

If [1: 2 shots] is set, you can select the + or - side when setting the AEB

range. With WB bracketing, the 2nd shot will be adjusted toward either the

B/A or M/G direction.

473

3 Custom Function SettingsN

C.Fn I-6 Safety shift

0: Disable

1: Shutter speed/Aperture

Takes effect in the <s> shutter-priority AE and <f> aperture-

priority AE modes. If the subject brightness changes and the

standard exposure cannot be obtained within the autoexposure

range, the camera will automatically change the manually-selected

setting to obtain the standard exposure.

2: ISO speed

Works in the <d> Program AE, <s> shutter-priority AE, and

<f> aperture-priority AE modes. If the subject brightness

changes and the standard exposure cannot be obtained within the

autoexposure range, the camera will automatically change the

manually set ISO speed to obtain the standard exposure.

Under [z2: zISO speed settings], even if [ISO speed range] or [Min.

shutter spd.] is changed from the default setting, safety shift will

override it if the standard exposure cannot be obtained.

The minimum and maximum limits for the safety shift with the ISO speed

are determined by [Auto range] under [z2: zISO speed settings]

(p.174). However, if the manually set ISO speed exceeds the [Auto

range], the safety shift will take effect up or down to the manually set ISO

speed.

Safety shift will take effect as necessary even when flash is used.

474

3 Custom Function SettingsN

C.Fn I-7 Exposure compensation auto cancel

0: Disable

The exposure compensation setting will not be canceled even if

you set the power switch to <2>.

1: Enable

When you set the power switch to <2>, the exposure

compensation setting will be canceled.

C.Fn I-8 Metering mode, AE locked after focus

For each metering mode, you can set

whether to lock the exposure (AE lock)

after achieving focus with One-Shot AF by

pressing the shutter button halfway. The

exposure will be locked while you keep

pressing the shutter button halfway.

Checkmark [X] the metering modes for

when AE lock is to be applied. Select a

metering mode [q/w/r/e], then press

<0> to append a checkmark [X]. Select

[OK] to register the setting.

475

3 Custom Function SettingsN

C.Fn II: AF

C.Fn II-1 Tracking sensitivity

Sets the subject-tracking sensitivity during

AI Servo AF when an obstacle cuts across

the AF points or when the subject strays

from the AF point.

Default setting. Suitable for moving subjects in general.

Locked on: -2 / Locked on: -1

The camera will try to continue focusing on the subject even if an

obstacle cuts across the AF points or if the subject strays from the

AF points. The -2 setting makes the camera keep tracking the

target subject longer than the -1 setting.

However, if the camera focuses on a wrong subject, it may take

slightly longer to switch and focus on the target subject.

Responsive: +2 / Responsive: +1

The camera can focus consecutively on subjects at different

distances that are covered by the AF points. Also effective when

you want to always focus on the closest subject. The +2 setting is

more responsive than the +1 setting when focusing on the next

subject.

However, the camera will be more prone to focus on an

unintended subject.

[8C.Fn II-1: Tracking sensitivity] is the same feature as [AI Servo

tracking sensitivity] in the EOS-1D Mark III/IV, EOS-1Ds Mark III, and

EOS 7D.

476

3 Custom Function SettingsN

C.Fn II-2 Acceleration/deceleration tracking

This sets the tracking sensitivity for moving

subjects whose speed can momentarily

change dramatically by starting or stopping

suddenly, etc.

Suited for subjects that move at a steady speed (minor changes in

moving speed).

+2 / +1

Effective for subjects having sudden movements, sudden

acceleration/deceleration, or sudden stops. Even if the moving

subject’s speed suddenly changes dramatically, the camera

continues to focus on the target subject. For example, for an

approaching subject, the camera becomes less prone to focus

behind it to avoid subject blur. For a subject stopping suddenly, the

camera becomes less prone to focus in front of it. Setting +2 can

track dramatic changes in the moving subject’s speed better than

with +1.

However, since the camera will be sensitive to even slight

movements of the subject, focusing may become unstable for

short periods.

477

3 Custom Function SettingsN

C.Fn II-3 AF point auto switching

This sets the switching sensitivity of the AF

points as they track the subject moving

dramatically up, down, left, or right.

This setting takes effect when the AF area

selection mode is set to Zone AF, Large

Zone AF, or Automatic selection AF.

Standard setting for gradual AF point switching.

+2 / +1

Even if the target subject moves dramatically up, down, left, or

right and moves away from the AF point, the camera switches its

focus to neighboring AF points to continue focusing on the subject.

The camera switches to the AF point deemed most likely to focus

on the subject based on the subject’s continual movement,

contrast, etc. Setting +2 makes the camera more prone to switch

the AF point than with +1.

However, with a wide-angle lens having a wide depth of field or if

the subject is too small in the frame, the camera may focus with an

unintended AF point.

478

3 Custom Function SettingsN

C.Fn II-4 AI Servo 1st image priority

You can set the AF operation

characteristics and shutter-release timing

for the first shot with AI Servo AF.

Equal priority

Equal priority is given to focusing and shutter release.

: Release priority

Pressing the shutter button takes the picture immediately even if

focus has not been achieved. Useful when you want to give priority

to capturing the decisive moment rather than achieving focus.

: Focus priority

Pressing the shutter button does not take the picture until focus is

achieved. Useful when you want to achieve focus before capturing

the image.

479

3 Custom Function SettingsN

C.Fn II-5 AI Servo 2nd image priority

With AI Servo AF for continuous shooting,

you can preset the AF operation

characteristics and shutter-release timing

for the subsequent shots after the first shot

in continuous shooting.

Equal priority

Equal priority is given to focusing and continuous shooting speed.

In low light or with low-contrast subjects, continuous shooting

speed may slow down.

: Shooting speed priority

Priority is given to the continuous shooting speed instead of

achieving focus.

: Focus priority

Priority is given to achieving focus instead of the continuous

shooting speed. The picture will not be taken until focus is

achieved.

Even if [Shooting speed priority] is set, under shooting conditions that

activate flicker reduction (p.206), the continuous shooting speed may

become slower or the shooting interval may become irregular.

If focus cannot be achieved in low-light conditions when [Equal priority] is

set, setting [Focus priority] may give better results.

480

3 Custom Function SettingsN

C.Fn II-6 AF-assist beam firing

Enables or disables the EOS-dedicated external Speedlite’s AF-assist

beam.

0: Enable

The external Speedlite emits the AF-assist beam when necessary.

1: Disable

The external Speedlite will not emit the AF-assist beam. This

prevents the AF-assist beam from disturbing others.

2: IR AF assist beam only

When an external Speedlite is attached, only the infrared AF-assist

beam will be emitted. Useful when you do not want to fire a series

of small flashes as the AF-assist light (Intermittent flash method).

With an EX-series Speedlite equipped with an LED light, the LED

light will not automatically turn on as the AF-assist beam.

If an external Speedlite’s [AF-assist beam firing] Custom Function is set to

[Disable], this function’s setting will be overridden and the AF-assist beam

will not be emitted.

481

3 Custom Function SettingsN

C.Fn II-7 Lens drive when AF impossible

If focus cannot be achieved with autofocus, you can have the camera

keep searching for the precise focus or have it stop searching.

0: Continue focus search

If focus cannot be achieved with autofocus, the lens is driven to

search for the precise focus.

1: Stop focus search

If autofocus starts and the focus is far off or if focus cannot be

achieved, the lens drive will not be performed. This prevents the lens

from becoming grossly out of focus due to the focus search drive.

C.Fn II-8 Select AF area selection mode

You can limit the selectable AF area

selection modes to suit your shooting

preferences. Select the desired AF area

selection mode and press <0> to add a

checkmark [X]. Then select [OK] to

The AF area selection modes are

described on pages 134-135.

N: Manual select.:Spot AF

E: Manual selection:1 pt AF

F: Manual select.:Zone AF

G: Manual select.:Large Zone AF

H: Auto selection AF

When focus search drive is performed using a super telephoto lens or a lens

with a wide focusing drive range, the lens can become grossly out of focus,

and it may take more time to achieve focus next time. Setting [1: Stop

focus search] is recommended.

The [X] mark cannot be removed from [Manual selection:1 pt AF].

If the attached lens belongs to group G or H, you cannot use certain AF

area selection modes even if you add a checkmark [X] in [Select AF

area selec. mode].

482

3 Custom Function SettingsN

C.Fn II-9 AF area selection method

You can set the method for changing the AF area selection mode.

0: S 9 AF area selection button

After you press the <S> or button, pressing the

button will change the AF area selection mode.

1: S 9 Main Dial

After you press the <S> or button, turning the <6> dial

will change the AF area selection mode.

When [1: S9Main Dial] is set, use the <9> to move the AF point

horizontally.

483

3 Custom Function SettingsN

C.Fn II-10 Orientation linked AF point

You can set the AF point or the AF area selection mode + AF point

separately for vertical shooting and horizontal shooting.

0: Same for both vert/horiz

The same AF area selection mode and manually-selected AF point

(or zone) are used for both vertical shooting and horizontal shooting.

1: Separate AF pts: Area+pt

The AF area selection mode and AF point (or zone) can be set

separately for each camera orientation (1. Horizontal, 2. Vertical with the

camera grip at the top, 3. Vertical with the camera grip at the bottom).

When you manually select the AF area selection mode and AF

point (or zone) for each of the three camera orientations, they will

be registered for the respective orientation. Whenever you change

the camera orientation during shooting, the camera will switch to

the AF area selection mode and manually-selected AF point (or

zone) set for that orientation.

2: Separate AF pts: Pt only

The AF point can be set separately for each camera orientation (1.

Horizontal, 2. Vertical with the camera grip at the top, 3. Vertical

with the camera grip at the bottom). While using the same AF area

selection mode, the AF point will switch automatically for the

respective camera orientation.

When you manually select the AF point for each of the three camera

orientations, it will be registered for the respective orientation.

During shooting, the AF point will switch to the manually-selected

one depending on the camera orientation. By changing the AF area

selection mode to Single-point Spot AF or Single-point AF, the AF

point set for the respective orientation can be retained.

If you change the AF area selection mode to Zone AF or Large

Zone AF, the zone will switch to the manually-selected one for the

respective camera orientation.

If [8: Clear all Custom Func. (C.Fn)] is selected (p.468), the settings

for the 1., 2., and 3. orientations will be cleared.

If you set this function and later attach a lens from a different AF group

(p.145-148, particularly Group H), the setting may be cleared.

484

3 Custom Function SettingsN

C.Fn II-11 Initial AF Point, AI Servo AF

You can set the AI Servo AF’s starting AF point for when the AF area

selection mode is set to Auto selection AF.

0: Auto

The AF point that AI Servo AF starts with is set automatically to

suit the shooting conditions.

1: Initial AF pt selected

AI Servo AF will start with the manually-selected AF point when

the AF operation is set to AI Servo AF and the AF area selection

mode is set to Auto selection AF.

2: Manual AF pt

If you switch from Single-point Spot AF or Single-point AF to Auto

selection AF, AI Servo AF will start with the AF point that was

manually selected before the switch. Useful if you want AI Servo

AF to start with the AF point that was selected before the AF area

selection mode is switched to Auto selection AF.

When [2: Manual AF pt] is set, AI Servo AF will start with the zone

corresponding to the manually-selected AF point even if the AF area

selection mode is switched to Zone AF or Large Zone AF.

485

3 Custom Function SettingsN

C.Fn II-12 Auto AF point selection: Color tracking

Use this function to autofocus by recognizing colors equivalent to skin

tones. This function works when the AF area selection mode is set to

Zone AF (manual selection of zone), Large Zone AF (manual selection

of zone), or Automatic selection AF.

0: Enable

The camera selects AF points automatically based on AF

information and information on colors equivalent to skin tones.

In One-Shot AF mode, focusing on a still human subject in the AF

area is made easier.

In AI Servo AF mode, focusing on a human subject in the AF area

is made easier. If no skin tones can be detected, the nearest

subject will be focused on. Once focus is achieved, AF points are

automatically selected so that the camera continues to focus on

the color of the area it focused on first.

1: Disable

AF points are automatically selected based only on AF

information.

With setting [0: Enable], focusing will take slightly longer than with

setting [1: Disable].

Even with setting [0: Enable], the expected result may not be obtained

depending on the shooting conditions and subject.

Under so low light that the EOS-dedicated, external Speedlite emits the

AF-assist beam automatically, AF points are selected automatically

based only on AF information. (Human skin-tone color information is not

used for AF.)

486

3 Custom Function SettingsN

C.Fn II-13 AF point selection movement

You can set either to stop the selection at the outer edge or it can cycle

around to the opposite side in AF point selection.

0: Stops at AF area edges

Useful if you often use an AF point along the edge.

1: Continuous

Instead of stopping at the outer edge, the selection of AF point

continues to the opposite side.

With [8C.Fn II-11: Initial AF pt, AI Servo AF] set to [1: Initial AF

pt selected], the above setting will also work when you are selecting the

initial AF point for AI Servo AF.

487

3 Custom Function SettingsN

C.Fn II-14 AF point display during focus

You can set whether to display the AF point(s) before AF starts

(shooting ready), when AF starts, during AF, when focus is achieved,

and when the metering timer is active after focus is achieved.

0 : Selected (constant)

1 : All (constant)

2 : Selected (pre-AF,focused)

3 : Selected AF pt (focused)

4 : Disable display

k: Displayed, l: Not displayed

AF point display during focus

With AF

point

selected

Before AF starts

(shooting ready) At AF start

0: Selected (constant) kkk

1: All (constant) kkk

2: Selected (pre-AF,focused) kkk

3: Selected AF pt (focused) klk

4: Disable display kll

AF point display during focus During AF Focus achieved

Metering

active after

achieving

focus

0: Selected (constant) kkk

1: All (constant) kkk

2: Selected (pre-AF,focused) lkk

3: Selected AF pt (focused) lkl

4: Disable display lll

488

3 Custom Function SettingsN

C.Fn II-15 Viewfinder display illumination

You can set whether the AF points in the viewfinder will light up in red

when focus is achieved.

0: Auto

The AF points achieving focus in low light or with a dark subject

will automatically light up in red.

1: Enable

The AF points light up in red regardless of the ambient light level.

2: Disable

The AF points do not light up in red.

With [Auto] or [Enable] set, you can set

whether the AF point is to light up in red

when you press the <Q> button during AI

Servo AF.

OFF: Non illuminated

The AF points will not light up during AI Servo AF.

ON: Illuminated

The AF points used for focusing light up in red during AI Servo AF.

The AF points also light up during continuous shooting.

If set to [2: Disable], this function will not work.

C.Fn II-16 AF Microadjustment

You can make fine adjustments for the AF’s point of focus. For details,

see page 491.

When you press the <S> or button, the AF points will be

illuminated in red regardless of this setting.

The aspect ratio lines, electronic level, and grid in the viewfinder and the

information set with [Show/hide in viewfinder] (p.82) will also light up in

red.

489

3 Custom Function SettingsN

C.Fn III: Operation/Others

C.Fn III-1 Warnings z in viewfinder

When any of the following functions are set, the <z> icon can be

displayed in the viewfinder and on the LCD panel (p.31).

Select the function for which you want the warning icon to appear, then

press <0> to add a checkmark [X]. Then select [OK] to register the

setting.

When monochrome V is set

If [z3: Picture Style] is set to [Monochrome] (p.178), the

warning icon will appear.

When WB is corrected

If white balance correction is set (p.191), the warning icon will

appear.

When M is set

If [z3: High ISO speed NR] is set to [Multi Shot Noise

Reduction] (p.195), the warning icon will appear.

When HDR is set

If [z3: HDR mode] is set (p.253), the warning icon will appear.

If you set any of the checkmarked [X] functions, <z> will also appear for

the respective setting displayed on the Quick Control screen (p.61).

490

3 Custom Function SettingsN

C.Fn III-2 Dial direction during Tv/Av

0: Normal

1: Reverse direction

Dial turning direction when setting the shutter speed and aperture

can be reversed.

In the <a> shooting mode, the turning direction of the <6> and

<5> dials will be reversed. In other shooting modes, the turning

direction of only the <6> dial will be reversed. The <5> dial’s

turning direction in the <a> mode and the turning direction to set

the exposure compensation in the <d>, <s>, and <f>

modes will be the same.

C.Fn III-3 Retract lens on power off

This is to set the lens retraction mechanism for when a gear-driven

STM lens (such as EF40mm f/2.8 STM) is attached to the camera. You

can set it to retract the extended lens automatically when the camera’s

power switch is set to <2>.

0: Enable

1: Disable

C.Fn III-4 Custom Controls

You can assign frequently-used functions to camera buttons or dials

according to your preferences. For details, see page 497.

With auto power off, the lens will not retract regardless of the setting.

Before detaching the lens, make sure that it is retracted.

When [0: Enable] is set, this function takes effect regardless of the lens’s

focus mode switch setting (AF or MF).

491

Fine adjustment of the AF’s point of focus is possible for viewfinder

shooting. This is called “AF Microadjustment”. Before making the

adjustment, read “General Cautions for AF Microadjustment” and

“Notes for AF Microadjustment” on page 496.

Set the adjustment amount manually by repeatedly making

adjustments, shooting, and checking the results until the desired result

is achieved. During AF, regardless of the lens used, the point of focus

will always be shifted by the adjustment amount.

1Select [C.Fn II: Autofocus].

Under the [8] tab, select [C.Fn II:

Autofocus], then press <0>.

2Select [16: AF Microadjustment].

3Select [1: All by same amount].

4Press the <Q> button.

The [1: All by same amount] screen

will appear.

: Fine Adjustment of AF’s Point of Focus

1: Adjust All by Same Amount

Normally, this adjustment is not required. Perform this adjustment

only if necessary. Note that performing this adjustment may prevent

accurate focusing from being achieved.

492

8: Fine Adjustment of AF’s Point of FocusN

5Make the adjustment.

Set the adjustment amount. The

adjustable range is ±20 steps.

Setting it toward “-: ” will shift the

point of focus in front of the standard

point of focus.

Setting it toward “+: ” will shift the

point of focus to behind the standard

point of focus.

After making the adjustment, press

<0>.

Select [1: All by same amount], then

press <0>.

6Check the result of the

adjustment.

Take a picture and play back the

image (p.388) to check the

adjustment result.

If the shooting result comes out with

focus in front of the targeted point,

adjust toward the “+: ” side. If it

comes out with focus behind the

targeted point, adjust toward the

“-: ” side.

Repeat the adjustment as necessary.

If [1: All by same amount] is selected, separate AF adjustment will not be

possible for the wide-angle and telephoto ends of zoom lenses.

493

8: Fine Adjustment of AF’s Point of FocusN

You can make the adjustment for each lens and register the adjustment

in the camera. You can register the adjustment for up to 40 lenses.

When you autofocus with a lens whose adjustment is registered, the

point of focus will always be shifted by the adjustment amount.

Set the adjustment amount manually by repeatedly making

adjustments, shooting, and checking the results until the desired result

is achieved. If you use a zoom lens, make the adjustment for the wide-

angle (W) and telephoto (T) ends.

1Select [2: Adjust by lens].

2Press the <Q> button.

The [2: Adjust by lens] screen will

appear.

3Check and change the lens

information.

Displaying the Lens Information

Press the button.

The screen will show the lens name

and a 10-digit serial number. When

the serial number is displayed, select

[OK] and go to step 4.

If the lens’s serial number cannot be

confirmed, “0000000000” will be

displayed. In this case, enter the

number by following the instructions

on the next page.

Regarding the asterisk “*” displayed

in front of some lens serial numbers,

see the next page.

2: Adjust by Lens

Registered number

494

8: Fine Adjustment of AF’s Point of FocusN

Entering the Serial Number

Select the digit to be entered, then

press <0> so <r> is displayed.

Enter the number, then press <0>.

After entering all the digits, select

[OK].

Lens Serial Number

In step 3, if “*” appears in front of the 10-digit lens serial

number, you can register only one unit of the same lens model.

Even if you enter the serial number, “*” will remain displayed.

The serial number on the lens may differ from the serial number

displayed on the screen in step 3. This is not a malfunction.

If the lens serial number includes letters, enter only the numbers.

If the lens serial number is eleven digits or longer, enter only the last

ten digits.

The location of the serial number varies depending on the lens.

Certain lenses may not have a serial number inscribed. To register a

lens that has no serial number inscribed, enter any serial number.

If [2: Adjust by lens] is selected and an extender is used, the

adjustment will be registered for the lens and extender combination.

If 40 lenses have already been registered, a message will appear. After

you select a lens whose registration is to be erased (overwritten), you

can register another lens.

495

8: Fine Adjustment of AF’s Point of FocusN

4Make the adjustment.

For a zoom lens, select the wide-

angle (W) or telephoto (T) end.

Pressing <0> will turn off the

orange frame and make the

adjustment possible.

Set the adjustment amount, then

press <0>. The adjustable range is

±20 steps.

Setting it toward “-: ” will shift the

point of focus in front of the standard

point of focus.

Setting it toward “+: ” will shift the

point of focus to behind the standard

point of focus.

For a zoom lens, repeat this

procedure and adjust it for the wide-

angle (W) and telephoto (T) ends.

After completing the adjustment,

press the <M> button to return to

the screen in step 1.

Select [2: Adjust by lens], then

press <0>.

5Check the result of the adjustment.

Take a picture and play back the image (p.388) to check the

adjustment result.

If the shooting result comes out with focus in front of the targeted

point, adjust toward the “+: ” side. If it comes out with focus

behind the targeted point, adjust toward the “-: ” side.

Repeat the adjustment as necessary.

Single focal length lens

Zoom lens

496

8: Fine Adjustment of AF’s Point of FocusN

When [ Clear all] appears at the bottom of the screen, pressing the

<L> button will clear all the adjustments made for [1: All by same

amount] and [2: Adjust by lens].

Clearing All AF Microadjustments

When shooting with the intermediate range (focal length) of a zoom lens, the

AF’s point of focus is corrected automatically relative to the adjustments

made for the wide-angle and telephoto ends. Even if only the wide-angle or

telephoto end is adjusted, a correction will be made automatically for the

intermediate range.

Cautions for AF Microadjustment

The AF’s point of focus will vary slightly depending on the subject

conditions, brightness, zoom position, and other shooting conditions.

Therefore, even if you perform AF Microadjustment, focus may still not

be achieved at the suitable position.

The adjustment amount of one step varies depending on the maximum

aperture of the lens. Keep adjusting, shooting, and checking the focus

repeatedly to adjust the AF’s point of focus.

The adjustment will not be applied to AF in Live View shooting or movie

shooting.

The adjustments will be retained even if you do [8: Clear all Custom

Functions (C.Fn)] (p.468). However, the setting will be [0: Disable].

Notes for AF Microadjustment

It is best to make the adjustment at the actual location where you will

shoot. This will make the adjustment more precise.

Using a tripod when making the adjustment is recommended.

For making adjustments, shooting at the 73 image-recording quality is

recommended.

497

You can assign frequently-used functions to camera buttons or dials

according to your preferences for easy operations.

1Select [C.Fn III: Operation/

Others].

Under the [8] tab, select [C.Fn III:

Operation/Others], then press

<0>.

2Select [4: Custom Controls].

The Custom Controls setting screen

will appear.

3Select a camera button or dial.

Select a camera button or dial, then

press <0>.

The name of the camera control and

the assignable functions will be

displayed.

The diagram on the left will show the

location of the selected button or dial.

4Assign a function.

Select a function, then press <0>.

5Exit the setting.

When you press <0> to exit the

setting, the screen in step 3 will

reappear.

Press the <M> button to exit.

8: Custom ControlsN

With the screen in step 3 displayed, you can press the <L> button to revert

the Custom Control settings to their defaults. Note that the [8C.Fn III-4:

Custom Controls] settings will not be canceled even if you select [8:

Clear all Custom Func. (C.Fn)].

498

8: Custom ControlsN

Assignable Functions to Camera Controls

Function Page

Metering and AF start

500

k k k

AF stop kk

ONE SHOT z AI SERVO/SERVO k k

Direct AF point selection

Pause Movie Servo AF

Metering start

501

AE lock/FE lock k k

AE lock (hold) kk

AE lock k k

AE lock (while button pressed) k

FE lock

502

Set ISO speed (hold button, turn ) k k

Exposure compensation (hold button, turn )

k k

Flash exposure compensation

Shutter speed setting in M mode

Aperture setting in M mode

Image quality

503

Picture Style

White balance selection

Depth-of-field preview

503

IS start

Menu display

Flash function settings

504

Wi-Fi function

No function (disabled) k k

AFExposureOperation Images

499

8: Custom ControlsN

k k

k k k

< > stands for “AF stop button” provided on super telephoto lenses

equipped with Image Stabilizer.

500

8: Custom ControlsN

When you press the button assigned to this function, metering and AF

are performed.

The AF will stop while you hold down the button assigned to this

function. Useful when you want to stop the AF during AI Servo AF.

You can switch the AF operation. In One-Shot AF mode, when you

press the button to which this function is assigned, the camera switches

to AI Servo AF/Servo AF mode. If you press the button in the AI Servo

AF/Servo AF mode, the camera switches to One-Shot AF mode. Useful

when you need to keep switching between One-Shot AF and AI Servo

AF/Servo AF for a subject that keeps moving and stopping.

When the metering timer is active, you can select an AF point directly

with the <9> dial without pressing the <S> or button.

While Movie Servo AF is operating, pressing <0> will pause the AF.

Press the button again to resume Movie Servo AF.

: Metering and AF start

: AF stop

: ONE SHOT z AI SERVO/SERVO

:Direct AF point selection

: Pause Movie Servo AF

This function does not work during Live View shooting if Multi Shot Noise

Reduction is set.

501

8: Custom ControlsN

When you press the shutter button halfway, exposure metering is

performed. (AF is not performed.)

When you press the button assigned to this function, you can lock the

exposure (AE lock) while the metering timer is active. Useful when you

want to set the focus and exposure separately.

For flash photography, pressing the button assigned to this function will

fire a preflash and retain the required flash output (FE lock).

When you press the button assigned to this function, you can lock the

exposure (AE lock) while the metering timer is active. Useful when you

want to set the focus and exposure separately.

The exposure will be locked (AE lock) while you hold down the shutter

button.

When you press the button assigned to this function, you can lock the

exposure (AE lock). The AE lock will be maintained until you press the

button again. Useful when you want to set the focus and exposure

separately or take multiple shots at the same exposure setting.

Exposure

: Metering start

: AE lock/FE lock

: AE lock

: AE lock (while button pressed)

: AE lock (hold)

502

8: Custom ControlsN

For flash photography, pressing the button assigned to this function will

fire a preflash and retain the required flash output (FE lock).

You can set the ISO speed by holding down the button assigned with

this function and turning the <6> dial (works with still photo shooting

only). If this control is used with ISO Auto set, you can set the ISO

speed manually. When the metering timer (0) ends, ISO Auto will be

restored. If you use this function in the <a> mode, you can adjust the

exposure with the ISO speed while maintaining the current shutter

speed and aperture value.

You can set the exposure compensation by turning the <6> dial while

holding down the button assigned with this function. Useful when you

want to set exposure compensation in <a> manual exposure with ISO

Auto set.

By pressing <0>, you can set the exposure compensation amount

while looking at the exposure level indicator in the viewfinder or on the

LCD panel.

With <a> manual exposure, you can set the shutter speed with the

<6> or <5> dial.

With <a> manual exposure, you can set the aperture with the <5> or

<6> dial.

: FE lock

: Set ISO speed (hold button, turn )

: Exposure compensation (hold button, turn )

: Flash exposure compensation

: Shutter speed setting in M mode

: Aperture setting in M mode

503

8: Custom ControlsN

Press <0> to display the recording quality setting screen (p.162) on

the LCD monitor.

Press <0> to display the Picture Style selection screen (p.176) on the

LCD monitor.

Press <0> to display the white balance setting screen (p.185) on the

LCD monitor.

When you press the depth-of-field preview button or <0>, the aperture

will stop down and you can check the depth of field (p.240).

With the lens’s IS switch set to <1>, if you press the depth-of-field

preview button or the lens’s AF stop button, the Image Stabilizer will

operate.

Press <0> to display the menu on the LCD monitor.

Image

: Image quality

: Picture Style

: White balance selection

Operation

: Depth-of-field preview

: IS start

: Menu display

504

8: Custom ControlsN

Press <0> to display the flash function setting screen (p.283).

Press <0> to display the wireless communication setting screen

(p.540).

Use this setting when you do not want to assign any function to the

button.

: Flash function settings

: Wi-Fi function

: No function (disabled)

505

Under My Menu tab, you can register menu items and Custom

Functions whose settings you change frequently. You can also name

the registered menu tabs, and press the <M> button to display the

My Menu tab first.

1Select [Add My Menu tab].

Under the [9] tab, select [Add My

Menu tab], then press <0>.

2Select [OK].

The [MY MENU1] tab is created.

You can create up to five My Menu

tabs by repeating steps 1 and 2.

1Select [Configure: MY MENU*].

Press the <Y> <Z> keys to select

[Configure: MY MENU*] (tab for

registering menu items), then press

<0>.

3 Registering My MenuN

Creating and Adding My Menu Tab

Registering Menu Items under the My Menu Tab(s)

506

3 Registering My MenuN

2Select [Select items to register].

3Register the desired items.

Select the option to be set, then press

<0>.

Select [OK] on the confirmation

dialog.

You can register up to six items.

To return to the screen in step 2,

press the <M> button.

You can sort and delete items under the

menu tab, and rename or delete the

menu tab.

Sort registered items

You can change the order of the registered items in My Menu. Select

[Sort registered items] and select the item whose order you want to

change. Then press <0>. With [z] displayed, press the <W> <X>

keys to change the order, then press <0>.

Delete selected items / Delete all items on tab

You can delete any of the registered items. [Delete selected items]

deletes one item at a time, and [Delete all items on tab] deletes all

the registered items under the tab.

My Menu Tab Settings

507

3 Registering My MenuN

Delete tab

You can delete the My Menu tab currently displayed. Select [Delete

tab] to delete the [MY MENU*] tab.

Rename tab

You can rename the My Menu tab from [MY MENU*].

1Select [Rename tab].

2Enter text.

Press the <L> button to delete any

unnecessary characters.

Use <9> or <5> <6> to move

the n and select the desired

character. Then press <0> to enter

it.

By selecting [Aaz1@], you can

change the input mode.

You can enter up to 16 characters.

To cancel the text entry, press the

button, then select [OK].

3Exit the setting.

After entering the text, press the

<M> button, then select [OK].

The set name is saved.

Input mode

If you cannot enter text in step 2, press the <Q> button and use the

character palette when the blue frame appears.

508

3 Registering My MenuN

You can delete all the created My Menu

tabs or My Menu items registered under

them.

Delete all My Menu tabs

You can delete all My Menu tabs you created. When you select

[Delete all My Menu tabs], all the tabs from [MY MENU1] to [MY

MENU5] will be deleted and the [9] tab will revert to its default.

Delete all items

You can delete all the items registered under the [MY MENU1] to

[MY MENU5] tabs. The tab(s) will remain. When [Delete all items] is

selected, all the items registered under all the created tabs will be

deleted.

Deleting all My Menu tabs / Deleting all items

If you perform [Delete tab] or [Delete all My Menu tabs], tab names

renamed with [Rename tab] will also be deleted.

509

3 Registering My MenuN

You can select [Menu display] to set the

menu screen that is to appear first when

you press the <M> button.

Normal display

Displays the last displayed menu screen.

Display from My Menu tab

Displays with the [9] tab selected.

Display only My Menu tab

Only the [9] tab is displayed. (The z, 3, 5, and 8 tabs will not

be displayed.)

Menu Display Settings

510

You can register current camera settings, such as the shooting

functions, menu functions, and Custom Function settings, as Custom

shooting modes under the Mode Dial’s <w> and <x> positions.

1Select [Custom shooting mode

(C1, C2)].

Under the [55] tab, select [Custom

shooting mode (C1, C2)], then press

<0>.

2Select [Register settings].

3Register the desired items.

Select the Custom shooting mode to

be registered, then press <0>.

Select [OK] on the confirmation

dialog.

The current camera settings (p.511)

will be registered under the Mode

Dial’s C* position.

If you change a setting while you shoot in the <w> or <x> mode, the

respective Custom shooting mode can be automatically updated to

reflect the changes in the settings (Auto update). To enable this

automatic update, set [Auto update set.] to [Enable] in step 2.

If you select [Clear settings] in step 2, the settings of respective modes

can be reverted to the default settings with no Custom shooting modes

registered.

: Registering Custom Shooting Modes

Automatic Update of Registered Settings

Canceling Registered Custom Shooting Modes

511

w: Registering Custom Shooting ModesN

Shooting Function Settings

Shooting mode, Shutter speed, Aperture, ISO speed, AF operation, AF area

selection mode, AF point, Drive mode, Metering mode, Exposure

compensation amount, AEB increment, Flash exposure compensation amount

Menu Functions

[z1]Image quality, Image review time, Release shutter without

card, Lens aberration correction, Lens electronic MF, Flash

firing, E-TTL II flash metering, Flash sync speed in Av mode

[z2]Exposure compensation/AEB, zISO speed settings, Auto

Lighting Optimizer, White balance, Custom White Balance,

White balance shift/bracketing, Color space

[z3]Picture Style, Long exposure noise reduction, High ISO

speed noise reduction, Highlight tone priority, Multiple

exposure (settings), HDR Mode (settings)

[z4]Interval timer, Bulb timer, Anti-flicker shooting, Mirror lockup,

Aspect ratio, Live View shooting

[z5 (Live View shooting)]

AF method, Touch Shutter, Metering timer, Grid, Exposure

simulation, Silent LV shoot.

[z1 (Movie shooting)]

Movie recording size, Image quality, Sound recording,

Peripheral illumination correction, Chromatic aberration

correction, Lens electronic MF

[z2 (Movie shooting)]

Exposure compensation,

ISO speed settings, Auto Lighting

Optimizer, White balance, Custom White Balance, White balance shift

Settings To Be Registered

My Menu settings will not be registered under Custom shooting modes.

Even in the <w> and <x> modes, you can still change shooting function

settings and menu settings.

512

w: Registering Custom Shooting ModesN

[z4 (Movie shooting)]

Movie Servo AF, AF method, Movie Servo AF tracking

sensitivity, Movie Servo AF speed, Metering timer, Grid, V

button function

[z5 (Movie shooting)]

Video snapshot, Time-lapse movie (setting), Movie digital IS,

Remote control

[x2] Slide show (settings), Image jump with 6

[x3] Highlight alert, AF point display, Playback grid, Histogram

display, Magnification (approx.)

[51] File numbering, Auto rotate

[52] Auto power off, LCD brightness, LCD off/on button,

Viewfinder display

[53] Help text size

[54] Touch control, Beep, Auto cleaning, z button display

options/z button LV display options, Multi function lock

[81]C.Fn I

Exposure level increments, ISO speed setting increments,

Bracketing auto cancel, Bracketing sequence, Number of

bracketed shots, Safety shift, Exposure compensation auto

cancel, Metering mode, AE locked after focus

C.Fn II

Tracking sensitivity, Acceleration/deceleration tracking, AF

point auto switching, AI Servo 1st image priority, AI Servo 2nd

image priority, AF-assist beam firing, Lens drive when AF

impossible, Select AF area selection mode, AF area selection

method, Orientation linked AF point, Initial AF point, AI

Servo AF, Auto AF point selection: Color Tracking, AF point

selection movement, AF point display during focus, VF

display illumination, AF Microadjustment (excluding

adjustment)

C.Fn III

Dial direction during Tv/Av, Retract lens on power off, Custom

Controls

513

Reference

This chapter provides reference information for system

accessories, camera features, etc.

Certification Logo

Select [55: Certification Logo Display] and press <0> to

display some of the logos of the camera’s certifications. Other

certification logos can be found in this Instruction Manual, on the

camera body, and on the camera’s package.

514

System Map

Strap

Battery Pack

LP-E6N*1

Battery Charger

LC-E6

Car Battery

Charger

CBC-E6

Car Battery

Cable CB-570

Macro Ring Lite

MR-14EX II

ST-E2 Macro Twin Lite

MT-24EX

270EX II

ST-E3-RT

Eyecup Eb

Battery Grip

BG-E21

Battery Magazine

BGM-E21L for

LP-E6N/LP-E6

(attached to BG-E21)

600EX II-RT430EX III-RT/

430EX III

AC Adapter

AC-E6N

DC Coupler

DR-E6

Bundled

Accessories

Angle

Finder C

Protecting

Cloth PC-E1

Rubber Frame Eb

Eyepiece Extender

EP-EX15

E-series Dioptric

Adjustment Lenses

Hand Strap E2

515

System Map

Card reader

Interface Cable

IFC-500U (4.7 m/15.4 ft.)

SD/SDHC/SDXC

memory card

Interface Cable

IFC-200U (1.9 m/6.2 ft.)

USB port

Computer

Card slot

Directional Stereo

Microphone

DM-E1

Timer Remote

Controller

TC-80N3

Remote

Switch

RS-80N3

Wireless

Controller

LC-5

EF lenses

Remote

Controller

RC-6

Wireless

Remote

Control

BR-E1

TV/Monitor

Connect Station

CS100

HDMI Cable

HTC-100 (2.9 m/9.5 ft.)

*1: Battery Pack LP-E6 can also be used.

*2: AC Adapter Kit ACK-E6 can also be used.

* All cable lengths given are approximate figures.

Interface Cable

IFC-400PCU (1.3 m/4.3 ft.)

516

You can check the conditions of the battery you are using on the LCD

monitor. Each Battery Pack LP-E6N/LP-E6 has a unique serial number,

and you can register multiple battery packs to the camera. When you

use this feature, you can check the registered batteries’ approximate

remaining capacity and usage history.

Select [Battery info.].

Under the [54] tab, select [Battery

info.], then press <0>.

The battery information screen will

appear.

3 Checking the Battery Information

Battery model or household power source

being used.

The battery level indicator (p.48) is displayed

together with the remaining battery level

shown in 1% increments.

The number of shots taken with the current

battery. The number is reset when the battery

is recharged.

Battery’s recharge performance level is

displayed in three levels.

(Green) : Battery’s recharge

performance is good.

(Green) :

Battery’s recharge performance

is slightly degraded.

(Red) : Purchasing a new battery is

recommended.

Battery position

Using a genuine Canon Battery Pack LP-E6N/LP-E6 is recommended. If

you use batteries that are not genuine Canon products, the camera’s full

performance may not be attained or malfunction may result.

The shutter count is the number of still photos taken. (Movie shooting is

not counted.)

The battery information will also be displayed when using Battery Grip

BG-E21 (sold separately).

If a battery communication error message is displayed, follow the

instructions in the message.

517

3 Checking the Battery Information

You can register up to six LP-E6N/LP-E6 batteries to the camera. To

each battery.

1Press the button.

With the battery info. screen

displayed, press the button.

The battery history screen will

appear.

If the battery is not registered, it will

be grayed out.

2Select [Register].

The confirmation dialog will appear.

3Select [OK].

The battery will be registered and the

battery history screen will reappear.

The grayed out battery number will

now be displayed in white.

Press the <M> button. The

battery info. screen will reappear.

Registering Batteries to the Camera

The battery cannot be registered if the household power outlet

accessories (sold separately, p.520) are used.

If six batteries are already registered, [Register] cannot be selected. To

delete unnecessary battery information, see page 519.

518

3 Checking the Battery Information

It is convenient to label each registered Battery Pack LP-E6N/LP-E6

with their serial numbers, using commercially-available labels.

1Write the serial number on a

label.

Write the serial number displayed on

the battery history screen on a label

approx. 25 mm x 15 mm / 1.0 in. x 0.6

in. in size.

2Remove the battery and affix the

label.

Set the power switch to <2>.

Open the battery compartment cover

and remove the battery.

Affix the label as shown in the

illustration (on the side with no

electrical contacts).

Repeat this procedure for all of your

batteries so you can easily see the

serial number.

Labeling Serial Numbers on Batteries

Serial number

7c400300

Do not affix the label on any part other than as shown in the illustration in

step 2. Otherwise, the misplaced label may make it difficult to insert the

battery or impossible to turn on the camera.

If you use Battery Grip BG-E21 (sold separately), the label may peel off

as you repeatedly insert and remove the battery into the battery

magazine. If it peels off, affix a new label.

519

3 Checking the Battery Information

You can check the remaining capacity of any battery (even when not

installed) and also when it was last used.

Look for the serial number.

Refer to the battery’s serial number

label and look for the battery’s serial

number on the battery history screen.

You can check the respective

battery’s remaining capacity and the

date when it was last used.

1Select [Delete info.].

Follow step 2 on page 517 to select [Delete info.], then press

<0>.

2Select the battery information to be deleted.

Select the battery information to be deleted, then press <0>.

[X] will appear.

To delete information for another battery, repeat this procedure.

3Press the <L> button.

The confirmation dialog will appear.

4Select [OK].

The battery information will be deleted and the screen in step 1

will reappear.

Checking the Remaining Capacity of a Registered Battery

Serial number Date last used

Battery level

Deleting the Registered Battery Information

520

You can power the camera with a household power outlet by using the

DC Coupler DR-E6 and AC Adapter AC-E6N (each sold separately).

1Place the cord in the groove.

Carefully insert the DC coupler’s cord

into the groove without damaging the

cord.

2Insert the DC coupler.

Open the battery compartment cover

and open the DC coupler cord hole

cover.

Insert the DC coupler securely until it

locks and put the cord through the

hole.

Close the cover.

3Connect the DC coupler to the AC

adapter.

Connect the DC coupler’s plug to the

AC adapter’s connector securely.

4Connect the power cord.

Connect the power cord to the AC

adapter and insert the power plug into

a power outlet.

5Set the camera’s power switch to

<1> (p.47).

Using a Household Power Outlet

DC coupler cord hole

521

Using a Household Power Outlet

Do not use an AC adapter other than the AC-E6N (sold separately).

While the camera’s power switch is on, do not connect or disconnect the

power cord or connector, or disconnect the DC coupler.

After using the camera, unplug the power plug from the power outlet.

AC Adapter Kit ACK-E6 can also be used.

522

With a commercially-available Eye-Fi card already set up, you can

automatically transfer captured images to a computer or upload them to

an online service via a wireless LAN.

The image transfer is a function of the Eye-Fi card. For instructions on

how to set up and use the Eye-Fi card or to troubleshoot any image

transfer problems, refer to the Eye-Fi card’s instruction manual or

contact the card manufacturer.

1Insert an Eye-Fi card (p.43).

2Select [Eye-Fi settings].

Under the [51] tab, select [Eye-Fi

settings], then press <0>.

This menu is displayed only when an

Eye-Fi card is inserted into the

camera.

3Enable Eye-Fi transmission.

Select [Eye-Fi trans.], then press

<0>.

Select [Enable], then press <0>.

If you set [Disable], there will be no

automatic transmission even with the

Eye-Fi card inserted (transmission

status icon I).

H Using Eye-Fi Cards

The camera is not guaranteed to support Eye-Fi card functions

(including wireless transfer). In case of a problem with an Eye-Fi card,

please check with the card manufacturer. Also note that approval is

required to use Eye-Fi cards in many countries or regions. Without

approval, use of the card is not permitted. If it is unclear whether the

card has been approved for use in your area, please check with the

card manufacturer.

523

H Using Eye-Fi Cards

4Display the connection

information.

Select [Connection info.], then press

<0>.

5Check the [Access point SSID:].

Check that an access point is

displayed for [Access point SSID:].

You can also check the Eye-Fi card’s

MAC address and firmware version.

Press the <M> button to exit the

menu.

6Take the picture.

The picture is transferred and the

[H] icon switches from gray (not

connected) to one of the icons in the

sequence below.

For transferred images, [O] is

displayed in the shooting information

display (p.392).

H(Gray) Not connected : No connection with access point.

H(Blinking) Connecting... : Connecting to access point.

H(Illuminated) Connected : Connection to access point established.

H() Transferring... :

Image transfer to access point in progress.

Transmission status

524

H Using Eye-Fi Cards

Cautions for Using Eye-Fi Cards

Under [Wi-Fi settings] of [51: Wireless communication settings], if

[Wi-Fi] set to [Enable], image transfer with an Eye-Fi card will not be

possible.

If “J” is displayed, an error occurred while retrieving the card

information. Turn the camera’s power switch off and on again.

Even if [Eye-Fi trans.] is set to [Disable], it may still transmit a signal. In

hospitals, on airplanes, and in other places where wireless transmissions

are prohibited, remove the Eye-Fi card from the camera beforehand.

If the image transfer does not function, check the Eye-Fi card and

computer settings. For details, see the card’s Instruction Manual.

Depending on the wireless LAN’s connection conditions, the image

transfer may take longer or it may be interrupted.

Because of the communication function, the Eye-Fi card may become

hot.

The camera’s battery power will be consumed faster.

During the image transfer, auto power off will not take effect.

If you insert a wireless LAN card other than an Eye-Fi card, [51: Eye-Fi

settings] will not appear. Also, the transmission status icon <H> will not

appear.

525

526

o: Set automatically k: User selectable : Not selectable/Disabled

Function Availability Table by Shooting Mode

Still Photo Shooting (A, C, Creative Zone)

Function ACd s f a F

Shooting with ambience selection k

Background blur setting k

Image-recording

quality

RAW kkkkkkk

JPEG kkkkkkk

Aspect ratio kkkkk

ISO speed Automatically set/Auto ookkkkk

Manually set kkkkk

Picture Style Auto ookkkkk

Manual selection kkkkk

White

balance

Auto ookkkkk

Preset kkkkk

Custom kkkkk

Color temperature setting kkkkk

Correction/Bracketing kkkkk

Auto Lighting Optimizer ookkkkk

High ISO speed noise reduction ookkkkk

Long exposure noise reduction kkkkk

Highlight tone priority kkkkk

Lens

aberration

correction

Peripheral illumination correction

ookkkkk

Chromatic aberration correction

ookkkkk

Distortion correction kkkkk

Diffraction correction ookkkkk

Anti-flicker shooting*1ookkkkk

Color space sRGB ookkkkk

Adobe RGB kkkkk

(Viewfinder

shooting)

One-Shot AF kkkkk

AI Focus AF ookkkkk

AI Servo AF kkkkk

AF area selection mode kkkkkkk

AF point selection kkkkkkk

Manual focusing (MF) kkkkkkk

(Live View

shooting)

One-Shot AF ookkkkk

Servo AF kkkkk

u+Tracking kkkkkkk

Smooth zone kkkkkkk

Live 1-point AF kkkkkkk

Manual focusing (MF) kkkkkkk

527

Function Availability Table by Shooting Mode

*1: Settable only with viewfinder shooting (enabled).

*2: Settable only with ISO Auto set.

*3: With ISO Auto, you can set a fixed ISO speed.

*4: Settable with [Flash firing] under [External Speedlite control].

Function ACd s f a F

Drive

Single shooting kkkkkkk

High-speed continuous shooting

kkkkkkk

Low-speed continuous shooting

kkkkkkk

Silent single shooting*1kkkkkkk

Silent continuous shooting*1kkkkkkk

10-sec. self-timer/Remote control

kkkkkkk

2-sec. self-timer/Remote control

kkkkkkk

Self-timer: Continuous kkkkkkk

Metering

Evaluative metering ookkkkk

Partial metering kkkkk

Spot metering kkkkk

Center-weighted average metering

kkkkk

Exposure

Program shift k

Exposure compensation kkkk*2

AEB kkkk

AE lock kkkk*3

Depth-of-field preview kkkkk

HDR shooting kkkk

Multiple exposures kkkkk

Interval timer*1kkkkkk

Bulb timer k

Mirror lockup*1kkkkk

External

flash

Flash on*4ookkkkk

Flash off*4kkkkk

Flash exposure compensation

kkkkk

FE lock*1kkkkk

Flash function settings kkkkk

Custom Function settings kkkkk

GPS function kkkkkkk

Live View shooting kkkkkkk

Quick Control kkkkkkk

Touch operation kkkkkkk

528

Function Availability Table by Shooting Mode

o: Set automatically k: User selectable : Not selectable/Disabled

Still Photo Shooting (8: 2 q 3 5C r)

Function 8

2q3 5 C r

Brightness kkkkkk

Color tone

Panning effect k

Image-recording

quality

RAW kkkkkk

JPEG kkkkkk

Aspect ratio

ISO speed Automatically set/Auto oooooo

Manually set

Picture Style Auto oooooo

Manual selection

White

balance

Auto oooooo

Preset

Custom

Color temperature setting

Correction/Bracketing

Auto Lighting Optimizer oooooo

High ISO speed noise reduction oooooo

Long exposure noise reduction

Highlight tone priority

Lens

aberration

correction

Peripheral illumination correction

oooooo

Chromatic aberration correction

oooooo

Distortion correction o

Diffraction correction oooooo

Anti-flicker shooting*1 oooooo

Color space sRGB oooooo

Adobe RGB

(Viewfinder

shooting)

One-Shot AF ooo

AI Focus AF

AI Servo AF ooo

AF area selection mode kkkkkk

AF point selection kkkkkk

Manual focusing (MF) kkkkkk

(Live View

shooting)

One-Shot AF ooo

Servo AF ooo

u+Tracking kkkkk

Smooth zone kkkkko

Live 1-point AF kkkkk

Manual focusing (MF) kkkkkk

529

Function Availability Table by Shooting Mode

*1: Settable only with viewfinder shooting (enabled).

Function 8

2q3 5 C r

Drive

Single shooting kkkkkk

High-speed continuous shooting

kkkkk

Low-speed continuous shooting

kkkkkk

Silent single shooting*1kkkkkk

Silent continuous shooting*1kkkkk

10-sec. self-timer/Remote control

kkkkkk

2-sec. self-timer/Remote control

kkkkkk

Self-timer: Continuous kkkkkk

Metering

Evaluative metering oooooo

Partial metering

Spot metering

Center-weighted average metering

Exposure

Program shift

Exposure compensation

AEB

AE lock

Depth-of-field preview

HDR shooting

Multiple exposures

Interval timer*1kkkkkk

Bulb timer

Mirror lockup

External

flash

Flash on ooooo

Flash off o

Flash exposure compensation

FE lock*1

Flash function settings

Custom Function settings

GPS function kkkkkk

Live View shooting kkkkkk

Quick Control kkkkkk

Touch operation kkkkkk

530

Function Availability Table by Shooting Mode

o: Set automatically k: User selectable : Not selectable/Disabled

Still Photo Shooting (8: 4 P y 6 F G)

Function 8

4 P y 6 F G

Brightness kkkkk

Color tone kk

Panning effect

Image-recording

quality

RAW kkkk

JPEG kkkkkk

Aspect ratio

ISO speed Automatically set/Auto oooooo

Manually set

Picture Style Auto oooooo

Manual selection

White

balance

Auto oooooo

Preset

Custom

Color temperature setting

Correction/Bracketing

Auto Lighting Optimizer oooooo

High ISO speed noise reduction oooooo

Long exposure noise reduction

Highlight tone priority

Lens

aberration

correction

Peripheral illumination correction

oooooo

Chromatic aberration correction

oooooo

Distortion correction

Diffraction correction oooooo

Anti-flicker shooting*1 oooooo

Color space sRGB oooooo

Adobe RGB

(Viewfinder

shooting)

One-Shot AF oooooo

AI Focus AF

AI Servo AF

AF area selection mode kkokkk

AF point selection kko*2kkk

Manual focusing (MF) kkkkkk

(Live View

shooting)

One-Shot AF oo ooo

Servo AF

u+Tracking kk kkk

Smooth zone kk kkk

Live 1-point AF kk kkk

Manual focusing (MF) kk kkk

531

Function Availability Table by Shooting Mode

*1: Settable only with viewfinder shooting (enabled).

*2: Focusing is performed with the (single) AF point at the viewfinder center.

Function 8

4 P y 6 F G

Drive

Single shooting kkkkkk

High-speed continuous shooting

kkkkkk

Low-speed continuous shooting

kkkkkk

Silent single shooting*1kkkkkk

Silent continuous shooting*1kkkkkk

10-sec. self-timer/Remote control

kkkkkk

2-sec. self-timer/Remote control

kkkkkk

Self-timer: Continuous kkkkkk

Metering

Evaluative metering oo ooo

Partial metering

Spot metering

Center-weighted average metering

Exposure

Program shift

Exposure compensation

AEB

AE lock

Depth-of-field preview

HDR shooting

Multiple exposures

Interval timer*1kkkkkk

Bulb timer

Mirror lockup

External

flash units

Flash on oo oo

Flash off o o

Flash exposure compensation

FE lock*1

Flash function settings

Custom Function settings

GPS function kkkkkk

Live View shooting kk kkk

Quick Control kkkkkk

Touch operation kkkkkk

532

Function Availability Table by Shooting Mode

o: Set automatically k: User selectable : Not selectable/Disabled

Movie Shooting

Function A/C8d/s/f/Fa

yukM

Movie recording quality selectable ko*1kk

Sound recording

Auto oo k k

Custom kk

Wind filter oo k k

Attenuator kk

HDR movie o*2

Time-lapse

movie

4K kkk

Full HD kkk

Video snapshot kkk

ISO speed

Automatically set/Auto oo o k

Manually set k

Picture Style

Auto oo k k

Manual selection kk

White balance

Auto oo k k

Preset kk

Custom kk

Color temperature setting kk

Correction kk

Auto Lighting Optimizer oo k k

High ISO speed noise reduction oo k k

Highlight tone priority kk

Lens aberration

correction

Peripheral illumination correction okk

Chromatic aberration correction oo k k

Movie digital IS kkk

533

Function Availability Table by Shooting Mode

*1: Automatically set to NTSC: L 6 X/PAL:L 5 X.

*2: In the <8> mode, HDR movie shooting will be set automatically.

*3: With ISO Auto, exposure compensation can be set.

*4: With ISO Auto, a fixed ISO speed can be set.

Function A/C8d/s/f/Fa

yukM

u+Tracking kkkk

Smooth zone kkkk

Live 1-point AF kkkk

Manual focusing (MF)

kkkk

Movie servo AF kkkk

• Tracking sensitivity kk

• AF speed kk

Metering oooo

Exposure

Program shift

Exposure compensation kk*3

AE lock kk*4

GPS function kkkk

Remote control shooting kkkk

Quick Control kkkk

Touch operation kkkk

534

z: Shooting 1 (Red) Page

*1: In the <F> and <G> modes, RAW quality cannot be selected.

z: Shooting 1 (Red) Page

*1: In the <F> and <G> modes, RAW quality cannot be selected.

z: Shooting 2 (Red) Page

*1: Not settable in the <r> mode. (Automatically set to [Smooth zone].)

3Menu Settings

Viewfinder Shooting (Basic Zone Modes)

Image quality*11 / 41 / 61

162

Image review time Off / 2 sec. / 4 sec. / 8 sec. / Hold 74

Release shutter

without card Enable / Disable 44

Interval timer Disable / Enable (Interval / Number of shots) 267

Live View shooting Enable / Disable 291

Live View Shooting (Basic Zone Modes)

Image quality*11 / 41 / 61

162

Image review time Off / 2 sec. / 4 sec. / 8 sec. / Hold 74

Release shutter

without card Enable / Disable 44

AF method*1u+Tracking / Smooth zone / Live 1-point AF 308

Touch Shutter Disable / Enable 319

Grid display Off / 3x3 l / 6x4 m / 3x3+diag n302

535

3Menu Settings

z: Shooting 1*1 (Red) Page

*1: During movie shooting, [z1: Movie rec. size] and [z1: Sound recording]

will be displayed (p.545).

*2: Not displayed for movie shooting.

Viewfinder Shooting and Live View Shooting

(Creative Zone Modes)

Image quality

1 / 41 / 61

162

Image review time*2Off / 2 sec. / 4 sec. / 8 sec. / Hold 74

Release shutter

without card*2Enable / Disable 44

Lens aberration

correction

Peripheral illumination correction: Enable /

Disable

200

Chromatic aberration correction: Enable / Disable

Distortion correction*2: Disable / Enable

Diffraction correction*2: Disable / Enable

Lens electronic MF Disable after One-Shot AF / Enable after One-

Shot AF 155

External Speedlite

control*2

Flash firing / E-TTL II metering / Flash sync.

speed in Av mode / Flash function settings /

Flash C.Fn settings / Clear settings

281

536

3Menu Settings

z: Shooting 2 (Red) Page

*1: For movie shooting, it will be [z2: Exposure compensation].

*2: During Live View shooting or movie shooting, exposure compensation can be

set up to ±3 stops.

*3: For movie shooting, it will be [z2: kISO speed settings].

*4: For movie shooting, it will be [z2: WB correction].

*5: Not displayed for movie shooting.

Exposure

compensation/

AEB setting*1

Exposure compensation: ±5 stops*2 in 1/3- or

1/2-stop increments 245

247

AEB: ±3 stops in 1/3- or 1/2-stop increments

zISO speed settings*3ISO speed / ISO speed range / Auto range /

Minimum shutter speed

170

173

174

175

Auto Lighting　

Optimizer

Disable / Low / Standard / High 194

Disabled in M or B modes

White balance

(Ambience priority) /

(White priority)

W/E/R/Y/U/D/O/P (Approx. 2500 -

10000)

185

Custom White Balance Manual setting of white balance 188

White balance shift/

bracketing*4

White balance correction: B/A/M/G bias, 9

levels each 191

White balance bracketing: B/A and M/G bias,

single-level increments, ±3 levels 192

Color space*5sRGB / Adobe RGB 208

Shaded menu options are not displayed in Basic Zone modes.

537

3Menu Settings

z: Shooting 3 (Red) Page

*1: Not displayed for movie shooting.

Picture Style

DAuto / PStandard / QPortrait /

RLandscape / uFine Detail /

SNeutral / UFaithful / VMonochrome /

WUser Defined 1-3

176

Noise reduction for

long exposures*1Disable / Auto / Enable 197

High ISO speed noise

reduction

Disable / Low / Standard / High / Multi Shot

Noise Reduction*1195

Highlight tone priority Disable / Enable 199

Dust Delete Data*1

Obtain data to be used with Digital Photo

Professional (EOS software) to delete dust

spots

452

Multiple exposures*1

Multiple exposure / Multiple exposure control /

Number of exposures / Continue multiple

exposure / Select image for multiple exposures

258

HDR mode*1Adjust dynamic range / Effect / Continuous

HDR / Auto Image Align 253

538

3Menu Settings

z: Shooting 4 (Red) Page

*1: Not displayed for Live View shooting.

*2: In Basic Zone modes, these menu options are displayed under the [z1] tab.

z: Shooting5*1*2 (Red) Page

*1: The [z5] tab is displayed for Live View shooting. (Not displayed for viewfinder

shooting.)

*2: In Basic Zone modes, these menu options are displayed under the [z2] tab.

Interval timer

*1*2Disable / Enable (Interval / Number of shots) 267

Bulb timer Disable / Enable (Exposure time) 251

Anti-flicker shooting*1Disable / Enable 206

Mirror lockup*1Disable / Enable 265

Aspect ratio 3:2 / 4:3 / 16:9 / 1:1 168

Live View shooting*1*2Enable / Disable 291

AF method u+Tracking / Smooth zone / Live 1-point AF 308

Touch Shutter Disable / Enable 319

Metering timer

4 sec. / 8 sec. / 16 sec. / 30 sec. / 1 min. / 10 min.

/ 30 min.

302

Grid display Off / 3x3 l / 6x4 m / 3x3+diag n302

Exposure simulation Enable / During e / Disable 303

Silent LV shooting Mode 1 / Mode 2 / Disable 303

539

3Menu Settings

3: Playback 1 (Blue) Page

3: Playback 2 (Blue) Page

3: Playback 3 (Blue) Page

Protect images Protect images 409

Rotate image Rotate images 408

Erase images Erase images 430

Print order Specify images to be printed (DPOF) 458

Photobook set-up Specify images for a photobook 464

RAW image processing

Process 1 images 438

Cropping Partially crop JPEG images 446

Resizing Downsize JPEG image’s pixel count 444

Rating Rate images 412

Slide show

Display time / Repeat / Transition effect /

Background music

424

Set image search

conditions Rating / Date / Folder / Protect / Type of file 402

Image jump w/6

1 image / 10 images / Jump images by the

specified number / Date / Folder / Movies / Stills /

Protect / Rating

400

Highlight alert Disable / Enable 397

AF point display Disable / Enable 397

Playback grid

Off / 3x3

/ 6x4

/ 3x3+diag

n390

Histogram display Brightness / RGB 398

Magnification

(Approx.)

1x (no magnification) / 2x (magnify from center) / 4x

(magnify from center) / 8x (magnify from center) / 10x

(magnify from center) / Actual size (from selected

point) / Same as last magnification (from center)

405

Control over HDMI Disable / Enable 428

540

3Menu Settings

5: Set-up 1 (Yellow) Page

*1: For details, refer to the “Wi-Fi (Wireless Communication) Function Instruction

Manual” (p.4).

Select folder Create and select a folder 209

File numbering Numbering: Continuous / Auto reset 211

Manual reset

Vertical image auto

rotation OnzD / OnD / Off 435

Format card Erase data on the card by formatting 70

Eye-Fi settings Displayed when a commercially-available Eye-

Fi card is inserted 522

Wireless

communication

settings*1

Wi-Fi settings:

Wi-Fi / NFC connection / Password /

Connection history / MAC address

–

Wi-Fi function:

Transfer images between cameras / Connect to

smartphone / Remote control (EOS Utility) /

Print from Wi-Fi printer / Upload to Web service

Bluetooth function:

Bluetooth function / Pairing / Check/clear

connection info / Bluetooth address

Send images to smartphone

Nickname

Clear settings

541

3Menu Settings

5: Set-up 2 (Yellow) Page

*1: Not displayed for Live View shooting or movie shooting.

5: Set-up 3 (Yellow) Page

*1: Not displayed for Live View shooting or movie shooting.

Auto power off 1 min. / 2 min. / 4 min. / 8 min. / 15 min. / 30

min. / Disable 73

LCD brightness LCD brightness adjustable to 7 levels 434

LCD off/on*1Remains on / Shutter btn. 74

Date/Time/Zone Date (year, month, day) / Time (hr., min., sec.) /

Daylight saving time / Time zone 49

LanguageKSelect the interface language 52

Viewfinder display*1

Electronic level: Hide / Show 81

Grid display: Hide / Show 79

Show/hide in viewfinder:

Battery level, Shooting mode, AF operation,

Image quality (Image type), Drive mode,

Metering mode, Flicker detection

GPS setting

GPS / Auto time setting / Position update

interval / GPS information display / GPS

Logger

217

Video system For NTSC / For PAL 341

427

Mode guide*1Enable / Disable 89

Feature guide Enable / Disable 90

Help text size Small / Standard 92

542

3Menu Settings

5: Set-up 4 (Yellow): For viewfinder shooting Page

*1: For Live View shooting and movie shooting, it will be [z button LV display

options].

5: Set-up 4 (Yellow): For Live View shooting/Movie shooting Page

Touch operation Standard / Sensitive / Disable 69

Beep Enable / Touch / Disable 73

Battery information Power source / Remaining capacity / Shutter

count / Recharge performance 516

Sensor cleaning

Auto cleaningf: Enable / Disable 450

Clean nowf

Clean manually 455

zbutton display

options*1Electronic level / Quick Control screen 84

Multi function lock

Main Dial

Quick Control Dial

Multi-controller

Touch operation

z button LV display

options

Live View info switch setting: 1 / 2 / 3 / 4 298

Histogram display

• Brightness/RGB: Brightness / RGB

• Display size: Large / Small 299

Reset

543

3Menu Settings

5: Set-up 5 (Yellow) Page

*1: Not displayed for Live View shooting or movie shooting.

Custom shooting

modes (C1, C2)

settings 510

Clear all camera

settings Resets the camera to the default settings 75

Display copyright information / Enter author’s

name / Enter copyright details / Delete

214

Manual/software URL URL and QR code for downloading Instruction

Manuals and software 5

Certification Logo

Display

Displays some of the logos of the camera’s

certifications 513

Firmware*1Select to update the firmware of the camera,

lens, Speedlite, etc. –

544

3Menu Settings

8: Custom Functions (Orange) Page

9: My Menu (Green) Page

C.Fn I: Exposure

Customize camera functions as desired

471

C.Fn II: Autofocus 475

C.Fn III: Operation/

Others 489

Clear all Custom

Functions (C.Fn) Clear Custom Function settings 468

Add My Menu tab Add My Menu tabs 1-5 505

Delete all My Menu tabs Delete all My Menu tabs 508

Delete all items Delete all items under My Menu tabs 1-5 508

Menu display Normal display / Display from My Menu tab /

Display only My Menu tab 509

545

3Menu Settings

z: Shooting 1 (Red) Page

*1: In Basic Zone modes, it will be [Enable] [Disable].

z: Shooting 2 (Red) Page

Movie Shooting

Movie recording size

1920x1080 / 1280x720

341

NTSC: 59.94p / 29.97p / 23.98p

PAL: 50.00p / 25.00p

Standard (IPB) / Light (IPB)

Sound recording

Sound recording*1: Auto / Manual / Disable

346Sound-recording level

Wind filter: Auto / Disable

Attenuator: Disable / Enable 347

kISO speed settings ISO speed / ISO speed range / ISO Auto /

aISO Auto 372

The “Movie Shooting” table only includes what is not covered by the

“Viewfinder Shooting and Live View Shooting” table.

For [z: Shooting 3] (Red), see page 537.

546

3Menu Settings

z: Shooting 4*1 (Red) Page

*1: In Basic Zone modes, these menu options are displayed under the [z2] tab.

Movie Servo AF Enable / Disable 373

AF method u+Tracking / Smooth zone / Live 1-point AF 374

Movie Servo AF

tracking sensitivity

Locked on (-3/-2/-1) / 0 / Responsive

(+1/+2/+3) 375

Movie Servo AF Speed

When active: Always on / During shooting

376

AF speed: Slow (-7/-6/-5/-4/-3/-2/-1) /

Standard / Fast (+1/+2)

Metering timer 4 sec. / 8 sec. / 16 sec. / 30 sec. / 1 min. /

10 min. / 30 min. 377

Grid display Off / 3x3 l / 6x4 m / 3x3+diag n377

V button function /- / q/- / /k / q/k378

547

3Menu Settings

z: Shooting 5*1 (Red) Page

*1: In Basic Zone modes, these menu options are displayed under the [z3] tab.

Video snapshot

Video snapshot: Enable / Disable

361

Album settings: Create a new album / Add to

existing album

Show confirm message: Enable / Disable 364

Time-lapse movie

Time-lapse movie: Disable / Enable

H(3840x2160) / Enable L(1920x1080) 350

Shooting interval (hr., min., sec.) 351

Number of shots

Auto exposure: Fixed 1st frame / Each frame

352

LCD auto off: Disable / Enable

Beep as image taken: Enable / Disable 353

Movie digital IS Disable / Enable / Enhanced 380

Remote control

shooting Disable / Enable 381

548

If a problem occurs with the camera, first consult this Troubleshooting

Guide. If this Troubleshooting Guide does not resolve the problem,

contact your dealer or nearest Canon Service Center.

If the battery’s remaining capacity (p.516) is 94% or higher, the

battery will not be recharged.

Do not use any battery other than genuine Canon Battery Pack

LP-E6N/LP-E6.



If (1) the battery charger or battery has a problem or (2) communication

with the battery failed (with a non-Canon battery pack), the protection

circuit will stop charging, and the charge lamp will blink in orange at a

constant high speed. In the case of (1), unplug the charger’s power plug

from the power outlet. Detach and reattach the battery to the charger. Wait

a few minutes, then reconnect the power plug to the power outlet. If the

problem persists, contact your dealer or nearest Canon Service Center.



If the internal temperature of the battery attached to the charger is

high, the charger will not charge the battery for safety reasons (lamp

off). During charging, if the battery’s temperature becomes high for

any reason, charging will stop automatically (lamp blinks). When the

battery temperature goes down, charging will resume automatically.

Make sure the battery compartment cover is closed (p.42).

Make sure the battery is installed properly in the camera (p.42).

Recharge the battery (p.40).

Make sure the card slot cover is closed (p.43).

Troubleshooting Guide

Power-Related Problems

The battery does not recharge.

The charger’s lamp blinks at high speed.

The charger’s lamp does not blink.

The camera is not activated on even when the power switch is set to <

549

Troubleshooting Guide

If the power is turned off while an image is being recorded to the

card, the access lamp will remain on or continue to blink for a few

seconds. When the image recording is complete, the power will

turn off automatically.

Do not use any battery other than genuine Canon Battery Pack

LP-E6N/LP-E6.

Remove and install the battery again (p.42).



If the electrical contacts are dirty, use a soft cloth to clean them.

Use a fully-charged battery (p.40).

The battery performance may have degraded. See [54: Battery

info.] to check the battery’s recharge performance level (p.516). If

the battery performance is poor, replace the battery with a new

one.

The number of possible shots will decrease with any of the

following operations:

• Pressing the shutter button halfway for a prolonged period.

• Activating the AF frequently without taking a picture.

• Using the lens’s Image Stabilizer.

• Using GPS.

• Using the LCD monitor frequently.

• Continuing Live View shooting or movie shooting for a prolonged

period.

• Using the Wi-Fi/NFC/Bluetooth (wireless communication)

function.

• Enabling the Eye-Fi card’s transmission.

The access lamp still lights or blinks even when

the power switch is <2>.

[Does this battery/do these batteries display the Canon

logo?] is displayed.

The battery becomes exhausted quickly.

550

Troubleshooting Guide

Auto power off is in effect. If you do not want auto power off to

take effect, set [52: Auto power off] to [Disable] (p.73).

Even if [52: Auto power off] is set to [Disable], the LCD monitor

will still turn off after the camera is left idle for approx. 30 min. (The

camera’s power does not turn off.)

The camera cannot be used with EF-S or EF-M lenses (p.53).

Install a recharged battery in the camera (p.40).

Make sure the card is properly inserted (p.43).

Slide the card’s write-protect switch to the Write/Erase setting

(p.43).

If the card is full, replace the card or delete unnecessary images

to make space (p.43, 430).

You cannot take a picture when focusing with One-Shot AF and

the focus indicator <o> in the viewfinder is blinking or when the

AF point is orange during Live View/movie shooting. Press the

shutter button halfway again to refocus automatically, or focus

manually (p.56, 154).

The camera turns off by itself.

Shooting-Related Problems

The lens cannot be attached.

The viewfinder is dark.

No images can be shot or recorded.

551

Troubleshooting Guide

If a card error message is displayed, see page 45 or 567.

Since SDXC cards are formatted in exFAT, if you format a card

with this camera and then insert it into another camera, an error

may be displayed and it may not be possible to use the card.

Set [z4: Mirror lockup] to [Disable].

Set the lens’s focus mode switch to <AF> (p.53).

Press the shutter button gently to prevent camera shake (p.55,

56).

With a lens equipped with an Image Stabilizer, set the IS switch to

<1>.

In low light, the shutter speed may become slow. Use a faster

shutter speed (p.236), set a higher ISO speed (p.170), use flash

(p.278), or use a tripod.

See “Minimizing Blurred Photos” on page 96.

The card cannot be used.

An error message is displayed when the

card is inserted in another camera.

I have to press the shutter button twice to take a picture.

The image is out of focus or blurred.

552

Troubleshooting Guide

Depending on the attached lens, the number of usable AF points

and patterns and Area AF frame shape vary. The lenses are

categorized into 8 groups from A to H (p.145). Check which group

your lens belongs to. Using a lens in Groups E to H will have

fewer usable AF points (p.147-148).

Regarding the AF points lighting up or blinking when you press

the <S> or button, see page 138.

The AF points light up in red when you shoot under low light or

when focus is achieved on a dark subject.

In the <d>, <s>, <f>, <a>, or <F> mode, you can set

whether to have the AF points light up in red for when focus is

achieved (p.488).

Set the AF operation to One-Shot AF. Focus lock is not possible in

the AI Servo AF/Servo AF mode or when servo takes effect in AI

Focus AF mode (p.97, 131).

There are fewer AF points or the Area AF frame

shape is different.

The AF point is blinking or two AF points are displayed.

The AF points do not light up in red.

I cannot lock the focus and recompose the shot.

553

Troubleshooting Guide

The continuous shooting speed for high-speed continuous

shooting may decrease depending on the temperature, battery

level, flicker reduction, shutter speed, aperture, subject

conditions, brightness, AF operation, lens, Live View shooting,

flash use, shooting function settings, etc. For details, see page

156 or 158.

If you shoot a subject that has fine detail such as a field of grass,

the file size will be larger, and the actual maximum burst may be

lower than the number listed on page 164.

The maximum burst displayed in the viewfinder does not change

when you change the card, even if it is a high-speed card. The

maximum burst shown in the table on page 164 is based on

Canon’s testing card. (The faster the card’s writing speed, the

higher the actual maximum burst will be.) Therefore, the

maximum burst displayed in the viewfinder may differ from the

actual maximum burst.

The continuous shooting speed is slow.

The maximum burst during continuous shooting is lower.

Even after I change the card, the maximum burst

displayed for continuous shooting does not change.

554

Troubleshooting Guide

If [z3: Highlight tone priority] is set to [Enable], the settable

ISO speed range will be ISO 200 - ISO 40000 (for still photo

shooting). Even if you set [ISO speed range] to expand the

setting range, you cannot select L (equivalent to ISO 50), H1

(equivalent to ISO 51200), or H2 (equivalent to ISO 102400).

When [z3: Highlight tone priority] is set to [Disable] (p.199),

you can set ISO 100/125/160, L, or H1/H2.

Set [z2: Auto Lighting Optimizer] to [Disable] (p.194). When

[Low], [Standard], or [High] is set, even if you set a decreased

exposure compensation or flash exposure compensation, the

image may come out bright.

See page 242 to set the exposure compensation.

During movie shooting, [Distortion correction] or [Diffraction

correction] will not be displayed.

ISO 100 cannot be set. ISO speed expansion cannot be selected.

Even if I set a decreased exposure compensation,

the image comes out bright.

I cannot set the exposure compensation when

both manual exposure and ISO Auto are set.

Not all the lens aberration correction options are displayed.

555

Troubleshooting Guide

If you shoot at night when the background is dark, the shutter

speed automatically becomes slow (slow-sync shooting) so that

both the subject and background are properly exposed. To

prevent a slow shutter speed, under [z1: External Speedlite

control], set [Flash sync. speed in Av mode] to [1/180-1/60sec.

auto] or [1/180 sec. (fixed)] (p.282).

Make sure the flash is securely attached to the camera.

If you use a non-Canon flash unit with Live View shooting, set

[z5: Silent LV shoot.] to [Disable] (p.303).

If you use a flash unit other than an EX-series Speedlite, the flash

will always fire at full output (p.279).

When the flash Custom Function setting for [Flash metering

mode] is set to [TTL flash metering] (autoflash), the flash will

always fire at full output (p.286).

If flash exposure compensation is already set with the Speedlite,

flash exposure compensation cannot be set with the camera.

When the external Speedlite’s flash exposure compensation is

canceled (set to 0), flash exposure compensation can be set with

the camera.

Under [z1: External Speedlite control], set [Flash sync.

speed in Av mode] to [Auto] (p.282).

When I use the <f> mode with flash,

the shutter speed becomes slow.

The flash does not fire.

The flash always fires at full output.

Flash exposure compensation cannot be set.

High-speed sync cannot be set in the <f> mode.

556

Troubleshooting Guide

When taking still photos, set the drive mode to <Q> or <k>

(p.157). When shooting movies, set [z5: Remote control] to

[Enable] (p.381).

Check the position of the remote controller’s release timing

switch.

If you are using Wireless Remote Control BR-E1, see page 273.

Under [51: Wireless communication settings], if [Bluetooth

function] is set to [Smartphone] or [Remote], you cannot use

infrared remote controllers such as the RC-6 for remote control

shooting. Set [Bluetooth function] to [Disable].

To use a remote controller for time-lapse movie shooting, see

page 360.

If you use flash with Live View shooting, the shutter will make two

release sounds each time you shoot (p.292).

It indicates that the camera’s internal temperature is high. If the

white <s> icon is displayed, the still photo’s image quality may

deteriorate. If the red <E> icon is displayed, it indicates that the

Live View shooting will soon stop automatically (p.323).

Remote control shooting is not possible.

The shutter makes two release sounds during

Live View shooting.

During Live View shooting, a white s or red E icon is displayed.

557

Troubleshooting Guide

If the image-recording quality is set to 41 or 61, the shot

images are not displayed during continuous shooting (p.291).

It indicates that the camera’s internal temperature is high. If the

red <E> icon is displayed, it indicates that the movie shooting will

soon stop automatically (p.382).

If the card’s writing speed is slow, movie shooting may stop

automatically. For cards that can record movies, see page 343. To

find out the card’s writing speed, refer to the card manufacturer’s

Web site, etc.

If you shoot a movie for 29 min. 59 sec., the movie shooting will

stop automatically.

In shooting modes other than <a>, the ISO speed is set

automatically. In the <a> mode, you can manually set the ISO

speed (p.331).

If [z3: Highlight tone priority] is set to [Enable], the settable

ISO speed range will start from ISO 200. Even if you expand the

setting range with [ISO speed range], you cannot select H1 or

H2. When [z3: Highlight tone priority] is set to [Disable]

(p.199), you can set ISO 100/125/160 or an expanded ISO speed.

Shot images are not displayed when continuous shooting

is performed during Live View shooting.

During movie shooting, the red E icon is displayed.

Movie shooting stops by itself.

The ISO speed cannot be set for movie shooting.

ISO 100 cannot be set or ISO speed expansion cannot

be selected during movie shooting.

558

Troubleshooting Guide

For viewfinder shooting and Live View shooting, the ISO speed

will be set according to [ISO speed range] under [z2: zISO

speed settings] (p.173). For movie shooting, the ISO speed will

be set according to [ISO speed range] under [z2: kISO

speed settings] (p.372).

If you change the shutter speed or aperture during movie

shooting, the changes in the exposure may be recorded.

Shooting a few test movies is recommended if you intend to

perform zooming during movie shooting. Zooming during movie

shooting may result in recording of changes in exposure or

mechanical sound of the lens, or images may be out of focus.

Flickering, horizontal stripes (noise), or irregular exposures can be

caused by fluorescent lighting, LED lighting, or other light sources

during movie shooting. Also, changes in the exposure (brightness)

or color tone may be recorded. In the <a> mode, a slow shutter

speed may reduce the problem. The problem may be more

noticeable in time-lapse movie shooting.

The manually set ISO speed changes when

switching to movie shooting.

The exposure changes during movie shooting.

The image flickers or horizontal stripes

appear during movie shooting.

559

Troubleshooting Guide

If you move the camera to the left or right (panning) or shoot a

moving subject, the image may look distorted. The problem may

be more noticeable in time-lapse movie shooting.

Still photos cannot be taken during movie shooting. To take still

photos, stop the movie shooting and perform viewfinder shooting

or Live View shooting.

If the camera is connected to a computer or other device with an

interface cable (sold separately), Wi-Fi functions cannot be set.

Disconnect the interface cable before setting any functions. For

details, refer to the “Wi-Fi (Wireless Communication) Function

Instruction Manual” (p.4).

The subject looks distorted during movie shooting.

I cannot take still photos during movie shooting.

Wi-Fi

Wi-Fi function cannot be set.

560

Troubleshooting Guide

Set the <R> switch downward (lock release) (p.59).

Check the [54: Multi function lock] setting (p.88).

Make sure [54: Touch control] is set to [Standard] or

[Sensitive] (p.69).

For movie shooting, check the [z4: V btn function] setting

(p.378).

Check the [8C.Fn III-4: Custom Controls] setting (p.497).

Certain tabs and options do not appear in Basic Zone modes or

for Live View shooting and movie shooting.

Under the [9] tab, [Menu display] is set to [Display from My

Menu tab] or [Display only My Menu tab]. Set [Normal display]

(p.509).

Operation Problems

I cannot change the setting with the <6>,

<5>, <9>, or <d>.

Touch operation is not possible.

A camera button or dial does not work as expected.

Display Problems

The menu screen shows fewer tabs and options.

The display starts with [9] My Menu or the [9] tab

alone is displayed.

561

Troubleshooting Guide

Set [z2: Color space] to [sRGB]. If [Adobe RGB] is set, the first

character will be an underscore (p.208).

It is a movie file (p.211).

If the card already contains recorded images, the image number

may not start from 0001 (p.211).

Make sure the correct date and time are set (p.49).

Check the time zone and daylight saving time (p.50, 51).



The shooting date and time do not appear in the image. The date

and time are recorded in the image data as shooting information.

When printing, you can imprint the date and time in the picture,

using the date and time recorded in the shooting information

(p.458).

The file name’s first character is an underscore (“_”).

The file name starts with “MVI_”.

The file numbering does not start from 0001.

The shooting date and time displayed are incorrect.

The date and time are not in the image.

562

Troubleshooting Guide

If the number of images recorded on the card exceeds the number

the camera can display, [###] will be displayed.

In low temperatures, the display speed of the AF points may

become slower due to the AF point display device’s (liquid crystal)

characteristics. The display speed will return to normal at room

temperature.

If the LCD monitor is dirty, use a soft cloth to clean it.

The LCD monitor display may seem slightly slow in low

temperatures or may look black in high temperatures. It will return

to normal at room temperature.

[51: Eye-Fi settings] will appear only when an Eye-Fi card is

installed in the camera. If the Eye-Fi card has a write-protect

switch set to the LOCK position, you will not be able to check the

card’s connection status or disable Eye-Fi transmission (p.522).

Image transfer with Eye-Fi card is not possible if [Enable] is set

for [Wi-Fi] in [Wi-Fi Settings] under [51:Wireless

Communication settings].

[###] is displayed.

In the viewfinder, the AF point display speed is slow.

The LCD monitor does not display a clear image.

[Eye-Fi settings] does not appear.

563

Troubleshooting Guide

[33: Highlight alert] is set to [Enable] (p.397).

[33: AF point disp.] is set to [Enable] (p.397).

The AF points are not displayed when the following types of

images are played back:

• Images taken in the <8: qFG> modes.

• Images taken with distortion correction applied.

• Images taken with Multi Shot Noise Reduction applied.

• Cropped images.

If the image is protected, it cannot be erased (p.409).

The camera may not be able to play back images taken with

another camera.

Movies edited with a computer cannot be played back with the

camera.

The images have been filtered for playback with [32: Set image

search conditions] (p.402). Clear the image search conditions.

Playback Problems

Part of the image blinks in black.

A red box is displayed on the image.

During image playback, the AF points are not displayed.

The image cannot be erased.

Still photos and movies cannot be played back.

Only few images can be played back.

564

Troubleshooting Guide

If you operate the camera’s dials or lens during movie shooting,

the operation sound will also be recorded. Using the Directional

Stereo Microphone DM-E1 (sold separately) is recommended

(p.347).

If there is a drastic change in the exposure level during

autoexposure movie shooting, the recording will stop momentarily

until the brightness stabilizes. In such a case, shoot in the <a>

mode (p.330).

Make sure the [53: Video system] is correctly set to [For NTSC]

or [For PAL] (depending on the video system of your TV set).

Make sure the HDMI cable’s plug is inserted all the way in (p.427).

If the movie file size reaches 4 GB, another movie file will be

created automatically (p.345). However, if you use an SDXC card

formatted with the camera, you can record a movie in a single file

even if it exceeds 4 GB.

Operation sound and mechanical sound can be heard

during movie playback.

The movie appears to freeze momentarily.

No picture appear on the TV set.

There are multiple movie files for a single movie shoot.

565

Troubleshooting Guide

Depending on the card reader used and the computer’s operating

system, SDXC cards may not be correctly recognized. In such a

case, connect your camera to the computer with the interface

cable (sold separately), then transfer the images to the computer

using EOS Utility (EOS software, p.594).

41 and 61 images cannot be processed with the camera.

Use Digital Photo Professional (EOS software, p.594) to process

those images.

With this camera, you cannot resize JPEG b and 1 images

(p.444).

With this camera, you cannot crop RAW images (p.446).

White, red, blue, or other colored dots of light may appear on

images if the sensor is affected by cosmic rays, etc. Their

appearance may be reduced by performing [Clean nowf]

under [54: Sensor cleaning] (p.450).

My card reader does not recognize the card.

I cannot process the RAW image.

The image cannot be resized.

The image cannot be cropped.

Dots of light appear on the image.

566

Troubleshooting Guide

Under [54: Sensor cleaning], when you select [Clean nowf],

the shutter will make a mechanical sound during the cleaning, but

no picture will be recorded to the card (p.450).

If you repeatedly turn the power switch <1> and <2> within

a short time period, the <f> icon may not be displayed (p.47).

Install EOS Utility (EOS software) in the computer (p.596).

If the camera is already connected via Wi-Fi, it cannot

communicate with any computer connected with an interface

cable (sold separately).

When using EOS Utility (EOS software), set [z5: Time-lapse

movie] to [Disable] (p.350).

Sensor Cleaning Problems

The shutter makes a sound during sensor cleaning.

Automatic sensor cleaning does not work.

Computer Connection Problems

I cannot transfer images to a computer.

Communication between the connected camera

and computer does not work.

567

If there is a problem with the camera, an

error message will appear. Follow the on-

screen instructions.

* If the error message still persists after following the above instructions,

write down the error code number and contact your nearest Canon Service

Center.

Error Codes

Number Error Message and Solution

Communications between the camera and lens is faulty. Clean the

lens contacts.

Clean the electrical contacts on the camera and lens, use a genuine

Canon lens, or remove and install the battery again (p.27, 28, 42).

Card cannot be accessed. Reinsert/change card or format card

with the camera.

Remove and insert the card again, replace the card, or format the

card (p.43, 70).

Cannot save images because card is full. Replace card.

Replace the card, erase unnecessary images, or format the card

(p.43, 430, 70).

Sensor cleaning could not be performed. Turn the camera off and

on again.

Operate the power switch (p.47).

10, 20

30, 40

50, 60

70, 80

An error prevented shooting. Turn the camera off and on again or

re-install the battery.

Operate the power switch, remove and install the battery again, or

use a Canon lens (p.47, 42).

Error number

Cause and countermeasures

568

•Type

Type: Digital, single-lens reflex, AF/AE camera

Recording media: SD/SDHC*/SDXC* memory cards

* UHS-I cards compatible.

Image sensor size: Approx. 35.9 x 24.0 mm

Compatible lenses: Canon EF lenses

* Excluding EF-S and EF-M lenses

(The effective angle of view of a lens is approximately

equivalent to that of the focal length indicated.)

Lens mount: Canon EF mount

• Image Sensor

Type: CMOS sensor

Effective pixels: Approx. 26.2 megapixels

* Rounded to the nearest 100,000.

Aspect ratio: 3:2

Dust deletion: Auto/Manual, Appending Dust Delete Data

• Recording System

Recording format: Design rule for Camera File System (DCF) 2.0

Image type: JPEG, RAW (14-bit Canon original),

RAW+JPEG simultaneous recording possible

Pixels recorded: L (Large) : Approx. 26.0 megapixels (6240 x 4160)

M (Medium) : Approx. 11.5 megapixels (4160 x 2768)

S1 (Small 1) : Approx. 6.5 megapixels (3120 x 2080)

S2 (Small 2) : Approx. 3.8 megapixels (2400 x 1600)

RAW : Approx. 26.0 megapixels (6240 x 4160)

M-RAW : Approx. 14.6 megapixels (4680 x 3120)

S-RAW : Approx. 6.5 megapixels (3120 x 2080)

* Rounded to the nearest 100,000.

Aspect ratio: 3:2, 4:3, 16:9, 1:1

Folder creation and

selection:

Possible

File numbering: Continuous, Auto reset, Manual reset

Specifications

569

Specifications

• Image Processing During Shooting

Picture Style: Auto, Standard, Portrait, Landscape, Fine Detail, Neutral,

Faithful, Monochrome, User Defined 1 - 3

White balance: Auto (Ambience priority), Auto (White priority), Preset

(Daylight, Shade, Cloudy, Tungsten light, White

fluorescent light, Flash), Custom, Color temperature

setting (approx. 2500-10000 K)

White balance correction and white balance bracketing

features provided

* Flash color temperature information transmission

possible

Automatic image

brightness correction:

Auto Lighting Optimizer provided

Noise reduction: Applicable to high ISO speed shots and long exposures

Highlight tone priority: Provided

Lens aberration

correction:

Peripheral illumination correction, Chromatic aberration

correction, Distortion correction, Diffraction correction

• Viewfinder

Type: Eye-level pentaprism

Field of view coverage: Vertical/Horizontal approx. 98% (with eyepoint approx.

21 mm and aspect ratio set to 3:2)

Magnification: Approx. 0.71x (-1 m-1 with 50mm lens at infinity)

Eyepoint: Approx. 21 mm (from eyepiece lens center at -1 m-1)

Dioptric adjustment

range:

Approx. -3.0 - +1.0 m-1 (dpt)

Focusing screen: Fixed, Precision Matte

Grid display: Provided

Electronic level: Provided

Function setting display: Battery level (remaining capacity), Shooting mode, AF

operation, Image quality (Image type), Drive mode,

Metering mode, Flicker detection, Warning! display

Mirror: Quick-return type

Depth-of-field preview: Provided

570

Specifications

• Autofocus (during viewfinder shooting)

Type: TTL secondary image-registration, phase-difference

detection with the dedicated AF sensor

AF points: Max. 45 points (Cross-type AF point: Max. 45 points)

* Number of available AF points, Dual cross-type AF

points, and Cross-type AF points vary depending on

the lens used.

* Dual cross-type focusing at f/2.8 with center AF point

when Group A (of the AF groups) lenses are used.

Focusing brightness

range:

EV -3 - 18 (with the center AF point supporting f/2.8,

One-Shot AF, room temperature, ISO 100)

Focus operation: One-Shot AF, AI Servo AF, AI Focus AF, Manual focusing

(MF)

AF area selection mode:Single-point Spot AF (manual selection), Single-point AF

(manual selection), Zone AF (manual selection of zone),

Large zone AF (manual selection of zone), Automatic

selection AF

AF point automatic

selection conditions:

Automatic AF point selection possible based on color

information equivalent to human skin-tone

AI Servo AF

characteristics:

Characteristics can be set with Custom Functions for

Tracking sensitivity, Acceleration/deceleration tracking,

and AF point auto switching

AF fine adjustment: AF Microadjustment (All lenses by the same amount,

Adjust by lens)

AF-assist beam: With the EOS-dedicated external Speedlite

• Exposure Control

Metering mode: Approx. 7,560-pixel RGB+IR metering sensor and

63-zone TTL open-aperture metering

• Evaluative metering (linked to all AF points)

• Partial metering (approx. 6.5% of viewfinder at center)

• Spot metering (approx. 3.2% of viewfinder at center)

• Center-weighted average metering

Metering brightness

range:

EV 1 - 20 (at room temperature, ISO 100)

571

Specifications

Shooting mode: Basic Zone modes:

Scene Intelligent Auto, Creative Auto, Special Scene

(Portrait, Group Photo, Landscape, Sports, Kids,

Panning, Close-up, Food, Candlelight, Night Portrait,

Handheld Night Scene, HDR Backlight Control)

Creative Zone modes:

Program AE, Shutter-priority AE, Aperture-priority AE,

Manual exposure, Bulb exposure, Custom shooting

modes (C1/C2)

ISO speed

(Recommended

exposure index):

Basic Zone modes: ISO speed set automatically

P, Tv, Av, M, B: ISO Auto, ISO 100 - ISO 40000 manual

setting (in 1/3- or whole-stop increments), and expansion

to L (equivalent to ISO 50), H1 (equivalent to ISO

51200), H2 (equivalent to ISO 102400) provided.

* With highlight tone priority set, the minimum limit will be

ISO 200.

ISO speed settings: ISO speed range, Auto range, and minimum speed limit

for Auto settable

Exposure

compensation:

Manual:

With viewfinder shooting: ±5 stops in 1/3- or 1/2-stop

increments

With Live View shooting: ±3 stops in 1/3- or 1/2-stop

increments

AEB (Auto Exposure Bracketing):

±3 stops in 1/3- or 1/2-stop increments (can be combined

with manual exposure compensation)

AE lock: Auto: AE lock when focus is achieved can be enabled or

disabled for each metering mode with a Custom Function

Manual: With AE lock button

Flicker reduction: Provided

Interval timer: Shooting interval and shot count settable

Bulb timer: Bulb exposure time settable

Mirror lockup: Provided

• HDR Shooting

Dynamic range adjustment:

Auto, ±1, ±2, ±3

Effects: Natural, Art standard, Art vivid, Art bold, Art embossed

Auto image alignment: Provided

572

Specifications

• Multiple Exposures

Number of multiple

exposures:

2 to 9 exposures

Multiple-exposure control:

Additive, average

• Shutter

Type: Electronically-controlled, focal-plane shutter

Shutter speed: 1/4000 sec. to 30 sec. (total shutter speed range;

available range varies by shooting mode), Bulb, X-sync

at 1/180 sec.

• Drive System

Drive mode: Single shooting, High-speed continuous shooting, Low-

speed continuous shooting, Silent single shooting, Silent

continuous shooting, 10-sec. self-timer/remote control, 2-

sec. self-timer/remote control, Self-timer: Continuous

Continuous shooting

speed:

High-speed continuous shooting: Max. approx. 6.5 shots/

sec.

* The continuous shooting speed decreases during

Antiflicker shooting, during Live View shooting with

Servo AF, or during Live View shooting with an external

Speedlite.

* The continuous shooting speed for high-speed

continuous shooting may decrease depending on the

temperature, battery level, flicker reduction, shutter

speed, aperture, subject conditions, brightness, AF

operation, lens, flash use, shooting function settings, etc.

Low-speed continuous shooting: Max. approx. 3.0 shots/sec.

* The continuous shooting speed decreases during Live

View shooting with an external Speedlite.

* During Panning mode in viewfinder shooting: Max.

approx. 4.3 shots/sec., in Live View shooting: Max.

approx. 2.7 shots/sec. (at 1/30 sec. shutter speed, with

maximum aperture)

Silent continuous shooting: Max. approx. 3.0 shots/sec.

Max. burst: JPEG Large/Fine: Approx. 110 shots (Approx. 150 shots)

RAW: Approx. 18 shots (Approx. 21 shots)

RAW+JPEG Large/Fine: Approx. 17 shots (Approx. 19

shots)

573

Specifications

* Based on Canon’s standard testing SD card (Standard:

8 GB, High-speed: 16 GB, UHS-I compatible) and

standard testing conditions (High-speed continuous

shooting, ISO 100, Standard Picture Style).

* Figures in parentheses are the number of shots when a

Canon’s standard testing UHS-I SD card is used.

• External Speedlite

Compatible Speedlites: EX-series Speedlites

Flash metering: E-TTL II autoflash

Flash exposure

compensation:

±3 stops in 1/3- or 1/2-stop increments

FE lock: Provided

PC terminal: Not provided

Flash control: Flash function settings, Flash Custom Function settings

• Live View Shooting

Focus method: Dual pixel CMOS AF

AF operation: One-Shot AF, Servo AF

AF method: Face+Tracking, Smooth zone, Live 1-point AF

Manual focusing (approx. 5x and 10x magnification

available for focus check)

Focusing brightness

range:

EV -2.5 - 18 (at room temperature, ISO 100, One-Shot

AF)

Metering mode: Evaluative metering (315 zones), Partial metering

(approx. 6.3% of Live View screen), Spot metering

(approx. 2.7% of Live View screen), Center-weighted

average metering

Metering brightness

range:

EV 0 - 20 (at room temperature, ISO 100)

Silent Live View

shooting:

Provided (Mode 1 and 2)

Touch Shutter: Provided

Grid display: 3 types

574

Specifications

• Movie Shooting

Recording format: MP4

* For time-lapse movies: MOV format

Movie: MPEG-4 AVC/H.264

Variable (Average) bit rate

* For 4K time-lapse movies: Motion JPEG

Audio: AAC

Movie recording size: Full HD (1920x1080), HD (1280x720)

* For time-lapse movies: 4K (3840x2160) and Full HD

selectable

Frame rate: 59.94p/29.97p/23.98p (with NTSC)

50.00p/25.00p (with PAL)

Compression method: Standard (IPB), Light (IPB)

* For 4K time-lapse movies: Motion JPEG / Full HD time-

lapse movies: ALL-I (For editing/I-only)

Bit rate: [MP4]

Full HD (59.94p/50.00p)/Standard (IPB)

: Approx. 60 Mbps

Full HD (29.97p/25.00p/23.98p)/Standard (IPB)

: Approx. 30 Mbps

Full HD (29.97p/25.00p)/Light (IPB) : Approx. 12 Mbps

HD (59.94p/50.00p)/Standard (IPB) : Approx. 26 Mbps

HD (29.97p/25.00p)/Light (IPB) : Approx. 4 Mbps

[MOV]

4K time-lapse movies (29.97p/25.00p)

Approx. 500 Mbps

Full HD time-lapse movies (29.97p/25.00p)

: Approx. 90 Mbps

Card performance

requirements:

[Movie] (Writing/reading speed)

Full HD (59.94p/50.00p)/Standard (IPB)

: SD Speed Class 10 or faster

Full HD (29.97p/25.00p/23.98p)/Standard (IPB)

: SD Speed Class 6 or faster

Full HD (29.97p/25.00p)/Light (IPB)

: SD Speed Class 4 or faster

HD (59.94p/50.00p)/Standard (IPB)

: SD Speed Class 6 or faster

HD (29.97p/25.00p)/Light (IPB)

: SD Speed Class 4 or faster

575

Specifications

[Time-lapse movie] (Reading speed)

4K Time-lapse movie (29.97p/25.00p)

: UHS-I 90 MB/sec. or faster

Full HD Time-lapse movie (29.97p/25.00p)

: UHS-I Speed Class 3 or faster

Focus method: Dual pixel CMOS AF

AF method: Face+Tracking, Smooth zone, Live 1-point AF

Manual focusing (approx. 5x and 10x magnification

available for focus check)

Movie servo AF: Possible

* With movie Servo AF, the subject tracking and AF

speed are settable.

Movie digital IS: Possible (Enable/Enhanced)

Focusing brightness

range:

EV -2.5 - 18 (at room temperature, ISO 100, One-Shot

AF, 29.97 fps)

Metering mode: Center-weighted average and Evaluative metering with

the image sensor

* Automatically set by the focus method

Metering brightness

range:

EV 0 - 20 (at room temperature, ISO 100,

center-weighted average metering)

Exposure control: Auto exposure shooting (Program AE for movie

shooting), manual exposure

Exposure

compensation:

±3 stops in 1/3- or 1/2-stop increments

ISO speed

(Recommended

exposure index):

Scene Intelligent Auto, Creative Auto: Automatically set

within ISO 100 - ISO 25600

P/Tv/Av/B: Automatically set within ISO 100 - ISO 25600,

maximum limit settable within ISO 6400 - H2 (equivalent

to ISO 102400).

M: ISO Auto (automatically set within ISO 100 - ISO

25600), Manual setting within ISO 100 - ISO 25600

(in 1/3- or whole-stop increments), expandable to H

(equivalent to ISO 32000/40000), H1 (equivalent to ISO

51200), and H2 (equivalent to ISO 102400)

* With highlight tone priority set, the minimum limit will be

ISO 200.

* The settable range is different for time-lapse movie

shooting.

576

Specifications

ISO speed settings: For movie shooting, you can set the ISO speed range,

maximum limit for ISO Auto, and maximum limit for time-

lapse movie shooting with ISO Auto

Sound recording: Built-in stereo microphones, external stereo microphone

jack provided

Sound-recording level adjustable, wind filter provided,

attenuator provided

Grid display: 3 types

HDR movie shooting: Automatically set in SCN modes

Time-lapse movie: Movie recording quality (4K, Full HD), Shooting interval

(hr., min., sec.), Number of shots, Auto exposure (Fixed

1st frame, Each frame), LCD auto off, and Beep at the

time of shooting are settable.

Video snapshot: Provided (2 sec., 4 sec., 8 sec.)

Remote control

shooting:

Provided

Still photo shooting: Not possible during movie shooting

• LCD Monitor

Type: TFT color, liquid-crystal monitor

Monitor size and dots: Wide 3.0-in. (3:2) with approx. 1.04 million dots

Brightness adjustment: Manual (7 levels)

Electronic level: Provided

Interface languages: 25

Touch screen: Capacitive sensing

Shooting mode guide: Display on/off settable

Feature guide: Display on/off settable

Help display: Provided

* Text size settable for Help screen

• Playback

Image display format: Single-image display (without shooting information),

Single-image display (with basic information), Single-

image display (Shooting information displayed: Detailed

information, Lens/histogram, White balance, Picture

Style 1, Picture Style 2, Color space/noise reduction,

Lens aberration correction, GPS information), Index

display (4/9/36/100 images)

577

Specifications

Highlight alert: Overexposed highlights blink

AF point display: Provided (may not be displayed depending on shooting

conditions)

Grid display: 3 types

Magnified view: Approx. 1.5x-10x, initial magnification and position

settable

Image search: Search conditions settable (by rating, date, folder,

protected, file type)

Image browsing method:1 image, 10 images, Specified number, Date, Folder,

Movies, Stills, Protect, Rating

Image rotation: Provided

Image protection: Provided

Rating: Provided

Movie playback: Possible (on LCD monitor or with HDMI)

Start/end movie scene

editing:

Provided

Slide show: All images or images matching the search conditions are

played back automatically.

• Post-Processing of Images

In-camera RAW image

processing:

Brightness adjustment, White balance, Picture Style,

Auto Lighting Optimizer, High ISO speed noise reduction,

JPEG image-recording quality, Color space, Lens

aberration correction (Peripheral illumination correction,

Distortion correction, Chromatic aberration correction,

Diffraction correction)

Resize: Provided

Cropping: Provided

• Print Ordering

DPOF: Version 1.1 compliant

• GPS Functions

Compatible satellites: GPS satellites (USA), GLONASS satellites (Russia),

Quasi-Zenith Satellite System (QZSS) MICHIBIKI

(Japan)

GPS signal reception

modes:

Mode 1, Mode 2

578

Specifications

Geotag information

appended to image:

Latitude, Longitude, Elevation, Coordinated Universal

Time (UTC), Satellite signal acquisition status

Position update interval: 1 sec., 5 sec., 10 sec., 15 sec., 30 sec., 1 min., 2 min., 5

min.

Time setting: GPS time data set to camera

Log data: One file per day, NMEA format

* Change in time zone creates another file.

* The log data saved in internal memory can be

transferred to a card or downloaded to a computer as a

log file.

Log data deletion: Possible

• Customization Features

Custom Functions: 28 functions

Custom shooting

modes:

My Menu: Up to 5 screens can be registered

• Interface

DIGITAL terminal: Hi-Speed USB equivalent

Computer communication, Connect Station CS100

connection

HDMI mini OUT

terminal:

Type C (Auto switching of resolution), CEC-compatible

External microphone IN

terminal:

3.5 mm diameter stereo mini-jack

Directional Stereo Microphone DM-E1 or commercially-

available external microphone connectable

Remote control terminal:For N3-type remote control units

Wireless remote control: Compatible with Remote Controller RC-6 and Wireless

Remote Control BR-E1 (via Bluetooth)

Eye-Fi card: Supported

579

Specifications

•Power

Battery: Battery Pack LP-E6N/LP-E6, quantity 1

* AC power usable with household power outlet

accessories.

Battery information: Power source, Battery level, Shutter count, Recharge

performance, Battery registration possible

Number of possible

shots:

With viewfinder shooting:

Approx. 1200 shots at room temperature (23°C/73°F),

approx. 1100 shots at low temperatures (0°C/32°F)

With Live View shooting:

Approx. 380 shots at room temperature (23°C/73°F),

approx. 340 shots at low temperatures (0°C/32°F)

* With a fully-charged Battery Pack LP-E6N.

Movie shooting time: Total approx. 2 hr. 40 min. at room temperature (23°C/

73°F)

Total approx. 2 hr. 20 min. at low temperatures (0°C/

32°F)

* With a fully-charged Battery Pack LP-E6N, Movie

Servo AF disabled, and Full HD 29.97p/25.00p/23.98p

Standard (IPB) set.

• Dimensions and Weight

Dimensions (W x H x D):Approx. 144.0 x 110.5 x 74.8 mm / 5.67 x 4.35 x 2.94 in.

Weight: Approx. 765 g / 26.98 oz. (including battery pack and

card)/Approx. 685 g / 24.16 oz. (body only)

• Operation Environment

Working temperature

range:

0°C - +40°C/ 32°F - 104°F

Working humidity: 85% or less

All the data above is based on Canon’s testing standards and CIPA (Camera &

Imaging Products Association) testing standards and guidelines.

Dimensions and weight listed above are based on CIPA Guidelines (except weight

for camera body only).

Product specifications and the exterior are subject to change without notice.

If a problem occurs with a non-Canon lens attached to the camera, consult the

respective lens manufacturer.

580

Trademarks

Adobe is a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated.

Microsoft and Windows are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft

Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.

App Store and macOS are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and

other countries.

SDXC logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC.

HDMI, HDMI logo, and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or

registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC.

The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by

Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by Canon Inc. is under license.

Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners.

All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.

About MPEG-4 Licensing

“This product is licensed under AT&T patents for the MPEG-4 standard and may

be used for encoding MPEG-4 compliant video and/or decoding MPEG-4

compliant video that was encoded only (1) for a personal and non-commercial

purpose or (2) by a video provider licensed under the AT&T patents to provide

MPEG-4 compliant video. No license is granted or implied for any other use for

MPEG-4 standard.”

THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE AVC PATENT PORTFOLIO

LICENSE FOR THE PERSONAL USE OF A CONSUMER OR OTHER USES IN

WHICH IT DOES NOT RECEIVE REMUNERATION TO (i) ENCODE VIDEO IN

COMPLIANCE WITH THE AVC STANDARD (''AVC VIDEO'') AND/OR (ii)

DECODE AVC VIDEO THAT WAS ENCODED BY A CONSUMER ENGAGED IN

A PERSONAL ACTIVITY AND/OR WAS OBTAINED FROM A VIDEO PROVIDER

LICENSED TO PROVIDE AVC VIDEO. NO LICENSE IS GRANTED OR SHALL

BE IMPLIED FOR ANY OTHER USE. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION MAY BE

OBTAINED FROM MPEG LA, L.L.C. SEE HTTP://WWW.MPEGLA.COM

* Notice displayed in English as required.

581

Third party software

This product includes third party software.

expat.h

Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a

copy of this software and associated documentation files (the

"Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without

limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute,

sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to

whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following

conditions:

The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included

in all copies or substantial portions of the Software.

THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF

ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED

TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A

PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT

SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR

ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN

ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM,

OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE

OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.

582

Use of Genuine Canon Accessories Is Recommended

This product is designed to achieve optimum performance when used with

genuine Canon accessories. Therefore, using this product with genuine

accessories is highly recommended.

Canon shall not be liable for any damage to this product and/or accidents such

as malfunction, fire, etc. caused by the failure of non-genuine Canon

accessories (e.g., a leakage and/or explosion of a battery pack). Please note

that repairs arising out of the malfunction of non-genuine accessories will not

be covered by the warranty for repairs, although you may request such repairs

on a chargeable basis.

Battery Pack LP-E6N/LP-E6 is dedicated to Canon products only. Using it

with an incompatible battery charger or product may result in malfunction or

accidents for which Canon cannot be held liable.

583

584

Digital Camera Model DS126631 Systems

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the

following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference,

and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including

interference that may cause undesired operation.

Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for

class B digital devices, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These

limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful

interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses

and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in

accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to

radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference

will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause

harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be

determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged

to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following

measures:

— Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

— Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.

— Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from

that to which the receiver is connected.

—

Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.

The cable with the ferrite core provided with the digital camera must be used

with this equipment in order to comply with Class B limits in Subpart B of Part

15 of the FCC rules.

Do not make any changes or modifications to the equipment unless otherwise

specified in the manual. If such changes or modifications should be made, you

could be required to stop operation of the equipment.

Canon U.S.A. Inc.

One Canon Park, Melville, NY 11747, U.S.A.

Tel No. 1-800-OK-CANON (1-800-652-2666)

CAN ICES-3 (B) / NMB-3 (B)

585

USA and Canada only:

The Lithium ion/polymer battery that powers the product is

recyclable. Please call 1-800-8-BATTERY for information on

how to recycle this battery.

For CA, USA only

Included lithium battery contains Perchlorate Material – special handling may apply.

See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate/ for details.

CAUTION

RISK OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS REPLACED BY AN INCORRECT TYPE.

DISPOSE OF USED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO LOCAL REGULATION.

586

587

588

589

590

591

592

593

Software Start Guide /

Downloading Images to a Computer

This chapter describes about the EOS software, how to

download and install the software, how to use the

Software Instruction Manuals (PDF files), and how to

transfer images to a computer.

594

You can download the following EOS software from the Canon

Web site (p.596).

EOS Utility

With the camera connected to a computer, EOS Utility enables you

to transfer still photos and movies shot with the camera to the

computer. You can also use this software to set various camera

settings and shoot remotely from the computer connected to the

camera. Also, you can copy background music tracks, such as EOS

Sample Music*, to the card.

* You can use the background music as the soundtrack for a video

snapshot album, movie, or slide show played back with your

camera.

Digital Photo Professional

This software is recommended for users who shoot RAW images.

You can view, edit, and print RAW and JPEG images.

* Certain functions differ between the version to be installed on a

64-bit computer and that to be installed on a 32-bit computer.

Picture Style Editor

You can edit Picture Styles, and create and save original Picture

Style files. This software is aimed at advanced users who are

experienced in image processing.

Software Start Guide

Software Overview

You cannot install the EOS software to a computer without an Internet

connection.

595

Software Start Guide

EOS MOVIE Utility

This software enables you to play back the time-lapse movies you

shot. You can also select time-lapse movie frames and save them as

still photos (frame grab).

Software Start Guide

596

Download the software.

Connect to the Internet from a computer and access the following

Canon Web site.

www.canon.com/icpd

Select your country or region of residence and download the

software.

Decompress it on the computer.

For Windows : Click the displayed installer file to start the

installer.

For macOS : A dmg file will be created and displayed. Follow

the steps below to startup the installer.

(1) Double-click the dmg file.

A drive icon and installer file will appear on the desktop.

If the installer file does not appear, double-click the drive

icon to display it.

(2) Double-click the installer file.

The installer starts.

2Follow the on-screen instructions to install the software.

Downloading and Installing the Software

Do not connect the camera to a computer before you install the

software. The software will not be installed correctly.

Even if a previous version of the software is installed on your computer,

follow the procedure below to install the latest version. (The previous

version will be overwritten.)

597

Software Start Guide

Software Instruction Manuals (PDF files) can be downloaded from the

Canon Web site to your computer.

Software Instruction Manual Download Site

www.canon.com/icpd

Downloading the Software Instruction Manuals

598

You can use EOS software to download images from the camera to a

computer. There are two ways to do this.

1Install the software (p.596).

2Use the interface cable (sold

separately) to connect the camera

to the computer.

Connect the cable to the camera’s

digital terminal with the cable plug’s

<D> icon facing the front of the

camera.

Connect the cord’s plug to the

computer’s USB terminal.

3Use EOS Utility to download the

images.

Refer to the EOS Utility Instruction

Manual (p.597).

Downloading Images to a Computer

Downloading by Connecting the Camera to the Computer

With Wi-Fi connection established, the camera cannot communicate with

the computer even if they are connected with an interface cable (sold

separately).

599

Downloading Images to a Computer

You can use a card reader to download images to a computer.

1Install the software (p.596).

2Insert the card into the card

reader.

3Use Digital Photo Professional to

download the images.

Refer to the Digital Photo

Professional Instruction Manual

(p.597).

Downloading Images with a Card Reader

When downloading images from the camera to a computer with a card

reader without using EOS software, copy the DCIM folder on the card to the

computer.

600

Numerics

10- or 2-sec. self-timer..................159

w1280x720 (movie)...................341

L1920x1080 (movie) ................341

H3840x2160

(Time-lapse movie) .......................350

4, 9, 36, or 100 images.................399

A (Scene Intelligent Auto) ............94

AC adapter....................................520

Acceleration/deceleration

tracking .........................................476

Access lamp .............................44, 45

Accessories ...................................... 3

Adjust all by same amount (AF)....491

Adobe RGB...................................208

AE lock..........................................249

AEB

(Auto Exposure Bracketing)..247, 472

AF .................................................129

AF area selection

mode ........................134, 136, 139

AF assist beam.........................480

AF groups .................................145

AF method ........................ 308, 374

AF Microadjustment .................491

AF operation..................... 130, 305

AF point automatic

selection ...........................135, 140

AF point red illumination...133, 488

AF point selection.............137, 500

AF sensor .................................143

AF speed ..................................376

Area AF frame.................. 135, 140

Beeper ....................................... 73

Color tracking................... 142, 485

Cross-type focusing ................. 143

Difficult subjects for AF .... 153, 316

Direct AF point selection .......... 500

Dual cross-type focusing ......... 143

F8 AF ............................... 143, 144

Manual focusing............... 154, 321

Number of AF points ................ 145

Out of focus ................. 55, 56, 551

Recomposing ............. 97, 131, 249

Spot AF point ..................... 31, 139

AF point auto switching ................ 477

AF-ON (AF start) button ......... 56, 498

AI FOCUS (AI Focus AF) ............. 132

AI SERVO (AI Servo AF)........ 97, 132

Acceleration/deceleration

tracking .................................... 476

AF point auto switching............ 477

AF points light up in red ........... 133

Initial position ........................... 484

Tracking sensitivity................... 475

Album (Video snapshot)............... 361

ALL-I (For editing/I-only) .............. 350

Ambience priority (AWB).............. 187

Ambience-based shots (C) ........ 101

Anti-flicker shooting ...................... 206

Aperture-priority AE ...................... 238

Area AF frame ...................... 135, 140

Aspect ratio .................................. 168

Attenuator..................................... 347

Auto (D) ................................... 177

Auto Lighting Optimizer................ 194

Auto playback............................... 424

Index

601

Index

Auto power off...........................47, 73

Auto reset......................................213

Auto time setting (GPS) ................227

Autofocus 9 AF

Automatic selection (AF).......135, 140

Av (Aperture-priority AE) ...............238

B (Bulb) .................................250, 326

B/W .......................................178, 182

Background blur (C) ...................103

Background music ........................426

Basic information display ..............391

Basic Zone modes ..........................35

Battery 9 Power

Battery Grip...........................514, 516

Beep (Beeper).................................73

Bit rate...........................................574

Black-and-white

images ..........................101, 178, 182

Bluetooth function .........................273

Bracketing

AEB (Auto Exposure

Bracketing) .......................247, 472

FEB (Flash Exposure

Bracketing) ...............................285

White balance bracketing .192, 472

Brightness (SCN)..........106, 127, 128

Built-in microphones .....................326

Bulb exposures .............................250

Bulb timer .................................251

buSY (BUSY) ........................167, 198

w/x (Custom shooting) ............ 510

C(Creative Auto) ........................ 100

Camera

Camera shake...................... 55, 96

Camera vibration blur......... 96, 265

Default settings .......................... 75

Holding the camera.................... 55

Candlelight ................................... 118

Cards...................... 5, 27, 43, 70, 343

Card reminder ............................ 44

Card requirements ................... 343

Formatting.................................. 70

Low-level formatting................... 71

Troubleshooting ................... 45, 71

Write-protect switch ................... 43

Center-weighted average

metering ....................................... 244

Certification Logo ......................... 513

Charger .................................... 37, 40

Chromatic aberration

correction.............................. 201, 442

Cleaning (image sensor) .............. 449

Clipped highlights......................... 397

CLn............................................... 455

Close-ups ..................................... 116

Color space .................................. 208

Color temperature ................ 185, 190

Color tone..................................... 181

Color tone (SCN).................. 106, 128

Color tracking ....................... 142, 485

Continuous (file numbering) ......... 212

Continuous shooting..................... 156

602

Index

Contrast ................................181, 194

Creative Auto ................................ 100

Creative Zone modes .....................36

Cropping (images) ........................ 446

Cross-type focusing ......................143

Custom Controls ...........................497

Custom Functions.........468, 469, 471

Custom shooting mode.................510

D+ ................................................. 199

Date/time ........................................49

Daylight saving time........................51

DC Coupler ...................................520

Default settings ...............................75

Camera settings ......................... 75

Custom Controls.......................497

Custom Functions ....................468

Custom shooting mode ............510

Flash function settings..............287

My Menu...................................508

Default settings tables ....................75

Depth-of-field preview...................240

Dials

Main Dial ....................................57

Quick Control Dial ......................58

Diffraction correction.............203, 443

Digital terminal ........................29, 598

Dioptric adjustment .........................55

Direct selection (AF point) ............500

Distortion correction..............202, 442

Double-tap ....................................407

Downloading images to a

computer ...................................... 598

DPOF

(Digital Print Order Format).......... 458

Dragging......................................... 68

Drive mode................................... 156

Dual cross-type focusing.............. 143

Dust Delete Data.......................... 452

Electronic level ......................... 80, 81

Erasing images ............................ 430

Err (error codes)........................... 567

Evaluative metering...................... 243

exFAT ..................................... 71, 345

Expanded ISO speed ... 170, 173, 372

Exposure compensation............... 245

Exposure compensation in M mode

with ISO Auto ............................... 242

Exposure level increments ........... 471

Exposure level

indicator.................... 32, 34, 293, 334

Exposure simulation..................... 303

External Speedlite 9 Flash

External microphone .................... 347

Eyecup ......................................... 270

Eye-Fi cards ................................. 522

Eyepiece cover....................... 38, 270

L1920x1080

(Time-lapse movie)....................... 350

u+Tracking ................................. 309

603

Index

Faithful (U) ...............................178

FAT32......................................71, 345

FE lock ..........................................278

Feature guide..................................90

FEB

(Flash Exposure Bracketing).........285

File extension................................211

File name

Underscore “_”..........................208

File size.........................164, 344, 345

Filter effect (Monochrome)............182

Final image simulation ..........297, 338

Fine (Image-recording quality)......162

Fine Detail (u)..........................177

Fineness (Sharpness)...................181

Firmware .......................................543

First-curtain synchronization.........285

Flash (Speedlite)...........................277

Custom Functions.....................286

External flash units ...................278

FE lock......................................278

FEB (Flash Exposure

Bracketing) ...............................285

Flash control

(function settings) .....................281

Flash exposure

compensation ...................278, 285

Flash sync speed..............280, 282

Manual flash .............................283

Shutter synchronization

(1st/2nd curtain)........................285

Wireless....................................284

Flash exposure

compensation........................278, 285

Flash mode................................... 283

Flash sync contacts........................ 28

Flash sync. speed in Av mode...... 282

Focus indicator ....................... 94, 131

Focus lock .............................. 97, 131

Focus mode switch..... 6, 53, 154, 321

Focusing 9 AF

Focusing point

(AF point).............. 134, 137, 139, 143

Folder creation/selection ...... 209, 210

Food ............................................. 117

For editing (ALL-I) ........................ 350

Formatting (card initialization) ........ 70

Frame rate.................................... 342

Full Auto mode ............................... 94

Full High-Definition (Full HD)

(movie) ......................... 325, 341, 350

Functions available by shooting

mode ............................................ 526

GPS.............................................. 217

Grid display ............ 79, 302, 377, 390

Group Photo ................................. 110

H1/H2 (Expanded ISO

speed) .......................... 170, 173, 372

Handheld Night Scene ................. 120

HDMI .................................... 417, 427

HDMI CEC.................................... 428

HDR Backlight Control ................. 121

HDR movie shooting .................... 348

604

Index

HDR shooting ...............................253

Help ................................................91

Text size .....................................92

High dynamic range 9 HDR

High ISO speed noise reduction...195

High-Definition ..............................341

Highlight alert................................397

Highlight tone priority .................... 199

High-speed continuous shooting ..156

Histogram ............................. 293, 398

Hot shoe .................................28, 278

Household power..........................520

ICC profile.....................................208

Icons .................................................8

Illumination (AF point)................... 488

Illumination (LCD panel) ................. 60

Image browsing (Jump display)....400

Image dust prevention .................. 449

Image review time...........................74

Image search ................................ 402

Image-recording

quality ...........................162, 164, 341

Images

AF point display........................397

Auto playback........................... 424

Auto reset .................................213

Auto rotation .............................435

Continuous (file numbering) .....212

Downloading (to computer) ......598

Erasing .....................................430

File numbering.......................... 211

Highlight alert ...........................397

Histogram ................................ 398

Image-recording

quality ...................... 162, 164, 341

Index display............................ 399

Jump display (image browsing) 400

Magnifying images................... 404

Manual reset ............................ 213

Manual rotation ........................ 408

Playback .................................. 387

Protecting................................. 409

Rating ...................................... 412

Search conditions .................... 402

Shooting information................ 392

Slide show ............................... 424

Viewing on a TV set......... 417, 427

Index display ................................ 399

INFO

button ....... 60, 84, 293, 298, 334, 388

Initial AF Point .............................. 484

Initial magnification ratio/position . 405

Interval timer ................................ 267

IPB ............................................... 342

ISO speed .................... 170, 327, 331

Auto range (Still photos) .......... 174

Automatic setting (ISO Auto) ... 172

ISO Auto (movie) ..................... 372

ISO expansion ......................... 173

ISO speed range.............. 173, 372

Manual setting range ............... 173

Minimum shutter speed for ISO

Auto (Still photos) .................... 175

Setting increments ................... 471

Time-lapse ISO Auto................ 372

JPEG.................................... 162, 164

605

Index

Jump display.................................400

Kids ...............................................113

Landscape ....................................111

Landscape (R)..........................177

Language........................................52

Large (image-recording quality) ....164

Large Zone AF ......................135, 140

LCD monitor..............................27, 46

Adjusting angle.....................46, 99

Brightness.................................434

Electronic level .....................80, 84

Image Playback........................387

Menu display ......................64, 534

Quick Control........................61, 86

LCD Panel

Illumination .................................60

Lens ..........................................27, 53

AF group designations..............145

Chromatic aberration

correction..................................201

Diffraction correction.................203

Distortion correction..................202

Focus mode

switch......................6, 53, 154, 321

Lock release ...............................54

Optical aberration correction ....200

Peripheral illumination

correction..................................200

Lens electronic MF........................155

Light (IPB).....................................342

Live View shooting ..................98, 289

AF operation ............................ 305

Exposure simulation................. 303

u+Tracking ............................. 309

Grid display .............................. 302

Information display................... 293

Live 1-point AF......................... 313

Manual focusing....................... 321

Metering timer .......................... 302

Possible shots.......................... 291

Quick Control ........................... 301

Silent LV shooting .................... 303

Smooth zone............................ 311

LOCK........................................ 59, 88

LOG.............................................. 228

Logging......................................... 228

Log Data .................................. 229

Long (bulb) exposures.................. 250

Long Exposure Noise Reduction.. 197

Low-speed continuous shooting... 157

LV 9 Live View shooting

M (Manual exposure) ........... 241, 330

Magnifying images ....... 317, 321, 404

Main Dial ........................................ 57

Malfunction ................................... 548

Manual exposure.................. 241, 330

Manual focus ........................ 154, 321

Manual focusing ................... 154, 321

Manual reset................................. 213

Manual selection

(AF point)...................... 134, 137, 139

Maximum burst..................... 164, 167

606

Index

Medium

(image-recording quality) ..............164

Memory cards 9 Cards

Menu............................................... 64

Dimmed menu items .................. 66

My Menu...................................505

Setting procedure .......................65

Settings ....................................534

3 icon .........................................8

Metering mode..............................243

Metering timer.................56, 302, 377

MF (Manual focusing)...........154, 321

Microadjustment ...........................491

Microphone

Built-in ......................................326

External .................................... 347

Mirror lockup .................................265

Mode Dial..................................35, 57

Monochrome (V) ...................... 178

Motion JPEG (J) ......................350

MOV (D) .................................... 350

Movies .......................................... 325

AE lock ..................................... 328

AF method ........................ 308, 374

AF speed during

Movie Servo AF ........................376

Attenuator.................................347

Autoexposure shooting.............326

Cards suited for movie

shooting.................................... 343

Compression method ....... 342, 350

Editing ......................................422

Editing out first and

last scenes ...............................422

Enjoying movies .......................417

External microphone ................ 347

File size............................ 344, 345

Frame rate ............................... 342

Grid display .............................. 377

HDR movie shooting................ 348

Information display................... 334

Manual exposure shooting....... 330

Metering timer.......................... 377

Microphone...................... 326, 347

Movie digital IS ........................ 380

Movie recording method .......... 350

Movie recording size................ 341

Movie Servo AF ....... 373, 375, 376

Movie Servo AF tracking

sensitivity ................................. 375

Movie shooting button...... 326, 378

Playback .......................... 417, 419

Quick Control ........................... 339

Recording time......................... 344

Servo AF .................................. 373

Shutter speed .................. 330, 333

Sound recording/

Sound-recording level.............. 346

Time-lapse movie..................... 349

Video snapshots ...................... 361

Viewing on a TV set......... 417, 427

Wind filter................................. 346

MP4 (C) .................................... 342

M-RAW

(Medium RAW)..... 162, 164, 165, 166

Multi function lock..................... 59, 88

Multi Shot Noise Reduction.......... 195

Multi-controller................................ 59

Multiple exposure ......................... 258

MWB ............................................ 188

My Menu ...................................... 505

607

Index

Neutral (S) ...............................177

NFC connection ......................29, 540

Night Portrait .................................119

Noise reduction

High ISO speed ........................195

Long exposures ........................197

Nomenclature..................................28

Non-Canon flash units ..................280

Normal (Image-recording quality) .162

NTSC ............................342, 427, 541

ONE SHOT (One-Shot AF) ...131, 306

One-Shot AF .........................131, 306

P (Program AE).....................234, 326

PAL ...............................342, 427, 541

Panning.........................................114

Panning effect...........................115

Partial metering.............................243

Peripheral illumination

correction ..............................200, 442

Photobook set-up..........................464

Picture Style..................176, 180, 183

Pixel count ............................162, 164

Play (Frame skip)..........................421

Playback .......................................387

Portrait ..........................................109

Portrait (Q) ...............................177

Positioning hole...............................30

Positioning interval (GPS).............226

Possible recording time

(movie) ................................. 337, 344

Possible shots ................ 48, 164, 291

Power ............................................. 47

Auto power off...................... 47, 73

Battery information ................... 516

Battery level ....................... 48, 516

Charging .................................... 40

Household power..................... 520

Possible shots............ 48, 164, 291

Recharge performance ............ 516

Pressing completely ....................... 56

Pressing halfway ............................ 56

Printing

Print order (DPOF)................... 458

Photobook set-up..................... 464

Program AE .......................... 234, 326

Program shift............................ 235

Protecting images......................... 409

Q (Quick

Control)........... 61, 126, 301, 339, 415

Quick Control Dial .......................... 58

Rating ........................................... 412

Rating mark .................................. 412

RAW ............................. 162, 164, 166

RAW image processing................ 438

RAW+JPEG.......................... 162, 164

Recharging ..................................... 40

Reduced display........................... 399

Release shutter without card.......... 44

608

Index

Remote control terminal..........28, 276

Remote controller .................271, 273

Remote switch ..............................276

Repeat (slide show)......................424

Resizing ........................................ 444

Rotation (image) ...........................408

Safety precautions ..........................22

Safety shift ....................................473

Saturation ..................................... 181

Scene icons .......................... 295, 329

Scene Intelligent Auto ..................... 94

SCN ................................35, 107, 348

SD, SDHC, SDXC cards 9 Cards

Second-curtain synchronization....285

Self-timer ......................................159

Sensitivity 9 ISO speed

Sensor cleaning ............................449

Sepia (Monochrome) ............101, 182

Serial number ................. 30, 494, 516

SERVO AF....................................307

Servo AF

AI SERVO AF .....................97, 132

Movie Servo AF ........373, 375, 376

SERVO (LV) ............................. 307

Sharpness.....................................181

Shooting information display.........392

Shooting mode guide......................89

Shooting modes..............................35

M (Manual exposure) .......241, 330

Av (Aperture-priority AE) ..........238

B (Bulb) .................................... 250

w/x (Custom shooting) ........ 510

C(Creative Auto).................... 100

A (Scene Intelligent Auto) ....... 94

P (Program AE)........................ 234

8 (Special scene) ............... 107

Tv (Shutter-priority AE) ............ 236

Shutter button................................. 56

Shutter button functions ............... 378

Shutter synchronization................ 285

Shutter-priority AE ........................ 236

Silent shooting

Silent continuous shooting....... 157

Silent LV shooting .................... 303

Silent single shooting............... 157

Single shooting..................... 156, 157

Single-image display .................... 388

Single-point AF............. 134, 139, 313

Single-point Spot AF ............ 134, 139

Slide show.................................... 424

Small (image-recording quality) ... 164

Smooth zone ................................ 311

Software ....................................... 594

Instruction Manual ................... 597

Sound recording/Sound-recording

level.............................................. 346

Speaker.................................. 29, 419

Special scene mode (SCN).. 107, 348

Specifications ............................... 568

Sports........................................... 112

Spot AF point.......................... 31, 139

Spot metering............................... 244

S-RAW

(Small RAW)......... 162, 164, 165, 166

sRGB............................................ 208

609

Index

Standard (IPB) ..............................342

Standard (P) ............................177

M icon..............................................8

Strap ...............................................38

Strength (Sharpness)....................181

Subjects difficult to

focus .............................153, 316, 374

System map..................................514

Temperature warning ............323, 382

Threshold (Sharpness) .................181

Tilt correction ..........................80, 447

Time zone .......................................49

Time-lapse movie..........................349

Tone priority ..................................199

Toning effect (Monochrome) .........182

Touch beeping.................................73

Touch operation ......................67, 406

Touch Shutter................................319

Tracking sensitivity........................475

Transition effect (slide show) ........425

Tripod socket ..................................30

Troubleshooting ............................548

Tv (Shutter-priority AE) .................236

UHS-I ........................................5, 343

Underscore “_”..............................208

USB (digital) terminal ..............29, 598

User Def. (W) ............................178

UTC (Coordinated Universal Time)218

Vari-angle LCD monitor ............ 46, 99

Vertical image auto rotation.......... 435

Video snapshots........................... 361

Video system................ 341, 427, 541

Viewfinder

Dioptric adjustment .................... 55

Electronic level........................... 81

Grid display ................................ 79

Information display..................... 82

Viewing on a TV set ............. 417, 427

Volume (movie playback) ............. 420

Warning icon ................................ 489

White balance (WB) ..................... 185

Auto.......................................... 187

Bracketing ................................ 192

Color temperature setting ........ 190

Correction ................................ 191

Custom..................................... 188

White priority (AWB) ..................... 187

Wi-Fi function ............................... 540

Wind filter ..................................... 346

Wireless communication

settings ......................................... 540

Zone AF................................ 134, 139

Table of Contents

Canon 6D Mark II + 24-70mm IS USM User Manual

Related Manuals